Home

User Manual User Manual

1. Editing differences for different families of panels By editing a project for a terminal in the VTxxxW family it is possible to make use of all POLYMATH utilities already descri bed in this manual copy paste library zoom graphic func tionalities etc The structure of the software anchorable windows tools bar and menu and the functioning mode are those already illu strated during this manual see chapter on page The main difference between editing of CE panels and those of the Windows family is in the contents of the Esplora Progetto Project Explore Only the functions supported by the opera tor panel selected in the project creation phase will be pre sent Moreover the windows and the options available that will be shown vary in relation to the terminal model contained in the project The compilation and download windows are structured following the structure of the relative windows in VTWIN The next paragraph analyses the components of the Project Explore in the editing phase of a VTxxxW project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Esplora Progetto i D amp Appendix E VTxxxW Panels Ma nagement Note when editing a project for VIxxxW terminals with POLYMA TH a more modern and simpler interface is offered which allows to make use of useful tools in the editing phase However new functio nalities at Runtime level are not introduced Project Explore T
2. i i a The last option relates to the possibility of enabling the Trend at the start up of the project if the Buffer is associated to a Timer it will still be necessary to start the Timer see chap 6 Properties of the Password Grid page 438 to begin the acquisition ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 226 Chapter 5 Project Explorer pP Note The log file is a file the system uses to permanently save the data to be represented in the TrendView The fact that its name can be chosen using POLYMATH is useful in that this allows the user to manage the file e g copy or delete if dimensions are too great If however you want to manipulate the data of a TrendBuffer it will have to be exported using either a predefined function or Script see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 TrendBuffersXY The display graphic of the TrendBufferXY property is the re presentation of two distinct variables and not like in the TrendBuffer of a variable depending on time Therefore as Shown in the following image in the assignment phase the variables must both be determined Source X and Source Y On Timer TOR 5 Clicking Modify the General Buffer and Events only in DOUBLE CLICK mode masks can be accessed General EAEAN Buffer Events Identification Name TrendBufferxy Comment The identification properti
3. Top Lief 15 width Ti Height 35 n 1 Ansacelonteleaced hire DET ENI Area visibility Le Bordarflink Me Blink Bordencolortressed 255 255 255 Bordercolorteleaced j 2 0 0 bordarviskiity bs borderSize g Butong Eiraan Mh Caption Label Tak Back FontField SystemTahomalTahomel ra Textbin amp Ho Blink Tuica 295 295 128 Teathilign Middle Teatwuign Middle Using the editing window that now opens we choose the size of 13 and choose Bold from among the properties Project font A EAHA gt stemTahoma Italian Italy SystemTahoma Font attributes Size Bold O Italics O Strikeout O Underline Preview Aa Bb Yy 2z 0123456789 At this point the only thing left to do is to set the colors of the button we select green as the background and border color when the button is released and blue with a white border when it is pressed We also set the border width as 3 pixels ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 680 Chapter 10 Tutorial la S og Hi TouchButton TouchButton 0000 v OTE Toc a a o g reaColorReleased J 64 128 128 4reavVisibility v N BorderBlink No Blink BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased jj 64 128 128 BorderVisibility 7 BorderSize 5 Button3D v Bitmap None Caption Label Text Back FontField SystemTahoma The last operation to be performed on the button is to define its function For this we open the Events Ed
4. Password Password amp Note With Polymath 2 0 and earlier versions if a project is download using the Ethernet port it is necessary to select the UDP protocol in the operator panel downloader configurator menu If an Ethernet TCP IP connection is required it is necessary to specify the parameters for making the connection the IP address and communication port see chap 8 Establishing an Ethernet connection page 523 A remote connection out of those set on the PC being used can be used when the project download starts in this case user credentials for authenticating access rights username and password also need to be given If the connection is Local that is the files are sent to a server present on the same PC just define the port through which POLYMATH and the application will communicate Once the type of connection has been selected just click on Connect to activate the connection which can be aborted by clicking on Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 511 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Preparation of IT panels before download The IT panels do not require any particular preparation if choosing a USB connection If an ethernet connection is chosen the panel must be connected to the network and the network parameters must be configured as indicated in the hardware manual Video terminal Txxx Control Panel Network Finally configure the conn
5. Cancel The shared Tags option allows viewing all Tags present in the project and allows the user to choose one or more varia bles to be shared on the network with a simple step in prac tice it makes it possible to quickly modify the Allow tag value ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 63 Layout of menus to be shared via ETH Check used for network project mana gement Shared tags Shared tags Tag name Shared tag name i Tag_INT Tag_INT Tag_INT_pro Tag_INT_pro DB_10 REQ DB_10 REQ DB_10 LADDR DB_10 LADDR DB_10 DB_NO DB_10 DB_NO DB_10 DBB_Nt DB_10 DBB_NO DB_10 LEN DB_10 LEN DB_10 DONE DB_10 DONE DB_10 ERROR DB_10 ERROR SYS_ETH_Driv Tag DB_10 ERROR_ DB_10 ERROR_1 input2 input2 output2 output2 input3 input3 input4 input4 float float text10 text10 oooooo00000000000 Finish Cancel All checkboxes are not selected by default they are selected by pressing the Select all key This makes all project variables shared throughout the network Shared tags Tag name Shared tag name Tag_INT Tag_INT Tag_INT_pro Tag_INT_pro DB_10 REQ DB_10 REQ DB_10 LADDR DB_10 LADDR DB_10 DB_NO DB_10 DB_NO DB_10 DBB_Nt DB_10 DBB_NO DB_10 LEN DB_10 LEN DB_10 DONE DB_10 DONE DB_10 ERROR DB_10 ERROR SYS_ETH_Driv Tag DB_10 ERROR_ DB_10 ERROR_1 input2 input2 output2 output2 input3 input3 input4 input4 float float text10 text10 Deselect All Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User
6. ESAFILE Shy ESAGetUrl ESALPT ES SMsgbox ESAPAGE The editor facilities the drafting of the code showing too the list of objects and properties available for the object that has been inserted Intellisense mechanism This list appears whenever the user presses the separation point between the objects or between an object and the method or property to be called When the code is edited the objects are in fact separated from their respective children or methods by the insertion of a point dot There follows a chart showing the hierarchy of objects accessible by script ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 555 Scripts ESAHMI gt ESATAG gt FSAPAGE gt ESACNTRL gt FSAPAGEMGR gt FSAUSERMGR gt FSAALARMMGR gt FSARECIPEMGR gt ESARECIPETYP gt FSARECIPEARC gt FSARECIPETRF gt ESA TIMER gt ESAPRN gt ESA BEEP gt ESACOM gt FSADATALOGMGR gt FSAFILE gt FSAGETURL gt ESALPT gt ESAMSGBOX gt ESA SLEEP gt ESAPIPEMGR gt ESA TRENDMGR gt ESAWAIT Therefore to indicate an element of the page we use an instruction of the type ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL Label ControlWid th 67 1 a ESAHMI ESATAG ReadValue a Tag_l a Tag_2 In the case of those objects that require a passage of the name of the reference object for example ESAPAGE ESACNTRL etc after the opening of the brackets just press the key of the keyboard to o
7. ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 315 Properties Editor Table 21 Properties of the Irregular line properties Description Regular polygon A Regular polygon can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Sim ple figures gt Regular polygon After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the Polygon The default setting is that a pentagon 5 sides is drawn to change the number of sides vertices just edit the properties Number of Points using the Properties Editor see the follow ing section This function allows the creation only of regular polygons that is one with all the angles and sides equal Irregular Polygons can also be introduced by using the appropriate POLYMATH tool see chap 6 Polygon page 310 To define the characteristics of the Regular Polygon they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 316 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties of the Regular Polygon The properties of the Regular polygon are identical to those of the Irregular polygon see chap 6 Properties of the Polygon page 311 Label A Label can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Label After clicking on the icon use the mouse to
8. SW Configuration As al Delete Re Create Folder E a a H a Add New H E Pal ade New and Edk H Po Rename H B Fr Duplicate H 8 us Hide component H S De H Sc Manage component ma d 3 a Gut Ctrl x Oo isn Ctrl C HI fae Ir Paste Ctrl V H P3 Ac Paste as Child e Manage visible components By selecting a field of the explore project tree and then right clicking with the mouse the user may customize the compo nent view by default the user will see everything that is avai lable for that type of product Project Explorer 2wa 0g Progetto ITLOST SP1 ETH1 Pages Y Tal Progetto C4 HwConfiguration ITLOST SP1 ETH1 ve Ce SW Configuration Import Export Configuration columns a7 on E amp Lan aa F Add New H Pag add New and Edit H a Pop Rename GBR Frai Duplicate H FN Ala Delete H Rec Create Folder i 8 ahi Hide component H EE Dat pede contents H Ser Manage component visibility te cio chs H List Copy Ctrl C H A Ime Paste Ctrl H Ady Paste as Child ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 126 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Manage component visibility c Visible components Component visible Content Visible HW Configuration Panel v v Tags Lx v ELanguages and foi SwWConfiguration Y Languages v F
9. the field displayed will be 35 4 03 Indicates the number of decimal digits DecimalDigits to display if the representation format is Fixed Point Indicates the string that will appear to NEJALIVECETETEXE the left when the value is negative PositiveLeftText Indicates the string that will appear to the left when the value is positive Indicates the string that will appear to NeDa eve Rime rext the right when the value is negative oe Indicates the string that will appear to pocttiveRignt lex the right when the value is positive Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 347 Properties Editor Properties Description TagDirectMovement a Tag to the Direct move se Movementienas Fina reno Numerical Field events Table 25 Numerical Field events Event Description OnAbortI nput anaes when data input operation is Activated when data input using the Snes golnpue keyboard starts Activated when the value of the Field is changed using the keyboard OnValueChange Dynamic Text A Dynamic text can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value Fields gt Dynamic text After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the Field The purpose of a Dynamic te
10. 53 g 5 v Nessuno Nessuno SystemTahome Nessun Lampeggro Centro Centro ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 972 Chapter 4 Managing the project Changing the You can swap between the DOUBLE CLICK or EXTENDED type of interfaces at any time interface Utilities Translations Tags Recipes Alarms Downloader Utilities Dictionary Select VARIOUS then select the interface from the drop down menu ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Creating a project in Wizard mode Chapter4 93 Managing the project Draw only field s border while moving Copy amp Paste using a new name Use manual validation of project s components Mask passwords editing Show page s fields tooltip Use the panel s picture into the page editor Show the invert function Show the structure images oie Use graphics hardware editor Shared dictionary Use Excel Like Drag amp Drop copy IOOOOORO JOK Don t ask for the conversion of older projects Use the panel s picture into the simulator Don t ask to import Tags from specific DB if supported by the device Activate Trial Mode Max open dialogs 10 GUI style M Ask for style at startup Changes of GUI style will be available after the restart of the application Mv Check updates weky S M Save project automatically je Check the Choose style at star
11. General Cross reference Properties k Duplicate Delete ut Copy zoom In foom Out Create table Level Convert to k Local Edit and Duplicate in the menu that appears we now have two completely identical buttons General Cross reference Properties The new button is to differ from the first only in three aspects the text of the label Forward and Continue instead of Back and Reverse the horizontal position which can also be set by dragging the button to the right and the reference function using Events Editor ShowNextPage rather than ShowPreviousPage can be set In just a few steps we have inserted a second button ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 682 Chapter 10 Tutorial General Cross reference Properties Mou Using the same procedure that is duplicating and changing the function in the Events Editor and the translations of the la bel in the Properties Editor we insert another 3 buttons one for the login UserLogin function one for the logout User Logout function and a last one for quitting runtime and set as indicated below After duplicating one of the already defined buttons we use the Properties Editor to change the label text we insert Quit and Uscita respectively for the two languages and the color of the area when the button is released we insert orange as indicated below 45x
12. Options Utilities Translations i gt 9 J ik K A J Um CS fi Ea J ef gpu kS gu 3e Recipes Alarms vizio XS715 ETH1 ETH2 Downloader Utilities Online tools Dictionary Backup Restore TTE TAZI Online tools Es sila Backup Restore YTxaxx Online took Tags ic Oa i cA Se 2 v v Backup Restore YTH with Modem Bootloader for IT and XT Bootloader for YTA in DIRECT mode Bootloader for VTxxxVW in ASSISTED mode 4 ETHIL ETH2 gt rs USB1 USB2 gt the following window will appear ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Connect panel Communication parameters Connection type Ee Port 4096 Protocol TCP upp The runtime environment is on this PC ESAPOLYMATH will use the TCP IP loopback connection Password Password Connect After having choosing the kind of connection USB in our ca se just click onto Connect to establish the connection between PC and HMI The following window will appear Online tools Panel Tools Project Exit Online tools Panel explorer Compare memory Compare files Files transfer Backup source project Change downloader password Project parameters Panel x5715 ETH1 ETH2 Compiling Date Not compiled Compile Project From the previous window it s possible to execute the fol lowing operations i
13. page 221 TrendAcquireSample ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 754 Appendix B Predefined functions Table 6 Functions relating to Trends Function TrendExport TrendEnable TrendDisable TrendReset Description Exports the trend indicated to a file the relevant Trend Buffer and the name and type of destination file need to be defined Enables acquisition of the trend indica tor the trend buffer the command re lates to must be defined as an input parameter see chap 5 In runtime the system supplies the support for the acquisition and accumulation of nu merical values and for their graphic presentation in the form of a trend curve page 221 Disables acquisition of the trend indi cated the trend buffer that the com mand relates to must be defined as an input parameter see chap 5 In runt ime the system supplies the support for the acquisition and accumulation of numerical values and for their graphic presentation in the form of a trend curve page 221 Clears the buffer of the trend indicat ed the trend buffer that the command relates to must be defined as an input parameter see chap 5 In runtime the system supplies the support for the acquisition and accumulation of nu merical values and for their graphic presentation in the form of a trend curve page 221 Functions relating to direct commands Table 7 Functions relating to direct commands
14. gs The following is an example of how the exportation file is com posed after customization by the user by default with all 4 options enabled ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 217 Project Explorer File Type USERS LOG EXPORT station Hame Project Id FW Version 2 00 Creation Date 17 04 2012 Creation Tmme 10 12 37 Export Eey DTUA License Code IMIS INCBITSOXG10 0 0N Oo amp oo hs em 10 Date Time UserName Action 11 17 04 2012 10 12 16 USERS login 12 17 04 2012 10 12 21 U35ERS logout 13 17 04 2012 10 12 27 USERS login 14 17 04 2012 10 1242 USERS logout 16 17 04 2012 10 1246 USER login Users General Users Users events Fields Users defined Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Level 6 Level 7 Level 8 Level 9 Level 10 DefaultUser No Pass Ae Create New x Delete Description The Users window is the one used to show the participating users and the corresponding passwords Up to 256 participating users can be introduced To create a new participant just click the appropriate level and then Create new for each participant created it is essential to indicate a user name and a password minimum 1 maximum 14 alphanumeric characters In addition each level can be supplied with a comment visible only within POLYMATH in the programming phase To introduce a comment just click on the level not the user and enter the text
15. 386 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 41 Properties of the Slide Potentiometer Properties Description Reference variable whose value is checked Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an existing one Tagld Indicates the color of the whole cursor CursorColor of the Potentiometer this is selected using the RGB code or the color palette Indicates the direction of the scale whether vertical or horizontal Indicates whether the field should be disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Disable Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock be Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the potenti PasswordLevel ometer value see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This proper ty is ignored if the field is Read Only Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using cursor keys within a page It also controls the or Tabi ndex der in which data is introduced in vari ous fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Color of the values figures related to the numerical subdivisions of the scale This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette ScaleValueColor ESA
16. Array _VAR_2 Array VAR 4 Array VAR 6 Sray_ VAR Duplicate We add a status area see Appendix C Status area page 761 by clicking on Add and in the variables menu we assign the variable with the dimension of 6 array_var_6 The are type we will leave as the type of VT The size of the Status areas is always 6 words Using the same procedure we now also add a command area to which we assign the variable array_var_4 for the invoke command and the variable array_var_2 for the command to see the results of the operation Thus in runtime word 7 will be checked for commands as indicated in the appropriate ap pendix see Appendix D Command area page 765 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 666 Chapter 10 Tutorial Phase 5 At this point in the programming we proceed to define the Defining the alarms to be taken into consideration using runtime In our alarms project we will define an alarm assigned to the variable num_ pezzi first of all using Project Explorer we click on Alarms and then on Add to create a new alarm By clicking twice on the alarm we have just created we can start editing it Identification Name Allarme_1 Comment This Alarm is raised when the tag int_var reaches the value 200 Event of the TAG that raises the alarm ma s1Q Activation Type yas S yS Activation Value 200 a We set the name Allarme_1
17. By selecting a folder of the panel you can choose the files to copy ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 536 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Browse For Folder 2 Desktop 3 My Documents Sy My Computer wA 342 Floppy A See WINXP Cr Hs DATI Ds 3 DVD CD RW Drive E S Ces on TtbldO3 groups M S Richieste_di_fattibilita on TtblIdO3 groups mkt mkt N z By clicking the button Next Polymath will copy the selected files in the folder selected Wizard Download files from panel File name Source directory Destination directory Hard Disk C Documents and Setting Hard Disk C Documents and Setting Add file s Remove file Edit destination directory Backup A different way to perform backup project is obtained from the Restore terminal control panel Backup From the initial page of the terminal click on Control Panel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 537 Compiling Downloading and Runtime o Downloader Configuration E ContralPanel From the Control Panel click on the Backup icon B amp Stylus Date Time CuWNer Network db OW AG P 3 Lamp Saver Backup Password FTP o Reset Information This window opens IBackup amp Restore RunTi Project History As you can see from the previous figure the user can carry out Backup or Restore the latter option is discu
18. Creation of a network project amp In all these cases an exploration window opens that allows you to select project files vtprj from within your resources Note When you enter the Home page of the program by means of a click on al a list of recently opened files ordered chronologically according to their last editing date This procedure is simplest and quickest if you often work with the same files At any point throughout the process of editing the project the user can Save his or her work onto hard disk or a removable Support There are three options for saving the project into a file File gt Save from the main menu Press CTRL S on the keyboard together Click on Note The project is automatically saved by POLYMATH every 30 seconds see chap 3 Automatic project storage page 35 When the project file is overwritten POLYMATH automatically creates a backup file with the extension vtprj bak saving it into the folder the user is working in In this way there is al ways areserve copy of the original project to use and edit the backup copy just rename the extension changing it from vt prj bak to vtprj and reopen the project in POLYMATH Important note When the Save command described above is used the currently open file is overwritten or written onto a new file in the case of a new project to maintain the original file you must choose File gt Save as from the main menu and sup
19. ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 179 Project Explorer To learn more about the List and the meaning of the properties that can be assigned to the Frames the reader is advised to consult the relevant part of the next chapter see chap 6 Properties of Frames page 298 List Double clicking on the Frames option from within Project Explorer gives access to the list of Frames present in the project this mask contains the name and the comment relating to each Frame and it is possible to introduce new Frames or delete or duplicate existing ones Cross references The mask relating to cross references allows you to see how the frames are used within the project you can set the mask for displaying the list of pages using at least one frame or as an alternative the frames used by the pages In both cases the results are displayed in a tree diagram When the Update key is pressed POLYMATH recalculates the references to the Frames in real time Creating and managing Frames A Frame can be created either by using the appropriate list see chap 5 List page 179 or directly by using Project Explorer press right key on Frames then Add Once a Frame has been added by double clicking on it in Project Explorer Work area in you access the editor Subdivided into three pages Fields General and Cross References which will be dealt with in the following sections ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev
20. Function ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Forces the value of a bit of a variable to a defined value in POLYMATH the variable and the position of the bit to be forced need to be specified Appendix B Predefined functions 755 Table 7 Functions relating to direct commands Function Description Allows the value of a bit to be reset ResetBit the variable to be reset and the posi tion of the bit to be reset need to be defined Inverts the value of a bit of a variable ToggleBit to a defined value in POLYMATH the variable and the position of the bit to be inverted need to be specified Forces the value of a variable to a de fined value in POLYMATH the variable and to be forced and the corresponding value need to be specified Used to increase a variable by one val ue must indicate the variable to which the command and the increase value Should be applied Used to decrease a variable by one val ue must indicate the variable to which the command and the decrease value Should be applied This executes a logical AND operation on the binary representation of the values must specify the variable on which to perform the operation and the value with which to execute the AND The result of the operation will substi tute the original value of the variable This executes a logical OR operation on the binary representation of the values must specify the variable on which to perform th
21. General Events Identification Name Pipeline Comment Parameters Source Tag_1 IGG Destination Tag_2 ICG Mode Polling Activation z F2 The General mask can be used to set the identifying properties of the image The Name of an image is a unique attribute within any given project that is other different images with the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH Advanced The following objects come under the heading of Advanced e Pipelines e Print e Remote messages e Keyboards e Weekly tasks e Schedulers e Groups e Audio files only when panels IT11x are used in the project Pipelines Pipelines are the active objects that update the value of one variable on the basis of the value of another variable The most common application of Pipelines is for copying the value of one variable into another this function is convenient for having the panel work as a bridge between two devices The Pipelines created with POLYMATH are already activated at the start of the Runtime together with their particular functioning By double clicking on the object Pipelines in Project Explorer the list of Pipelines in the project can be accessed The principal characteristics of each Pipeline are entered in editable fields Using this mask you can add new Pipelines edit or delete existing ones A new Pipeline can be edited after ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev
22. Group Acknowledgement allows the operator to per form a global cumulative acquisition of all the alarms in the table that belong to the same group as the one selected if this option has been enabled for the alarm In question see chap 5 Properties page 200 Show History shows the page containing the Alarm His tory Enter the appropriate Events Editor and indicate the name of the page to go to after pressing this key In addition Dynamic fields can be assigned to the system variables related to the alarms each of which has properties that can be edited using the Properties Editor see chap 6 Label page 316 These fields are Total of active alarms shows the total number of active alarms not yet acknowledged or not yet terminated Total of active alarms not acknowledged shows the to tal number of alarms not acknowledged Total of alarms not returned shows the total number of alarms not terminated still present in the device 431 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 432 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Soa a Identification Override default grid size width 10 Height 10 The General mask can be used to insert a name and an iden tifying comment for the Alarm table being edited In addition you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of the page see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field The gr
23. If a gt 3 Then ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR ShowPageByName Page _1 Else ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR ShowPageByName Page 2 End If Example 3 Exporting alarms to a file chosen by the user Another example of how POLYMATH Scripts can be used is provided by the use of value fields to receive data to be used to invoke dynamic functions We insert a complex field into a page and this displays the Alarm history an ASCII field ASCII assigned to a string variable and a button to which we assign a Script event onReleased The Script reads the value of the ASCII field and saves it in variable a using the following instruction a ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL ASCII Value Then we invoke the Export alarms function to which we pass the string that has just been read ESAHMI ESAALARMMGR HistoryExport a 1 1 a ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL ascii Value 2 ESAHMI ESAALARMMGR HistoryExport a 1 Naturally this is only a simple example useful for illustrating the ease of programming via scripting that makes creating the project extremely dynamic Example 4 Saving a Recipe into a memory In this subsection we will show how it is possible for example using a Script to force the loading the saving and exporting of certain recipes when a bit in the device is raised To do this we assign this Script to the event OnRawValueChange of the control bit in our case the variable Control The PLC raises the sta
24. lt lt E AlarmType OnDescription OnUserDatal OnUserData2 OnDate OnTime OnEventType OnQuality OnOperator SecDescription s ts s ts s s ts s s s ts Ts Up using Up the user will be able to move the selected layer up after going to the Id column ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 185 Project Explorer Down using Down the user will be able to move the se lected layer down after going to the Id column Preview with the Preview key the user will view a graphic preview of the chosen customization OK by pressing OK the user confirms the created settings The following is an example of how CSV exportation of the alarms list occurs SS Ps es Pe A S Be G H 1 File Type ACTIVE_ALARMS_EXPORT 2 Station Name 3 Project Id 4 FW Version 3 00 5 Creation Date 26 03 2012 6 Creation Time 1 22 51 Export Key NPACDTEQO 6 License Code 1M1S1NCBJTSQXG1Q 9 10 Name Priority AlarmTy OnDescripi OnDate OnTime OnEventTy OnQual OnOperator 11 Allarme 100 4 Descrizion 26 03 2012 1 22 41 1 0 DEFAULTUSER 12 Customize History Log Files By pressing Customize History Log Files a guided window will open to create the customised file 15 x Customize Log File i Columns Column Enabled gafa Description UserDatal UserData2 EventType Quality OnOperator lt lt s s s s
25. 10 of 30 30 3 27 thus the event will be activated when the value 27 is crossed We operate in the same way to define a high deviation threshold by clicking on the appropriate box we activate the high level threshold assigning 50 as the value This means that the event onThdDevHi see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 is launched each time there is a breach whether going up or down of the value given by e reference value high threshold value In our case 30 50 of 30 30 15 45 thus the event will be activated when the value 45 is crossed Ll Enabled Value Ceadhared 6 E Hegh O Enabled Value 4 E Daadband 1 E Reference Vae t The third group of thresholds is the Variation speed group the idea is to be able to carry out checks on variation times used ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 153 Project Explorer by a variable It may for example be useful to manage a situation in which a temperature plunges or soars too rapidly We can define two Variation speed thresholds that can be enabled independently of each other e RLO low variation decrease in the value e RHI high variation increase in the value The Variation speed thresholds are relative to a reference value It is necessary to specify the time in seconds below which the variation in value should take place such that the event is launched relative to the threshold Return from the threshold oc
26. A a n y Jo ORAL amp oe y Seen e Sf Bee CeCe ee ge nese ecanteeese anaes amp i p p y d ani Je AR ARS AAA AT ES SE 9 s 4 S a m AR RRARAA RAR SAS Pa k gt 4 eno ce Fe ee P m p A ry oo i Faa i r P aL AARASAAL AAA RRARA LAR EAR TERESA SEERA TERE AA RSS SG ares gaeeeeeeeaeeseeeaaet amp 2 8 Bae gt a 4 oe 4 p 7 2s Bee se FR SS Oe Se US Ue O gt C O L Q N TABLE OF CONTENTS PYVEE OCU CEION vices ss cassis esis say cadaazenssadavas cacacsats sed eutsentsanteuietdanesasasataseneaczacnd 1 Wiari FoNN l What does Pohrmath do eein taaa EA wae l Which POLY MATH version speceroiresneinare i l Main POLYMATH functions ccc cccccccsssssseeseececeeceeaeeeseseeeeees 2 The Manual 5 Conventions used in the Manual ccccsesesseeceeeeeeeaeesseeeeeeees 5 ESA Elettronica s Customer Care service sssssssoeeesessssssseeeerees 6 DVIS CAN AGIOME 550 scicaadesesacceuacsaletscetaccesadsaadivscadecedsecadscasadssiesedescsctdasseadecasees 7 Minimum regu rements sssrin an vues eaeinade T Recommended requirements rresia 8 Installs POLYMA TH cocvntssdicocitiaatiationtncinaniiinlegdatieiusss 9 PAV OUU OL Menus sine cosectesiscinceccasdebicenwasenscevectuscaetechecasoisinecotacsescpeeceeess 15 IVAN AIMS NU ase te Toeamncanctetes hat receduniemesioremedasaetsadenrenssudseacas 16 THe TO OID AP se
27. Bar Table 44 Methods of ESACNTRL Bar Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Control Properties of ESACNTRL Indicator Table 45 Properties of ESACNTRL Indicator Properties Description Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the left where the rectangle containing the indicator ControlLeft has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the rectangle Width containing the object Control Defines height of the rectangle Height containing the object Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the top where the object or the rectangle containing the indicator has ContrOTOR currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 622 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 45 Properties of ESACNTRL Indicator Properties Description Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needin
28. BorderColor value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 612 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 37 Properties of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Properties Description Defines whether the border of the rectangle of the field should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method BorderBlink Defines the color of the internal area of the field currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the text currently contained in the field Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for TextColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 613 Scripts Table 37 Properties of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Properties Description Defines whether the current field text should blink or not Possible va
29. Options Utilities Translations ae Recipes j Alarms Downloader Utilities Dictionary By clicking on the sub menu Import the following screen is obtained Tags Import Choose type of import Excel format PLC Format Cancel It is possible to select the format type with which to import va riables e Excel Format standard Excel format e PLC Format previously exported variables are impor ted automatically by using the PLC application in use ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 162 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Excel Format Tags Import E m Choose type of import Excel format PLC Format Next Cancel After clicking Next and selecting the file to be imported the following screen is obtained Tags Import Choose the tags to import Starting importing from row Scheduler_Ste INTERNAL Scheduler_Stc INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL Tag_INT INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL Scheduler_Ste INTERNAL Scheduler_Stc INTERNAL SYS_AlarmNo SYSTEM 37 SYS_AlarmNo mvm sirim som meee ser msm erim som O d d O d O O O O h i Deselect All O Overwrite existing var O Stop importing if encounter errors Import Cancel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 163 Project Explorer From the previous screen it is possible to choose between the following options by acting on th
30. Properties Editor The purpose of this chapter is to describe all those functions offered by POLYMATH for editing the graphics and the acces sibility of the project applications Our starting point is the concept that each executable operation each visible data modifiable or not each link between the pages each func tion button must appear to the operator inside a page dis played on the VT We shall start out giving some indications of the general orga nization of the pages and go on to give more detailed informa tion on all the elements that can be introduced together with their characteristics For each graphic element that can be in troduced in a page and for the pages themselves a series of properties can be defined that determine the aspect that the object will assume in Runtime Furthermore in the case of many objects functions or scripts are applicable when particular events are triggered The reference windows for managing the properties and events are the Properties Editor and the Events Editor respec tively Properties Editor DefaultHeader HeaderFooter 0000 BackgrImageEnabled ALSE BackgroundImageld Empty value FrameBColor 255 255 255 FrameBColorTransp FALSE PageBorder3DEffect Flat PageBorderColor EEI PageBorderEnabled FALSE PageBorderSize 1 PageBorderStyle Solid Events Editor Task Help Please note the Properties Editor is only visible in EXTEN DED mode see chap 4 Choice of inte
31. ReleasedArea Visibility Indicates whether the field should be disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Disable ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 4072 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 49 Properties of the Monostable button Properties Description Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock at Determines the authorization level re quired to access the button utilities see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 PasswordLevel Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using the cursor keys within a page It also controls the or Tabi ndex der in which data is introduced in sev eral fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement Sess a Tag to the Direct move see roen Finan ornoo FinalY Vertical co ordinate Monostable button events Table 50 Monostable button events Event Description Activated whenever the button is OnPressed pressed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 50 Monostable button events Event
32. es or it can be managed with thresh olds Indicates if zeroes should be set before the significant digits e g if True 000541 will be displayed otherwise it will simply be 541 Determines if the object can move or Lock AOE Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the field see PasswordLevel chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only LeadingZeroes ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 346 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties Description Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con Tabl ndex trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Indicates whether to show thousand Thousep separators or not The value can be associated with Tag or it can be man aged with thresholds Allows you to use a general numerical field and view during insertion of its data the character attributed to the Password Character property For PasswordChar example if you attribute the cha racter to the Password Character property a line of asterisks will appear when inserting the data e g 12345 Indicates the layout of the representa tion of the numerical value for exam ple if the value is 35403 and if the picture is
33. input string If the input string is empty when this method is called in Runtime the window for exporting files is shown to allow a search for the file from which to import the recipe The object This object offers functions relating to the transfer of recipes ESARECI PETRF the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESARECI PETRF RecipeBufferUpload RecipeType 1 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 ESARECI PETRF methods accessible with Scripts Chapter9 571 Scripts Table 8 ESARECIPETRF methods accessible with Scripts Method LoadRecipe SaveRecipe Recipe Download Description Loads the recipe specified by the input parameter into the video buffer It is necessary to provide the type of recipe the name of the recipe and a Boolean variable indicating whether the user must confirm the operation 1 or whether the loading is automatic 0 Saves the data in the video buffer into the recipe specified by the input parameter It is necessary to provide the type of recipe the name of the recipe and a Boolean variable indicating whether the user must confirm the operation 1 or whether the loading is automatic 0 Downloads onto a device the recipe specified by the input parameter It is necessary to provide the type of recipe the name of the recipe and a Boolean variable indicating whether the download mus
34. page 598 and see chap 9 Methods of ESACNTRL Polygon page 600 Properties of ESACNTRL Label Table 31 Properties of ESACNTRL Label Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the rectangle of the label has ControlLeft currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle of the ControlTop label has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Width Control Defines the height of the object Height ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 602 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 31 Properties of ESACNTRL Label Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 Modifying this command provokes Properties Description Typ RW e an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw Bool RW ControlHide method Defines the color of the border of RGB RW the rectangle of the label currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for pOreerColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the border of the Int RW rectangl
35. tomatically removed by POLYMATH Using this function an open line can be created that differs from an irregular Polygon in that it is not necessarily closed to form a closed geometric figure To define the characteristics of the Irregular line they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following sec tion ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 314 Chapter6 Properties Editor Properties of the Irregular line Table 21 Properties of the Irregular line properties Description Identifying name of the Irregular line Must be unique among the graphic el ements man Wt avesion pem civenion Determines the color of the Line which can be selected using the RGB code or LineColor color palette The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the thickness of the out line of the Line The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds LineSize Indicates the number of sides assigned to the Irregular Line in the drawing phase Determines whether the object is ini tially visible it is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable dynamic in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock Boe Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement Ser a Tag to the Direct move
36. 1 of the tag s string Changes the fillings String Tag character of the tag s name string Integer Fil Ichar Geti nputValue Gets the lower limit of the Doub String LowerLimitGe operations in entry of a le tTagThrsDevR numerical tag eference Geti nputValue Gets the upper limit of the String ee operations in entry of a UpperLimit numerical tag Geti nputRaw Gets the lower limit of the String ValueLowerLi operations in exit of a mit numerical tag Geti nputRaw Gets the upper limit of the String ValueUpperLi operations in exit of a mit numerical tag GetConversion Gets the conversion type Integ String Type code of a numerical tag er Gets the parameter of the String GetConversion mathematical conversion X1Par of the value of a numerical tag Gets the parameter of the String GetConversion mathematical conversion Y1Par of the value of a numerical tag Gets the parameter of the String GetConversion mathematical conversion X2Par of the value of a numerical tag Gets the parameter of the String GetConversion mathematical conversion Y2Par of the value of a numerical tag ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 SetFillingChar Chapter 9 Scripts Table 2 Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from Script Seti nputValue LowerLimit Seti nputValue UpperLimit Seti nputRaw ValueLower Limit Seti nputRaw ValueUpper Limit SetConversion X1Par SetConversion Y1Par SetConversion X2Par Set
37. 2 2 238 Chapter5 Project Explorer double clicking on its Name in Project Explorer thereby accessing the General mask described in the next section For more information on the table and the meaning of the events that can be associated to a Pipeline readers are advised to consult the next chapter see chap 6 page 292 General Events Identification Name Pipeline Comment Parameters Source Tag_1 ICG Destination Tag_2 IGG Mode Polling Activation v B Using the General mask you can set the identifying properties of the Pipeline The ID of the Pipeline is an identifying number of the data structure within the project it is a whole number greater than zero The Pipeline name and ID are unique attributes within the project that is other different Pipelines with the same name and the same ID cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH At the bottom of the mask you can enter the working characteristics that describe the Pipeline First of all it is necessary to indicate a source and destination variable ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 239 Project Explorer The related sliding menu is used to select the Pipeline operating mode and this is chosen from those listed in the following table Tabella 4 Pipeline modes Description Each time a new value is read from the source variable this value is assigned to the des
38. 2 2 630 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 53 Properties of ESACNTRL Complex Control Grid Properties ControlHide BorderColor GridColor ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description TYP RW T Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the border of the rectangle containing the Grid currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the rectangle containing the Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the field is enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the user can edit its values Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Chapter9 631 Scripts Table 53 Properties o
39. Activated when a Page is about to be closed OnPageClose Properties of Popup pages The properties of the Popup page editor are exactly the same as those of the standard pages see chap 6 Page properties page 297 Events related to Popup pages The Editor events that can be assigned to the Popup pages are exactly the same as those of the standard pages see chap 6 Events related to Pages page 298 Properties of Frames Table 14 Frame properties Properties Meaning FrameBColor Defines whether the background of the Transparent Frame must be transparent ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Predefined graphic elements Chapter6 299 Properties Editor Table 14 Frame properties Properties Meaning Background color of the frame edit FrameBColor able using RGB code or palette of col ors PageBorder3DEffect Permits the 3 D effect that can be as signed to the Border Indicates the color of the Border edit PageBorderColor able using RGB code or palette of col ors PageBorderEnabled a Ne whether the page must have a PageBorderSize Indicates the dimensions of the Border PageBorderStyle Permits the style of the Border to be chosen Backgrl mageEnabled Determines the use of a background image BackgroundI magel D Determines the background image in the frame POLYMATH has a set of predefined graphic elements that can be added to a page These elements can have simple graphic funct
40. Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Recipes List Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Hidden Recipe Editing Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Recipe Type Name Text Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Disabled Hidden Recipe Comment Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Disabled Hidden Chapter6 34 Properties Editor ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 342 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Chronothermostat View Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Chronothermostat Grid Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Colour Border Thickness Border Flashing Vertical Scale Label Colour Keyboard Display Area Colour Border Colour Text Colour Numerical Field A Numerical Field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value Fields gt Numerical fie
41. Design Name NumericField Comment Empty value i Position Top Left Width Height i Appearance ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 4reaColor 255 255 255 AreaVisibility gt es A Border3D No BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize BorderStyle Digits FontField Syd Invert KeyboardId Empty value Thresholds option functioning Chapter 6 Properties Editor The behaviour associated to the Tag Is inverted For exam ple ifa Tag enables the display of the background colour of the numerical field when its value is 1 selecting the Invert option the numerical field background will be visible even when the value of the Tag is 0 and not 1 Thresholds Management Function A new functionality is present inside POLYMATH starting from version 1 7 The new POLYMATH function called Thresholds is present in side the Editor Properties and as been created as an additional option in order to manage the colour change the flashing hi de disable and other properties of the various objects To explain functioning of the Thresholds option the AreaCo lourPressed property of a Touch sensitive Button will be taken as an example Properties Editor TouchButton TouchButton 0000 Name TouchButton Comment Empty value E Position Top 10 Left 10 width gi Height r 0 0 0 AreaCalorPressed ee aAA Areawisibility TRUE BorderBlink No Blin
42. ETHI iiir SP1 ETH a mm Tn Rottan Each time a user drags a device on the panel it will be con nected by following a predefined logic the first driver will be assigned to the first available door by excluding whether it is serial or Ethernet The second serial driver is assigned to the second serial door if present in case in which the second serial door is not available POLYMATH will not allow use of a serial driver but only Ethernet It is possible to enter up to 2 different protocols for each ethernet door on the terminal the following is an example of entry of 4 PLC ethernet belonging to 2 distinct families ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 114 Chapter 4 Managing the project IT107W SP1 SPZ ETH 57 300 400 Industri ahaha 57 300 400 Industri Leaded L i amp Note The number of PLC which may be entered on each door can also be greater than the 4 reported in the previous example as long as they do not belong to more than 2 different families It is also useful to point out that in case the user wants to connect a particular device on the second serial door instead of the first like POLYMATH would do by default simply carry out the Drag and Drop operation by moving the mouse in correspondence to the chosen door ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 115 Managing the project aj Devices IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH 5 PLC mm Ase
43. HIRCoAgi all Doernieading Huron Ha ASSOAPA al Coenkaded Buntme file MISOAPR dl Doenkading unas Ga ASS0Ar1 di A window reporting the download will then appear which Shows the status of the file transfer Once this phase Is over the download is ended and the project we have just finished editing will start on the panel automatically ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 712 Chapter 10 Tutorial ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 11 Remote Desktop Installationand registration Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC Available functions for Remote connection from the PC ESA puts at the user s disposal an application that can be bou ght separately ESA order code PCREMOTEACCESS or that can be installed with the POLYMATH 1 60 version The application which we will call Remote Desktop allows to have on the PC an identical vision of the terminal display whe re the project is found To use the Remote Desktop function the software called ESAremote exe must be installed on the PC To install the application follow the simple instructions which the guided installation proposes At the end of installation a license code for carrying out the registration will be requested Registration is not obligatory but if it is not carried out pro duct registration will be requested every time the application is used and connection to the terminal is carried out 713 ESAP
44. Methods of ESACNTRL Label Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Returns the length of the GetTextLen string currently written in the label ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 605 Scripts Properties of ESACNTRL I mage field Table 33 Properties of ESACNTRL Image field Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the rectangle of the field has currently ControlLeft been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle of the ControlTop field has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object IS moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Defines whether the object should Bool be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the borderof R the rectangle of the field currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long BorderColor value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 nt nt nt GB ControlH
45. Password configuration page 213 Disable PasswordLevel Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Tabi ndex Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement oes a Tag to the Direct move ste rone Fina raoa FinalY Vertical co ordinate Touch Area events Table 40 Touch Area events Event Description Activated whenever the button is OnPressed pressed 381 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 382 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 40 Touch Area events Event Description Activated whenever the button is re OnReleased leased after being pressed Touch Keyboard Button A Touch Keyboard Button can be inserted inside the key board Double click one of the keyboard types on Polymath default in the Keyboards sub menu of the Explore Project Project Explorer 34200888 Progetto ITLOST SP1 SP2 ETH1 SwWConfiguration w Ww Progetto C4 HWConfiguration C ITLOST SP1 SP2 ETH1 SW Configuration Pz Tags Languages and fonts Pages E PopUp pages n Frames rN Alarms Recipe types 3 Users and passwords 5 Data archive P Scr
46. Policy None Mone Group NoRunHoliday 4 _ Separate Scheduling Choosing the Do not Perform during Holiday option the sche duler is disabled for a time period set by the user Holiday Peet NoRunHoliday J Mone O 0 OOOO Group NoRunHoaliday A Separate Scheduling e T Choosing the separate Scheduling option it is possible to se parately manage scheduler activities main and Holiday ac tivities option Mone w ll NoRunHolida a Separate Scheduling In both last 2 cases it is necessary to create a Holiday Group Policy Separates cheduling be Holiday Group w ie i Group On the Group sub mask it is possible to choose among the following options Fields The Fields option allows viewing buttons on Scheduler View that make it possible to set scheduler activities custo mising them at will ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 264 Chapter 5 Project Explorer User can choose among following options e None e Days e Week Choosing the None option only two fields indicating hours and minutes for scheduling beginning and end will appear on the configured page By using the specific decrease and increase keys it is possible to indicate scheduled time hours and minutes Weekly type By choosing the Days option the configu
47. Recipes Convert device Alarms Remove unused tags Downloader Utilities Cross reference Dictionary Shared tags Show Memory Update operator terminal EditFind Replace scripts ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 68 Chapter 3 Layout of menus On the first Screen it is possible to choose between opening an existing procedure previously saved or creating a new one the default image is the following Procedure for updating operator terminal Open an existing procedure Create new procedure New procedure To create a New procedure select the corresponding option then click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal Initial choice Open an existing procedure Create new procedure Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 69 Layout of menus Select the operator panel being used in the project and that needs to be backed up then click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal VT155W PROFIBUS Eoma A T185W Portrait T185W ETHERNET T185 W ETHERNET Portrait YVT505W VT505W CAN YVT505W ETHERNET TSOSW PROFIBUS VTSiSW VT515W CAN T51i5W ETHERNET YVT515W PROFIBUS From the following screen choose the COM port to be used set communication speed then click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal Select communication parameters Communication port Baudrate COMI E f15200 Cancel F
48. Table 34 Properties of Bar field Properties Description Indicates the color ranges to be as Signed to given value intervals within the scale By clicking on v you enter an editing window in which the value intervals and their respective colors can be defined the window also allows you only to specify the limits in relation to the scale to be displayed ScaleColorRanges Indicates the number of notches on the scale of values You will also see the fi ScaleSectors gure for the value above the notch calculated based on the number of notches Reference variable corresponding to the position of the indicator Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or editor an existing one AlignBarColorToScale Allows to align or not the color of the Color bar to the color of the scale Allows you to assign a color to the bar background The value can be associ ated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Indicates the direction of the Bar whether vertical or horizontal Indicates whether the field should be disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds BarBackgroundColor Disable Determines the color of the filling of the bar through code or RGB color pa lette The value can be associated with integer variable FillBarColorRanges Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be
49. To move an element button or table just drag it to the desired position Insertable buttons are different and a non editable predefined function can be assigned to each of these e Move Left The button has two functions depending on whether the cursor is displayed or not if the cursor is invisible pressing the key makes the graph move from right to left If however the cursor is visible the button moves it to the left and when it reaches the furthest point the graph moves from right to left by a unit de fined by the principal horizontal division of the grid e Move Right The button has two functions depending on whether the cursor is displayed or not if the cursor is invisible pressing the key makes the graph move from left to right If however the cursor is visible the button moves it to the right and when it reaches the furthest point the graph moves from left to right by a unit de fined by the principle horizontal division of the grid e Move Up the button makes the graph move upwards by a unit defined by the major vertical division of the grid ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Move Down the button makes the graph move down wards by a unit defined by the major vertical division of the grid Principal the button makes the graph move from right to left until the oldest sample readings are positioned on the left side of the graph End the button makes the graph move from right t
50. ce it with another for example a different Font type Cross reference Replace ImaqgeList ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 52 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Let us now select the font to be used Cross reference Search for x Source font English United States SystemTahoma ESELI en Replace font SystemTahoma SystemCourier SystemSymbol SystemTimesNewRoman SystemWingdings SystemFangSong ESA Cancel Clicking Forward the following screen is appears Cross reference Filters Mv Search By Name i Element s category Search in Save filtering conditions Search from to N v Element s name begin with Mask NumericField All Project only in Load filtering conditions Click End ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Cancel Chapter3 53 Layout of menus Page Elements In the Page Elements option it is possible to complete a search for elements within the project with three different criteria that can be used both individually and at the same time e Search by Name allows carrying out an alphabetic search among elements the Search by Name option is divided into three subgroups 1 Search from to the filter is set by the user who can de fine a search field starting form one letter and finishing with another one the following mask will display
51. e Select the Specify an IP address option and insert an IP address and a Subnet Mask address These parameters must be used in order to interact with the terminal inside of the network for example Downloading a project via Ethernet see chapter Download the project on the VTCE panels on page 290 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 G Chapter 8 525 Compiling Downloading and Runtime SMSC11X Ethernet Driver M4 IP Address Mame Servers An IF address can be automatically assigned ta this computer Obtain an IP address via DHCP Ea 2 a IF Address 169 254 208 131 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 Oo Default Gateway Po Note To check that the panel has been correctly set in the Ethernet network the operator is advised to perform a Ping operation using a different terminal in the network For example using a Windows PC click on Start gt Run gt and write ping kxk kxk kkx REE renlacing the asterisks with the IP address assigned to the panel A command window for checking the actual connection and its speed will appear Naturally to have a PC interact with the panel via Ethernet the PC also needs to be configured to access the network with its own IP address the configuration is identical to that seen for the terminal Sharing folders between panel and PC It can sometimes prove useful to share folders in a network to make them accessible to a Windows CE panel in the
52. in red signalled by the compiler before downloading the project onto the panel as failure to do so could cause runtime malfunctioning By contrast the warnings relate to incomplete parts of the project that it would be advisable to correct although their runtime impact is less grave Compiler Output Building Sip_0003 xml Building Sip_0003 xml Succeede Building Sip 0004 xml Building Sip 0004 xml Succeede Building DataLog xml Building DataLog xml Succeede Building TEXT_001 TRN Building TEXT_OO1 TRN Succeede Building APPMSG_001 TRN Building APPMSG_O01 TRN Succeede Building SYSMSG_ENG TRN Building SYSMSG_ENG TRN Succeeded Building NetworkTags xml Succeeded When the compilation has finished the project is ready to be downloaded onto the panel When there is an attempt to download a project that has not been compiled or that contains changes compared with the last compilation POLYMATH will advise the user and ask whether to go ahead with the compilation again before beginning to transfer ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 505 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Project Run time simulator Srmularion The project can be simulated directly on the PC without being transferred to the terminal all device variables and the project s accurate execution can be verified without the device actually being connected List of menu items File Menu Path Function Imp
53. indicate the temperature reference values for activation of the system ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Schedulers Chapter 5 Project Explorer The Tag offset can be used to set the offset value referring to the Chronothermostat working temperature in a variable The actual temperature value is memorised in the Tag tem peratura corrente Current temperature tag Values General Script PAMA The Values table contains the data relative to the tempera ture and corresponding tag values It can be useful to assign a different tag value with respect to the temperature when the device used in the realisation of the project requires conver sion of the data according to its programming features The Tools key allows to modify the structure of the columns at will Through the Schedulers function Polymath allows program ming the execution of organised events in daily and weekly ti me periods even combining them with customised calendars List After having double clicked on the Schedulers icon in the Explore Project inside the work area the List mask contai ning a list of the schedulers inserted inside the project will ap pear Comment From this list it is possible to insert new ones by clicking the Add key to duplicate or to eliminate the existing ones by clicking the Duplicate and the Delete keys the Tools ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 260 Chapter 5 Pr
54. rev 2 2 336 Chapter6 Properties Editor Disabled Hidden Date Time Field Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Disabled Hidden Bar Field Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Bar Background Colour Disabled Hidden Indicator Area Visibility Border Style Hidden Touch sensitive Button Area Colour Pressed Area Colour Released Area Visibility Border Flashing ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Border Colour Pressed Border Colour Released Border Thickness 3D Button Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Image Horizontal Alignment Image Vertical Alignment Disabled Hidden Tactile Area Disabled Slide Potentiometer Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Disabled Hidden Slide Selector Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Disabled Knob potentiometer Area Visibility Chapter6 337 Properties Editor ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 338 Chapter6 Properties Editor Border Style Disabled Hidden Knob Selector Area Visibility Border Style Disabled Hidden Monostable Button Area Colour Pressed Area Visibility
55. side of the object preceding it is always equal to the distance between the bottom side of the first object and the top side of the second object reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from the top If the ref erence distance is less than zero POLYMATH takes it automat ically to O In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure For atop line arrangement just click on icon of the toolbar or the Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Top POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the top sides of consecutive objects is al ways equal to the distance between the top sides of the first two objects reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from the top In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor For a mid point arrangement just click on the icon of the toolbar or the Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Mid point POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the central horizontal axes of consecutive objects is always equal to the distance between the central horizontal axes of consecutive objects reference objects cal culated according to their order when scrolling the page from the top If the reference distance is less than zero POLY
56. specting the conditions indicated in the Filters window will be shown If more than one filter is set only the alarm in stances respecting the limits AND conditions will be shown in runtime Indicates whether the horizontal scroll HScrollBarvisible bar should be visible in Runtime LetterHeadVisibility Indicates whether the tables should have titles Allows the operator to decide whether or not to display the index numbers of the alarm in the columns to the left of the table RibbonVisibility Indicates the chronological order in which to arrange the alarms in the grid may choose to show the most re cent ones first or the oldest ones i Indicates whether the vertical scroll VacCroUBar Visible bar should be visible in Runtime TimeStampOrder ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 434 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Alarm History View The Alarm History table is a predefined element in POLYMATH one that can be inserted into the project pages It allows the operator to access the active alarm list and perform the prin cipal operations with a simple click To insert an Alarm History View table into a page click on the icon ag or alternatively use the main menu Fields gt Create gt Complex Controls gt Alarm History This table contains only those alarms whose configuration explicitly says that they are to be saved in the terminal s Alarm History see chap 5 Properties page 200 After clicking on the
57. the chart containing the graph We select the chart and move to its Properties Editor Using this window we can set all the characteristics relating to graphic representation like col ors and scale values lines and subdivisions As area color we choose gray and select a white 3 pixel wide Bump border ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appearance Chapter 10 Tutorial AreaColor 4reaVisibility Border3D BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize Behavior Advanced 192 192 192 Iv Bump No Blink Boo v 3 Chart4reaColor Chart4reaTop Chart4reaLeft Chart4reawidth Chart4reaHeight ChartBorderColor 259 205 255 Boo v We now change the representational properties of the hori zontal value scale choosing tenths of a second we choose dark blue as the color and finally a value interval of 1 Gridvervisible HorScaleLabelColor HorScaleLabelFont HorScaleLabelSkip HorScaleMinNotchesLen HorScaleMoade HorScaleNotchesLen HorScale Visible We leave all the other values unchanged except for the colors 9 128 255 SystemTahoma 0 1 I TenthotSecond 3 of the dividing lines that we set as white ChartBorderSize GridHorDivisionColor GridHorDivisionNumber GridHorDivisionStyle GridHorMinDivisionColor GridHorMinDivisionNumber GridHorMinDivisionStyle GridHorVisible GridVerDivisionColor GridVerDivisionNumber GridVerDivisionStyle GridVerMinDivisionColor GridVerMinD
58. the graphic elements Comment Identification comment inside of POLY MATH man Wt avesion pem Het avenson Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the 3D effect of the Bor der It can be Flat Relief Rec essed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as sociated to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the Border colour by me ans of the RGB code or the colour pa BorderColor lette The value can be associated toa whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Viewer border BorderVisibility is present or not A Boolean variable can be associated to this value Determines the dimension of the Bor der It must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be associated op tionally or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border It can be No Flash Slow Flash or Fast BorderBlink Flash The value can be associated to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds 449 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 450 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 62 Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Properties Description Determines the type of use of the WeeklyType Chronothermostat It can be None Days or Week GridLineVisible Determines
59. to status indication commands Naturally the list of variables can be accessed at any point during the editing of the project In our example we do this to define some examples of each type of variable Defining device variables If we click twice on the Tags option of the Project Explorer we access the list of variables defined in the project Now click on Add to insert the new variables Marna Meme Address ret Group Converse ghari Har Tag Usitelvay TENOR SVEI S Premien meger Girs DLT S00 rears Hone Hone Tay Tag Usitalway TOMONINI Premian integer Clee 08 SOO meee Wane wane Tag p Unitelaay TSO ITS Premam Integer Class 0 5 BOO mec Kone Kona Tag_z Tes eer TSxn7 a747 57 Premiven Imager Ghaza 05i S00 mee fone hone Taga For the moment we will introduce 4 variables which we will then edit individually We shall now describe in detail how the first variable is edited the procedure being identical for the following ones We start with the General mask where we digit the name and the comment of the variable Idenbticaorn Hama Comment This tag shows the valus of items produncd Tyrie Device Let us call the variable num_ pezzi and add a brief descrip tion which may be useful for identifying what the variable is for in the future defining its location as Device ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 658 Chapter 10 Tutorial r In the Value mask we specify
60. we set a generic alarm Alarm that will be set off when the variable Tag assumes the value 10 We remember to set in Alarms in the User Signals mask see chap 5 Usersignals page 190 the display of one of the user signals present We set a page called Page in which we insert a label called Label and a touch button Touch Button to which we assign the Script Script corresponding to the event onReleased Using Project Explorer we drag the variable to ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 9 Scripts the work area to create a dynamic field showing its value in runtime useful for constantly monitoring its value We add two buttons to which we assign the predefined functions of increase decrease value acting on the variable Tag so as to be able to change the value in runtime The page created will look like this Our Script must be able to get the value of the variable Tag check that the value is less than 5 and should this not be the case launch an alarm edit the layout of the label and the page and take the variable to a low value To get the value of the variable we use ESATAG and Save it into variable a with the following instruction a ESAHMI ESATAG ReadValue Tag Now let us analyze the received value if the value is greater than or equal to 5 an alarm is raised Using POLYMATH we set an alarm to be activated when the value 10 was reache
61. wished Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Determines the flashing of the text the possibilities are No Blinking Slow blinking or Rapid Blinking The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Field text which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the type of horizontal text alignment which can be Centered Left or Right ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 322 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 23 Properties of the Trend Pen Properties Description Determines the type of vertical text TextVAlign alignment which can be Centered Top or Bottom Determines if the object can move or Lock aot Determines the authorization level re PasswordLevel quired to access the field see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 AsciiLen Determines the maximum length of the string represented in
62. 13 Functions of the menu Image Icon Path Menu Description of function Image gt Cut area Cuts the area selected Image gt Rotate Rotates the image selected Image gt Adaptto Adapts the selection to the screen display Image gt Maintain Maintains the proportions while proportions the image size is changed Menu Display Home Alt Up Backward Alt Left gt Forward Alt Right gt English United States a Show all K Hide all Show Toolbars Reset window and bars layout a Enter full screen Fil Table 14 Functions of the menu Display Path Menu Description of function Display gt First Moves to POLYMATH Home page Page Moves to last work page Display gt Last displayed Display gt Moves to next work page Forward displayed o Dispi Proiect Makes it possible to change the mmaa SPpray gt Frojec current project language E haan Shows all the anchorable windows see chap 3 Anchorable windows page 84 Display gt Show all ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 3 Layout of menus Table 14 Functions of the menu Display Path Menu Description of function Display gt Hide all Hides all the anchorable windows NA Allows to access the anchorable Display gt Show windows sub menu Display gt Tools Allows to access the tools bar NA bar submenu Display gt Allows to restore the POLYMATH Restores windows windows
63. 136 Langages and FONS aeinn N 166 Pane ri tua teueaa nei wath td cuba ton rtaabraa ete tnet tess 168 DA reser aca cece ETA VE EEE E date V eee clasts 169 POPUP PaCS aee E N 176 Frames onee aad uep ete tund rae os an saan etetenrretee es eaeat oad 178 PVA AMIS 25 ea hiatacichs eect eect aaa ake iort ua eeecae eaten aartacen taeda 182 Recipes LY pes annee a e 203 WserSeanid Pass Ww OVS isehsteticaccecetst saathnceetertehstetidaamnectit suas naucean 213 User 16 2 EX DORE sirsa 218 Dart Ar Cte tot oiera seater ronscasiundia ty ethos doteatetaicncadleeorieaiastecdesneeds 220 TENG BUTCESIXG Y rererere onda aang e e e a 226 Daal op securise E E E 228 eea 8 AS eee ee eee te en E ne 228 CIGD AUS CUES oes asian eadacermsean tater eres de E 230 MCG SU cate sient teases eae E EE boxe eee eae eee ee ee 230 DTA STS E E E chy E A E E E E E T E 232 1a VeXe Saree mc Reet err enprncat E neC nT weenie onetny CrewrC mr nneCT tren 2352 PU RAN Oe a cts cat a E eaiaeecacees 237 PIPE NDE Suisiana a 237 CDOS afaik rien ah haste eae a arte ere 240 Remote NOUMCA IONS orsa Annn OTA EEEN 246 Syse Ke ybod S eeeneed eee eens 250 ICY BOATS Saa 253 Weekly Tasko i 256 SCHCOUIETS ri a ee eee 259 Hondi y GOUD aea E teat tries E 267 AUTOPISTA 270 ESAPOLYMATH User manual rev 2 2 COMMSUMMS Te CE VIC S secs cuisaswsssdnneiscudadshesaiuehscusdatuseaduasdaerdadiyes 278 Properes Editor seii a 281 Properties EdItOP earcetseiiriacenei i E E 281 Event ETOT scorns a E ae
64. 168 100 255 Bootloader for IT Doki Make sure the TCP IP address of your PC is compatible with the TCP IP address of the panel 4t boot time the panel is configured with the TCP IP address 192 168 100 1 and the subnet mask 200 200 200 0 For example you may use the TCP IP address 192 168 100 2 and the subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Cancel Use the w icon to change path where is placed the new OS image to download to the terminal Bootloader for IT Parameters File name image to send C Program Files ES4 elettronica EPM OS Images Se Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 778 Appendix F Update Operating System Turn on the panel Bootloader for IT MoR Send File Please start the panel if Cancel Transfer of C Program Files ES4 elettranicaEPM OS ImagesIT105 TFAMNE bin Wait loading Cancel Waiting the end of the image download Bootloader for IT Send File IT image transfer completed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix F Update Operating 779 System Waiting for the panel reboot Bootloader for IT Wizard completed Panel is loading the new IT image this action may take between 10 and 20 minutes Finish ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 780 Appendix F Update Operating System ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2
65. 2 2 180 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Fields General Cross reference Using this mask you can edit the way a Frame will actually appear in the pages into which it ts called it is edited just like that for normal pages with various objects being introduced and properties being set see chap 6 Managing a page page 295 To introduce an object simply click on the respective icon and immediately after draw where in the page you wish the outline of the area to contain it to be placed The next chapter describes all the procedures for introducing the graphic objects together with their related meanings and tools Using this mask you can however set the dimensions of the Frame click on the icon to select it and then move the cursor to one of the red corners by dragging it in line with the dimensions required This operation can also be performed by the General mask as set out in the next section You cannot use this mask to move the Frame in that its final position is defined periodically in the destination page General Identification Name Comment diting O Override default grid size Width 10 Height ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 181 Project Explorer This mask can be used to introduce the identifying attributes of the alarm like Name and Comment The name is a unique property within any given project that is other different frames with the same name cannot
66. 4096 Downloading files Time left 29 sec Show details O By enabling the Show details check box the file names cur rently being transferred are displayed ESAPOLYMATH Downloader Upload Connection Type Ethernet UDP 192 168 100 1 4096 Downloading files Time left 18 sec Show details MJ LEE ELLE LLL EEE LEE ELE ELLE ELL ELLE LLL LLL Downloading Runtime file V4IExchA4reas dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IExchAreas dll Downloading Runtime file YV4IPageManager dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IPageManager dll Downloading Runtime file V4IRecipeManager dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IRecipeManager dll Downloading Runtime file 4lAlarmManager dll Downloaded Runtime file V414larmManager dll Downloading Runtime file V4IAlarmObserver dll Downloaded Runtime file V4 A4larmObserver dll Downloading Runtime file V4IUserObserver dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IUserObserver dll Downloading Runtime file V4IRecipeObserver dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IRecipeObserver dll Downloading Runtime file V4IPIcTag dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IPIcTag dll Downloading Runtime file V4ITimer ocx Downloaded Runtime file V4ITimer ocx Downloading Runtime file 4ITrendManager dll Downloaded Runtime file V4ITrendManager dll Downloading Runtime file 4ITrendObserver dll Downloaded Runtime file V4ITrendObserver dll Downloading Runtime file V4IIM dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IIM dll Downloading Runtime file V
67. 5 to make the editing more precise and to leave the default settings for the page display focus reduce button etc Using the lower part of the mask we set at 5 the consent level allowing a user to display system pages then access is given when you log on We then edit the Help pages font by clicking on Project font English United States Font_Trebuchet Font_Trebuchet Font_Verdana SystemCourier SystemSymbol SystemTahoma SystemTimesNewRoman SystemWingdings Italian Italy Font attributes Size O Bold O Italics O Strikeout O Underline Preview Aa Bb Yy Zz 0123456789 A different font can be specified for each of the project lan guages In our example we set Font_ Trebuchet which we pre viously inserted for both languages and set the font size at 25 These changes will be valid for all the Help pages we set ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 665 Tutorial Configuring the Boot In this mask we set the start up options of the project We in dicate the language of the Operating System English and leave the page displayed on start up as the default option Page Setting Exchange areas The last terminal configuration operation for our project is the definition of the exchange areas After moving to the appro priate mask we specify which of the variables areas created are to be dedicate to these checks Status Bh array_var_s
68. 6 Properties Editor To operate a rightward arrangement just click on icon of the toolbar or Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Right POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the right sides of consecutive objects Is al ways equal to the distance between the right sides of the first two objects reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from the left If the reference distance is less than zero POLYMATH takes it automatically to 0 thereby aligning to the right In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure To arrange to the center just click on icon fff of the toolbar or the Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Center POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the central vertical axes of consecutive ob jects is always equal to the distance between the central ver tical axes of the first two objects reference objects calculated according to the order when scrolling the page from the left If the reference distance is less than zero POLYMATH takes it automatically to 0 thereby aligning to the center In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure TO Operate a leftward arrangement just click on the icon of the toolbar or Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Left POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance betwee
69. 6 Properties Editor orities masks of the Alarm see chap 5 Fields page 171 and see chap 5 Priorities page 189 Properties of the Alarm History Grid The properties of the Alarm History Grid coincide with those of the Active Alarm Grid see chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 User List Table The User List table see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 is a predefined element in POLYMATH one that can be inserted into the project pages It allows the operator to access the user list respecting the limits of its level of protec tion and perform the principal operations with a simple click To insert a User List table into a page click on the icon or alternatively use the main menu Fields gt Create gt Complex Controls gt User list After clicking draw just the outline of the table and it will ap pear automatically Once the table has been inserted into the page and been se lected a series of properties contained in the Properties Editor can be attributed to it the meanings of these properties are identical to those of the properties in TrendView see chap 6 Properties of a TrendView page 408 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 437 Properties Editor By double clicking on the table itself you access its editing page which comprises two masks Fields and General The default contents of the Fields mask i
70. Boolea field on the ethernet gate is active na gate2 Logic2 SYS_ETH4_Driver Driver version on the ethernet gate String Version gate2 logic2 SYS_ETH4_Driver Terminal address on the ethernet String Address gate gate2 logic2 SYS_ETH4_Driver Present ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 744 Appendix A System Variables ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix B Predefined functions 745 Appendix B Predefined func tions This section is dedicated to the meanings of the predefined functions in POLYMATH that will prove useful during the devel opment of a project In general they can be assigned to the events of the various POLYMATH objects see chap 6 Events Editor page 288 and can be selected from the relevant pull down menu For certain types of function it is also necessary to specify the variables or the objects that that function should effect and indicate the values with which it should operate A typical example of the use of predefined functions in POLY MATH is when they are assigned to touch buttons and touch areas when changing values of value fields or when opening and closing pages and pop ups Functions relating to alarms Table 1 Functions relating to alarms Function ClearAlarmHistory ExportAlarmHistory ExportActiveAlarms Description Cancels the buffer containing the alarm history may be useful to insert a button with this function near an alarm h
71. Complex Control editor see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Label A Label is a text field may be multilanguage into which you can in troduce text strings that will not change in Runtime To define the other characteristics of the Label they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following sec tion w Properties of the Complex Label The properties of the Complex label are identical to those of the Label The reader is therefore advised to consult the ap propriate part of the previous section see chap 6 Properties of the Label page 316 Trend Pen A Trend Pen can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple fig ures gt Trend pen This icon or Menu option is active only if it is within a Trend editor see chap 6 Editing a TrendView page 410 In practice the Trend Pen makes it possible to view the current value next to the Pen selected in such a way ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 320 Chapter 6 Properties Editor as to couple a numeric indication with the graphic display of the Trend After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Trend Pen For the characteristics of the Trend Pen to be defined they must be set in the Properties Edit
72. ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 311 Properties Editor Properties of the Polygon Table 20 Properties Description tome Sty he are Sema be unique among the graphic elements wan wistvginenon Determines the color of the Polygon which that can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 312 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 20 Properties Description Determines the color of the Polygon outline which can be selected using LineColor the RGB code or color palette The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the thickness of the out line of the Polygon The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible it is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable dynamic in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock ane Determines whether to make a partial Partial Fill color infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable LineSize Determines the color of the Polygon in FillColor
73. Excel or CSV file e Export selected Export selected objects in the list to an Excel or CSV file e Modify After selecting an element from the list it al lows modifying it within the project e Tree view Allows modifying how elements are viewed from table to tree type e Find element Allows a more detailed search among ele ments that have already been searched e New search Allows carrying out a new search from the beginning Projects Tags In the Projects Tags option it is possible to complete a sear ch for elements within the project with two different criteria that can be used both individually and at the same time e Search by Name allows carrying out an alphabetic search among elements the Search by Name option is divided into three subgroups ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 55 Layout of menus 1 Cerca da a II filtro impostato dall utente il quale pu definire un campo di ricerca iniziando da una lettera e finendo con un altra Cerca per Tipo II filtro impostato dall utente il quale pu definire un campo di ricerca selezionando il tipo di Tag che si vuole ricercare verranno evedenziate tutte le Tag apparte nenti allo stesso tipo 2 Nome dell elemento inizia con II filtro impostato dall utente il quale puo definire un campo di ricerca selezio nando la lettera di inizio del nome dell elemento da cercare 3 Maschera II f
74. File name My Library_1 lib N Files of type Library Cancel By clicking on Update system libraries eventual anomalies on the objects of the system libraries are restored Clicking on Check shared libraries the local libraries on PC will be updated will all the libraries on the network Creating a subfolder User can add subfolders to the USER and TEMP folders by clicking on the Create Folder icon ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 496 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows The new folder appears under library User I Folder Right clicking makes it possible to perform the following ope rations on the just created folder e Rename e Change icon e Delete Folde Rename Change icon Delete Select the Rename option to open this window x Insert the new name for Folder Folder Type the desired name then click OK to confirm Selecting the Change Icon option makes it possible to modi fy the default icon Selecting the Delete Folder option makes it possible to eli minate selected folder ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 TASA Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows Do you want to delete BOILER Saving objects It is possible to save edited objects in the USER OBJECTS fol der in the same Library Objects saved in the USER OBJECTS folder can also be used for other projects There is a folder in
75. Flush Interval min 3 v Edit mode idle timeout sec 10 Help pages font SystermTahoma Tahoma w The Work window of the main window shows the dimensions in pixels of the page displayed on the panel in general these dimensions are unchangeable and depend on the features of the panel hardware On a PC for example this one character can be configured because it is not possible to determine the resolution of the screen Nevertheless it is possible to change the grid for arranging objects in the page see chap 6 Managing a page page 295 the default values for these dimensions are set at 10 pixels for the width and 10 pixels for the length By reducing these values you have more freedom to add and reposition elements within the page the grids in the work area will be denser similarly by increasing these ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 130 Chapter 5 Project Explorer values the lines will become less dense and there will be less freedom to introduce objects Then providing the operating system of the panel allows this if not they will appear disabled a series of configurable options are available regarding the display of pages on the terminal the Show focus option can be selected 100 zoom the user can decider whether to display the title bar the Reduce to icon button the window focus practically Speaking the focus highlights the currently selected object or button the on screen keyboard for e
76. Inserts a trendXY in the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Displays the users logged on and allows the password to be changed see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Adds a table of active alarms to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Adds an alarm history table to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Adds a table with a list of users to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Adds a table with a list of recipes to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Adds a table with a recipe editor to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Inserts a chronothermostat view in the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Inserts a scheduler view in the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Inserts a holiday group view in the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Chapter3 25 Layout of menus Menu Layout ua Show grid w Align to grid is Show Hide touch grid amp Show Hide touch areas Zoom in 3 Zoom out 100 Me Ta Group Ctrl Shift G Ungroup Ctrl Shift U Align Distribute i Resize with content Table 9 Functions of the menu Layout Icon Path Menu Description of function Shows the grid in a page or ina Layout gt Show Hardware configuration see grid chap 6 Page properties page 297 Layout gt Align Ali
77. MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Holiday Group Chapter5 267 Project Explorer General PM List OnStart OnStop wW Events Functions Editor Functions Scripts associated to this event Parameters of the selected function script O Store the return value into The Holiday Groups function already found in the Chrono thermostat option see chap 6 Chronothermostat page 445 allows activities planning usually matched to the Scheduler function and managing them over a user defina ble time period See chap 5 Holiday page 262 After having double clicked on the Holiday Groups icon in the Explore Project inside the work area the List mask contai ning a list of Holiday Groups inserted inside the project will ap pear List Month Tag Year Tag Comment g Holiday Group SpecificYears HolidayGroup_Month HolidayGroup_Year T Add Edit X Delete Duplicate ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 268 Chapter5 Project Explorer From this list it is possible to insert new ones by clicking the Add key to duplicate or to eliminate the existing ones by clicking the Duplicate and the Delete keys the Tools key allows modifying the columns structure at will while the Modify key allows entering the General property editing mask General Identification Name HolidayGroup Comment Holiday type SpecificYears b Month HolidayGroup_Month v T Ye
78. MATH takes it automatically to 0 thus making the alignment in the center In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure For a bottom line arrangement just click on the icon of the toolbar or the Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Bottom 477 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 478 Chapter 6 Properties Editor POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the lowest sides of consecutive objects is al ways equal to the distance between the lowest sides of the first two objects reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from the top If the reference distance is less than zero POLYMATH takes it automatically to O thus making the alignment at the bottom In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 479 Other anchorable windows T Other anchorable windows In the last chapters we dealt with the workings of the three main anchorable windows Project Explorer Properties Editor and Events Editor But POLYMATH contains other anchorable windows each of which has its particular purposes and functions as we shall now see Library Explorer Error Viewer and Complirer Output POLYMATH POLYMATH has a structure saving tool that also functions out Libraries side the context of the project being edited the Library This
79. MB AEG MODICON E ALLEN BRADLEY Mm BECKHOFF E BERTHEL Mm CROUZET Mm DELTA Mm EATON MOELLER Mm GE FANUC Mm HITACHI MM KERNEL Sistemi Mm KUHNKE MB MITSUBISHI By MoODBUS iW RTU Master fast peripherals i RTU Master slow peripherals I RTU Slave i Tcp IP Modbus Master iw Tcp IP Modbus Slave J OMRON PANASONIC xl E via IT10 7W SP1 SP2 ETH 4 SP1 SP2 b PETHI RTU Master fast pe p Aa 4 com What was just said clearly also goes for the ethernet ports Note In case the user drags the device outside the panel the device is connected anyway by following the logic described previously For each connected device a page will appear from which it will be possible to set the connection parameters both of the de vice door and of the panel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 116 Chapter 4 Managing the project Device By clicking on Communication ports it will be possible to set in case of an ethernet device as in the example the connec S7 300 400 Industrial Ethernet lel eS General Identification Name S 300 400 Industrial Ethernet Comment DEVICE Model S 300 400 Industrial Ethernet DEVICE Creation Date 09 05 2012 8 30 43 Modify Date 09 05 2012 8 30 43 Compiling Date 09 05 2012 8 30 43 Type of addressing Default 7 tion
80. Main window page 129 By clicking on the icon of the toolbar Layout gt Align Grid you can decide whether to align the objects to the grid once they have been introduced or whether to have them intro duced freely With alignment to the grid is activated the element can only be introduced within the limits delineated by the grid Text While if the alignment function is deactivated the elements can be freely introduced into the page as shown in the figure below Text ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 297 Properties Editor pP Note You are recommended to activate the alignment to the grid function to be sure to have a well ordered and coherent arrange ment of objects on the page Should you be creating a multilanguage project see chap 5 Languages page 166 the elements in the page and the re lated texts can be displayed in a particular project language To do this just select the required language from the drop down menu Ersshtnted states containing all the languages added to the project this command can be accessed also via the Main menu using the sequence Display gt Project language Each time a language Is chosen the display of the page changes in Stantly To introduce an object into the page click on the related icon in the toolbar or use the Main menu and draw the outline in the position desired on the page preview Once an element is added it will appear in the page and can be
81. Manual rev 2 2 500 Chapter7 Other anchorable windows Warning Viewer frrrrrnriiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiit Errors Viewer 3 Warnings Viewer 1 A Compiler Output The Warning Viewer window lists in real time any warnings associated with the project you are editing and validating warnings are highlighted in orange Double clicking the description of a problem focuses the appli cation on the source of the error opening a window Proper ties Editor window in the work area etc where you can make the necessary corrections Errors disappear aS soon as they are corrected in the associated area Compiler Compiler Output is an anchorable window where the log in Output formation relative to the last compilation if already carried out during the actual session of the project currently being edited is reported During the compilation phase the log in this window is updated in real time showing the object and the compiled file on which it is working The errors and war nings are signalled as in the Error Viewer mask and a double click on them causes movement of the focus onto the area of application from where it is possible to solve the problem ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 501 Other anchorable windows Compiler Output Files deleted Compiling Obj file Compiling line ports Compiling d
82. Manual rev 2 2 64 Chapter 3 Layout of menus or it is possible to choose the variables to be shared by clicking on the check box of each individual item Shared tags Shared tags SMOOO00 O O O O O O O O CL Tag name DB_10 REQ DB_10 LADDR DB_10 DB_N0 DB_10 DBB_N DB_10 LEN DB_10 DONE DB_10 ERROR SYS_ETH_Driv DB_10 ERROR Symboli input2 output2 input3 input4 float text10 Symbol8 Select all Shared tag name DB_10 REQ DB_10 LADDR DB_10 DB_NO DB_10 DBB_NO DB_10 LEN DB_10 DONE DB_10 ERROR Tag DB_10 ERROR_1 Symboli input2 output2 input3 input4 float texti0 Symbol8 Finish Cancel The selected Tags will be shared on the network by pressing the End key Memory status With the Memory status option Polymath makes it possible to have Device memory occupation state in real time Using a graphical interface the user can immediately identify the areas that have been allocated or that are free If more devices are used it is possible to choose the one whe re Memory Status control is to be completed on ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 65 Layout of menus Device tag occupation Choose the Device and Data rea Device S7 300 400 Industrial Ethernet S7 TEME Industrial Ethernet Datarea The DataArea is the list of memory Areas that can be confi gured it is different for each Device and it allows selecti
83. Ml Vertical Mode im Id Ricetta Nome Ricetta Commento Ora ultima moc ALTEZZ4 LARGHEZZA PROFONDITA Add Delete Finish Cancel also clicking on Add or Delete new recipe columns will be created deleted Preis Recipes editor The headers of the grid are visibled and exported only if the Export headers of RecipeTypes is checked M Vertical Mode Id Ricetta Nome Ricetta Commento Ora ultima moc ALTEZZA LARGHEZZA PROFONDITA Finish Cancel Customize Log Files Allows to customize the recipe fields which will be saved in the log files to export By clicking on customize Log Files a new window will open where it is possible to enable the fields to export with check marks ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 208 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Customize Log File Column Structure Id Recipe Name Structure Name Comment Up using Up the user will be able to move the selected layer up after going to the Id column Down using Down the user will be able to move the se lected layer down after going to the Id column OK by pressing OK the user confirms the created settings Delete with the Delete key the user will delete the selected row Preview with the Preview key the user will view a graphic preview of the chosen customization the following is an example of how default exportation of a Recipe in CS
84. Pressed Area Colour Released Area Visibility Released Disabled Hidden Bistable Button Area Colour Key Off State Area Off Present Area Colour State On State Area On Present Disabled Hidden Frame Background Frame Colour Transparent Background Frame Colour Page Edge Colour Page Border Thickness Page Border Style Trend Buffer View Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Trend Buffer Graphics Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Trend Buffer X Y View Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Trend X Y Graphics Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Data Log View Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Chapter6 339 Properties Editor ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 340 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Hidden Active Alarms View Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Historic Alarms View Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden User List Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border
85. Properties of the Touch button Properties TextListLastBit I mageAutoSize I mageKeepAspect Ratio I mageListValue I mageListType I mageListli d I mageTagi d I mageTransparent I mageHAlign I mageVAlign ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Active if TextListType is bit group ori ented indicates the last bit of the group to which the control is applied Indicates whether the image should automatically sized to fit the dimen sions of the Field Indicates whether the image should maintain the proportions of the source image Active if ImageListType is value ori ented Indicate the values correspond ing to the Strings in the list By clicking on you access the mask for associ ating values and text list elements Indicates which type of check to per form on the variable value oriented single bit or bit group oriented Active only if the Bitmap is an Image List Determines the reference text list see chap 5 Image list page 232 Active only if the Bitmap is an Image List Determines which text list vari able to choose see chap 5 Image list page 232 Indicates whether a transparency filter Should be applied to the image Allows you to specify the horizontal centering of the image within the but ton The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Allows you to specify the vertical cen tering of the image within
86. Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 364 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 32 Properties of the DateTime field Properties Description Determines if the object can move or Lock ae Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the field see PasswordLevel chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only Makes it possible to control the active focus using cursor keys within a page It also controls the order in which data Tabi ndex is introduced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Indicates the position of the Date with DatePosition in the field this may be centered left ward or rightward Indicates the format of the date to be Shown the order and the layout of the day month and year can be selected You can choose whether or not to as sign a text list to the value of the month so as to display the string relat ed to the current month see chap 5 Text list page 230 DateRepresentation Indicates the position of the Time with TimePosition in the field this may be centered left ward or rightward Indicates the format of the date to be shown you can indicate whether or not to insert the seconds and whether to create an AM PM type of display TimeRepresentation Indicates the
87. SP2 ET we eg B Progen tapre Ta MewGocfiguration D T1 Srl EP ETHL ETH Sa Cenhgurateert LF Tags m Qh Languages and fonts E Pages ka Bie SPP pages ES Frames ia A Al anti Sh Reope ppt iy Users and Passwords iT Data archiet seire Fa mi eb i ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 171 Project Explorer OFF State OFF tate ON State GFF ESAPOLYMATH ProgettoSapmle es IT112 SamplelT 112 vtprj OBB 6GaIVSGSO0 eneee G6 S aaan Boe4eS TC AE CEECEE GO 1BEQE Hin e 228 0 8 0 0pAo prre OG 2e State OFF h ProgettoSapmle IT112T SP1 SP2 V qd ProgettoSapmle 4 HWConfiguration 17112T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETr SW Configuration a Pz Tags 9 Languages and fonts Zi Pages Inizio Page_2 Page_3 5 Page_4 Page_S 5 Page_6 5 impostazioni telecamere Password tastiere impostazioni_1 gl PopUp pages Fields Mouse pointer 456 0 The Fields mask shows graphically how the page will appear once the project has been installed in the terminal To introduce an object simply click on the relevant icon and immediately afterwards draw the outline of the area that will contain it in the page in the desired position ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 172 Chapter 5 Project Explorer The next chapter will illustrate all the procedures for introducing graphic objects and the relevant meanings and tools see c
88. Table 48 Knob Selector events Event Description Activated when the Selector value is OnValueChange changed using the touch screen 399 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 400 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Complex Complex Controls are objects that can be inserted into a page Controls in order to show the operator the value of one or more data items or groups of data like recipes alarms trends etc and if required edit them In this section we will analyze each Complex Control setting out its functional characteristics their respective properties to be configured by the Properties Editor and associated events Events Editor Monostable Button A Monostable Button can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon E or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Complex controls gt Monostable button After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the button The Monostable Button serves basically to trigger OnPressed and OnReleased events to which the desired functions or scripts can be assigned For further details regarding predefined functions and user scripts that can be assigned to the button the reader is ad vised to consult the appropriate section in this manual see chap Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the detai
89. Trend Buffer for which the Pen must be used A type must be indicated for the scale of values this may be e Programmed it is necessary to indicate the maximum and minimum values which can also be assigned to vari ables ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 418 Chapter 6 Properties Editor e Automatic calculated in Runtime on the basis of the values contained in the Buffer but limits can also be in serted e Tag Limit related the Buffer has to refer to a limited variable see chap 5 Limits page 143 e Client maximum and minimum values must be defined You can also choose the appearance of the penline which can be of the following samples only analog continuous with oblique connections between the values or digital scaled with digital steps Also the dimensions of the line its color and style solid broken or dotted can be edited to suit the user s taste The pen marker can assume various different geometric forms pixel circle cross etc and you can choose not to show the icon relating to the pen Each variation updates the preview at the bottom of the mask Intervals Properties GELES Color range This mask is used to insert the values relating to the intervals to which different representation colors can be attributed The scale of intervals must present values in increasing order Interval colors ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 419 Properties Edi
90. User Manual rev 2 2 88 Chapter 3 Layout of menus ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 4 Choice of interface Chapter4 89 Managing the project Managing the project The user can completely program the behavior of the terminal by using POLYMATH which will produce at the end a project file The user can create a project file edit it as he or she pleases using the functions we will describe later on save it and lat er reopen it for any further editing The aim of this chapter is precisely to furnish the information needed to create and manage the POLYMATH project files cor rectly When the Polymath starts up in the case of version 2 0 or above you are offered a choice of graphical interface DOU BLE CLICK or EXTENDED The initial page is shown below Mode selection x _ Click t start DOWB LE CIIEGK DOUBLE CLICK Click to start piimas DAIEN DIED O Use this style as the predefined one and don t ask the next start mi A Z Lu lt LLI Click one of the two options to activate the required interface ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 9O Chapter 4 Managing the project Double Click Interface ee oe ee ee e 7 O98 088808085 5056 500 aaa sea0eaa8a oA MELLL EE h mi a EE Hi HTT GH CF ATS F Frain i Ye PROLLY AS meres 7 7 FREER Faas sy The main feature of the DOUBLE CLICK interface is that with a few and simple steps it
91. a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as Signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 324 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 24 Properties of the Image Field Properties Description Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Image Field or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val BorderStyle ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Reference to the image that must be contained within the Field Determines whether the object is ini tially visible It is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable for changes in Runtime or it ca
92. a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border when the button is released using BorderColorReleased the RGB code or color palette The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether there will be a BorderVisibility Border to the button or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the button is in Button3D 3D The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresh olds Indicates the choice of image to apply Bitmap to the button No image a single im age or list of images Active only if Bitmap set on Image with this you can indicate which of the images in the project to apply to the button Indicates the type of inscription to dis Caption play on the button None Label or Text list ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 376 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 37 Properties of the Touch button Properties Description Active only if Caption is set for Label makes it possible to indicate the text to be applied to the button Inside a mul Text tilanguage project click on v to edit texts in any language see crap 5 Languages page 166 Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on y
93. alarms in the system Total number of recipes currently Int SYS RecipeNum saved in the VT memory irrespective of their type With X being from 1 to the number of recipe types in the project indicates the number of recipes of SYS RecipeXNum type X currently saved in the VT memory There is one of these TAGs for each type defined in the project SYS _CurrentUser Name of present user SYS CurrentLevel Current level of protection Int j password SYS_ Current Name of current language String Language ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 740 Appendix A System Variables Table 1 Meaning of System Variables Variable Description Type SYS Current ID of current language Int Languagel D Con XYZ being the name of the Boolea timer Becomes TRUE when the n SYS_ TimerXYZ timer XYZ is set off There isa variable of this type for every Timer configured in the system Con XYZ being the name of the Int timer Indicates the current value See Sentiimer of the XYZ There is a variable of XYZ l this type for every Timer configured in the system SYS_LastError Level of gravity of last error 0 2 Int Severity SYS_LastError Software module that generated Int Module last error 1 35 gt SYS_LastError Numerical ID of last error message Int Message SYS_LastError Multilanguage string identifying String Text last error message Int Int SYS ReportPage Report page number pint SYS ReportPages Total number of report pages p
94. allows the operator to access the Recipe list in the terminal see chap 5 Recipes Types page 203 To insert a Recipe List table into a page click on the icon HH or alternatively use the main menu Fields gt Create gt Complex Controls gt Recipe list After clicking draw just the outline of the table and it will ap pear automatically Once the table has been inserted into the page and been se lected a series of properties contained in the Properties Editor can be attributed to it the meanings of these properties are identical to those occurring in TrendView see chap 6 Prop erties of a TrendView page 408 By double clicking on the table you access its editing page which comprises two masks Fields and General Download The default contents of the Fields mask include the Alarm Grid table whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsec ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 440 Chapter 6 Properties Editor tions see chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 Using this mask you can proceed to indicate which buttons should be present with the table and position them within the area To insert or remove a button just click on the list of buttons to the left of the table if an object is already present in the page it will appear highlighted within the list and will be visible in the Table Edit Area To move an ele ment button or table just drag it to the desired positio
95. and bars with the de and bars position fault position Allows to display the work win dow in Schermo Intero Full Screen mode Display gt Full screen 1 cona Non Disponibile Submenu Show Project explorer Library explorer Log viewer Properties editor Events editor Table 15 Functions of the submenu Display gt Show Icon Path Menu Description of function Shows the Explore Project window see chap 3 Anchorable windows page 84 Show gt Explore Shows the Explore Library Library window Show gt Explore lt gt project Show gt Log List Shows the Log List window Show gt Shows the Properties Editor Properties Editor window Show gt Events Shows the Events Editor win Editor dow ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 32 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Submenu Toolbar This submenu lists the twelve groups of icons making up the toolbar Using this menu the user can proceed to reintroduce into the application groups of icons that have been closed and that no longer appear in the POLYMATH screen For further Information about the way the toolbar works please consult the next paragraph Menu Tools Options Utilities Translations Tags Recipes Alarms Downloader Utilities Sr a ar F oe Dictionary Options Sub menu Table 16 Functions of the menu Tools ete a Path Menu Description of function NA Makes it possible to configure Tools gt Opti
96. are a means of creating the setup of the plant or part of it to carry out a given process This result can be obtained by writing appropriate values into a certain number of variables typically set points or regulating parameters and PLC memory cells POLYMATH allows you to define a number of types of recipes that is general data structures whose instances the operator will proceed to furnish in line with his needs there are no limits to the number of types of recipes that the programmer can define using POLYMATH The only limits my depend on the Hardware characteristics of the terminal Warning POLYMATH makes it possible to define types of recipes that is different structures identified by name and by the related variables the recipes are created and managed in runtime and saved into the retentive memory of the panel The types of recipes describe only the structure which all the recipes belonging to that type have For further information regarding the list and the meanings of the events that can be associated to a Recipe type the reader is advised to consult the next chapter see chap 6 Events 203 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 204 Chapter 5 Project Explorer related to Recipes page 292 where there is also a description of the display modes of the recipes using complex controls see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 as well as the meanings of the transfer operations between the VT and the dev
97. automatically inside Control panel RCS ADAPTER CONTROL PANEL w RCS Adapter Control Panel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 513 Compiling Downloading and Runtime During installation of the ESAPOLYMATH Downloader application the drivers necessary for connecting the PCUSB are installed as well The drivers are requested the first time the PCUSBxxxxxxx is connected to the PC XS and are found skimming through the path C PROGRAM FILES ESAELETTRONICA SPA ESAPOLYMATH DOWNLOADER DRIVER RCS_ ADAPTER Once the driver path requested by the application is inserted we connect the USB port used in our project for example USB1 with the COM to which the PCUSB is associated This connection is carried out double clicking the RCS ADAPTER CONTROL PANEL icon previously described The following image will appear Ka ESA RCS Adapter y 1 2 Settings x ADAPTER PROJECT PORT m USB2 b elg Apply Close At this point click APPLY to save the settings If there are problems during the connection temporarily deactivate firewall and the antivirus installed on the PC XS if there is one Clicking the icon near the system clock in the traybar with the right key of the mouse one accesses the program functions Start Up Info Connection Settings start ESA system Stop ESA system Exit Downloader About e Start Up clicking the new option opens a window that allows y
98. be configured using the Fields mask of the Recipes element see chap 5 Fields page 171 Operations for transferring Recipes The following summary gives an overview of all the operations that can be performed on transfers of Recipes using VTs and devices It is important to note that transfer operations see the interaction of 3 elements the physical memory of the VT where the Recipes are saved the VT video buffer contain ing the data of just one Recipe the one being displayed on the ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 444 Chapter 6 Properties Editor panel and the device in whose memory the Recipe data re ally resides import 1t Export Load Video Buffer VT Memory o Sawe Do Fi Buffer Upan Download Device When you decide to manage the transfer of Recipes in syn chronized mode constitutes a special case In this case before transferring the data the terminal asks for the status of the device waiting for an authorization The syn chronization procedure happens by means of the write read of certain exchange areas see chap Appendix C Status area page 761 and see chap Appendix D Command area page 765 A synchronized transfer is defined at the moment the function is attributed or the script instruction see chap 9 Scripts page 553 Let us give a practical example Supposing we are performing a synchronized download and are using a Recipe type in non compatible
99. can be inserted are different and each has a pre defined non editable function assigned to it The General mask can be used to insert a name and an iden Page Up allows the operator to go up the pages of the table Page Down allows the operator to go down the pages of the table Page Left allows the operator to move left within the page Page Right allows the operator to move right within the page Line Up select the line above the current one Line Down select the line below the current one Cursor Left move the table cursor leftwards Cursor Right move the table cursor rightwards User button this button can have a user chosen func tion or a script assigned to it see chap Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 Show Page displays the page assigned to the alarm see chap 5 Properties page 200 dentification HistoricallournalvViewer Camment diting O Override default grid size Width 10 Height 10 tifying comment for the Alarm History table being edited In addition you can overwrite the default dimensions of the ed iting grid of the page see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field The graphic properties fonts and colors of the Active Alarm View grid can be configured using together the Fields and Pri 435 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 436 Chapter
100. can set the dimensions in pixels width and height of the image contained in the project Should the original dimensions of the imported image be varied it will also be necessary to define how POLYMATH will have to effect the change in size calculating the addition or removal of pixels The options available are e Normal e Resample also called Bilinear a faster and less precise algorithm recommended for reducing images e Bicubic a more precise algorithm recommended for enlarging images in addition you can define the type of filter for the images that contain colours not supported by the panel thanks to the dithering technique substitution of pixels with colours not available with the interpolation method you can choose from a list of the more common types of dithering algorithm the one you wish to use e None e FloydStenberg e Stucki e Burkes e Sierra e StevensonArce ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer e Jarvis e Ordered e Clustered Note For more details regarding the special characteristics of each dithering algorithm the reader is advised to consult manuals specializing in digital graphics Finally you have to specify the format in which the image is to be saved within the project Bitmap J peg or Png if the Jpeg format is chosen the level of quality compression desired will also have to be defined by choosing between the levels offered e Exc
101. chap 5 Timers page 274 Momentarily suspends the count of the selected Timers the count of the se SuspendTimer lected Timers need to specify the name of the timer to which the com mand refers see chap 5 Timers page 274 Set the value of the selected Timers the count of the selected Timers need SetTimerValue to specify the name of the timer to which the command refers see chap 5 Timers page 274 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix B Predefined functions 757 Functions relating to printing Table 10 Functions relating to printing Function Description This command brings up the print pref PrinterSetup erences window to choose printer format etc in runtime This function makes it possible to print the contents of the current page see chap 5 Points relating to print for mats XML and Hardcopy page 246 HardCopy need to specify if the print preference window the print mode 1 page hard copy 2 full screen hardcopy and the page orientation horizontal or verti cal should be shown Prints one of the Reports defined in the project need to specify if the print ReportPrint preference window and the name of the Report to be printed should be shown This function apart from executing the print saves the contents in an PDF file need to specify whether to show the print preference window the name of ReportPrintSave the Report to be printed and the n
102. chap 6 User List Table page 436 The Font choice box allows you to decide to assign a font to the user list table by clicking on the v icon a window appears for specifying the font and using this each project language can have a font assigned to it In addition this window can be used to define various properties of the font for the table like dimensions and graphic effects In addition you can specify a background and text colour for the cell selected currently The colour can be selected using RGB values or the colour palette obtainable by clicking on the rectangle of the colour f or on the selection arrow F the classic Windows colour selection window appears and using this even customized colours can be defined Data Archive The Data Archive object comprises all the Polymath func tions able to store data e Time trend e XY trend e Data log ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 221 Project Explorer Trend Buffer In runtime the system supplies the support for the acquisition and accumulation of numerical values and for their graphic presentation in the form of a trend curve The accumulated data can be presented in real time or saved into the permanent memory and recalled to the screen at a later point By double clicking on the Trend Buffers element in Project Explorer the list of Trends held in the project can be accessed This list also offers a Summary of the principal characteristics o
103. choose which labels to assign to the Table headings Each column can have a multilingual label assigned to it To access Multilanguage editing just click on the w icon adjacent to the editable text field active only if more than one language coexists in the project Creating and changing a Recipe type Once the general characteristics of the recipes in the project have been established you can start defining the actual characteristics of each Recipe type A Recipe type can be created directly from the list of Recipe types see chap 5 Recipe list page 204 or using Project Explorer click with right key on Recipes types and then on Add For each Recipe in the project there are two editing masks General Fields Recipes and Events the Events op tion is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode which we shall describe in detail below ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer General Identification Name RecipeType Comment Id 1 Exchange areas O Enable exchange areas Command area T00 Status area a A C H The General mask is used to define the identifying properties of a Recipe Type The Recipe Type ID is an identifying number within the data structure of the project it is a whole number greater than zero The Recipe type name and ID are unique attributes within the project that is other different Recipe types wit
104. click on File gt Validates Current There is also a choice as to whether to let POLYMATH perform a validation in real time signals problems as they are edited or whether validation should be carried out only when requested by the appropriate commands This function can be configured using the main menu by clicking on Tools gt Options The Errors mask contains a report in real time of the errors and warnings relating to the project being validated The ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 5O4 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime errors appear in red while the warnings appear in orange If we double click on the description of the problem POLYMATH will focus the application on the origin of the error that is on the mask Properties Editor work area mask etc where a correction can be made As soon as they are corrected in the appropriate area the errors disappear Compilation Compilation is the operation whereby a project created with POLYMATH is transformed into files ready to be sent to the panel to be then interpreted by the VT s firmware To start off the compilation of a project click on the icon in the Toolbar or use the main menu File gt Compile Any errors or warnings detected in the process of compilation are signalled in the Errors Viewer window see chap 7 Errors Viewer page 499 Errors appear in red while Warnings appear in orange A Warning Itis always advisable to correct errors
105. deriving from the Hardware configuration of the panel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 231 Project Explorer When you double click on the Text list icon in Project Explorer the causes the table of text lists to appear in the work area this list can be used to introduce duplicate and delete the text lists or Simply introduce or edit a related comment Once a Text list has been created it can be double clicked in Project Explorer to access the corresponding editing mask Tarek cee Tie Higbas a ssa m Raed fa ae AED oe om ED The upper part of the mask can be used to change the identifying properties of the list The Name of a list is a unique attribute within any given project that is other different lists with the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH The lower part of the mask can be used to edit the text list itself new texts can be added or existing ones deleted To move a text just select it and click on the Up or Down keys according to the operation to be performed If there is more than one language in a project see chap 5 Languages page 166 you can go on to define the translation for each text in the list as shown in the following figure he machine is now on The key allows to insert symbols into the description ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 232 Chapter5 Project Explorer Image list In POLYM
106. disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Active if the type of control is single bit orientated or bit group oriented It in dicates the bit reference to apply the control to or the group initial refer ence if the control relates to a group Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Active if the control is bit group orient LastBit ed Indicates the last bit of the group to which the control is applied Determines if the object can move or Lock ot Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the field see PasswordLevel chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con Tabl ndex trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Indicates whether the image should I mageAutoSize automatically sized to fit the dimen sions of the Field Indicates the type of horizontal align I mageHAlign ment of the image within the Field which can be Center Left or Right Indicates whether the image should maintain the proportions of the source image I mageKeepAspect Rati
107. display related to the day of the week it is possible not to dis play anything to show an ordinal num TypeOfDayOfWeek ber Sunday being 0 etc or to assign a text list to the number so as to view also in multilanguage the current day see chap 5 Text list page 230 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 365 Properties Editor Table 32 Properties of the DateTime field Properties Description Active if the TypeOfDayOfWeek is set as a text list This property indicates the text list assigned to the day of the week a text list of 7 values must be created see chap 5 Text list page 230 DayOfWeek Indicates the position of the text relat ed to the Day if desired within the field this may be centered leftward or rightward DayOfWeekPosition Active if the DateRepresentation dis play is to be the full name of the month This property indicates the text list assigned to the month a text list of 12 values must be created see chap 5 Text list page 230 Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement Sn a Tag to the Direct move se reenen e reno DateTime field events Table 33 DateTime field events Event Description OnAborti nput A when data input operation is Activated when data input using the wnbeginiapue keyboard starts ESAPOLYMATH User Manual r
108. e Horizontal Size Decrease decreases the horizontal scale factor e Zoom Increases the total graphic display e Reduction Decreases the total graphic display e Reset zoom restores the original scale factors no ZOOM e User Button Button to which the user can assign a function script e Show Pen Scale determines the Scale pen to be Shown by means of the pull down menu Also present three Bistable Buttons a Time Date field and two Numerical Fields which can be edited as described in this chapter see chap 6 Bistable button page 403 see chap 6 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 423 Properties Editor DateTime field page 361 e see chap 6 Numerical Field page 342 Each one of them has a particular function e Cursor Enabled allows the graphic cursor to be di splayed or not e Break represents if the graphic update is enabled or not it does not disable e sample acquisition e Pen Enabled Displays or hides the selected pen e Time Date Field Displays the sample instant e Numerical Field 1 X value e Numerical Field 2 Y value As already described in this chapter a further customised la bel can be inserted on the complex field see chap 6 Com plex label page 319 or go and insert a dynamic field which Shows the Trend value on the pen see chap 6 Trend Pen page 319 dentificatian Trendviewer Comment diting Ol Ove
109. e g BorderColor Area Color etc the variable must assume admissible RGB Long values as indicated in the following table Table 1 Color XC Hexadecimal value Red 255 0 0 00 00 00 FF Careen 0 255 0 00 00 FF 00 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 288 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 1 Color XC Hexadecimal value Blue 0 0 255 00 FF 00 00 Events Editor The Events Editor like the Properties Editor is only visible in EXTENDED mode see chap 4 Choice of interface page 89 The Events Editor is composed of a list of events that can be assigned to the element in question vents Editor Start OnPageclose Properties Editor M Ewents Editor Task Help If the Events Editor does not appear on the screen because it has already been closed it can be recalled to the screen by clicking on the icon 4 on the toolbar or using the Main menu by clicking on Display gt Show gt Events Editor Like all anchor able windows the Events Editor too can be moved reduced to an icon or closed see chap 3 Moving Anchorable windows page 85 Over the next paragraphs we will show in relation to each ob ject the events to which functions and scripts can be as Signed For further details relating to the functions and scripts the reader is advised to consult the appropriate sections of this manual see chap Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9
110. editing for every aspect of the programming phase beginning from Hardware and Soft ware configuration to navigation procedures access and man agement of alarms and recipes in the project In this Tutorial project we do not intend to explain how Scripts are composed or how to use the Library as these topics are already fully dealt with elsewhere in this manual see chap 9 Scripts page 553 and see chap 7 POLYMATH Libraries page 479 The first operation that must be performed with POLYMATH is the creation of a new project defining its operating proce dures The quickest and most natural way to do this Is to cre ate a project using a Wizard To do this go to the main menu and select File gt New In the work area there will be a series of windows for determining general preferences and those re lating to the Hardware aspect of the project Create New Project Panel Choose the panel to use 3 fig Panels CE VTS 75CE VTS8SCE fig IT fig T104 fig 17105 f IT105K fig 17107 fi 17110 fig 17112 i T115 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 652 Chapter 10 Tutorial First of all we are asked to identify the model of ESA terminal that we are using and that we intend to use for our project In our case we will select VT595CE from among the CE panels in the list and then click on Continue Create New Project Device Choose the device to use A mode D SCHLEICHER
111. fig SIEMENS fig SIEMENS 505 PLC fig SPRECHER SCHUH S TELEMECANIQUE M Reglage TSx17 20 M Reglage TS 47 TSX Premium Modbus TCP IP port Twido Modbus port He E unitelway TSx17 i fig TOSHIBA fig VIGOR fi VIPA fig THERMOREGULATOR fig WEB SERVER Finish In the next page we select the device the ESA panel should interface with in our example we will use a Telemecanique PLC Using the list of devices in the form of a tree diagram we search the category of PLC to find the makers of our cho sen device We select the model we are using one which uses a compatible protocol in our case Unitelway TSX07 37 47 57 Premium and then click on Continue to proceed with the configuration Create New Project Propet pps Chasse the type of project thak you wank te ereate o W Semple Propet Haaah ol Hahask ol dened janes Cho e 4 Aare aod optionally daterption for the prejact Aare Tutorial Geteripson This project i an exemple showing the Boererful features avaiable throught the POLTMATH aftu ara ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Phase 2 Software configuration Chapter 10 Tutorial The last operation is to give a name to our project and a de scription allowing us to identify it The names and the descrip tions given in this phase have no functional value in the project but serve only to make identifying it easier At this point we click on Continue and then End to conclude
112. fill using the RGB code or the color pal ette The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the direction of the Poly gon infill The infill can happen From Low to High From High to Low From Right to Left or From Left to Right The value can be assigned to a whole vari able Indicates the percentage of the infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement si aie a Tag to the Direct move ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 313 Properties Editor Table 20 Properties Description Irregular line A Irregular line can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon MY or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Irregular line After clicking on the icon click on the page at the points that you want the vertices of the figure to appear in practice the beginning and the end of the various line sections POLYMATH will show the preview of the line as soon as the mouse is moved Every click made will produce a new line sections The introduction of the Irregular line is con firmed by just double clicking it thereby ending its edit Once an Irregular line has been introduced its structure that Is its vertices can be edited after selecting the Line and then moving one of its lines those adjacent to this vertex are au
113. for organization reasons it is possible to split all the components of a project in different folders You can Create new folders Rename the folders Cut Copy Paste the objects in the folder ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 124 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Delete the objects and the folders Move the objects among the folders e Hide component By selecting a field of the explore project tree and then right clicking with the mouse choosing the hide option the field will be disabled Project Explorer 2a0 a8 TEA Progetto IT105T SP1 ETH1 Pages Fal Progetto L HWConfiguration H E ITLOST SP1 ETH1 Ce SW Configuration amp La Edit Add New z P Add New and Edit Pc Rename BB rr Duplicate a Delete Re Create Folder g Us D Hide contents be S Manage component visibility f sl EE Gut Cirit nl Li Copy Ctrl C h In Paste Ctrlev a Ac Paste as Child Import Export Configuration columns e Hide content By selecting a field of the explore project tree and then right clicking with the mouse choosing the hide content option the field content will be disabled ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 125 Project Explorer Project Explorer a Q2a0 a8 Progetto ITLOST SP1 ETH1 Pages ra Progetto L HWConfiguration H IT105T SP1 ETH1
114. foreseen Returns a string of the page name corresponding to the input parameter needs the identifying number of the page whose name is required to be passed GetPage Name Returns the identifying PageName number of the page Str GetPage corresponding to the input Number parameter needs the name of the page whose ID is required to be passed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 583 Scripts Table 15 ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Description OUT IN be checked Returns a Boolean value 0 Bool PagelD if False 1 if True Int indicating whether the I sPageNum page relating to the input Open parameter is open or not needs the passage of the ID number of the page that is to be checked ActivePage Activates a a window Show Ganaa the page where Sequence Sequence the name of the page and Name Str PageBy the name of the sequence PageName Name are specified Returns a Boolean value 0 Bool PageName if False 1 if True Str indicating whether the IsPageName page relating to the input Open parameter is open or not needs the passage of the name of the page that is to Show Displays the page where Sequencel Sequence the Id of the page and the d I nt PageBy name of the sequence are Number specified Show Displays the previous page Previous inside the current Sequence sequence Page ShowNext Displays the following Sequence page inside the current Page sequence Get Get
115. gt 77 And t17 Then ESA ESAPAGE Page ESACHTHI oJ i il ESAMI ESAFAGE Page ESACHTHL Lacel vorderio lore H i3 ESAMI ESAFAGE T r aj ESACHTEL 7LA El AreaColor kbu 1 ESAHMT ESAPAGE Page ESACHTAI Lanel TeveColoar hGa 14 ESAHMT ASAPAGE Page ESACHTAI Lanhel Clipxie is 15 ESAHHI ESAPAGE Page ESACHTAL Label Texthlink 2 L ESAHHI EZAPAGE Page ESACHTRL Label clipYi 467 17 ESA ESAPAGE Page ESACHTHL Lacel 0oas In POLYMATH once a script has been inserted using Project Explorer see chap 5 Scripts page 228 the editor page for writing the code can be used The editor runs a real time check of the syntax of the code immediately posting an on screen warning should it detect any imprecision in the formulation of the instructions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 554 Chapter 9 Scripts Errors Viewer E Errors 1 D Warnings 1 VBScript error 1006 line 0 Expected as ipt error 1006 line 0 Expected t ESAHMI ESAPAGMGR CloseActivePoplpto As indicated in the figure above a red circle is shown to indicate the existence of an error When the mouse cursor is placed on it a complete description of the problem is put on screen The errors and their related descriptions are also listed the moment the project is validated and compiled ESAHHMI i ESABeep w ESACOM 3 ES4D47 4LOGMGR ESSETH
116. if the grid has reference li nes or if it must be transparent Determines the Visible Grid Line colour by means of the RGB code or the co lour palette The value can be associa ted to a whole variable GridLineColor It determines the colour of the cells not used in the Grid by means of the GridUnusedCellColor RGB code or the colour palette The value can be associated to a whole va riable Determines the text to display in the OffLabel grid in the intersection point of the graphical lines Determines the selection between WeekTask TaskSettimanali present for program ming Allows to use the w button to access the configuration window of the co lours relative to the graphic tempera ture intervals GrdiColors Determines whether the object can Lock move or not Determines the index that the object Tabli ndex l l will occupy in the table order Determines the presence or not of a packgrimagcEnarice background image in the grid Background magel D Determines the background image used in the program HorScaleVisible Determines the presence or not of the horizontal scale in the graphics HorScaleLabelFont Determines the Font to use for the la bels of the horizontal scale ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 451 Properties Editor Table 62 Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Properties Description It determines the colour of the labels in HorScaleLabelColor the horizontal scale by means of
117. in network project D My Documents MLANZA NetProject PC Client vtprj D My Documents MLANZA NetProject Server_IT107 vtprj Delete We will now examine the individual projects which make up the network project in particular the part of the project refer ring to the shared variables ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 ServerlT107 Chapter4 107 Managing the project From Explore project double click the voice Tag from the Tags option Project Explorer 3020088 Progetto IT107w SP1 SP2 ETH1 Tags v ra Progetto L HWConfiguration ITLO7W SP1 SP2 ETH1 SW Configuration Pz Tags 7 E3 D Languages and fonts 5 Pages Inizio Le PopUp pages DB Frames Alarms Recipe types 3 Users and passwords S Data archive Scripts 3 Global script el Lists an Images Ei Advanced tt Ge te I Tag Progetto IT1O7 W SP1 SP2 ETH1 Tags Tag From the editing area the features of the tag to be shared can be observed on the General mask In our example the tag will be Internal pre art O there a salys a the papita mamers eee The tag i eens fe Aloe Se Rags shije to be hirri trough Ban nir embiat Select the Share Tag option and assign a name in this ca se Server_Tag so that it can be seen by the other partici pants ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 4 Managing the project PC Client From Explore proje
118. in table for mat the trend of a variable in time as well as to export the value history through Excel or CSV file Polymath al lows the configuration of two types of different Trends Classic Buffer Trend through which one can monitor the trend of one variable in time and Trend XY which allows to view a graph in which the value trend of two different variables is related see chap 5 Data Archive page 220 e Multi structure recipes It is possible to configure reci pe structures each containing a different number of va riables In this way it is possible to prepare different sets of data for different production methods see chap 5 Recipes Types page 203 e Rich library of objects Polymath has available a rich li brary of objects highly treated both in appearance of the graphics and in their function The objects are sub divided by category and can easily be positioned in the pages with a simple drag amp drop The library can also be customised according to requirements by adding objects created directly by the user and can be shared ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 3 Introduction in the network to be automatically used within different Polymath installations see chap 7 POLYMATH Libra ries page 479 e see chap 7 Libraries management page 490 VBscript with Intellisense Polymath offers a further le vel of customization of the applications thanks to VB Script VBScript
119. include in the connection When the pointer nears an available port a small rectangle will appear next to the pointer contain ing a connection thread IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH RTU Master fast pe pg a SP2 b z 4 ETH1 SP1 e a The connection will appear as a broken blue line between the two reference ports A Important note In Simple Project mode it is not possible to create connections between two panels or between two devices were such a need to arise it would be necessary to create a network project Operations on VTs and devices To change a VT or a device in the Hardware Configuration win dow you need first to select it click on and then on the el ement itself Once the object has been selected just click with the right hand key on the same to be able to access the following edit ing menu ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Opening a project Chapter 4 Managing the project Edit Duplicate Delete zoom In zoom uk 4dd Mew Object Convert device Show Memory Using the Edit option you can make changes to the properties of the object Duplicate creates within the Configuration Win dow an Identical copy of the object that has been selected all the properties of the first are copied into the second The Cancel option eliminates the element from the project while the Cut Copy and Paste keys have their usual functions typical when operating in Windows B
120. into groups of icons each of which can be managed individually To move or delete a group of objects just drag up from the bar towards any area of the application To start the drag click on the left edge of the group Once you have clicked the mouse pointer will change into the dragging cursor typical of Windows It is now possible to insert the group wherever you want Release the mouse key to apply the move The group can be left in any position on the screen or closed by clicking on the related Ej Closed groups can be reinserted into the toolbar by clicking on the corresponding name in the main menu Display gt toolbar The changes to the layout of the toolbar are saved for the next time POLYMATH is used Anchorable Besides the menu and the icons the other fundamental windows component of POLYMATH is the Anchorable window Anchorable windows are e Project explorer see chap 5 Project Explorer page 121 e Properties editor see chap 6 Properties Editor page 281 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 a amp Chapter3 85 Layout of menus e Events editor see chap 6 Properties Editor page 281 e Library explorer see chap 7 POLYMATH Libraries page 479 e Errors Viewer see chap 7 Errors Viewer page 499 e Compiler Output see chap 7 Compiler Output page 500 The Anchorable windows are described in detail in the following chapters together with
121. is possible to edit any object proper ties In this mode in the right part of the development environment the graphical libraries are in the foreground To use a library object simply select one of the present objects and drag it on the page to then edit it and configure it at will Using this type of interface is recommended to those users who are familiar with the use of Popup pages for the configu ration or the editing of objects Cor guranonette Page GH Ceara Paanadibaln Ia Eventi Page Properties ees When you have inserted an object you can double click it to edit its properties straight away ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Extended Interface Chapter4 91 Managing the project The main feature of the EXTENDED interface is its net divi sion between the graphical characteristics of the object that is being edited and the object events In this mode on the right part of the development environ ment the Property Editor object is in the foreground it is pos sible to select the Events assigned to the object being edited at that time in the bottom section To use a library object simply select one of the present objects and drag it on the page to then edit it and configure it at will Using this type of interface is recommended for all those users who prefer a structured interface 164 175 193 taarea v Lampeggio Nessun Lampeggio ef Premut 255 255 255 BordoRilasciat goo hiktaBord 7
122. is required that acts as a license without which runtime will not execute In order to create a project for the PC or any other platform terminal PC based no hardware drive is required The advanced polymath version with license is Sufficient The same project can be used on a limited number of PCs as long as each PC has a hardware drive ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 521 Compiling Downloading and Runtime A Attention if the drive is withdrawn from the USB gate in which it is inserted a message will appear on the terminal The USB must be connected while Esaruntime is running retry key check or close runtime At this point re insert the drive in the gate and click on the retry runtime to execute or cancel to close Download the In POLYMATH it is possible to transfer the whole image of the IT OPERATING Windows Operating System CE on the terminal This SYSTEM image operation is reachable from the main menu clicking on Instruments gt Utility downloader gt Update Boot Windows CE for IT It is necessary to set the connection mode as in the case of project download see chap 8 Transferring data page 516 The loaded images on the panel will overwrite the existing one for which backup should be carried out before performing this operation Set up an To update the Boot between the PC and the IT panel a Ethernet crossed ethernet cable is necessary only possible method connection successively it
123. it possible to control the focus movement when using cursor keys within a page It also controls the or Tabi ndex der in which data is introduced in sev eral fields when the automatic setting the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 TextMaxLen Determines the maximum value in re lation to the length of the text string TextMultiLine Determines whether the Label text can start a new line Determines whether the translation of Text iranslateDisable the Button text must be disabled Active if TextListType is value orient ed it is necessary to indicate the val ues on which to apply the list strings By clicking on you can access the mask for associating values and text list elements TextListValue Indicates which type of check to per form on the control variable can be value oriented single bit or bit group oriented TextListType Active only if Caption is a Text List TextListi d type Determines the reference text list See chap 5 Text list page 230 Active only if Caption is a Text List type Determines the variable to choose from the text list see chap 5 Text list page 230 TextTagld Active if TextListType is single bit or bit group oriented Indicates the ref TextListFirstBit erence bit to be checked or the group initial reference if the control relates to a group ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 378 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 37
124. language using Cyrillic Greek German American and Asian characters Keyboards can be created and saved in the library to be used in further projects You can associate a customized default keyboard to any language List Double click on keyboard to access the list of keyboards entered by default Bk_Numeric_4_5_7_10 Bk_Ext_Low_ _10_Hor H Bk_Ext_Up_7_10_Hor aED aED GEIS GEE ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 254 Chapter 5 Project Explorer The List menu allows you by pressing the respective but tons to e Add one or more keyboards e Edit one or more keyboards in the list e Cancel one or more keyboards in the list e Duplicate one or more keyboards in the list Fields Double click one of the keyboards in Explore Resources S E Advanced see ty Pipelines HS Reports SZ Remote notification E88 Keyboards Bk_Ascii_Low_4 5 7_10 The Fields window opens In the Fields window you can double click each button of the keyboard and customize its settings and properties ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Mouse polvter 25 56 Kepboardkep_i4 C beck Keyboard td KeyCode Fananie Pressedhode Toggi General General Identification Name Bk_Numeric_4_5_7_10 Comment Width Height O Override default grid size Width 10 m Height 10 The General window allows you to do the followi
125. mode Forces printer Form Feed Resets numbering of print pages Global alarm acknowledge ment Requests disabling if flag is at zero or enabling if flag is at 1 of the touch screen if disabled il terminal does not respond to the touch Requests transfer of recipe from VT to PLC Parameter 1 contains the ID of the rec ipe to be transferred while parameter 2 has the identi fier of the recipe type Sending recipe from PLC to VT with overwriting Param eter 1 contains the ID of the recipe to be transferred while parameter 2 has the identifier of the recipe type Start the automatic execu tion of a pipeline Stopt the automatic execu tion of a pipeline Increase display light one discrete step Parameters PARAMETER_ 1 flag PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 text mode recipe_id type_id recipe_id type_id pipeline id PARAMETER_2 PARAMETER_3 PARAMETER_ 1 pipeline id PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_3 PARAMETER_1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_3 769 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 770 Appendix D Command area Tabella 2 Command codes and parameters Description Decrease d
126. mode idle timeout sec 10 Help pages font SystemTahoma Tahoma w This value is unique for all the dialog boxes and can not be chan ged at Runtime level The events which use the new Dialog Box are the User login and all the related to Recipes functions see chap 6 Events re lated to Recipes page 292 Configuring the Boot Lisdlate Datt Tore Spar Tig This mask allows the user to set the page to be displayed when the project is opened By clicking on the gg icon a new page can be added while theld icon opens the editor of the page selected In addition the Runtime refresh frequency of the DateAndTime system Tag see Appendix A System Variables page 737 can be defined a refresh of once a second or once a minute can be set ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 132 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Exchange areas ESA panels communicate with the field devices to which they are connected to make this information exchange possible the panel and the device in question share memory areas from which data can be taken and into which it can be written In reality an exchange area is a tag area of one or more words located in the field device The two main categories of exchange areas are the status areas and the command areas The former are for the panel to write information regarding the working of the device connected while the second are read by the VT which then answers by running particular
127. next will open a window from which by clicking on Browse it is possible to select the name and path where the file is to be saved Document Template Creation Step 3 a C Document File File Name PDF RTF Page Design Page Format 44 v Orientation Portrait Landscape Margins mm Top 20 a Left 20 Down 20 a Right 20 Header j0 Footer 0 O Document Index O Header O Footer Position Header Footer Alignment Left Center Right O Page Numbers File Options V Open file after creation M Include Graphics By clicking on Create the project is saved with the desired file path ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 44 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Convert panel The Convert panel option allows converting the panel used In the project into an HMI with different characteristics after choosing the product family Building the Building group contains panels used for home or Industrial the industrial group contains panels used for applications that are typically industrial systems open the folders to select the panel type Panel conversion wizard Destination panel Convert to fig Products fi Building fig PC fi YT fig Industrial fig IT ig PC Rotation Cancel Once the panel type and the rotation is chosen vertical or ho rizontal clicking on Next Panel conversion wizard Desti
128. no recipes for the type indicated R_Type the function returns an empty string Thus cancellation should only occur if the string returned is different from We therefore use a Do While cycle to make operation Do While a lt gt ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC DeleteRecipe R_Type a 0 a ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC GetFirstRecipeName R_ Type Loop ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 649 Scripts As we can see the While cycle remains open until such time as the value of a is different from the empty string that is until recipes have been saved Cancellation occurs in accordance with the type indicated at the beginning of the Script and the current value of a recipe name In addition the value O is passed to avoid confirmation being asked of the operator Within the cycle we also update the value of a by getting the new first recipe we again use GetFirst rather than GetNext because the delete operation has changed the order of the recipes Exiting from the While cycle all the recipes have been eliminated so all we can do is get the time taken by the Script t Timer t return t Using this instruction the value of t is updated by removing from the current value of Timer the value obtained at the beginning of the Script saved in t Thus at the end of this instruction t will contain the number of seconds elapsed between the beginning and the end of the cancel operation Below is the compl
129. of the operating system for IT panels only Updates the boot Windows CE for IT and XT panels The Toolbar Chapter3 83 Layout of menus Table 22 Utility downloader functions menu Icon Menu path Function description Utility downloader Updates the boot of the VTxxx NA gt Boot loader terminal without the help of directly for WTxxx help messages Utility downloader Updates the boot of the VTxxx gt Boot loader for terminal with the help of help WTxxx in assisted messages mode Register Table 23 menu functions Icon Menu path Function description gt Reaister Allows the user to register the j g installed polymath product program to be seen Allows the information NA gt Information regarding the version of the NAt Allows to access the POLY MATH guide 1 Icon Not Available The Toolbar consists of buttons allowing the user to access all POLYMATH operations 0060ddG00 S28008 vadu 00 6 BAS0ETGRIVG 3 u aaoo 6 oaoa OO 3200 jdd UUs BUSRBE AJ i Bilic When the mouse is placed on one of the icons its meaning is displayed see below ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 84 Chapter 3 Layout of menus pP Note The Toolbar offers a shortcut to the same Functions that you can access from the main menu To find out what a given icon means consult the Table of Functions in the main menu see chap 3 Main menu page 16 Editing the Toolbar The Toolbar is organized
130. of the complex fields for displaying and managing alarms see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 List THEY Memory resources Behavior Fields Priorities Alarms groups User Signals Events g Alarm il Tag larmPriority Error None Descrizione Allarme el X Delete Duplicate The Alarm list allows you to manage the table of alarms and their related properties a summary of all the standard properties in editable fields is supplied This mask Is useful for giving an overall vision of all the alarms present in the project New alarms can be added or cancelled and those existing edited by means of the relevant buttons at the bottom of the mask By pressing Tools a sub menu will open with the following functions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 184 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Fa T Tools Import Export Customize Active Log File Customize Historic Log File Configuration columns e import e export e customize Active Log Files e customize History Log Files e column configuration Import Export It is possible to export or import a series of Alarms create pre viously by clicking on the Import or Export options see chap 5 Alarms Import Export page 193 Customize Active Log Files By pressing Customize Active Log Files a guided window will open to create the customised file Customize Log File loj x Columns Column Enabled BBEL Priority Group
131. on Continue to proceed Create New Project o xj Project Type Choose the type of project that you want to create te c oo be Simple Project Network of devices Network of panels Multi devices Multi panels Choose a name and optionally a description for the project Name Project Description Cancel Now state which ESA panel is to be used once this choice has been made click on Continue to proceed ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 95 Managing the project Create New Project o x Panel Choose the product to use fig Products a fii Building E E Industrial B IT H T104 fi T105 fm 1T105K lt B T107 M IT107T COMO SP2 ETH1 M IT107T SP1 CAN ETH1 M IT107T SP1 DP ETH1 M IT107T SP1 PN ETH1 M IT107T SP1 SP2 ETH1 M IT107W SP1 CAN ETH1 M IT107W SP1 DP ETH1 mea Ti07W SP1 ETH1 M IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH1 m TTi 1N E m Rotation o 90 Cancel If a panel in the IT family is selected excluding panels in the I TLO5K family it is possible to have both the horizontal O or vertical 90 display options The device to be connected must be selected different cate gories are supplied for the selection ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 96 Chapter 4 Managing the project For each category the devic
132. on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value fields gt DateTime field After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the Field The DateTime field serves to indicate to the operator the cur rent date and or time while a project is running A variable can be associated to the field like Long or UnsignedLong e g to use the data set in the device or the system variable SYS_DateAndTime that shows the time of the operating sys tem of the panel see chap Appendix A System Variables page 737 To express the day or the month in letters rather than in numbers the corresponding translations must be giv en in appropriate text lists see chap 5 Text list page 230 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a DateTime field In POLYMATH the value of the DateTime field is represented by the DateTime of the op erating system of the machine the programmer is using Properties of the DateTime field Table 32 Properties of the DateTime field Properties Description Identifying name of the Date Time field Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH man Wt avesion pem Hehtcivenion ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 362 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 32 Properties of the DateTime field Proper
133. on all the elements To group two or more elements select them simultaneously us ing the mouse to construct an area to enclose them and click on the icon La of the toolbar or Layout gt Group using the Main menu For example let us insert into a page a Regular 5 sided poly He gon and then a touch button Let us suppose that after individually defining the properties of the single objects as shown in the previous sections we want the button to be over the Polygon and want this structure to be a single structure so that we can move resize or dupli cate them together as a group First of all we will move the button selecting it and dragging it to the desired position Now we have to select the two objects collectively We just click on the icon and draw a Selection area inside the page big enough to contain the outlines of both objects as shown in the following figure 465 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 466 Chapter 6 Properties Editor at this point release the button and both elements will be se lected and the Group key on the toolbar will become activated DA Layout gt Group By clicking on this icon the elements be come grouped and the Polygon button ensemble becomes us able as a single element The type of object created is Group Field and when selected the Properties Editor can be used to attribute the properties relating to dimensions and position besides the name and identifying com
134. on the update server Please check the settings below If they are correct click Next to continue otherwise click Settings to adjust them Direct connection Settings By clicking on Next a more recent version of Polymath will be searched online on the ESA site compared to the one in stalled on the PC if a more updated version is not found the following image is displayed aiclx Current version is 2 20 0313 There aren t new updates available If there is an updated version the following mask will appear from here by clicking Next a new Polymath version is in Stalled ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 41 Layout of menus aici Current version is 1 70 1105 There is a new updates 1 70 1106 132185 KB Click next to perform the update Finish Project documentation The Project documentation option allows creating a simple or complete print report choosing from pdf rtf and ht ml formats In the first screen it is possible to choose the Simple or Complete option the first only contains default options Document Template Creation Step 1 E Template Contents IT107W SP1 ETH1 SWConfiguration Simple Tags Pages Complete ScreenShot Pages PopUpPages C Images _ TextLists _ ImageLists Alarms RecipeTypes Frames C Reports C Pipelines Scripts C GlobalScripts TrendBuf
135. only ina part of it Using two keys it is alSo possible to save load filter conditions In XML format Then click Search ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 HO Chapter 3 Layout of menus Cross reference Name mask Search in All Project Only in Save filtering conditions Load filtering conditions The following mask will display all objects whose name begins with the letter F Cross reference lements List Searched element Element name Element type Fonts Fonts Project ITLO7W SP1 ETH1 Sw Friday SwitchButton Project ITLO7W SP1 ETH1 Pac Frames Frames Project ITLO7W SP1 ETH1 Fra Find element In the same page by using the keys it is also possible to e Export all Export all objects in the list to an Excel or CSV file e Export selected Export selected objects in the list to an Excel or CSV file ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 5 Layout of menus e Modify After selecting an element from the list it al lows modifying it within the project e Tree view Allows modifying how elements are viewed from table to tree type e Find element Allows a more detailed search among ele ments that have already been searched e New search Allows carrying out a new search from the beginning Find Replace With the Find Replace option it is possible to find within the project certain elements for example a Font type and repla
136. operations in relation the value read in practice the device uses the command areas to send automatic commands to the VT From this mask it is possible to proceed to add using the Add key delete using the Delete key or duplicate using the Duplicate key both exchange areas and command areas Once an exchange area is added an area type variable must be assigned to it see chap 5 Value page 140 for reference In the case of command areas it is also necessary to introduce a response tag variable to which the data relating to the outcome of the operation indicated is written This variable can also be newly created and edited by clicking on the adjacent icon this can then naturally also be used inside the project or accessed using Scripts To be able to see in detail the list of activities that can be run using the status area and the command area the reader is advised to consult the appropriate appendices see Appendix C Status area page 761 e see Appendix D Command area page 765 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Software Configuration Chapter 5 Project Explorer Components Components This page offers only a summary of the components that can be assigned to ESA panels by clicking on each of these the appropriate main editing page can be accessed The first option you find on the menu of the panel in Project Explorer is the one relating to the configuration Software
137. operator with access to the pages for changing User Passwords using the User List check can display and change the access credentials name password only of users with the same or higher numbered levels than his her own e g an operator on level 5 can see and change the password of levels 5 6 7 8 9 and 10 also the operator will be asked for the password of the necessary authentication level to access that field User ID 123456789 Password KKKKKKKKX User Level 5 Cancella OK yp amp Note During project simulation for example during Runtime the user may use in data editing and entry phase a customizable keyboard for each language in the project see Languages and Fonts page 166 The password configuration of the access levels is made up of three edit masks General Users and Fields grid By means of the Mask Password edit it is possible to determine if the password is to be displayed or hidden with asterixes during configuration ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer General General General parameters O Logout automatically when panel is idle Idle timeout sec 60 O After a user s logout show always a particular page Page to show Pages o M Login using password only Log users activity 5 O Enable logging of users login logout Log to file User log The file will be saved in the FLASH of the terminal If the logs are too frequent
138. or delete existing ones In addition certain attributes like Page number Description and Comment can be edited simply by clicking inside the appropriate fields of the table and new texts can be introduced Once a page has been created using Project Explorer or the list double clicking on it in the tree diagram makes it ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Layer Chapter 5 Project Explorer possible to edit it in the work area The page editor is organized in the following sections Fields General Help page and F keys The subsections below offer a description for each mask The properties and the events that can be assigned to the Page will be dealt with in the next chapter we advise readers to consult the relevant section for a list of them and their meanings see chap 6 Page properties page 297 and see chap 6 Events related to Pages page 298 In Polymath there is a layer subdivision of the single pages di splayed At the time of the compilation all the objects are pla ced on layer O for each page it will be possible to have a maximum number of 13 layers numbered from O0 to 12 When a new project is created layer 0 is the one present by default it will always be available and cannot be deleted To use the Layer function simply click on the icon in the main bar ESAPOLYMATH Progetto File Edit Script Fields Layout Image View Tools OoGGIVIe8oe0 6 SA0OUB B9008eE FEEL LONCIAN EJ ago o Pi
139. page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Line and drawing its dimensions directly in the page To define the characteristics of the Line they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 309 Properties Editor Properties of the Line Table 19 Properties of the Line Properties Description Identifying name of the Line Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH XP Horizontal coordinate of starting point Horizontal coordinate of destination point Vertical coordinate of starting point Vertical coordinate of destination point Determines the 3D effect to be applied to the image Flat Relief Recessed Tube in Relief or Recessed Tube Can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the infill which can be selected using the RGB code or LineColor color palette The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the thickness of the line The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds LineSize ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 310 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 19 Properties of the Line Properties Description Determines whether the object is ini tial visible it is also possible to assign a Bool
140. path Function description Alarms gt Export Exports Alarms Alarms gt Import Imports Alarms 1 Icon Not Available ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 82 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Downloader Utility Sub menu ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 Icon 2 Online tools Backup Restore Backup Restore Yay Backup Restore YTxxxw with Modern Upload O75 image for IT panels Bootloader for IT and T Bootloader For YTxxxw in DIRECT mode Bootloader for YTxxxw in ASSISTED mode Table 22 Utility downloader functions menu Menu path Utility downloader gt Online Tools Utility downloader gt Backup Restore Utility downloader gt Backup Restore VTXxXxx Utility downloader gt Backup Restore VTxxxW with modem Sends O S image for the Windows IT panels Utility downloader gt Update Boot Windows CE for IT and XT Function description After having connected to the ESA panel it allows to carry out the following operations To transfer the project to explore the panel to compare the me mory used with that which can be used to compare the files which make up the project to be transferred with those already present on the ESA terminal to fill in the project Perform backup or restore the project for CE IT products Perform backup or restore the project for VTxxx products Perform backup or restore the project for VTxxx products by means of the modem Updates the image
141. praries Visible Name f Switches v Lights v Pipes and Valves v Tanks v Motors v Machinery v Image lists v Images v Flags and Icons v Various v Keyboards v User Selecting the Visible column boxes makes it possible to de termine which libraries need to be visible in Libraries Explo rer ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 491 Other anchorable windows K Note To choose a library click twice on check box the first time is to select a library and the second time is to make the selection ef fective Libraries management window contains the following keys e Delete e Export e Up e Down e Update source e Update local e Tools Delete If you want to delete a library click on the corresponding check box to select it then click on the Delete key Librarios manapement image Wier Dynamic objects Filled aly gee My Library Syren keyboards My Lohrary_ I To confirm click on Yes x Do you want to delete My Library ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 492 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows Export By clicking on Export it will be possible by choosing the de Stination path to export the selected libraries for example in a folder shared on the network Libram Usar Local Lacal fl utters Sythe Sen Sa
142. programmer s PC images in all the more common graphic formats can be introduced By double clicking on the Images icon in Project Explorer the list of images uploaded into the project can be accessed Using this list you can see a preview of the figures add them duplicate and delete them ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 233 Project Explorer In addition this window makes information available regarding the dimensions in pixels of the image its format and quality it is also possible to edit the Comment relating to each figure Picture size BION ec ro 4 67 10 SUE 4_s_f_ i Best Quality DE Sao Bk_Numeric_Bg_4_5_7_10 240x220 Jpeg Best Quality Bk Ext Up Fg 7 10 Hor 600x407 Jpeg Best Quality Bk_Ext_Up_Bg_7_10_Hor 600x407 Jpeg Best Quality Bk_Ext_Low_Fg_ 7_10_Hor 600x407 Jpeg Best Quality Bk_Ext_Low_Bg_ 7_10_Hor 600x407 Jpeg Best Quality Bk_Ascii_Up_Fg_4_5_7_10 BER 240x220 Jpeg Best Quality Bk_Ascii_Up_Bg_4 5 7_10 EE 240x220 Jpeg Best Quality Bk_Ascii_Low_Fg_4_5_7_10 SEN 240x220 Jpeg Best Quality H Bk_ scii_Low_Bg_4_5_7_10 240x220 Jpeg Best Quality BE O E Edit Duplicate When a new project is created POLYMATH introduces some images intended for specific uses as a default display of alarms Trend Pen etc These can also be used inside for other purposes For the description of how to introduce and change images within a page you are advised to read the following chapter
143. rasaddzaro our or MINVEOSadd ters Minut pore i Secondoeaddrersa Second 6re g deeb ination strir 1a d ste Hard Diskiiric 17 xport IA ESAIMI ESAFECIPEARC RecipeEsport dest Dosaggi al ESANMI ESATAG COREE S tTagva lue 0 i End If Example 5 Canceling all the recipes in the VT Putting together the methods described in this section you can construct customized functions according to your own project needs In this example we shall see how to create a function of just a few rows that will cancel all the recipes saved in the VT This is useful for avoiding cancelling each individual recipe manually and substituting it with a cumulative cancellation We also introduce a few rows of code allowing us to time the execution of the entire script giving us an identifying value of the time taken for it Let uS now analyze the code t Timer R_Type Dieci_ Var In the first line we ask for the instant the Script starts the Timer function returns the number of seconds elapsed since 12 00 AM and we save this in variable t In the second line we define the recipe type whose instances we want to cancel completely alternatively we could pass this string value as a parameter for the function as seen in example 4 for the addzero function Next we go and get the name of the first recipe and save it in a variable a a ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC GetFirstRecipeName R_ Type if there are
144. se lect the keyboard to use for editing Indicates the value representation for mat which will be either Decimal with or without a Sign Hexadecimal Bina ry Floating or Fixed Point Reference variable for the value to be displayed This is anumerical variable Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an exist ing one Chapter6 345 Properties Editor Properties Description Determines the flashing of the text the possibilities are No Blinking Slow TextBlink blinking or Rapid Blinking The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Field text which can be selected using the RGB TextColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the type of horizontal TextHAlign alignment of the text this can be Cen ter Left or Right Determines the type of horizontal TextVAlign alignment of the text this can be Cen ter Top or Bottom Indicates the number of digits to be truncated when finally representing the field the digits are truncated start TruncationDigits ing from the right e g 1456 when truncation 2 is 14 The value can be associated with Tag or it can be man aged with thresholds Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang
145. see chap 6 Image Field page 322 Below we describe the procedure for adding an image to a project Add an image To add an image in POLYMATH you can operate directly on the image object by clicking on Add or using Project Explorer by right clicking on Images then Add In both cases the Image mask is accessed described in the next section to browse the contents of your PC just click low down on the mask press here to upload a file At this point a window appears and this is used to add one of the personal images that can be edited with the normal commands contained in the Image and General masks that we are about to describe in detail Itis possible to insert images with extension type DWG or DXF type even if they are not available in the files list To insert such images in the project select the image select the type of file such as All files and open it Polymath will automatically convert the image in png ready then to be used in the project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 234 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Image mask Image Parameters Width 200 Height 200 Resize Normal v Dithering None v Format Png w Quality Image This mask is used to edit the parameters of the image Each time one of the properties of the image is changed the changes made are immediately visible in the preview box at the foot of the mask Firstly you
146. selected simply by clicking on it For each object selected there will appear in the Properties and Events Editor all the options the user can set while by clicking with the right key on an object selected you can access a menu with standard functions like Edit Dupli cate Delete Cut Copy and Zoom Page properties Table 12 Page properties Properties Description Background page color editable using page ores RGB code or a palette of colors PageBorder3DEffect Defines the effects of the Border Flat Relief or Sunken PageBorderColor Color of the Border PageBorderEnabled Defining whether to display the Border of the Page PageBorderSize Dimensions of the Border PageBorderStyle Style of the Border Solid or Broken Backgroundl mage Defines whether the page must have a Enabled background image ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 298 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 12 Page properties Properties Description Chooses the background image from the list of images introduced Horizontal positioning of the image agosto Centered Right or Left Backgroundl mageld Mode of representation of the image can be Cut Stretched Stretched maintaining the proportions and Posi tion ae Vertical positioning of the image Cen rmegevrosmen tered Top or Bottom Events related to Pages ImageReprMode Table 13 Events related to Page Event Description OnPageOpen Activated after a Page is shown
147. should Bool RW be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 587 Scripts Table 17 Properties of ESACNTRL Rectangle Properties Description Defines the color of the border of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value BorderColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the edge of the object should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking BOrdergunK If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines infill direction of the object currently being redrawn the values may be as follows 0 From bottom to top 1 From top to bottom 2 From left to right 3 From right to left If a different value from the preceding ones is at
148. table draw just its outline in the page and the table will appear automatically Page Up Page down Page left Page right Line Up Line down Cursor left Cursor right Once the table has been inserted into the page and been se lected a series of properties can be attributed using the Prop erties Editor the meanings of these properties are identical to those of the properties in TrendView see chap 6 Properties of a TrendView page 408 By double clicking on the table itself you access its editing page which comprises two masks Fields and General C PIDICICIS 7 7 s gt gt f E OE GEAEAL 1 3 The default contents of the Fields mask include the Alarm Grid table whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsec tions see chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 Using this mask you can proceed to indicate which buttons should be present with the table and position them within the area To insert or remove a button just click on the ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor list of buttons to the left of the table if an object is already present in the page it will appear highlighted within the list and will be visible in the Table Edit Area To move an ele ment button or table just drag it to the desired position The buttons that
149. the RGB code or the colour palette VerScaleVisible Determines the presence or not of the vertical scale in the graphics VerScaleLabelFont Determines the Font to use for the la bels of the vertical scale It determines the colour of the labels in the vertical scale by means of the RGB VerScaleLabelColor code or the colour palette The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Scheduler View Scheduler View is the Scheduler function graphical repre sentation inside of the page see chap 5 Schedulers page 259 A Scheduler View can be inserted inside of a page by clicking on the icon 4 or from the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Controls Complexes gt Scheduler View After having clicked the icon indicate the area in which POLYMATH must draw the new Scheduler View inside of the page using the mouse ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 452 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Before creating a new Scheduler view it is necessary but not indispensable to have created a Scheduler to which as sociate it It is also possible to create scheduler after having created scheduler view by editing the Scheduler property di rectly from property editor under the Advanced item Scheduler Invalid ERROR The Scheduler doesnt exist Scheduler Scheduler QO After having inserted Scheduler the Vista Scheduler ima ge automatically becomes the foll
150. the terminal see chap 8 Preparation of IT panels before download page 511 Once the connection has been selected click on Connect to Start the connection whilst clicking on Cancel cancels the operation Preparation of the PCs or PC terminals based on the first download If an ethernet connection is chosen connect the PC to the network and configure the network parameters refer to the windows guide or consult the network administrator PCUSB ADAPTER If a SERIAL CAN or PROFIBUS connection is chosen the ESA PCUSBxxxxxxx product must be used The PCUSBxxxxxxx product is essential to establish communication between PC XS and the PLC provided with a CAN DP or SERIAL port ESA puts the following order codes at disposal PCUSBADPOSP2 RS232 485 serial communication board PCUSBADPOCAN CAN BUS communication board PCUSBADPODP PROFIBUS DP communication board In order to perform a project transfer it is necessary to install on the PC where the runtime is located a program called ESAPOLYMATH Downloader available on installation CD of the POLYMATH To install the downloader follow the simple instructions provided by the installation guide At the end of installation the program asks if it must always be started with the start of Windows If the answer is no it must be manually activated each time a transfer is to be carried out or runtime launched After having installed the program the icon is added
151. the FLASH could be damaged Timestamp format DD MM YYYY hh mm 24h M Erase logs after 3 Days Export file Customize file The General mask is used to configure the panel such that it executes the logout automatically after a certain period of Inactivity you can also define which page to go to see once a user has completed the logout This window can also be used to set the procedures for recording the user login logout operations this function is particularly useful where it is important to be able to maintain a history file of accesses The files in which the data is saved a valid file name must be given when working in a Windows are editable as is the format of the date time and whether to program the logs after a certain period of time The log file is saved in text format in the folder log See chap 8 Transferring data page 516 By pressing Customize the user has the possibility to custo mize the Log file to export in CSV format 215 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 216 Chapter5 Project Explorer UP The Up key allows the user to move the selected entry up after going to the desired option Down The Down key allows the user to move the selected entry down after going to the desired option Preview With the Preview key the user will view a graphic preview of the chosen customization OK By pressing OK the user confirms the created settin
152. the Library Explore called TEMPORARY OBJ ECTS where saved objects are only available for the cur rent project Open the USER Objects folder Select the object you wish to save press CTRL Shift and drag Library Explorer User objects hs it into the USER OB ECTS library 497 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 498 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows This operation can take a few seconds ab x MELAS a Mouse pointer 780 480 Buttons Switches Lights Pipes and Valves Tanks Motors Machinery Image lists Immagini Flags and Icons Various A P Tastiere LA User objects It is possible to save an entire page of a project in the library by simply selecting it in Explore Project and dragging it into the User Objects library The operation can take a few se conds ibrary Explorer q Buttons Switches Lights Pipes and Valves Tanks Motors Machinery Image lists Images Flags and Icons Various Keyboards User objects rreeterr ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 A A Errors Viewer Chapter7 499 Other anchorable windows Warning If an element is dragged from the project to a library and this object refers to a variable e g Numeric field POLYMATH does not automatically import the variable into the Library this op eration must be done manually When a variable is imported into a Library its reference to the memory address is lost Draggi
153. the length of the notches on the vertical scale of values VerScaleVisible Indicates whether there should be a vertical scale VerScaleVisible Number of digits to show on the verti Number cal scale Editing Trend Pens To be able to edit the Pens for writing Trends you have to en ter the complex field edit function TrendView double click on it in the page After selecting the Trend Graph use the ap propriate Properties Editor to click on the icon w In the Pens option ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 417 Properties Editor Name i h United States Trenen Trend buffer f 30 Scale type reset p Me Default color E 0 0 E Show pen on The Pen edit window that is displayed is composed of three sections The left part has a list of pens created by the user from which it is possible to create and eliminate elements The bottom part contains a preview of the pen currently being ed ited while the middle part of the window contains the real ed iting area for the pen selected This window is organized into property masks Intervals and Interval Colors that are dealt with in the next subsections Properties Name English United States v TrendPen Trend buffer Scale type Preset Pen style Line Analogic Line style Solid Size Marker Cross Default color o 0 First of all it is possible to assign a Name to the Trend Pen and assign a
154. the number of tracks Long NumTracks currently in the table Available as read only Specifies the identifying code of Long RW ACUVETNEACK the track that is currently active Specifies the identifier of a track Long RW Tracki d Gives access to the attributes of a specific track The number of intervals into Long RW TrackNum Ranges which the track values are ad divided Defines the limits of the values of RW interval 1 into which the domain TrackRange of the track values has been 1 divided Used only if the attribute TraclINumRanges specifies a sufficient number of intervals Defines the limits of the values of RW interval 2 into which the domain TrackRange of the track values has been 2 divided Used only if the attribute TraclINumRanges specifies a sufficient number of intervals Defines the limits of the values of RW interval 3 into which the domain TrackRange of the track values has been 3 divided Used only if the attribute TraclINumRanges specifies a sufficient number of intervals ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 636 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 55 Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Properties Description Defines the limits of the values of interval 4 into which the domain TrackRange of the track values has been 4 divided Used only if the attribute TraclINumRanges specifies a sufficient number of intervals Defines the limits of the values of interval 5 into which the domain TrackRang
155. the same name even if they are of the same type brand and model The comment is a unicode string that can only be viewed in the POLYMATH ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Parameters subwindow Parameters M Use swap into protocol Type of addressing The Parameters subwindow allows you to configure the fol lowing options e Use swap in the protocol Check the box to invert the order of the bytes in the complex data e Type of addressing Allows you to establish the format of the register device address the Default option as sociates the format of the chosen driver to the register Communication Ports IT110T SP1 5P2 ETH1 ETH2 9600 bit s NONE Device address Device address DEC 1 255 In this window you can configure communication between the panel and device You can configure all the ports on the devi ce In general it is possible to configure on the terminal the communication speed baudrate and general settings of the communication protocol including parity of the bits data bits and stop bits while the address of the device is configured on the device itself At the bottom of the window are the ran ges permitted by the protocol for each value inserted ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 280 Chapter5 Project Explorer ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Properties Editor Chapter 6 Properties Editor
156. these can be se lected using the RGB code or color pal ette HorScaleLabelFont Indicates the Font for the label texts of the horizontal scale Indicates the frequency with which the HorScaleLabelSkip horizontal scale labels should be in serted GridVerMinDivision Style HorScaleLabelColor Indicates the minimum length of the notches on the horizontal scale of va lues HorScaleMinNotches Len ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 416 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 55 Properties of a Trend Graph Properties Description Indicates the way the scale should be displayed The Date alone the Time alone both or tenths of seconds can be represented HorScaleNotchesLen Indicates the length of the notches on the horizontal scale of values Active if the type of scale envisages HorScaleTimeFormat the Time and permits its format to be specified HorScaleMode Active if the type of scale envisages HorScaleDateFormat the Date and permits its format to be specified HorScaleVisible Indicates whether there needs to be a horizontal scale VerScaleLabel Number of decimal digits to show on Decimal the vertical scale VerScaleLabelFont Indicates the Font for the label texts of the vertical scale Indicates the frequency with which the VerScaleLabelSkip vertical scale labels should be inserted VerScaleMinNotches Indicates the minimum length of the Len notches on the vertical scale of values VerScaleNotchesLen Indicates
157. this Script if the Script is set to return a value in a variable For details regarding the functions that can be associated and regarding Scripts the reader is advised to consult the sections of the manual devoted to these topics see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 e see chap 9 Scripts page 553 Variables Variables are fundamental elements for creating a POLYMATH project they allow the programmer to store and arrange data to permit dialog between panel and device An indefinite number of variables can be created the limits depending on the memory available on the device ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer List List hare Memory Address address Field Twpe i t erson Thresher troelTa tarini Ta nteger Taj ATU Mattar fadt per sddresce Addretcet bibeger Clea a 0 Tag_i RTU Master fast perAddress Addressed onteger p RTU Major fadvt por Aiddroii 0 addredaeO Babeger fo E a After double clicking on Project Explorer you access a table of variables whose list and classes of update described in the next subsection can be managed Using the list you can not only introduce new variables delete them and duplicate them but also edit certain properties name memory and Type the meaning of these properties will be described in the next section The Tools key allows modifying at will the columns structure importing or ex
158. tions previously shown ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 228 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Editor Events in Extended mode You can associate events scripts to the various conditions of the trendbufferxyY for example when the trendbufferXyY is full by clicking the Browse button on the right OnBufferClear OnBufferFull OnBufferOvetla HE Events Functions Editor 15 x OnSample s i s z Functions Scripts associated to this event OnWarningLe Parameters of the selected function script O Store the return value into J Add Script The event is activated in the various conditions of the trend bufferxXY The conditions are listed in the table Trendbuffer Events see chap 6 The events relating to the Timers can be edited by the Events editor by keeping the reference Timer in the related list selected page 294 DataLog The DataLog is a property similar to the TrendBuffer The biggest difference is that while the TrendBuffer is data displayed on a graphic the DataLog is data displayed on a table Scripts Scripts are an element enabling writing of functions to be customized which is useful in that the predefined functions are not always sufficient for the user s needs They can be written with true programming languages and be executed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2
159. to Pipelines Event Description When anomalies in the destination OnDestDown variable stop the Pipeline working cor rectly ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 293 Properties Editor Table 7 Events assignable to Pipelines Description When anomalies in the source variable stop the Pipeline working correctly break in the connection with the de vice invalid value assignment etc OnSourceDown The event is activated following the startup of the Pipeline that is it oc curs at the start of Runtime or after a break in the connection between the variables is restored sOnstop When a Pipeline stop is requested Events related to Passwords The events relating to the Passwords can be edited by the Events editor by keeping the User table for Password configu ration selected see chap 5 Users and Passwords page 213 Table 8 Events assignable to Passwords Event Description operation OnLogout Activated following a successful Logout operation OnLoginError Activated when wrong Login data is emitted Activated following a change in pass word for a user via the user grid see chap 6 Properties of the Password Grid page 438 OnPasswordChanged ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 294 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Events related to Timers The events relating to the Timers can be edited by the Events editor by keeping the reference Timer in the related list sel
160. to be able to edit the selector PasswordLevel value see chap 5 Password configu ration page 213 This property is ig nored if the field is Read Only StartAngle Determines the Knob starting position given as an angle Determines the angle in degrees o aWeepAngie the aperture of the Knob ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 47 Properties of the Knob Selector Properties Description Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using the cursor keys within a page It also controls the or der in which data is introduced in sev eral fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Tabi ndex Indicates the display type for setting the scale the display of values can be maintained or a text list corresponding to the values can be used ValueType Active if the value is a Text List value Allows you to choose the text list asso ciated with the values in question see chap 5 Text list page 230 TextListid Determines the color of the scale of ScaleValueColor values This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement oes a Tag to the Direct move ste rone Fina raoa FinalY Vertical co ordinate Knob Selector events
161. to determine the number of pages to be printed Programmers can use the bottom of the mask to define their preferences regarding the editing of the page by ticking the option required you can define whether to overwrite the default dimensions established in the General mask of the Report of the grid Definition of Header and Footer In POLYMATH you can use the default Headers and Footers after editing them or create an unlimited quantity of new ones Editing for Headers Footers is the same both for the default elements and for those introduced by the user After clicking on the Edit option of the Headers Footers list or on a Header or Footer in Project Explorer you can proceed to the actual editing the object which is subdivided into two masks Fields and General Note In this phase the objects are defined without distinguishing between Headers and Footers thus these are created and edited in the same way and only at the moment of their being used within a Report is it specified whether they are to be placed at the top or the bottom of the page Header Footer list HeaderFooter By clicking twice on the object Headers Footers you can access the Headers Footers list defined in the project for the Reports As a default POLYMATH already contains two objects Default Header and DefaultFooter to edit these objects just click on the Edit button Itis also possible to add new objects by clicking on Add du
162. too is useful as it makes it possible to store save and re use portions of a project each individual element or set of el ements indeed even a whole project can be put in a library to be easily re usable in new projects A classic example of the use of the Library is when you want to maintain a uniform style in different projects without having to redefine them each time For example you need simply create a frame with the colors the size and the style required and save it in a Li brary to conserve it and make it available to be inserted in all the other projects With POLYMATH an unlimited number of libraries can be man aged The libraries are managed using the Explorer Library window which is an anchorable window and thus can be cus tomized at will see chap 3 Anchorable windows page 84 This chapter describes POLYMATH s standard libraries and how to insert objects of the various categories of library ina page of the project Library Explorer Library Explorer is the window that shows the contents of the libraries being worked on and allows them to be managed ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 480 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows Image of the Explore Libraries in Double click mode Select Explore Libraries at the bottom of Explore Resour ces ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Library Explorer 86 00 Buttons on e B s Access Access Access Access Bathro Bathro Camco
163. user General Fields General Identification Name SchedulerViewer Comment Editing O Override default grid size Width HE Ue Height An identification name and comment for the Scheduler that is being edited can be inserted on the General mask The pa ge editing grid default dimensions can be overwritten as well Introducing new measurements in pixel valid only for the cur rent field editing see chap 5 Main window page 129 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 456 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Holiday Groups View Holiday group view is the Holiday group function graphical representation inside of the page see chap 5 Holiday Group page 267 A Holiday Group View can be inserted inside of a page by cli cking on the icon 49 or from the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Controls Complexes gt View Holiday Group After having clicked the icon indicate the area in which POLYMATH must draw the new Holiday group view inside of the page using the mouse Holiday Group View Properties Table 64 Holiday Groups View Properties Properties Description Identifying name of the Holiday Groups Viewer Must be unique among the graphic elements Comment Identification comment inside of POLY MATH man Wt avesion pem emanes ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 457 Properties Editor Table 6
164. user can decide whether to continue by click ing on the OK key or to annul the introduction of the data which must be re set If the user decides to continue by clicking OK as just seen Polymath will automatically attribute the maximum limit value 100 The same will occur when trying to insert a value below the minimum set e g if a value equal to 5 is set when the min imum limit is 10 a warning message will appear under the form of a Popup page as shown below ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer You are writing a value lower than limit Do you want fo continue Canel Also in this case the user can decide whether to continue by clicking on the OK key or to annul the introduction of the data which must be re set If the user decides to continue by clicking OK as just seen Polymath will automatically attribute the minimum limit value 10 Conversion The value of the numerical external variable is always calculated by the system based on the rough value Often apart from the standard conversions it is necessary to carry out a calculation because the units of measurement in which the rough value is expressed are different from those required for the value of the variable For example it occurs very frequently that the rough value is expressed as an integer value within the range of a digital analog converter while the value of the variable is expressed
165. working the VT sets the bit at 1 If from time to time the device sets it at 0 you can check the Runtime is active in which case the VT will set it at 1 witha refresh period corresponding to the TAG AREA EDITING MODE set at 1 when any ac tive base page field is in editing mode ALARM_PRESENT set at 1 when at least one alarm is active whether rec ognised or not ALARM_PENDING set at 1 when at least one alarm has not been acknowl edged COMMAND_NACK set at 1 when a command from the device has not been accepted by the VT ALARM BUFFER_WLEVEL set at 1 if the alarm history has reached its threshold percentage determined by the maximum capacity available Appendix C Status area 763 Tabella 2 Meaning of VT_STATUS bit values COSSIR On ALARM_BUFFER_FULL setat 1 ALARM BUFFER FULL set at 1 if the the alarm buffer is full CONTEXT VALUE values Tabella 3 Meaning of CONTEXT_VALUE bit values batt eas Focus is checking sequence directory or project pages Displayed and is focus service driver status page Boas Herne esse fe remem oC eee o_o e Keyboard The status area relating to the keyboard is composed of 2 status area Words making a total of 32 bits Each bit corresponds to an F key on the keyboard where bit 0 is assigned to F1 bit 1 to F2 and so on for all the successive keys The bits are set at 1 when the key is held down 0 when released The value of the bit simply reflec
166. 0 in an interval of less than 5 seconds In the same way the event returns to rest when there is an increase of less than 15 seconds in an interval of 5 seconds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 154 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Indirect Addresses The Indirect Addresses option is enabled only when an In dexed Tag has been inserted In the General window select the Indexed Tag option Name Indirect_4 Comment Address Type The Indirect Addresses option is now enabled Select it with the mouse This window appears Index tag and values The Index_A variable is called Index Tag and is an Inte ger type of Device Tag al and a2 are two Integer type Device variables of the same type as the Index varia ble Indexed variables are particularly useful when you have a project involving a high number of Tags a complex project can involve literally thousands of varia bles In the interest of Simplicity POLYMATH offers the user a new function called Indexed Variables that allows you to associate map any ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 155 Project Explorer number of tags to a single variable the Indexed variable without having to create many fields containing as many va riables saving you time and facilitating your work in the bar gain The indexed variable allows you to view the value of each va riabl
167. 288 Manas me apa O e sis heanccnn duced vaaccaneneclsin bead ecd was eacecind 295 Predefined rap hic Clements lt msigieceteediaenvedencesesdasananatenesecdanaeanes 299 Simple ESS ares ed cts neces act aetna anus aan oialtatya siete teaolias 300 Value Helds cass tasaarenticant ii a E S 325 lnvert Function OPON sercinireercenir iran A 325 Invert Function option operation eeessssssesoeresssssssseerrrsssssseee 326 Thresholds option functioning ccccccccccccssseeeesececeeeeeeaeeeeeees 327 Objects to which the Thresholds functionality can be applied 332 SIMPE COMMONS srira a r a tate ae ancavaie ts 373 Complex CONTOS casts testianasecinte ean aaianetkcte near enaled 400 Movement properties of the objects sssnoeesssssssssseeerrsssssssee 462 Operations on graphic elements oeeeeseessssoeeeesssssssseerrsssssseee 464 Other anchorable windows ccccccssssssssssssssscssssssssssssssseceeees 479 POLY MA TH LiDrarieS scccccansutcesienducsdueasetousanntecdeaetatadsen decedansdeoes 479 EmOrSs VAC W Cl sisarien nna E E oueioeaedvaaaes 499 Warnie NC WCE nerean tee tisha T a A 500 Compiler QUO OG zee A eehicosntanes 500 Compiling Downloading and Runtime sssseececcccssssececoocossssseee 503 Project simula o nense nak ee aba 505 Downloading a Project rersicaneccna e 508 Change PassWord rsss a E 519 Download the IT OPERATING SYSTEM image 521 Set up an Ethernet CONNECTION seirini
168. 36 Methods of ESACNTRL Numerical field Method Refresh Control ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Chapter9 611 Scripts Properties of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Table 37 Properties of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the rectangle of the field has currently ControlLeft been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle of the ControlTop field has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Width Control Defines the height of the object Height Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the border of the rectangle of the field currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long
169. 4 Holiday Groups View Properties Properties Description Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds AreaVisibility Determines whether the Holiday Groups Viewer should have a back ground or if it must be transparent a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as Signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border which can be selected using the RGB BorderColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Rectangle or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value BorderVisibility Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable could be assigned if de sired or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val BorderStyle i l ue can be assigned t
170. 400 OFM S011 4 14 47 EEO 17 00 35 COOL LT ddGz OMS 2011 O91 Soe ZAW 1700 AME 17 00 27 ZATA S011 17 00 23 SEIRENA 27 As Propet date 2a 2001 09 14 35 22011 O94 35 DTM SSL VP STS Pl ADJON Taie ATOL 175 2M2 17 41 35 27 20LE 17 41 35 De aoe PRM 0a Osa VES 00 Taai I a 20s 17330 OOS QOL Qe PW IOLL OF Ae De OS idi Oey 0n tgi PAOL 0814s P2 091400 SHS 2011 09 14 75 Wa ee ere a E Runtime 531 bl D i Cafferent Bl i 0 Progect eny e Transfer files Backup original project The function has 2 sub menus l Transfer files to the panel it allows to transfer files from a HMI 2 Download files from the panel into a HMI it allows to transfer files Wizard eelect type of operation D Upload files to panal Download Aes from panel By selecting the first option Transfer files to the panel with the open project the following window will appear ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 532 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Wizard Pr ged backup hl Create a back up of the propad source files Censtination directory bd Compress project files in a rip file Zip fle name ProgettoTe stT zip Ll Protect zap tlle with 1OGH6KE s 15701Kb 604 In the window above you can see the following options e CREATING BACKUP OF THE PROJECT gt you can decide to create a backup of the project on the panel e COMPRESSING THE PROJECT IN A Z
171. 4IPDFWriter dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IPDF writer dll Downloading Runtime file V4ISMPPLib dll Downloaded Runtime file YV4ISMPPLib dll Downloading Runtime file V4IMessaging dll Downloaded Runtime file V4IMessaging dll Downloading Runtime file 4IChronoObserver dll v D Next to the download bar the remaining process completion ti me is displayed During panel transfer a message indicating download status is displayed after its completion the project execution is laun ched Polymath provides the possibility to set a password on the panel necessary then if configured to transfer the project In order to configure the Main Menu click on Instruments gt Utility downloader gt Change Password Downloader CE ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 520 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime CSAPOLYMATH Downloader At this point the type of connection with which to communicate to the panel will be requested and once chosen the password can be changed To remove the password carry out again the procedure listed above leaving the fields empty Execution runtime on XP Once download is complete runtime is automatically carried out By means of the ESAPOLYMATH Downloader functions runtime can be stopped and restarted Start Up Info Connection Settings start ESA system Stop ESA system Exit Downloader About With regards runtime of Polymath on windows XP a USB pen drive
172. 5 Value page 140 Setting the TrendBuffer also requires its dimension be indicated the maximum number of samples to be saved can be defined or if the sampling frequency refers to a timer the maximum duration of the buffer in tenths of a second The system can manage the buffer either on a FIFO first in first out the least recent element is eliminated or an ARRAY basis when the buffer is full the new values are disregarded You can also set a Warning value expressed as a percentage beyond which the user must be advised that the Buffer is nearly full this triggers an OnWarningLevel event The option Save to File at the bottom of the mask indicates whether the elements of the TrendBuffer must be saved to file so as to be kept after the terminal is switched off otherwise they are retained in the volatile memory If this option is activated a storage file name containing characters Supported by a Windows environment will also have to be specified The log file is memorized in the log folder see chap 8 Transferring data page 516 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 224 Chapter 5 Project Explorer It is possible to customize certain parameters during exporta tion of the file in CSV format by pressing the Customize File key this way the user will access a menu to change the file Customize Log File 5 x Columns e UP The Up key allows the user to
173. 56 Methods of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Method AddTrack AddSample Remove Track Remove Samples Description Adds a new track to the table Requires the passage of the track identifier and the maximum number of samples the buffer will hold Adds a new sample to the track indicated by the input parameter Also needs the passage of the value of the sample the acquisition time and a flag indicating whether the value is valid 1 or not 0 Invalid values flag 0 are used to specify acquisition errors Removes the track indicated by the identifier passed as an input parameter from the table Removes all the samples related to the track indicated by the identifier passed as an input parameter Trackld Long NumSampl es Int Trackld Long Value Var Time Str Quality Bool Trackld Long Trackld Long ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 638 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 56 Methods of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Description Returns the value of the Trackld track at the position Long indicated by the cursor Value Needs as an input Var parameter the ID of the Result track and the value and Long value type pointers The value type is numerical with the following meanings O intersection value 1 Sample value 2 valid value but cursor is in cut off area 1 non valid value the cursor is out of range 2 non valid value the cursor is in a track
174. 6 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 460 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 65 Properties of the Holiday Groups Viewer Grid Properties Description Allows assigning an image to selected I mageSelectedCell cell Allows assigning an image to unse I mageUnselectedCell lected cell Allows assigning an image to current I mageCurrentCell day cell Allows assigning an image to not ena I mageDisableCell bled cell or cells days not included in current month Determines which holiday group to HolidayGroup RON Determines texts list used for week DayOfWeek days Edit Holiday Group View After having inserted a Holiday Group on a page double cli ck it to start its editing A default graphic is present accompa nied by a Save button The editing is organised on two masks Fields and General Fields From the Fields mask it is possible to edit grid keys cha racteristics Each button has its relative properties which can be edited in Editor Properties as for normal touch buttons see chap 6 Touch Button page 373 To insert the Save button simply click on it while dragging it to the desired po ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 461 Properties Editor sition will move it A pre determined function unchangeable is associated to the Save button You can have the following buttons along with the grid which
175. ATH there are objects whose purpose it is to be text containers useful for creating value fields see chap 6 Value fields page 325 Each Image list can contain an indefinite number of texts the sole limits are those deriving from the Hardware configuration of the panel When you double click on the Image list icon in Project Explorer the causes the table of Image lists to appear in the work area this list can be used to introduce duplicate and delete the text lists or simply introduce or edit a related comment Once an Image list has been created it can be double clicked in Project Explorer to access the corresponding editing mask The upper part of the mask can be used to change the identifying properties of the list The Name is a unique attribute within any given project that is other different lists with the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH The lower part of the mask can be used to edit the Image list itself new images can be added or existing ones deleted Add an image already in the project see chap 5 Add an image page 233 by using the relevant drop down menu Image column A preview and a comment can be displayed for each Image belonging to the list TO move an image just select it and click on the Up or Down keys according to the operation to be performed I mages POLYMATH offers the possibility of importing into the project images that are in the
176. According to the simplest syntax for invoking that method the passage of a value whether constant or variable is as set out in the following example ESAHMI ESAMSGBOX Message Text which in Runtime makes the window containing the message Message Text appear If on the other hand we use the following syntax ESAHMI ESAMSGBOX VariableName in Runtime a window containing the current value of the variable VariableName appears Alternatively the method can be invoked with the passage of two values in this case the first parameter indicates the string to be displayed while the second parameter must be a string that then appears in the title bar of the window See example below ESAHMI ESAMSGBOX Message Text Message Title will make a window containing the message Message Text appear while the title appearing in the bar above this window will be Message Title Aw Warning The ESAMSGBOX method is advised only for debugging the script or rather during its testing For the final project when messages are to be presented on screen for the operator we strongly advise the use of pop up pages whose appearance can be controlled using Scripts Aw Warning To execute scripts relating to a variable the continuous update option must be enabled during the setting of the variable in POLYMATH see chap 5 Device page 142 In addition tags can only use the methods and properties relating to thresh
177. AreaVisibility Border3D BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize ScaleNotches Description Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Bar Field or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Indicates the size of the character of the values written above the numerical division lines Indicates the number of subdivision marks appearing between two numer ical divisions These are shorter divi sion lines than the numerical ones giving greater precision to the repre sentation ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 368 Chapter 6 Properties Editor
178. CNTRL Numerical field Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the rectangle of the field has currently ControlLeft been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle of the ControlTop field has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Int Width Control Defines the height of the object Int Height Defines whether the object should Bool RW be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 608 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 35 Properties of ESACNTRL Numerical field Properties Description Defines the color of the border of the rectangle of the field currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long BorderColor value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the border of the rectangle of the field should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking BorderBuny If a different value fro
179. Chapter 5 Project Explorer directly in runtime For more information on writing Script codes readers are advised to consult the chapter dealing with these see chap 9 Scripts page 553 In this section we shall limit ourselves to describing the how the Scripts are managed at the project level By double clicking on the Script option in Project Explorer the list of Scripts in the project with their related comments can be accessed Using this list mask you can add new Scripts to the project using the Add key or duplicate them using Duplicate and delete existing ones using Delete ES Sear To be able to enter the actual edit mode for a Script double click on it in Project Explorer there are two masks for editing Scripts General and Scripts These are described in the next Subsections For more information on the table and the meaning of the events that can be associated to a Script readers are advised to consult the next chapter see chap 6 Script Events key page 292 General Identification Name Script Comment Return value type None Sa ne Comment ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 230 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Using the General mask you can set the identifying properties of the Script The Name is a unique attribute within the project that is other different Scripts with the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string
180. Compiling Downloading and Runtime B amp i a Stylus Date Time OEF Network gt 0 amp oo z m i ey es Lamp Saver Backup Password FTP X Pr ue Reset Information The following image will appear Delete Project C Remove project and runtime Complete terminal disk reset Protection Change Password From the image above the user can choose between 2 op tions e Remove project and runtime gt choosing this option both the project and the runtime that have been tran Sferred from Polymath onto the terminal will be cancel led e Complete terminal disk reset gt choosing this option the whole content of the Hard Disk folder will be can celled with the exception of the files that are essential for operating the terminal Choosing one of the two options described above and clicking Delete the safety password will be requested since impor tant information contained in the terminal is about to be can celled ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 551 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Warning the terminal disk content is about to be deleted Enter password to confirm execution Password The default password is 1234 If wanted it can be changed After having typed in the password confirm pressing Send on the Input Panel keyboard ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 552 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Run
181. Conversion X2Par GetCurrent Value Description Changes the lower limit of the operations in entry of a numerical tag Changes the upper limit of the operations in entry of a numerical tag Changes the lower limit of the operations in exit of a numerical tag Changes the upper limit of the operations in exit of a numerical tag Changes the parameter of the mathematical conversion of the value of a numerical tag Changes the parameter of the mathematical conversion of the value of a numerical tag Changes the parameter of the mathematical conversion of the value of a numerical tag Changes the parameter of the mathematical conversion of the value of a numerical tag String Tag name DbI Limit String Tag Li String Tag name Double Li String tag name Double Li String Tag name Double Co nvPatamet String Tag name Double Co nvPatamet String Tag name Double Co nvPatamet String Tag name Double Co nvPatamet Reads the current value Varia String saved in the tag nt 561 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 562 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 2 Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from Script N GetCurrent Read the current rough Varia String value value inside the n RawValue i l device saved in the tag ReadValue Read the value of the tag Varia String from the device n t t Writes a new value of the WriteValue tag in the device lue Reads from the dev
182. DOL 1606 53 version Import w Hy bbrary_z Imported from T VOC WMAMUEL Th Scarce ELS Od LOO 6 is more recent than the Local LOy0S 2012 17 03 05 version i My Library_2 Local Lazal x My Library_3 Lees Laszal By clicking on Import it will be possible by choosing the source path to import the selected libraries from a hard disk or from a folder shared on the network ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 495 Other anchorable windows Imported From C AProgramm ESA Sourced 14 05 2012 26 36 53 is equal to tee Lozak 2805 2012 18 36 53 verson imperil imported From TACCMARUSLAA Soure 2105 2012 10 30 26 is more recent than the Lorcai 16 05 11 17 0905 version Libraries i User Local Local i Butters System System i aithe System System ca mept System System fa Lighhs System System Ei Ormen objets System System a Filled polygons System System System keyboards System System Ei My Library Local Local z My Library 1 Local Local amp Mp Library_1 amp Mp Library_2 E Mp Ubrary_2 Leal Locs Lazal Locs ra My Library_3 Look in Q My Recent Documents Desktop cy My Documents 9 My Computer My Network Desktop Create irary Rares pyrbeen keist Check shared Mbraries B My Documents 4 My Computer Documents and Settings hedit New Folder Project 310 slave Project selection Project selection310 TEST CE E My Library _2 lib
183. Description Activated whenever the button is re OnReleased leased after being pressed Monostable button events Once a monostable button is added to a page its form can be edited but in OnPressed state and in OnReleased state To edit the button just double click on it within the page editing the monostable button comprises three windows Pressed Re leased and General In the Pressed and Released masks the graphic appearance of the button in its two states can be defined Editing these win dows works like normal editing for project pages see chap 6 Managing a page page 295 Note A monostable button differs from a touch button in its graphic form which is completely editable As described in this chapter im ages or geometric forms can be applied to them The library sup plied with POLYMATH contains a set of buttons ready for use in a project see chap 7 POLYMATH Libraries page 479 The General window can be used to set identifying properties related to the button the Name is a unique string within a set of graphic objects while the comment is a recognition text to be used only within POLYMATH You can also choose to over write the global grid dimensions to make positioning on the surface of the button more or less precise Bistable button A Bistable button can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Com plex controls gt Bistable button Aft
184. ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 374 Chapter 6 Properties Editor change Properties of the Touch button Table 37 Properties of the Touch button Properties Description Identifying name of the Touch button Must be unique among the graphic el ements man Wit avesion pem Het avenion Determines the color of the Area of the button when depressed which can be selected using the RGB code or col or palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be man aged with thresholds AreaColorPressed Determines the color of the Area of the button when released which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned toa whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds AreaColorReleased Determines whether the Button has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 375 Properties Editor Table 37 Properties of the Touch button Properties Description Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border when the button is depressed using BorderColorPressed the RGB code or color palette The val ue can be assigned to
185. Geos iiad G8 05 iiiad 8 05 oO My DoGumnenk Gi Prapram fil s aa Temp By Wires e Compare memory throughout Polymath is possible to compare the memory of the HMI with respect of the me mory used by the project size of memory used and size of memory free Online toals Cemnpare mehir y Panal memory Propect memari fraa 10 43 BB fraa 1043 AB Pres memory BB sed memes Project Used merry Syrtem others e Compare files It compares files of a PC project with the files stored on the HMI by clicking on the key Re port Print is possible to print a list of the files ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Online tools Campare hlg File Rete L Exchange_Areaz xml i HOLIDAYS DAT W fcondlaema cknowled W ailih bine W ionale Tarina W E len W liyn enpleAlarm ip i Maceaging rel i GESTE TER C GEET C EGES E E NetworkTags oml W Pagetanager tin m PaceThrough bin W Paiet iil fA 105 Identical Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Camparroan reru Tiental Idenmcal Identical Identical here identan Tderkesal Idenmcal Identical Pees here idena Idenmcal Identcal Idantical Pees hartecal Eetarant Idenmcal Tr m mii mi fa i 0 Panel oniy Pare date SRO S011 17 00 29 SRAOAS011 170024 Fae ca LL 17l fee 211 FALH SF fe S011 Tals ere S011 171 5 ENUA D011 17 41 35 ZPD ITAJ ZAW LL Ldi ZAD Lone 120R S008 17 30 LENS S008 17 3
186. HT ESAMHT ESAMHT EZAHHTI End IZ FESS ae a sa eFEEGEE F oo oo 5 Example 2 Page access according to user level Another example of using Scripts is the way access to project pages is managed according to the level of the user currently logged onto the terminal Using POLYMATH we can set the objects we need while the Script is run We set two levels of use see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 assigning a password for levels 3 and 8 for example Remember that when the project starts the predefined level is 10 that is the lowest Jg We add 3 buttons to the default page Page one recalling the Script the other two the log in and log out functions respectively Finally we set two new pages Page_1 and Page_2 that will be recalled by the Script depending on the user level Let us look now at the implementation of the code first of all we must use the object USERMGR to get the level of the user currently logged in a ESAHMI ESAUSERMGR GetCurrentUserLevel Now we need merely create a check condition for this level the function returns an integer The credentials of the user will determine which page is displayed If a gt 3 Then ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR ShowPageByName Page_ 1 Else ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR ShowPageByName Page_2 End If The complete Script code is ass follows ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 9 Scripts a ESAHMI ESAUSERMGR GetCurrentUserLevel
187. Holiday type SpecificYears bs Month Scheduler_Start Scheduler_Stop HolidayGroup_Month BEEN Year Year Clicking on the Modify key will edit parameters of the just created Holiday group Unsigned Integer Long Ea Unsigned Long inp lear Real Initialization Double String Audio Files The Audio Files option is present only when a panel IT110 IT112 0 IT115 has been used ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 271 Project Explorer Project Explorer 200 a8 Project IT110T Pro SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 P x Tal Project C4 HWConfiguration IT110T Pro SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 SW Configuration Pz Tags H 2 Languages and fonts H 8 Pages i PopUp pages DB Frames Alarms Recipe types ig Users and Passwords S Data archive Scripts 3 Global script i Lists Ai Images a Advanced ty Pipelines ib Reports M Remote notification TE SystemKeyboards H H H r Keyboards f gt weekly tasks kA Schedulers iA Holiday Groups p udioFiles rae Timers User can use the Audio Files function to assign an audio file both MP3 and Wav to an alarm report Note Only MP3 files can be downloaded to panel during project download Polymath converts Wave files in MP3 format before downloading After having double clicked on the Audio Files icon in the Explore Project inside the work area the List mask
188. IP FILE gt you can zip the backup file e PROTECTING THE ZIP FILE BY A PASSWORD gt you can protect the zip file by a password By clicking on Next the following window will appear In the window above there are the following buttons e Add file s gt Run the procedure again for new files to add e Remove row gt select the row and delete it e Delete file s gt Remove files and folders in the panel It is useful to get part of the memory free ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 533 Compiling Downloading and Runtime e Modify the destination folder gt just change the path of the files By clicking on Add File you can choose the file to store into the panel Once selecting the file to send just choose the folder of desti nation In the sample we ve selected the folder Hard Disk Just click OK Choose destination directory m rk rd Dik 2 Document and Settings CS hi G pages Cearercign 2891K5 smoke deawee pasang bine ape 10666Eb f 15701 Kh E85 By clicking on Next the download will start At the end just press End ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 534 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Change the password downloader it allows to change the password downloader blanked by default Online tools Panel Tools Project Exit Change donnloader passeard PagrHord Canirm fatten
189. MATH A practical example is when needing to send a project to a remote customer that does not have the POLYMATH software available First thin the file to be sent must be created From POLYMATH go top the main menu bar specifically in Tools Utilities Downloader Backup Restore ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 540 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Tools Options Utilities Translations SE evs ATIE Tags Recipes Alarms T ERI Y F F F oader Utilities Online tools Dictionary BackUp Restore Backup Restore VToo0c Backup Restore YToeod with Modem Bootloader for IT and XT Bootloader for YTH in DIRECT mode Bootloader for YTH in ASSISTED mode 4 ETH1 ETH2 gt rs USB1 USB2 gt Choose the terminal family in our case the IT family then click on Next Wizard Panal femihr i IT Pe ovr In the following image enable the Panel Format Backup op tion only offline and choose if the Project option the Run Time option or both at the same time are to be enabled then click on Next ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 541 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Wizard IT Backup Testare Options Mode Backus G Bado Panel Fermat only offlice C Restore In the next screen choose the panel where the project is to be saved and then enable the Compile
190. MATH is a programming utility for ESA panels ESA that use the Windows CE operating system but this configuration soft ware can be installed on PCs using the Windows 2000 Win dows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating system Minimum Below are set out the minimum requirements necessary for requirements using POLYMATH on one s machine Tabella 1 Minimum requirements Requirement Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 Windows XP with Service Pack 3 Operating eyetem Windows Vista Windows 7 Processor Pentium IV or equivalent anre en 1024 768 resolution Space on Hard Disk ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 8 Chapter 2 Installation Recommended Below are set out the recommended requirements for being requirements able to run POLYMATH better on one s machine Tabella 2 Recommended Requirements Requirement Windows 2000 with Service Pack 4 or better Windows XP with Service Pack 3 Operating or better system Windows Vista Windows 7 Processor Pentium IV or better Screen 1024 768 or better resolution Space on Hard Disk 3 GB or more ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter2 9 Installation Installing Once the presence of the minimum requisites have been che POLYMATH cked on your mac hine it is possible to start the installation of POLYMATH Close or end any application active on the computer Introduce the POLYMATH program DVD ROM The following w
191. Moves the Editing area selected Editing area e g Popup Page Enables connection of devices Fields gt Connect and terminals see chap 4 Managing the project page 89 m Fields gt Move Moves a connection port Port a a Fields gt Create Adds a device or a terminal to the project The Create submenu can be reached via the Fields menu and this submenu can be used to add a large number of elements to the page Fields gt Create Basic shapes Value Fields Simple controls Complex controls The elements that can be added are grouped under the following headings e Simple figures e Value fields e Simple Controls e Complex controls ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 20 Chapter 3 Layout of menus The tables below give a description of the commands that can be launched from this submenu Refer to the appropriate chapter for the characteristics peculiar to the elements that have been added Submenu Simple figures a Regular polygon Label A Complex label Trend pen A Image Table 5 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures Icon Path Menu Description of function Adds a rectangle to the page see chap 6 Simple Figures page 300 Simple figures gt Adds an ellipse to the page Ellipse Simple figures gt Adds an arc to the page Arc Simple figures gt Rectangle Simple figures gt Adds a line to the page Line Simple figures gt Add
192. O Match case M Search hidden text Replace All O Match whole word O Search in selection Search All O use O Search up Show Find Replace By going to the Go to line field and entering the line number to view the user will be directed in the chosen point of the compiled file after having pressed the Go button ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 80 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Translations Sub menu Export Import Table 18 Translations menu functions ete Menu path Function description Translations gt Exports Translations Export NA Translations gt Imports Translations Import 1 Icon Not Available Translations are converted in CSV format easily transferable and convertible from each software Export Import Table 19 Tags Variables menu functions Tags Sub menu ete a Menu path Function description NA Tags Variables gt Exports Tags Variables Export NAL Tags Variables gt Imports Tags Variables Import 1 Icon Not Available ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 8 Layout of menus Recipes Sub menu Export Import Recipes editor Table 20 Recipe menu functions Icon Menu path Function description Recipes gt Export Exports Recipes Recipes gt Import Imports Recipes Recipes gt Allows to manage the recipes Recipe Editor 1 Icon Not Available Export Import Table 21 Alarms menu functions Alarms Sub menu Icon Menu
193. OLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 714 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC Use of Remote To use Remote Desktop do as follows Desktop From the Explore Project menu double click the product in this case IT105T Project Explorer n GGo0008 Loy Progetto Hi Configuration EAE TL0ST SP1 5P2 ETH1 t Siw Configuration m Languages and fonts ii 5 Fages fa Popup pages a Frames FN Alarms bce Ye Recipe types ig Users and passwords Data archive af Scripts 3 Global script E l Lists in Images E Advanced g f Pipelines HE Reports PM Remote notification a5 Keyboards La tes Weekly tasks the following image will appear ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 E ie LTTE Mame ITLOST SPL 5P ETHL comment Madel TLOST SP1 SP2 ETH r ston Date ILDA Z009 1499 46 Modiy Data SLM 2009 15 47 29 Compiling Date 21 2009 1544 52 IT Remote OESS O Activate IT Remote Access Uierm aire Chapter 11 715 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC Enable the Activate Remote Access function and assign a User Name in our example we have inserted USER1 in the IT Panel Remote Access window of the General mask Identification Name IT105T SP1 SP2 ETH1 Comment Model ITLOST SP1 SP2 ETH1 Creation Date 21 04 2009 14 39 46 Modify Date 21 04 2009 15 47 29 Compiling Date 21 04 2009 15 44 52 IT Re
194. Out the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field is enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the user can edit it Disable Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the value of the text currently written onto the field Can be varied by providing a new Value string and the on screen update happens after the Draw method or Refresh Control is invoked Methods of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Table 38 Methods of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Control Returns the length of the GetTextLen string currently written into the field ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 615 Scripts Properties of ESACNTRL ASCII field The properties of the ASCII field accessible using Scripts coincide with those of the Numerical field see chap 9 Properties of ESACNTRL Numerical field page 607 Methods of ESACNTRL ASCII field Table 39 Methods of ESACNTRL ASCII field Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic pr
195. PCMACHI NEBASE The whole system regarding Runtime on the PC XS working with ESAPOLYMATH DOWNLOADER application described until now will automatically close after 20 minutes if the USB Hardware key has not been inserted Inserting the PCMACHINEBASE key in the XS PC terminal the system could request to insert the drivers to acknowledge the key These drivers are found skimming through the following path C PROGRAM FILES EUTRONSEC SMARTKEY DRIVERS Carry out project Download on the PC or PC terminal based When a project is compiled it can be transferred on to the terminal by means of the Download function to start transfer click on the icon Ci of the instruments bar or on the main menu File gt Download If there are compiled files for the current project version edited POLYMATH will display a window relating to the configuration of the hardware connection machine terminal If however no files are compiled with respect the project POLYMATH will ask the programmer to perform compilation ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 516 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime In the window relating to download it is possible to select the relative parameter connection types to be used the envisioned connection types for the PC platforms are e Standard Serial e Ethernet TCP IP e Local e USB e http The serial connection is carried out by connecting using a suitable cable the gate
196. POLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 387 Properties Editor Table 41 Properties of the Slide Potentiometer Properties Description Indicates where the scale of values should be positioned in relation to the Potentiometer If the Potentiometer is vertical the scale can be positioned to the left or the right if it is horizontal the scale can be above or below ScalePosition Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement ear a Tag to the Direct move sts Movenenintenals ee FinalY Vertical co ordinate Slide Potentiometer events Table 42 Slide Potentiometer events Description Activated when the value of the Poten OnValueChange tiometer is changed using the touch screen Slide Selector A Slide Selector can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple controls gt SlideSelector After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the Selector Slide Selectors are useful is useful for introducing a direct check on a variable There is a discrete representation of the value of the reference variable and the operator can attribute one of the available values by just clicking on the indicator slide control ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 388 Chapter 6 Properties Editor The r
197. Page you have created ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 175 Project Explorer The event is activated in the two different conditions of the Pa ge e OnPageClose the event is activated when the page clo ses for instance when moving from one page to the next e OnPageOpen the event is activated when the page opens for instance when moving from one page to the next OnPageClose OnPageOpen To attribute an event to the page simply select a condition by clicking the browse button and in the window that appears using the necessary buttons to associate a function or script to the page CI Stor the retar valve inte Page Properties The Page Properties option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mo de and comes under Properties Editor in Extended mode ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 176 Chapter 5 Project Explorer The Page Properties window is in two parts Appearance and Advanced Appearance Jess 255 255 Background color Border visibility C Border size Border color Border style Border 3D Advanced Use background image Background image Image representation Image horizontal position Image vertical position The Appearance section allows you to edit the following op tions e Background colour e Border visibility e Border size e Border colour e Border style e 3D border The Ad
198. Page x El Binary compiler pages page Inizio alarm signal AlarmSiqnal alarm signal AlarmSignal_1l alarm signal AlarmSignal 2 alarm signal AlarmSignal 3 frames frame signal AlarmSiqnal frame signal AlarmSignal_1 frame signal AlarmSignal 2 frame signal AlarmSignal_3 At this point by clicking end the projects that make up the network are ready to be transferred to their respective termi nals ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Download the network project Chapter4 111 Managing the project Click on the icon to transmit the projects to their respec tive terminals ESAPOLYMATH NetProject etProject NetProject vtprj O8b66EGaGgs00 8 SsB00ag eS s SESG01880C 0DOSR 8080808000885 BSW Sou Ww a0 O08 i a aaa NetProject a C MLONSPLEFLETHI Wama Nathrayect amp Hetero Taga Darran miniga She ETAL Z F Hieterork Tage g Tag Author ESA Compare Version Crpeted Bodied The following mask will appear from which one can choose to transfer all the projects that make up the network or if only one project has been varied to transfer only the modified Wizard download network project New Wizard Page E3 Choose network panel to download compile PC_Client IT107T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 112 Chapter 4 Managing the project Click End when the transfer is complete Wizard download network pr
199. Pipelinel D I nt Pipeline Name Str ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Table 9 ESAPIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts 574 Chapter 9 Scripts GetPipeline StatusBy Number The object ESATI MER Description Returns an indication of Pipelinel D the status of the pipeline Int referred to in the input parameter the number relating to the ID of the Pipeline must be transferred The complete returned data will have one of the following values and meaningss 1 Inactive Pipeline 2 Active Pipeline 3 Disconnected Pipeline no communication This object offers functions relating to the timers in the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of the type var ESAHMI ESATI MER nomeTimer State ESAHMI ESATI MER nomeTimer Stop ESATI MER properties accessible with Scripts Table 10 ESATIMER properties accessible with Scripts Properties Direction Count ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Defines Timer counting mode possible values of this property are 1 Ascending 0 to Duration 2 Descending Duration to 0 Defines the duration of the Timer The meaning of this value depends on the type of Timer if it is Once Only or Normal the unit of duration is 1 10 second if itis Single alarm the duration is a Date and Time expressed as the number of seconds from 1 1 1970 if it is A
200. Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn ControlLeft or the rectangle containing it If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle containing it has currently been ControiTop drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the outline of the polygon currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value LineColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 00 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 601 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL Broken line Table 30 Methods of ESACNTRL Broken line Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Regular polygon The properties and methods of the regular polygon coincide with those of the polygon drawn by the user as already described see chap 9 Properties of ESACNTRL Polygon
201. Properties Editor part of an image to create a map The area in question can contain other graphic objects or elements i t Note If a Touch area is superimposed on other objects only the function relating to the Touch area is performed in Runtime In gen eral the operation relating to the object positioned on the surface is performed while those relating to the objects underneath are ig nored For further details regarding the script and predefined func tions the reader is advised to consult the relevant section of this manual see chap Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Touch area Properties of the Touch Area Table 39 Properties of the Touch Area Properties Description Identifying name of the Touch area Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH man nanes pem emanes ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 39 Properties of the Touch Area Properties Description Indicates whether the field should be disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock ae Determines the authorization level re quired to access the Area functions see chap 5
202. Properties Editor a aa TouchButton_3 TouchButton 0002 v width 75 Height 35 4reaColorPressed 0 128 255 AreaColorReleased J 255 128 0 AreaVisibility v BorderBlink No Blink BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased J 255 128 0 BorderVisibility v BorderSize 5 Button3D vi Bitmap None Caption Label Text Exit We now move to the Events Editor and change the function assigned to the button as seen above we choose the function ShowPageByName as shown in the figure below ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 Tutorial E Events Functions Editor The lower part of the mask contains a request to specify the page to be seen In this phase we can also indicate a page that does not yet exist in the project but that we will edit later on So we now Select the option pop up pages in the first pull down menu the second remains empty as no Pop up pages exist in our job so far At this point we click on to create one The page PopUpPage that was created with this operation will be edited in the next section when we deal with the pop up pages To finish editing our Frame we insert a DateTime field within it so as to let the operator see the date and time at any point assuming the frame will be added to every page of the project We click on the il button of the toolbar and draw the outline of the field in the frame Once the field has been Inserted we can begin editing its propert
203. RatioCtrl ISOMinus OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl POL1Plus OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl POLIMinus OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl POL2Plus OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl POL2Minus OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl Out1al OK tag DB 101 0utputRatioCtrl OutZzAl OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl RatiolAl OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl Ratio2Al OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl TrasducerAl OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl OutputInRangel OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl OutputInRange2 OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl RatioInRangel OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl RatioInRange2 OK tag DB 101 0utputRatioCtrl ISOPulseMem OK tag DB 101 OutputRatioCtrl POL1PulseMem OK tag DB 101 0utputRatioCtrl POL2PulseMem OK tag DB 101 WeightCtrl Weight14lack OK tag DB 101 WeightCtrl Weight24lAck OK tag DB 101 WeightCtrl Weight14l OK tag DB 101 WeightCtrl Weight24l OK tag DB 101 WeightCtrl PrintDataMem Finish import 03 03 2011 11 37 48 Imported 518 Tags Open Export Folder If everything is done correctly there are no error reports ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 166 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Languages and Languages Fonts The configuration window for Languages allows the user to manage the project languages that can be displayed on the panel Up to eight languages can be introduced at the programming level and at least one language always needs to be present To introduce a new language to the project just click on Add For each langu
204. Scripts page 553 pP Note When POLYMATH is first started in EXTENDED mode the Events Editor is incorporated as a clickable icon for the Properties Editor To access it just click in the corresponding area at the bot tom of the window Properties eae ae ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 289 Properties Editor Use this window to assign a predefined function or a user script to each event simply by double clicking on the corre sponding row in the table and then on the ip key The resulting mask will allow you to make all the settings nec essary to add a function just click on Add Function and choose the function you want from the list that appears Sim ilarly by clicking on Add Script you can choose the Script to be assigned For objects like touch buttons Function keys and Switchbuttons up to 2 functions scripts per corresponding event can be introduced for the events of other objects gen erally only one function or script can be assigned To change the order in which the functions must be executed just move them using the Move up and Move down keys To eliminate a function you just need to select it and click on the Delete button Warning Where two functions can be assigned to the same event the user must take care to furnish an order which is logical for con secutive functions there would be no sense for example in having a function referring to an o
205. Simulation gt Enables the selected simulation Enable simulation Simulation gt Disables the selected simulation Disable simulation ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 507 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Simulation gt Removes all simulations Remove all simulation Simulation gt Enables all simulations Enable all simulation Simulation gt Disables all simulations Disable all simulation List of buttons in the tags Device simulation tag List of configured simulations e Add adds a simulation to a selected variable e Edit edits the selected simulation e Remove removes the selected simulation Project Tags Tag List of all the variables in the project e Edit Value Edits the value of the selected variable e Watch List shows only the variables in the Watch List selected by check mark e Reset List Reset List unchecks all variables removing them from the watch list ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 508 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime From the simulator it is possible to change the values contai ned in the different columns shown by double clicking on the desired column for example the format of the variables ESA RunTime Simulation File Tags Simulation Help Project Tags Devices Simulation me iT a ag M E r o es stag uong jo P Edit value Watch List Reset List Simulation is stopped A 1 WARNING When quitti
206. SystemTahoma Tahoma System Font SystemCourier Courier New System Font KI SystemSymbol Symbol System Font Delete Duplicate The window related to the fonts allows the user to manage introduce delete and edit the name or property of all the character fonts used in the project There is a series of default fonts present in the project that cannot be cancelled but new ones can be added by choosing from those installed on your PC It is also possible to associate a comment to each font added to be displayed only within POLYMATH for each font there is also the indication of the memory that to be occupied by installing the font in question It is possible to use up to 32 Fonts during the programming phase 6 are by default and the user can choose between the other 26 Pages Pages are fundamental for the creation of a project they are the real interface between operator and terminal The editing of pages must be based on information accessible to the user and the access policy restrictions on users and navigation procedures links between the pages For each project page it is possible to enter up to 1024 objects which may be selected from a list supplied by POLYMATH which will be described in detail in the next chapter After double clicking the Pages icon of Project Explorer the work area will display a list of the pages introduced into the project Using this list you can introduce new pages and duplicate
207. TH THE INSTALLATION OF THE PROGRAM YOU MUST READ UNDERSTAND AND ACCEPT THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT WHICH FOLLOWS IMPORTANT Read This Carefully Before Installing the Software THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND ESA v pa eles el eS accept the terms of the license agreement Pint do not accept the terms of the license agreement POLYMATH SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT 11 EXPLICIT ACCEPTANCE Explicit acceptance of the clauses 6 Limited gurantee 7 No other gurantees 8 Limited library 9 Termination 10 Miscellaneous accept the terms of the license agreement do not accept the terms of the license agreement ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 12 Chapter 2 Installation Select one of the options and click Next ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard Please select a setup type C Conse 13 All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space C Custom iE Select which program features you want installed Recommended for advanced ers Select Next in order not to modify the default folder of the POLYMATH program C Program Files ESA elettronica ESA POLYMATH x xx or Change to modify the pathway ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard Install ESAPOLYMATH 2 0 to C Programmi lt ESA elettronica E SAPOLYMATH 2 0 Note as POLYMATH is a software in continuous development with frequent iss
208. To this area there belong the setting windows for the following elements e SystemAlarms e SystemMessages e F Keys To access the general editor of each option just double click on the appropriate name in Project Explorer The following paragraphs will carry detailed information on the features that can be configured for each element SystemAlarms The system alarms are alarms that are displayed to the operator whenever certain conditions of anomaly occur In this section it is possible to access a table containing all the system alarms that are displayed by the panel in particular situations Alarm messages are displayed for each project language entered Some messages are unchangeable by the programmer while others are contained in editable fields In any event it is always possible to delete the changes made to the translation by clicking on the appropriate button Clear Translation Use the Project language button to access the editable list of languages already described in this paragraph see chap 5 Languages page 166 133 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 134 Chapter 5 Project Explorer A Warning when editing the texts of the systemalarms and messages be careful not to introduce special characters reserved for the system e g SystemMessages System messages are messages displayed to the operator at various points when the panel is in use In this section it is possible to access a table
209. User Manual rev 2 2 566 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 4 ESAALARMMGER methods accessible with Scripts Alarms Export History Export History Delete The object ESARECIPEMGR Description Acknowledges the alarm specified by the first input parameter whether it is AlarmI SA type or OnlyAck Needs as an input parameter the number with which the alarm has been registered 1D the operator s name and that of the station from which the request is made valid parameter in the case of a network Exports active alarms to the file in main directory of the terminal Needs two input parameters one relating to the name to give to the file and one whole relating to its type the possible file extensions are FileType 1 XML FileType 2 CSV Exports history alarms to the file in main directory of the terminal Needs two input parameters one relating to the name to give to the file and one whole relating to its type the possible file extensions are FileType 1 XML FileType 2 CSV Cancels the buffer of alarm history and needs no input parameter Registratio ni D Long Operator Str Station Str FileName Str FileType Int FileName Str FileType Int This object offers functions relating to the management of the recipes in the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESARECI PEMGR GetTAGBuffer m Rec
210. V occurs A B fo 1 File Type RECIPES EXPORT 2 Station Name IT110T_ ProfsP1 3P2 ETH1 ETH2 3 Project Id Progetto 4 FW Version 1 00 5 Creation Date SOf03 2012 6 Creation Time 16 43 22 7 Export Key H o License Code SOOO OC COO OOCOOCK J 10 Recipe Hame 11 Name This is an example of how the exportation file is composed af ter customization by the user ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 209 Project Explorer A B File Type RECIPES_EXPORT Station Hame Project Id FW Version 1 00 Creation Date 02 04 2012 Creation Tome 12 26 08 Export Key S MIRC o m A amp oo Ro Sm otructure Hame TIPORICETTA 1 10 Recipe Name A 11 Stricture 1D 1 12 Recipe ID 1 13 Recipe Comment 14 RECIPE 1 Zucchero 15 RECIPE 2 Sale 16 RECIPE 43 Pepe a 16 Structure Name TIPORICETTA 2 19 Recipe Name B 20 Structure ID 2 21 Recipe ID 1 22 Recipe Comment 23 RECIPE 1 CampoRicetta 10 C The column configuration allows to change the structure of the displayed columns in POLYMATH as desired Modes of compatibility Options O Use compatibility mode for the following recipe type JOG O Export headers O Use an export language Export language English United States z Using the Recipe list mask you can specify for which type of recipe present in the project the mode of compatibility should be enabled th
211. _ var and str_var obtaining the following list oy Phase 7 At this point we can try to load some images in the project that Loading we can go on to use in our pages to make the functions more Images comprehensible or simply to give the project a more pleasing appearance For example we introduce two images for the project languages namely English and Italian provided of course that these two images are on our hard disk 669 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 670 Chapter 10 Tutorial Tutorial VTS95CE Images ra Tutorial 1 b HWConfiguration VT595CE Ba Loud SS SWConfiguration Pz Tags amp Languages and fonts Pages H PopUp pages E Frames Alarms Recipe types g Users and passwords 5S Data archive Scripts 3 Global script amp Ct Lists Aien Add New and Edit D H E Create Folder Copy Ctrl C Paste cril y Paste as Child Configuration columns First we load the image of the Italian flag clicking on the Im ages option in Project Explorer right key and then on Add New Gl fa Images ry IconAlarmRaised TcondlarmTerminated o gt fe IconAlarmAcknowledged IconSimple Alarm IconDiagnosticAlarm IconSimple4larmTerminated PeR E TrendPen ry TrendPenMarkerPixel rs TrendPenMarkerPlus rs TrendPenMarkerCrass ry TrendPenMarkerCross4ndPlus as TrendPenMarkerCircle rs Image The list of image
212. a potentiometer Properties of the Knob Potentiometer Table 45 Properties of the Knob Potentiometer Properties Description Identifying name of the Potentiometer Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate Determines the color of the Potentiom eter selectable using the RGB code or color palette The value can be as signed to a whole variable AreaColor ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 393 Properties Editor Table 45 Properties of the Knob Potentiometer Properties Description Determines whether the Potentiometer has a background area or should be AreaVisibility transparent a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be man aged with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border Bord rsD which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking Bordersink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the color of the Border us Bord rCol r ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able Determines whether there will be a Border to the Potentiometer or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number t
213. a recipe in each line R_Type Tipo Recipes 1 a ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC GetFirstRecipeName R_ Type Do While a lt gt ESAHMI ESAPRN WriteLN a a ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC GetNextRecipeName R_ Type Loop Up to this point we have prepared the contents of the page now we launch the command that actually starts the printing ESAHMI ESAPRN End End If With the execution of this method the print process begins Below we show the complete text of the Script Tt ESAHMT ESAPRH Starr lier Then ESAH T FSAPRH FonrSimr 1 6 ESAHMTI FSAPRN Grice Elenco Ricette preaenti aul T y ESAHHT FESAPRH Wr ineLH ESAHMI ESAPRH Wr ireLH ESAHMI ESAPRH Fooutdize 12 Type2 Tipo Ricette 1 A ESAHNHI ESAFECIFEARC GetFarsthecipenane Type bo Whil ai gt ES AML ESAPEHH UWCTit LN amESAHHI ESAPRECIPERRC Cethextlbecipebome R _TYpE 1 Loop ESAHMAT FSAPRH Erri ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 10 Phase 1 The Project and Hardware Configuration Chapter 10 Tutorial Tutorial The purpose of this chapter is to give practical examples of how POLYMATH can be used to create complete projects We Shall try to include all the functions offered by the application together with simple but exhaustive descriptions For our project we will be using an ESA VT595 terminal with Win dows CE operating system and a Telemecanique TSX 37 Mi cro PLC The following sections deal with the
214. able Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able Determines whether there will be a Border to the Indicator or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Indicates the size of the character of the values written above the numerical division lines ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 372 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 36 Properties of the Indicator Properties Description Determines the color of the Indicator I ndicatorColor hand using the RGB code or the color palette Indicates the number of subdivision marks appearing between two numer ical divisions These are shorter divi ScaleNotches sion lines th
215. ached to the terminal and PC In this phase POLYMATH compares the versions of the project element on the panel and those to be downloaded The next window shows us a summary of this comparison ESAPTL THUA TH Downoader Panel Connec an Op pe Selecked pert Model parel commected Meguri 2511k Mardry Avadabiity OF the comp nints can ba deelaadad Prepac omMpo nti FAR Ci Use stones alocati Camponent Current prej riwe Runtime Z120 b Hard Disk Pages GRE Hard Disk Help WA HA Hard Disk Images Z25Kb Hard Disk Configurator SHKb j Hard Disk Recipes W A Hri Hard Disk Translates LOKB Hard Disk Ci Update Al Update oldest only The parts needing updating are highlighted in pink In addi tion the support and the destination path of the files in the terminal can be changed In our case we will leave everything unchanged and click on Update only oldest to only update the project If you also want to download the firmware for the first time you are advised to click on Update all ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 711 Tutorial ESARILYMATII Dormior er lugina Connechon Type COML TTT TT wing OoankadAaT Dienbkaded tonha fle 4 080 Ramearing unmcessary files Downloading Runtime fle Vally dl Dosnleaded Runtime the wA rty dll Oosnkading munces fle nersari dil Coenkaded Runtime Tike neath SAF ail Ooenlosding Runtime fla WAIRCSaApi dll Dosenkadad Runtime tie
216. ackground colour options also allow you to attribute a variable and threshold manage ment see chap 6 Thresholds option functioning page 327 In the Advanced you can choose whether to use a back ground image and attributes this to a variable Alarms Alarms are events that need immediate attention on the part of the operator they are connected to signal anomalous conditions with respect to the plant or the terminal The alarms usually have associated to them particular events of the following type A Raised A Acquisition amp Feturn to rest e raised the alarm condition is signalled on the device e return to rest refers to the end of the alarm state on the device e acquisition often also identified as ack acknowledgement an operator has recognized the alarm condition ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 183 Project Explorer Using Project Explorer double click on Alarms to access the general setting windows of all the alarms The masks available in this area are e List e Memory resources e Behaviour e Fields e Priority e Alarm groups e User signals The next subsections will give a detailed account of the features accessible via each mask For a more thorough knowledge of the list and the meaning of the events that can be associated to an alarm the reader is advised to consult the next chapter see chap 6 page 291 where there are also illustrations
217. ady to create projects with the sure knowledge of how to take full advantage of the numerous functions avail able Once the edit phase is over before seeing the results of our work we must compile the relevant files and download them onto the panel To start the compilation in the toolbar click on the icon The compilation starts straight away and the messages relat ing to its status will appear in the Log View under the Compi lation mask As the instructions supplied in each phase have been correctly followed no error nor warning message will appear provided that we have also remembered to assign a Help page for each page created With no error signaled in the compilation phase we are ready to download onto the panel we click on and POLYMATH proceeds by asking us for information regarding the connec tion between the PC and the terminal ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 710 Chapter 10 Tutorial SARL MATH Downloader Dgarytor paral proj ct to dels VITS SLE Communication parameters Connection fice Belore deleng on Coneeet check Bhat the cable connechens are mgh the oor fig 5 ESAPOLTMATH wil recognise tie pareruugaion parestters ayharrabealliy In our example we have connected the terminal using the Standard COM1 serial port so we do not need to edit what is in the mask VT model and connection mode We click on Connect after checking that the connection cable has been properly att
218. again or open projects di rectly realised with ESA VTWIN application and with vts ex tension Create new projects for VTxxxW products The creation procedure of a new project for VTxxxW in POLY MATH is identical to that already described for the other ter minals see chapter on page The only difference is in the terminal selection phase where a panel from the VT family must be selected Create New Project Panel Choose the panel to use fi YT fig Graphic VT1L30W VT130W PROFIBUS VT3O00Ww VT300Ww CAN VT3SOOW VTLOOMT1000 VT310wW VT310W VTLOOMT1000 VT320W VT320W VTLOOMT1000 VT330W COLOR VT330W COLOR Rev 4 Rotation Open projects created in VTWIN POLYMATH allows to open and edit files created with ESA VTWIN software directly To open a project the procedure is the same used for any POLYMATH project see chap ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 774 Appendix E VTxxxW Panels Ma nagement ter on page in the file selection window look through the files with vts extension ESAPOLYMATH Project Look in Samples K E F gt fav 17104 i 4 IT 105 My Recent CQITLOSBK TK Documents 17107 A 1115 3 vT130 VT Ce xs612 xs615 xs619 My Documents 33 My Computer a File name v Y My Network Files of type ESAPOLYMATH Project vtpr i v ESAPOLYMATH Project vtpri Network project nvtpry VTWIN mle a
219. age added a decimal and group needs to be indicated as well as a system language and a Font for the related system messages Naturally you can delete languages present in the project by pressing Delete duplicate by clicking on Duplicate or change the settings of the existing ones by clicking on the corresponding fields in the list table in this window you can also indicate the language to be used when the project starts up on the terminal The Tools key allows to access two windows e Translations if a multilanguage project is created ev ery time a text is introduced the possibility of translat ing it into all languages is given In this way a Wizard will start that will guide the user through the translation process e Columns configuration for modifying the structures of the columns at will ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 167 Project Explorer Select the desired languages and select Next Choose the elements to export MEE eeins System Messages System Alarms M Text Lists Recipe Headers J Touch Buttons Alarms Alarm Headers Pages PopUp Pages Labels Create Text Table Select the elements to be exported and click on the Create ta ble Sataal Capells Vet kl La Lag Tan tos levai of thee Correct Lier Lirels hare Tuer Lear alftedp Sarita Pii hir jeh Hirini Targ aga ir J Feyh nisjahn mhia gee Pried gree epee ator Cirat cera Dettoebde mc
220. aging a page page 295 The General window is used to set identifying properties relat ing to the Button the Name is a unique string within the set of graphic objects while the comment is a recognition text to be used only within POLYMATH You can also choose to over write the global grid dimensions to make positioning within the surface of the button more or less precise Frame Field A Frame field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Complex controls gt Frame After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should add the Frame ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 407 Properties Editor A Frame Field is simply an area for containing an actual Frame We have already described in the preceding chapter how to create a Frame See chap 5 Frames page 178 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Frame Field Note A Frame can also be added to a page simply by dragging the frame in question from Project Explorer to the desired page position in the Work area With this procedure POLYMATH automatically creates a field to contain the dragged frame Properties of a Frame Field Table 53 Properties of a Frame Field Properties Description Identifying name of the Frame Field Must be unique among
221. al configuration of the VT uo eeeeeeeeeeeees 663 Phase 5 Defining the alarms os cacsstsconesiscectiaasilevdaandeasdasseieeaaes 666 Phase 6 Defining recipe Ly POS lt sesicberinceatsiesiaeeninddeseesate iesieanst 668 Phase 7 Loadme Tim ae CS anna ae 669 Phase 8 Defining text and image lists eee eececeeeseeeeeeeeees 671 Phase 9 Setin Pipeline Scierra A 673 Phase 10 Defining a Trend Buffer eeccccccceeeeeeeeeeeees 674 Phase 11 Graphic setting drawing a Frame cc eeeeeeeeeeees 675 Phase 12 Creating pop up Page cc cescessseceeececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 685 Phase 13 Drawing Full Screen pages ceeeccecccceeeeeeeeeeeees 689 Phase 14 Using complex controls cccseecseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 699 Phase 15 Defining the Trend graph eee eeceeccccceesseeeeeeeeees 704 Phase 16 Compilation and Download cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeees 709 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC 713 Remote DOS KRON arrena aN Ree ecsecuiens 713 Installation and registration eessssssoeeesessssssseerrsssssssseerrrsssssssses 713 ESAPOLYMATH User manual rev 2 2 Use or Remote Desktop iriciteteie teint acetates eres 714 Prable and disable TP secicsosicetveattuasziendeathceatawadsepacatueesduonseidaatves 721 Pas sthrOue ns ast ctastctaeitetoncasadpndunn wetness tocar 724 Panels network is seiczace said aasa cedcancessudazarensaccatsseleutssetcaneessasanapeneecctanened
222. alization OnOffLine X OnoOffScan OnOnLine OnOnScan OnRawValueChange OnvValSent OnValueChange Onlnitialization The event is activated according to the condition of the Variable The conditions are listed in the table Events associated with variables see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 157 Project Explorer Variables Export Import It is possible to export or import a series of previously created variables by Export Tags clicking Tools then Tags from the main menu Options Utilities Translations Recipes Alarms Downloader Utilities Dictionary Options Utilities Translations Recipes Alarms Downloader Utilities Dictionary By clicking on the sub menu Export the following screen is obtained Tags Export E Filter Tags to be exported Cancel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 158 Chapter 5 Project Explorer By clicking on the pull down menu the filter options that can be selected by the user are shown select for example All Ta gs option all Tags types present in the project will be shown and subse Tags Export Choose the tags to export Filter All Tags of all Devices All Tags of a Device Tags to be exported quently exported ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Tags Export Choose the tags to expor
223. all objects whose name is included between M and N of the Numerical Field category and belonging to the entire project Cross reference Filters M Search By Name Search from C Element s name begin with Mask M Element s category NumericField M Search in All Project only in Save filtering conditions Load filtering conditions 2 Element name begins with The filter is set by the user who defines a search field by selecting the letter at the begin ning of the name for the element to be searched 3 Mask The search filter is the same one of the option Element name begins with e Element category Allows searching within each indi vidual category of elements present in the project e Search in Allows deciding where within the project the search is to be carried out in the entire project or only in a portion of it ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 RA Chapter 3 Layout of menus Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained Cross reference lements List Element type NumericField Project ITLO7W SP1 ETH1 Pa NumericField Project IT107W SP1 ETH1 Pac Export all Export selected ea Find element From the previously described mask using the appropriate keys it is possible to complete the following operations e Export all Export all objects in the list to an
224. ame of the PDF file in which the contents of the Report will be saved if the file al ready exists the contents will be over written This function saves the Report con tents into an PDF file specify the name of the Report to be printed and the ReportSave name of the PDF file in which the con tents of the Report will be saved if the file already exists the contents will be overwritten ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 758 Appendix B Predefined functions Functions relating to Data Log Table 11 Functions relating to Data Log Function Description Reads Data Log sample the LogBuffer DataLogAcquire that the control must act upon is requi Sample red upon input see chap 5 DataLog page 228 Exports the indicated Data Log to file DataLogExport requires that relative LogBuffer name and destination file be specified Enables acquisition of indicated Data Log the Log Buffer that the control DataLogEnable must act upon is required upon input see chap 5 DataLog page 228 Disables acquisition of indicated Data Log the LogBuffer that the control must act upon is required upon input see chap 5 DataLog page 228 DataLogDisable Resets indicated Data Log buffer the Log Buffer that the control must act upon is required upon input see chap 5 DataLog page 228 DataLogReset Functions relating to Remote Notification Table 12 Functions relating to Remote Notifica
225. an Excel or CSV file e Export selected Export selected objects in the list to an Excel or CSV file e Modify After selecting an element from the list it al lows modifying it within the project e Tree view Allows modifying how elements are viewed from table to tree type e Find element Allows a more detailed search among ele ments that have already been searched e New search Allows carrying out a new search from the beginning VT By selecting the Function option it is possible to locate all functions in the project and choosing an item from the list e g Direct Command to Value all Direct Command to Value functions will be displayed 59 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 60 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Cross reference Filters Search By Name Search from Element s name begin with Mask Search By Type Function Script Function Internal Command Macro Save filtering conditions Load filtering conditions Goto page Macro Momentary reset bit Momentary set bit None Permanently reset bit Permanently set bit Value direct command Cancel Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained Cross reference lements List Element type OMacro Export all Export selected Find element ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Project VTSOSH Macros Macro By selecting the Internal Command a
226. an ele ment button or table just drag it to the desired position The ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 443 Properties Editor buttons that can be inserted are different and each has a pre defined non editable function assigned to it e Save saves the Recipe in the terminal memory if nec essary overwriting the one being edited e Save as saves the Recipe open in any case the inser tion window of the name e Load loads the Recipe selected into the video buffer e Delete Buffer empty the buffer e Transfer to Buffer upload transfers the Recipe from the device to the video buffer e Transfer from Buffer download transfers the data of the Recipe present from the video buffer to the device In addition dynamic fields can be inserted which contain a Recipe list and the name of the uploaded Recipe which has Same properties as the Label objects see chap 6 Label page 316 that can be edited using the Properties Editor dentificatian Name RecipeEditing Comment diting O Override default grid size Width 10 KH Height 10 The General mask can be used to insert a name and an iden tifying comment for the Recipe table being edited In addition you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of the page see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field The graphic properties fonts and colors of the Recipe list can
227. an the numerical ones giving greater precision to the repre sentation Indicates the color ranges to be as Signed to given value intervals within the scale By clicking on v you enter an editing window in which the value intervals and their respective colors can be defined the window also allows you only to specify the limits in relation to the scale to be displayed Indicates the number of divisions on the scale of values The number relat ScaleSectors ing to the value above the division is also displayed calculated according to the number of divisions Reference variable corresponding to the position of the indicator Using the Tagi d l appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an existing one Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds w if the object can move or Lock StartAngle Determines the Indicator start position given as an angle SweepAnale Determines the angle in degrees o ii the aperture of the Indicator Color of the values figures related to the numerical subdivisions of the scale This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette ScaleColorRanges ScaleValueColor ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Simple Controls Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 36 Properties of the Indicator Properties Description Determines the color of the Indicato
228. an type variables to which the values are returned Returns TRUE if the operation is successful while Quality indicates whether the value of Value exists or not if Quality FALSE the buffer is empty Returns attributes of the next sample of the trend buffer specified by the input parameter next in chronological order relative to the last sample read by the GetFirstSample methods or by GetNextSamples itself Apart from the Trend ID requires as input parameters pointers linked to Variant String and Boolean type variables to which the values are returned Returns TRUE if the operation is successful while Quality indicates whether the value of Value exists or not if Quality FALSE the buffer has no successive elements Checks whether the Trend specified by the input ID is empty returns 1 or not returns 0 Trendid Long Value Var Time Str Quality Bool Trendid Long Value Var Time Str Quality Bool Trendid Long Chapter9 579 Scripts Table 13 ESATRENDMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method PutValue PutValueAt Reset Samples Acquire Sample ExportPart TrendBuffer ExportFull TrendBuffer Description Adds to the trend indicated by the input ID a new Sample with the attributes provided as input parameters The sample time is the current one Adds to the trend indicated by the input ID a new Sample with the attributes passed as input para
229. and ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 557 Scripts separated by a comma without brackets as shown in the following example ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR ShowPageByNumber 32 0 If a function a method returning a value requires one of more input parameters a passage must be made using brackets as follows a ESAHMI ESATAG Tag_Array GetTagBitValue 1 a ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR GetTAGBuffer RecipeType RecipeName Use of functions and subroutines It is possible to insert into one s projects functions and Subroutines the former return a value while the latter do not that can be called by a script at any moment The definition of these functions happens as with normal scripts only that it is necessary to specify the type of input and output parameters Identification Name addzero Comment Return valuetype variat n y After creating the script using Project Explorer enter in the General mask the type of output value None if it is a subroutine and enter the type in question in the list of input parameters ESAMSGBOX Method The ESAMSGBOX method serves to make a message window appear on the terminal with the value provided This is a Message Box JK ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 558 Chapter 9 Scripts This method is useful for debugging the script as it allows the user to view for example the value of a variable at a given moment of its execution
230. and include a brief description The lower part of the mask is used to define the more impor tant properties of the alarm namely the reference variable and the type of activation Our alarm refers to the variable int_var and is activated by value when it assumes the value 200 AlarmPriarity Urror E 2 PIF lt e O Cag ber pice The deraor m troker User Date 1 User Dota 2 es Alarm 5A We go to the properties mask simply to define the priority here maximum FatalError the group of alarms managing the groups is only useful for cataloguing alarms in the project when many of them are configured and a description of the alarm the description is displayed on the panel when there is an error in runtime As alarm type we will leave the default setting ISA ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 667 Tutorial Parametleri D Support acknosedge eth giobal s U Zu gort rence message MUUTA E bd bog fn hatong butter 7 fi Delay in rong the alera 110 gee D Shan an instance is acknowledged acknowledge also all the instances of this alam O fugeart external acknowledge SE matic bi ith om as sl Di Support adeenhon mAh o pease h j Faga Fages Page We now use the lower part to enable the log in the history buffer in practical terms with this option the instances of this alarm are listed in the history table we will set in due cours
231. and is visible only within POLYMATH It is also necessary to define whether the Script must return a value to the application and what type of value this must be Number String or Variant Use the table at the bottom of the mask to specify the input parameters to the function with their related Names Types Number String or Variant and Comments visible only in POLYMATH Scripts General Sub ESAStartup 1 ESAStartup script The Script mask contains only one text input window inside of which you enter the code relating to the functions the Script will have For more information regarding the uses of Scripts we advise the reader to consult the relevant part of the manual see chap 9 Scripts page 553 GlobalScripts GlobalScripts function in the same way as the Scripts described in the preceding paragraph the real difference is that these types of Script cannot be associated to an event or a key but are activated with the start up of the Runtime They work and are edited in the same way as standard Scripts the only difference consists in the non configurability of the input parameters and the return values for these functions as they cannot be called up inside the project Text list In POLYMATH there are objects whose purpose it is to be text containers useful for creating value fields see chap 6 Value fields page 325 Each text list can contain an indefinite number of texts the sole limits are those
232. and positioning a variety of texts in the page The page is printed and released only after the method End has been invoked This type of printing is therefore useful when you need to print data destined to change over time on the same page In fact the method Start opens a buffer of elements to be printed that closes only when the method End Is invoked For a concrete example of the use of the print functions the reader is advised to consult Example 6 of this chapter see chap 9 Example 6 Creates printout of list of recipes page 649 ESAPRN properties accessible with Scripts Table 57 ESAPRN properties accessible with Scripts Properties Description Typ RW e Indicates the code of the last Int RW LastError Saree 639 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 640 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 57 ESAPRN properties accessible with Scripts Properties Description Defines in points the size of the font in which the strings inserted during the print session will be written Can be called more than once within the same print session Moreover when a value is assigned to this property the properties PageRows and PageColumns are updated og Defines the page width in pixels aa PageHeight Defines page height in pixels page Defines page height in pixels in pixels Indicates the horizontal margin of the page in pixel MarginVert Indicates the vertical margin of the page in pixel Defines the numb
233. aphic properties fonts and colors of the Active Alarm View grid can be configured by using together the Fields and the Priorities mask of the Alarms see chap 5 Fields page 171 and see chap 5 Priorities page 189 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid Table 58 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid Properties Description wan Dinerson few pem Dinersonofteneane This field allows the operator to deter mine which columns to put in the table and define their respective properties To edit the columns click on the icon Columns W In the window which appears enter the details relating to their width to the font and to the dimension and for mat of the titles of each column in the table ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 433 Properties Editor Table 58 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid Properties Description RowHeight Determines height in pixels of each row Determines whether the object can Lock move or not Determines the index that the object Tabli ndex l will occupy in the table order Indicates whether table scrolling AUTOSCrONENADIEG should be enabled automatically Active if autoscroll is enabled Sets the AutoScrolll nterval number of lines for the autoscroll inter val This field allows the operator to insert filtering parameters for the alarms to be displayed within the table To apply these filters click on the icon In Runtime only the alarm instances re
234. apter 5 Project Explorer to assign to a page if this preference is enabled it will be necessary to define a reference page be assigned To be able to exploit this function you will need to introduce the Shows page button in the Alarm display tables see chap 6 Active Alarm View page 429 and see chap 6 Alarm History View page 434 Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode It is possible to associate an event Script to each alarm you have created The event is activated in the different conditions of the Alarm OnAlarmAck the event is activated when the alarm is stopped OnAlarmOff the event is activated when the alarm en ds OnAlarmOn the event is activated when the alarm en ters Activated mode General Properties ated On4dlarmack On4dlarmott On4dlarmon On4dlarmoan To attribute an event to the alarm simply select a condition by clicking the browse button and in the window that appe ars using the necessary buttons to associate a script to the alarm ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Recipes Types Chapter 5 Project Explorer General Properties List On larm ck OndlarmoOff OndlarmOn HE Events Functions Editor a Functions Scripts associated to this event Or Parameters of the selected function script O Store the return value into Recipes
235. ar HolidayGroup_Year ve iC The General mask consists of the following sub masks e Identification e Properties Identification tification lame Holiday Group zomment This sub mask makes it possible to assign a name and a com ment to the Holiday Group ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 269 Project Explorer Properties Properties Holiday type SpecificYears v Month HolidayGroup_Month Year HolidayGroup_Year The Properties sub mask shows data relating to the Holiday Group settings It is possible to insert page identification at tributes e Holiday Type e Month e Year The Holiday Type section makes it possible to choose among the following options Specific Year Determines month and year during whi ch Group is active Properties Holiday type SpecificYears be Year Scheduler_Stop il Every year With this option holiday group is active during a specific month of every year Halids Ayre Month Holiday Group Month v i Two Tags are assigned to Holiday Type by default e Start Tag e End Tag ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 2 70 Chapter 5 Project Explorer It is possible to change Tags adding new ones that have to be of the same type Internal and value Unsigned Long of the default ones Identification Name HolidayGroup Comment Properties
236. ared with other computers on the network View your Windows Firewall settings Cancel Apply e We select the option Share this folder we then leave the sharing name unchanged leaving the default one ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime corresponding to the name we chose for the folder in our case Shared Polymath e Finally we click on the Authorization button to define which users can have access to the folder for details regarding network users consult your network administrator and which actions can be performed Permissions for Shared_Polymath Share Permissions Group or user names Add Remove Permissions for Everyone Allow Deny Full Control Change Read e Using the lower part of the window we select all 3 options available In this way outside users can read and write the files contained in this folder e At this point we click on Apply and Ok in this window and then on Apply and Ok in the window for assigning the properties of the folder After making these settings the folder C Shared_Polymath will be accessible from any Windows CE panel connected to the same network In particular the folder can be reached by the panel by digit ting the following path NOMEPC c Shared_Polymath where NOMEPC indicates the ID name of one s personal computer within the network this name is given in the Syst
237. ariable that triggers the acquisition Used only if StrobeType has a StrobeTimer value of 0 This is the Timer identity code used by the Trend Represents the maximum number of sample readings that can be Saved in the Buffer selected BufferSize value set in POLYMATH With Array type trends this value is an exact multiple of the array dimension Represents the number of sample readings currently in the Buffer selected Defines the percentage threshold of the number of samples for Warning which the OnWarningLevel event Level is generated for the buffer selected value set in POLYMATH This is a Boolean flag indicating the active state of the buffer Enabled selected If at O the trend activities are ignored while if at 1 the trend functions regularly The number of trend status area bits assigned to the trend If the buffer is full the bit assumes a value of 1 if it is not full 0 if the buffer is not assigned to external bits 1 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 578 Chapter 9 Scripts ESATRENDMGR methods accessible with Scripts Table 13 ESATRENDMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method GetFirst Sample GetNext Sample IsEmpty ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Returns attributes of the first least recent sample of the trend buffer specified by the input parameter Apart from the Trend ID requires as input parameters pointers linked to Variant String and Boole
238. ate Horizontal position coordinate Determines the color of the display which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 409 Properties Editor Table 54 Properties of a Trend View Properties Description Determines whether the sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a BorderVisibility Border to the display or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Soli
239. ating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Line Table 25 Properties of ESACNTRL Line Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn ControlLeft If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method ControlTop ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 596 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 25 Properties of ESACNTRL Line Properties Description Horizontal coordinate of the starting point Changing this value means moving the starting point horizontally when redrawing using the Draw method This value if read with a Script assumes a value of X1 Left values set with POLYMATH Similarly the point is drawn on the pixel with the value X1 Left Script values Horizontal coordinate of the arrival point Changing this value means moving the arrival point horizontally when redrawing using the Draw method This value if read with a Script assumes a value of X2 Left values set with POLYMATH Similarly the point is drawn on the pixel with the value X2 Left Script values Vertical coordinate of the starting point Changing this value means moving the starting poi
240. ault By pressing the Close button POLYMATH will automatically create the connection of the device to the terminal ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 LOO Chapter 4 Managing the project Modification and connection of the project components Once all of the useful elements for the realisation of the project have been introduced they must be connected and the connection modes must be specified The ConfigurazioneHW HW Configuration window displays the VTs and previously inserted devices The ports available are indicated for every element MSP ASP COM etc Moving a VT or device To move a VT or a device to the inside of the Configuration Window just click on and then on the element to be moved At this point the element has been selected and you need only drag it keeping the left mouse key pressed down till it reaches the desired position when the left mouse key is released the element will remain in the new position unless it is again moved If elements containing connections are moved POLYMATH will automatically update the position and the connections showing in the window Moving a port To move a port click on Fg at this point the icons represent ing the ports can be selected as in the following example aS estes ETH RTU Master Gast pe jrpr uu After clicking on the port to be moved just drag it keeping the left mouse key pressed down till it reaches the desired posi tion whe
241. be emptied in runtime using a Script a button or a command area You can also decide on the limit of alarms present in the history above which the system variable SYS_HistoryWarning will be activated see Appendix A System Variables page 737 The name of the file in which the Alarm History is to be saved must be entered into the text field in the mask the log file is saved in the folder log see chap 8 Transferring data page 516 Warning When entering file names care must be taken that they are admissible names for a Windows environment A file name to be admissible cannot contain the following characters lt gt 187 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 188 Chapter 5 Project Explorer pP Note The log file is a file used by the system to permanently save the data to be represented in the Alarm History Being able to choose its name using POLYMATH is useful in that it allows the user to manage this file e g copy or delete in the event that it is too big Should you want to re arrange the data in an Alarm History however it will have to be exported using a predefined function or Script see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 If you decide that a Page should change automatically when an alarm is raised that is of higher priority than a threshold specified using a drop down menu see chap 5 Priorities page 189 indicate
242. bin Wikii The first type of threshold is the Level type Up to eight Level thresholds can be defined each of which can be enabled independently of the others For each of the above mentioned thresholds the developer wants to enable he she must specify whether the threshold is a maximum or minimum independently of which event is generated thus if all eight of the possible Level events are generated eight different thresholds need to be specified It is also necessary to specify a dead zone value indicated as a percentage of the reference value to be used exclusively to check the re entry of the event hysteresis The dead zone indicates a time interval within which the event must not be raised so as to be able to make the slight value oscillations negligible Alternatively the Dead zone and Value attributes can be assigned to another tag simply by clicking on inside the field in question The functioning of the Level thresholds can be summed up as follows e minimum thresholds tf the value of the variable is falling the event is activated the moment the variable falls below the reference value if the value of the variable is rising the event is activated the moment the variable rises above the reference value increased by the value of the dead zone e maximum thresholds if the value of the variable is falling the event is activated the moment the variable falls below the reference value diminished by the value of the d
243. ble dynamic in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock TOt Determines the Sector starting posi StartAngle tion given as an angle Determines the angle in degrees in SweepAngle ternal to the Sector ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 308 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 18 Properties of the Sector Properties Description Determines the type of Sector If True the line closing the sector does not pass through the center forming a convex figure otherwise if False the line passes through the center con cave figure CircularSectorType Determines whether to make a partial Partial Fill color infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the color of the Sector in fill which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable FillColor Determines the direction of the Sector infill The infill can happen From Low to High From High to Low From Right to Left or From Left to Right The value can be assigned to a whole variable Indicates the percentage of the infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement fai a Tag to the Direct move Sts Moveneninevas Fina Rona cwaaate Line A Line can be introduced into a
244. ble changes If we want to constantly monitor the progress of a variable we can do this using Trend This is a graphic object displaying the data relating to the sampling of the values assumed by a particular variable The sample readings are saved in a mem ory called TrendBuffer Genera MEMA Events Daure aarnple Nurs perzi a 4 i P sree trg ani Tim Ft Strobe Timer A bene Chez mint per0 dyer harming level 40 fed Log to file logT rand srl Then File wall bes faved m the FLASH af te ferrell H the lage are to ir d be g aid wi he Sijipent thee FLASH sould be darneged fel Enabled at start up After double clicking on the item TrendBuffers double click in Project Explorer we click on Add to be able to edit the buffer created We will leave the name TrendBuffer and the default ID 1 created by the application in the General mask In the Buffer mask however we set the options for how the buffer in question will operate First of all we set as the source the variable to be monitored num_ pezzi while we select the acquisition mode OnTimer and assign to it the Timer Timer we created in Phase 2 We must remember to change the Timer so that its event OnTimerFired has assigned to it the function AcquireSample for this TrendBuffer the timer must also be made to start in runtime to enable the count A good solution here is to assign a function or a Script to the opening of the i
245. bles it is necessary to proceed to specify the destination memory areas for the values POLYMATH guides the user by furnishing indications regarding the valid memory ranges calculating them automatically in relation to the device chosen in the project First of all it is necessary to introduce the destination device the related memory addresses and the update class see chap 5 RefreshGroups page 138 If these last two components are lacking or incorrect they can be introduced again by clicking on the icon or they can be edited by clicking on K In addition you can decide whether to enable the updated or not Even when a tag is not being used by any field the option Keep updating indicates if it is activated that the variable will be updated even when its value is not shown in the page currently being displayed on the panel this option is indispensable whenever you want for example to access the value of this variable via Script In the event that the variable is part of Alarms Pipelines Trends or Recipes this setting is ignored and the variable is monitored all the same ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 G E Chapter5 143 Project Explorer In conclusion a one shot read can be requested when the variable is used in a data field Itis also necessary to indicate the type of memory to reserve whether Bit Byte Word DWord or String if it is not String you can indicate whether the memory is to be con
246. btain the list of objects that can be inserted The following sections of this chapter will deal with the various objects accessible by Script and set out their properties and functions giving where necessary practical examples of their use ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 556 Chapter 9 Scripts A Note Some properties mentioned in the following paragraphs are described as being in read only mode when using Scripts for many of these properties however there is no physical protection so there is the possibility that the script will overwrite their value This overwrite operation is in any case not advised It is thus the programmer s responsibility to avoid the properties indicated as being read only R being edited by the scripts Key to types of variable and syntactical premises The following sections will refer to properties and methods characteristic of objects The table below gives a rapid key to the abbreviations that will be used Table 1 Key to Abbreviations WE Vat le N EAE hale n moe e sem e CO RGB color returned by the RGB function Read read only Read amp Write read and write If a subroutine method returning no value requires an input parameter the passage can be achieved by using brackets or by leaving them out ESAHMI ESAMSGBOX Text ESAHMI ESAMSGBOX Text When a subroutine requires more than one input parameter these parameters must be written consecutively
247. can also be edited e Month views configured month e Month increase button e Month decrease button e Year views configured year e Year increase button e Year decrease button Only in Runtime it is possible to select the days where the scheduler does not need to operate holidays ESA RunTime Simulation Wednesday Thursday P Note Current day is selected by default in blue ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 462 Chapter 6 Properties Editor General Identification Name HolidayGroupViewer Comment Editing O Override default grid size Width Height An identification name and comment for the Holiday group that is being edited can be inserted on the General mask The page editing grid default dimensions can be overwritten as well introducing new measurements in pixel valid only for the current field editing see chap 5 Finestra Principale page 131 Movement A movement property can be associated to every object pre properties of sent in the creation of the POLYMATH project the objects This is used to determine the behaviour of this object associa ted to a Tag The commands useful for introduction of a movement are pre sent in the object Editor Proprieta Properties Editor Table 66 Movement properties of the objects Properties Description Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizonta
248. changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method ControlWidth Defines the width of the object pint fR Int Control Defines the height of the object Height Defines whether the object should B be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ool Defines the color of the border of RGB the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value BorderColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the border of the object should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking B OrCErBNAK If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced at 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 590 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 19 Properties of ESACNTRL Ellipse Properties FillColor ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Defines the color of the internal area of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The chan
249. color of the Border in fill that can be selected using the RGB FillColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the direction of the Border infill The infill can happen From Low to High From High to Low From Right to Left or From Left to Right The value can be assigned to a whole variable Indicates the percentage of the infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement i a Tag to the Direct move ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 303 Properties Editor Table 15 Properties of the Rectangle Properties Description Ellipse An ellipse can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Ellipse and drawing its dimensions directly in the page To define the characteristics of the Ellipse they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section Properties of the Ellipse Table 16 Properties of the Ellipse Properties Description Identifying name of the Ellipse Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH man Wt avesion pem Hehtcivenion ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 304 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 16 Properties of the Ellipse Properties Descr
250. components C Mask passwords editing C Show page s fields tooltip C Use the panel s picture into the page editor C Show the invert function C Show the structure images C Use graphics hardware editor C Don t ask for the conversion of older projects C Use the panel s picture into the simulator C Don t ask to import Tags from specific DB if supported by the device 0 Activate Trial Mode Max open dialogs GUI style DOUBLE CLICK V Ask for style at startup Changes of GUI style will be available after the restart of the application Use the Various menu to proceed to configure the general Op tions of the application The user may decide to view all the objects during the move or only their outline to automatically provide a new name if using the cut paste function whether to validate the project manually File gt Validate project or in real time automatically see chap 8 Validation page 503 to visualise the edit password screen view or hide information on the various fields of the page whether or not to view the ESA terminal frame on the page editor whether to activate the Invert option or not view or hide the images of structures graphically decide if wanting to inherit the Hard ware configuration decide whether it should show the messa ge regarding conversation for old programs or not display or not display the panel image in the simulator enable or disable pop up windo
251. contai ning a list of the Audio Files inserted inside the project will appear ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 272 Chapter5 Project Explorer Embedded Resources Comment lt ilk From this list it is possible to insert new ones by clicking the Add key to duplicate or to eliminate the existing ones by clicking the Duplicate and the Delete keys the Tools key allows modifying the columns structure at will while the Modify key allows entering the General property editing mask by clicking on the Including Resources editing area the Include as a resource inside project check box will also appear by setting True the file just downloaded will be avai lable inside the project Embedded Resources Comment lt iili gt Add Edit Delete Duplicate ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 273 Project Explorer General sina Name Alarm Comment In the General sub mask the Audio File name and com ment can be edited Properties Properties File Name C Documents and Settings mlanza Desktop Alarm mp3 Format mp3 CJ Embed as resource in project 2lay Stop The Properties sub mask shows data relating to the Audio Files settings e Properties e Listen Stop In the Properties section the Audio File can be loaded can be associated to Alarm Select file to be loaded by clicking on the Load key and by choosing desired fil
252. containing all the system messages that are displayed Messages are displayed for each project language entered Some messages are unchangeable by the programmer while others are contained in editable fields When editing these strings be careful not to introduce special characters reserved for the system e g In any event it is always possible to delete the changes made to the translation by clicking on the appropriate button Clear Translation Use the Project language button to access the editable list of languages already described in this paragraph see chap 5 Languages page 166 a Note In ESA terminology system messages differ from alarms in as much as the former are simple messages set into Dialog Boxes or masks for entering information while the latter are connected to events correlated to system variables e g flat battery insufficient space on disk etc ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 135 Project Explorer F Keys Global This mask allows the user to define a global mode of behaviour for all F keys of a virtual or physical keyboard System alarms System messages Timers Timers events Keys defined in this panel Global Function Note By global mode of behaviour we mean that the key will make it possible to effect the configured function independently of the page being displayed on the panel while by local mode of behaviour we mean the execution of the fun
253. ct double click the voice Tag from the Project Tags option Project Explorer O 280 88 Project PCClient_ ETH1 Tags Ww Tal Project I b HwConfiguration f PCClient_ ETH1 Ca SwConfiguration fz Tags 7 E Languages and fonts li t Pages el PopUp pages DB Frames Alarms Recipe types g Users and passwords S Data archive Scripts 3 Global script E E Lists a ra Images a Advanced Tag Project PCClient_ ETH1 Tags Tag From the editing area the features of the tag to be monitored can be observed on the General mask The tag must be the Network type ideri ahin Hane Tag Comnet Address Tree Ristevark Tag thang O Aloe the tagr value bo be shored Hiraugh the irtranetiinterrest Mura CoTr Aetrork Hierber Network We will now examine the previously created network project Project which contains the two sub projects just shown ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 109 Managing the project Project Explorer G8 2800 88 etProjecRTi0 5 6Ps P2 ETH WetworkTase Ea NetProject B p ITLOFTESP1 SP2 ETH1 a NetworkTags ITLO5S 5P1 3P2 ETH1L a NetworkTags z Tag NetProject ITLOSS SP1 S5P2 ETHL WNetworkTagsTag From Explore project double clicking the voice Tag from the Network Tags option the editing area is accessed On the Link mask the features of the tag to be
254. cted after clicking on o remove a field in the Recipe type simply select it and click on Delete Recipes General Fields Events Delete Duplicate The Recipes option allows you to view all the recipes ina project There are also buttons for adding new recipes and cancelling and duplicating existing ones Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode It is possible to associate an event script to each Recipe you have created by clicking the Browse button on the right ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Users and Passwords Chapter 5 Project Explorer General Fields Rees AA eee ield Reci Buttons OnDownloadComplete s OnDownloadError Access Acces OnRecipeCreate Cy cS OnRecipeDelete A H ioli Functions Scripts associated to this event OnRecipeLoad OnUploadComplete OnUploadError Parameters of the selected function script O Store the return value into The event is activated according to the condition of the recipe The conditions are listed in the table Events associated with recipes see chap 6 Events related to Recipes page 292 Password configuration Within a project you can define authentication levels to maintain control of access to specific areas The purpose of this feature is to distinguish and control the level of operational freedom for each user in the cours
255. ction Aligns the object in the m TREN selection with the top see Agn Top chap 6 Alignment of objects page 469 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 D7 Layout of menus Table 10 Functions of the submenu Layout gt Align Koli Path Menu Description of function Aligns the object in the a Angne Bottom selection with the bottom al Aligns the object in the m B m G AGN are selection with the middle Aligns the object in the ii re selection with the left HA Aligns the object in the B ANgM e CEntre selection with the centre Aligns the object in the aD PGR Se RIONE selection with the right Submenu Arrange Horizontally Right Center Left Vertically Top Middle Bottom Table 11 Functions of the submenu Layout gt Arrange Icon Path Menu Description of function Arranges the object in the Arrange gt selection horizontally see Horizontally chap 6 Arrangement of objects page 472 i Arranges the object in the arangece AE selection to the right ii Arrange gt Centre Arranges the object in the selection to the centre ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 28 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Table 11 Functions of the submenu Layout gt Arrange Icon Path Menu Description of function Mil Arranges the object in the Arrange cher selection to the left Arrange gt Arranges the object in the Vertically selection vertically Arrande g
256. ction of the manual dealing with the transfer of recipes between the terminal and the device see chap 6 Operations for transferring Recipes page 443 Table 3 Functions relating to recipes Function Description Loads a recipe of a particular type POLYMATH requires that the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command refers be speci fied The user is offered a choice be tween the list of available recipes in runtime LoadRecipe ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix B Predefined functions Table 3 Functions relating to recipes Function DownloadRecipe Buffer DownloadRecipe SaveRecipeBuffer ClearRecipeBuffer DeleteRecipe UploadBufferRecipe Description Allows downloading recipes buffer from terminal to PLC or device POLYMATH requires the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command refers to be specified and whether the transfer should occur after synchronization or not By pressing this key in runtime the buffer is down loaded to the terminal Downloads one or more recipes to the terminal POLYMATH requires the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command refers to be spec ified and whether the transfer should occur after synchronization or not By pressing in runtime the key associated with this func
257. ction only in the context of the current page see chap 5 F keys Local page 174 A predefined function or a user Script can be associated with any key simply by double clicking on the table in the corresponding row or by selecting and clicking on Put should you wish to delete an already existing association click on Remove after having made the selection ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 136 Chapter 5 Project Explorer If you choose to introduce an association with a key the following dialog window opens zipi x pa To add a function just click on Add Function and choose the function required from the list which appears by clicking on the line just created three times or on the f key similarly by clicking on Add Script the Script to be associated can be chosen Up to 2 functions Scripts can be introduced for each key and these will be executed in the order indicated to change the order of the functions just move them with the Move Up and Move Down keys To delete a function just select it and click on the Delete button Should a predefined function be chosen to associate with the global key the lower part of the window can be used to indicate the data related to a correct execution of this e g file name name of objects etc Should a Script be chosen to associate with the global key it will be possible to choose to save the value returned by
258. curs when there is an increase decrease lower than the value specified within the threshold period There must also be a dead zone value for each threshold expressed as a percentage value of the level referred to the attributes dead zone and value can be associated to another variable Let us now seek to clarify how Variation speed thresholds work by using an example To make it easier to understand we will avoid using the dead zone the concept of which has already been expressed in the course of the explanation of the Level threshold concept Let us set 30 as a reference value and 5 seconds as the checking time Clicking on the appropriate box we shall activate the low Level threshold assigning 10 as the value This means that the event onThdDevLo see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 is launched each time there is a decrease of at least 3 10 of 30 in an interval of less than 5 seconds In the same way the event returns to rest when there is a decrease of less than 3 seconds in a time interval of less than 5 seconds Similarly if we set a high threshold we will leave the reference values unchanged 30 and the checking time remains 5 seconds Clicking on the appropriate box we shall activate the high Level threshold assigning 50 as the value This means that the event onThdDevHi see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 is launched each time the value of the variable increases by at least 15 50 of 3
259. d Trendy Log viewer Active alarms viewer Historic alarm viewer Users directory Recipe directory Recipe editing Chronotherm Schedulers viewer BBB 860060 0UR46 Holyday group viewer Table 8 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Complex controls ete Path Menu Description of function Complex controls Adds a one touch push button gt One touch to the page see chap 6 button Complex Controls page 400 Complex controls Adds a double touch button to gt Double touch the page see chap 6 button Complex Controls page 400 Adds a frame to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Complex controls gt Frame Adds a trend to the page see chap 6 Complex Controls page 400 Complex controls gt Trend ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 24 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Table 8 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Complex controls Icon ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Path Menu Complex controls gt TrendXY Complex controls gt Logged on users displayed Complex controls gt Active alarm table Complex controls gt Alarm history table Complex controls gt User list Complex controls gt Recipe list Complex controls gt Recipe editor Complex controls gt Chronothermostat Complex controls gt Schedulers Complex controls gt Holiday Groups Description of function
260. d by the relative software remaining with one s own PC comfortably connected to the panel in fact the panel will be the means for connection between different de vices and the corresponding software see chap 11 Passthrough page 724 Email and text message alerts Polymath allows mana gement of event or alarm notification through text mes sages and E mail It is possible to match a personalised text message and or E mail for every single event or verification of a specific alarm condition Through Poly math it is also possible to restrict sending of such com munications to user groups based on specific time slots or days of the week see chap 5 Remote Notifications page 246 Dictionary In Polymath a practical utility is also avai lable for the automatic translation of text in 36 langua ges with a database of 400 000 words short phrases and technical terms It will therefore also be possible to make one s project international with minimum effort being able to start from any of the 36 supported langua ges to automatically translate the text in all the langua ges necessary see chap 5 Languages and Fonts page 166 The created dictionaries may also be shared on the network with other Polymath installations see chap 3 Shared Dictionary page 36 Additional Polymath functions include ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Horizontal or vertical terminal direction Project documentation A
261. d once this is selected the name and path of the destination file I mportRecipes Imports the recipes contained in a CSV j P or XML file on the terminal Makes it possible to export to a CSV or XML file all the recipes of a certain type POLYMATH requires the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and ExportRecipeType changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command refers to be spec ified The operator can indicate the name and path of the destination file in runtime ExportRecipe Makes it possible to export to a CSV or XML file all the recipes whatever their ExportRecipeAllTypes type The operator can indicate the name and path of the destination file in runtime Ends recipe transfer POLYMATH re quires the type of recipe see chap 5 StopRecipeTransfer Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command re fers to be specified StopAllRecipe Interrupts all current recipe transfers Transfers ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix B Predefined functions 749 Functions relating to pages Table 4 Functions relating to pages Function Description Shows next page follows order of page ID numbers If this command is on a Pop up page the next Pop up page is shown ShowNextPage Shows previous page follows order of page ID numbers If this command is on a Pop up page the previous Pop up page is shown ShowPreviousPage Displays page def
262. d so we are certain that it is the Script activating it now The control and activation code uses the object ESAALARMMGR as indicated by the following rows If a gt 4 Then ESAHMI ESAALARMMGR RaiseAlarm Alarm End If We can also run other instructions within the same condition such that when we change the value of the variable and launch the Script other changes will be applied too For example we change the text the color and the blinking of the label object ESACNTRL remembering to invoke the Draw method related to the label and the background of the page object ESAPAGE as set out below If a gt 4 Then ESAHMI ESAALARMMGR RaiseAlarm Alarm ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL Label TextValue ValueError ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL Label AreaColor RGB 23 123 43 643 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 644 Chapter 9 Scripts ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL Label BorderColo r RGB 54 245 13 ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL Label BorderBlin k 2 ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page ESACNTRL Label Draw ESAHMI ESAPAGE Page AreaColor RGB 25 25 25 End If Finally we re establish an admissible value for the variable with the following instruction ESAHMI ESATAG WriteValue Tag 2 The final code inserted in the POLYMATH editor is the following 5 PEEEEEEE a THRA BL Label Bordarhilink s BL Label prawd deers Wak aE i a ESAHHI ESAHHI ESABMT ESAMMT ESAB
263. d for the project and that available on the terminal s supports is Shown the operator can see if there is enough space on the panel to hold the project files and if there are problems an error message is shown Project components status C Use automate allocator Orive Hard Derk Rages N A MA Hard Cetk pager Help Him Aa Hard Beak help Images L20Kb L20Kb Hard Desk migi Configuratior Sk sikb Hard Disk configh Races MA MA Hard Derk recipes 1 LOK Loe Se Hard Donk Err Lag Him Aa H rd Brak Tih Thea a ab Edk Edi isea Pinel J Updabe all i Update oldest only Finally in the lower part there is a list of project components the more recent of which compared with those residing in the terminal are highlighted in pink The support and the path used for saving the files of the related section can be shown or the operator can decide to let POLYMATH automatically allocate the component on the physical supports available on the panel At this point all the elements on the panel firmware project and all the other components can be updated or to save time only those elements requiring updating because the currently used version is more recent than that of the elements in the terminal ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 518 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Runtime transfer of firmware files in the currently used version of POLYMATH Pages files containing information abo
264. d in runtime by the related Start function called up by the button or Script see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 The object ESATIMER page 574 otherwise the related count or control will not be initialised The duration attribute also takes on various meanings depending on the operational mode specified If the Mode is One run or Normal it represents the trigger time in tenths of a second 0 disables the Timer If the Mode is Single alarm it represents the date trigger time in ANSI C format number of seconds from time 0 0 0 of the l January 1970 the data can be selected in POLYMATH using an convenient calendar window If the Mode is alarm time it represents the trigger time in seconds after midnight assigning a inadmissible value disables the Timer and is flagged to the operator by means of an error dialog box The value of direction indicates the counting mode of the Timer this may be arrived at by increasing the count variable or decreasing it this choice has no operative consequences on the working of the Timer but merely on the internal count value ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 277 Project Explorer A Warning These types of Timer are software timers so it is preferable to avoid using them as clocks Timer Events You can associate an event function or script to a particular condition of any timer you have created These conditions can be e OnSus
265. d or Broken The val BorderStyle ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock ne ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 410 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Editing a TrendView After inserting a TrendView into a page just double click on it to edit The default object is a Trend Graph see chap 6 Properties of a Trend Graph page 412 that can be accom panied if the programmer wishes by a series of control but tons for displaying the Trend Editing is organized through two masks Fields and General E FE f E a E So amp gt 32 amp p i 3 DCBBEGEREGEREGGGEREG00605 reePpitp te ttenteys ei i Rates eS oe H i i S a oo oe SE ee ee ee eee The Fields mask allows you to indicate which buttons have to be present together with the table and position them in the ar ea Each button has properties which can be edited in the Properties Editor as happens with normal touch buttons see chap 6 Touch Button page 373 To add or eliminate a but ton just click on the list of buttons present to the left of the table If an object is already present in the page it will appear highlighted within the list it will be visible in the Table Edit Ar ea
266. d the Warn if the value introduced is incor rect option see following image Input limits on Tag value M Enable Min Max El ae M Advice in case of wrong input Type Complete Page for both limits x Complete Page OK CANCEL for both limits ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 145 Project Explorer from Project Explore click twice on the main page and then use the mouse to drag the Tag inside the page o9e8e88eceo Doaa aaa BIE Bo 8 ceous 9081 5 98080a a0 8600 iB esoasa D 0 B 908 OG a00 0a8 Ty Propertio fi fw configuration E ri PaO TSP SPs OTe THs TH Canhigquratan LF Tzs 7m g Languages and forks al E Pee T nig ry iz Peplip pager At this point click on the Esegui Progetto Perform Project icon D the following image will appear e ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 146 Chapter 5 Project Explorer By clicking on the Tag the editing keyboard will appear from where a value can be assigned to the tag itself For example by entering 150 on the editing keyboard and confirming using Enter also on the editing keyboard a warn ing will automatically appear under the form of a Popup page where the user is warned of the fact that the value being introduced is a higher value that the maximum limit set which remember is 100 You are writing a value hagher than limit Do you want bo continue At this point the
267. den Polyline Line Colour Line Size Hidden Regular Polygon Area Colour Area Visibility Line Colour Line Size ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 334 Chapter6 Properties Editor Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Hidden lI mage Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Numerical Field Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Rejected Characters ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Disabled Hidden Mile Separator Dynamic Text Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Disabled Hidden Ascii Field Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Text Flashing Text Colour Text Horizontal Alignment Text Vertical Alignment Disabled Hidden Symbol Field Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Chapter6 335 Properties Editor ESAPOLYMATH User Manual
268. device to change the operating status of the VT that is send commands The Command tag function and the Response tag have the same layout and are generally made up of four words Tabella 1 Command Tag Structure and Response Tag Word Description COMMAND _ID contains the code of the command requested executed pL PARAMETER_ 1 first parameter 4 PARAMETER_ 2 second parameter es 4 PARAMETER_ 3 third parameter The panel will execute the requested operation relative to the value of the Word corresponding to the COMMAND_ID and where necessary use the parameters indicated in the remain ing 3 Words The COMMAND _ID of the function command ar ea is set at 0 by the VT when it is able to process a command free area 765 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 766 Appendix D Command area To send a command the device must e check that the COMMAND _ID is at 0 e compile the parameters e set COMMAND _ID of the response tag at 0 e set the command in the COMMAND _ID The VT executes the command and when it has finished puts any parameters into the response area and then puts the command code executed into the COMMAND ID of the re sponse tag In addition it frees the command tag by putting O into its COMMAND_ ID If the command cannot be executed or there are errors in any parameters in the response tag the VT will put the value OXFFFF all 16 bits at 1 into the COMMAND _ID and puts the non executed command code int
269. dilnen ep atone core Leng of thee Liar serereg muri ba 14 chanh Le hegre fave gure DEYIN A bre Canar devia pa kA iar Dg bie Cancels fees pi Sabre eye jinbet Deepa lke ppap la hatim Bii largh of he Pimieerd rt be 214 thanh Lureedie erate bet la Pirre irer rikere Jla batten Laer 5 He ee Stet Paced WB eee wane Pasar fevess E arima Once the texts have been added just click on OK to save the changes made or on Delete to delete them There is no default translation but POLYMATH furnishes the same text the one introduced for the main language for all the languages Note There is no particular limit for the translation of secondary languages their length may exceed that of the reference language Note While programming with POLYMATH the display language for the project elements e g labels and buttons can be changed simply by selecting the required language from the Display gt project language menu or the option from the tools menu if the field has been set to be present in both cases the changes will be immediate and all the objects will be displayed in the required language ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 168 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Character fonts Fessusossnsuseannsnsassnenapasnenenesnsnanasnenaensnensensnenasnsnensensnenssssse iv iSystemTimesNewRoman i Times New Roman System Font Vv SystemWingdings Wingdings System Font v SystemFangSong_ESA FangSong_ESA System Font
270. dvanced user management Scheduler Network projects between panels The Manual Conventions used in the Manual Chapter 5 Introduction e Remote project download e Advanced handling of objects This manual is designed to be a constant guide for ESA s cus tomers describing and explaining the different features that the software offers It is aimed at the average user of ESA products guiding both first time users of ESA products and those already familiar with previous versions of the configura tor The principal concepts and the method of use related to each topic and operative feature will be illustrated using appropri ate examples and screenshots The information contained in this document is subject to change without prior notice and do not represent any obliga tion on the part of ESA elettronica S P A All products are trade names registered by their respective owners To make it easier to consult the manual and make the topics dealt with simpler to understand we will use symbols that it would be useful to learn from the outset The table below lists all the symbols that are used in the fol lowing chapters of this manual Tabella 1 List of conventions used Symbol Meaning Indicates a navigational path in this case it means the user should click File gt New consecutively on the File and then New buttons Indicates that there is a note notes are often inserted to provide sugges tions or clarify com
271. e We also enable the association with a page to be displayed when requested by the user after the alarm has been raised for now we will assign the first page General alarm settings A series of general options relating to managing the alarms can be accessed by clicking twice on Alarms in Project Explor er While we will leave the masks relating to the resources and the behavior of the alarm buffer memory unchanged we will make changes to the Priorities mask AlaverePrmrty Paia Ere TIEN GS alae ret Creer Fir EUT Pah Alar narty Sete T ay Br a In this mask we will indicate the colors to be used to represent in the pages showing the alarms with complex controls the instances of the alarms that have FatalError priority like the one defined in the project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 668 Chapter 10 Tutorial Phase 6 Defining recipe types Signals used to inform the operator Enable a signal and move it to the desired position O Raised Alarms Mv Message O Diagnostic Alarm O Banner Message A Left 35 a vr Top 0 Page to show Pages Start v Priority AlarmPriority Error C Image IconSimpleAlarm 00 lt Buzzer settings M Enable Buzzer Minimum priority that will trigger the buzzer In the last mask we select the option Message and set the same priority FatalError that we set for the alarm we defined In this section we ca
272. e POLYMATH program NAL Utility gt Updates control Allows a document to be created with the specifics of the project Utility gt Project documents ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 39 Layout of menus Table 17 Utility functions menu Menu path Utility gt Panel converts Utility gt Device converts Utility gt Remove Tags Variables not used Utility gt Crossed reference Utility gt Shared Function description Allows the conversion of a panel Allows the conversion of a de vice Checks if Tags Variables not used are present in the project Finds all components used inside the project Configured only components are not included in the research Displays Tags shared on the network Utility gt Show Displays the Tags occupied in NA Memory the device memory Utility gt Update operator terminal Utility gt Edit Find Replace scripts 1 Icon Not Available This function allows you to re store a backup file and execute additional backup before resto re This function allows you to han dle fine edit and replace Scripts in a project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 40 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Update control The Update control option allows verifying if online there are more updated Polymath versions compared to the one instal led Web update E Ol x This wizard checks if there are updates available
273. e W 7 W7 8 9 10 9 10 MemoryAddress 4 4 array_var 4 var_ array_var 4 EEE emaa me W 17 waris MemoryAddress6 MemoryAddress6 array var 2 var_ array var 2 Phase 4 Having defined the Hardware and Software structure as well General as the data areas of the job variables we now also provide configuration the general work settings for the terminal of the VT G Tutorial LS HwConfiguration ef a eTe m CA SW Configuration ags in Oy T 9 Languages and fonts 5 Pages e PopUp pages DB Frames Alarms Recipe types Og Users and passwords S Data archive Scripts 3 Global script i Lists x fs Images Ce a Advanced E zi ttl For this we double click on the name of the terminal in Project Explorer in our case this is VT595CE Setting the main window Here in the VT section the window is again arranged in masks We go to the Main Window mask where we can set our general preferences regarding the appearance of the project in runtime ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 664 Chapter 10 Tutorial Editing page default grid size Width 5 H ight apbans O show focus Be Use STP kephoards bd Hide Taskbar O Show mouse cursor OF Beep on key press E Show confirmation messages Persistent Gata Flush Tnkeval rin i gl Edit mode idle timeout sec 10 Helo pagas fork System homal Tahoma m In our example we have decided to specify the dimensions of the grid as 5
274. e a Description containing the string excessive temperature ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 201 Project Explorer TFORNOF F 03d C if the variable TFORNO has a value of 150 it will be displayed as excessive temperature 150 C The Property mask also asks you to specify the type of alarm the following table explains the types of alarm available Tabella 2 Types of alarm Event type Description simple event this is not an Simple event alarm but an information message alarm event requires acknowledgement on the part of an operator triggers an ISA sequence F f 200 The lower part of the mask is used to set a series of parameters relating to the behaviour of the alarm It is possible to decide e to permit acknowledgement via global cumulative acquisition e to include the alarm in the Alarm History e to attribute a lag in seconds before the alarm is signalled to the user in the tables or by means of messages If the alarm is terminated within this interval it is not signalled e that acknowledgement of an alarm instance should provoke the acquisition of all the instances of this type of alarm e to enable external acquisition via a project variable If so it will be necessary to define a reference variable and the bit value to be checked You can choose to have the bit reset automatically after its remote acquisition ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 202 Ch
275. e device memory by a device side process If this is not the case by assigning device limits a value will be read on the terminal within the range set also when the tag on the device assumes values outside of the interval Once the relative box has been enabled it is possible to manually insert the limit values or assign them dynamically by ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 144 Chapter 5 Project Explorer combining them with those of tags This last option can be performed by clicking on and selecting the tag from the drop down menu that will Occur as a consequence It will always be possible to access the creation modification of the tags directly from this mask Limits Input limits on Tag value O Enable Min Max O Advice in case of wrong input Type Complete Page for both limits Complete Page OK CANCEL for both limits Input limits on device value O Enable Min Max 00 Another option that can be found in the Limits option is the possibility that the user is warned when an incorrect value is attributed to the Tag This option is activated by selecting the Warn if the value introduced is incorrect box When the option is activated a warning will appear under the form of a Popup page every time that the value attribut ed to the Tag is greater or smaller than the previously set lim its After having enabled and set the minimum and maximum limit and having selecte
276. e the but ton See figure By clicking on I Layout gt Align gt Center the horizontal mid points of all the figures selected are aligned with one an ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 472 Chapter 6 Properties Editor other at the level of the horizontal mid point of the lowest positioned object in our example the button See figure By clicking on a Layout gt Align gt Right the right edges all the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level of the right edge of the rightmost object in our example the button See figure Arrangement of objects When there are at least three objects in a page the operator can use the tools supplied by POLYMATH to obtain their auto matic arrangement these tools can be accessed directly via the Main menu Layout gt Arrange or via the respective icons of the toolbar as described below Objects are arranged within a page by taking as a point of ref erence the distance between the first two objects in the page For vertical arrangements the reference is the distance be tween the first two objects encountered scrolling the page from top to bottom for horizontal arrangements the refer ence Is the distance between the first two objects encountered scrolling the page from left to right ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor The following subsections offer simple examples which take into consideration only three to
277. e when the mouse key is released POLYMATH will draw the basic structure for us ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 705 Tutorial GRP General Hein ceos ers Events Pans Properties Mouse pointers 282 541 While keeping the graph we have just inserted selected we move to the Properties Editor to edit the graphic properties of the trend area employing the usual methods To maintain a graphic unity with the rest of the project so far edited we set blue as the color for the area and the border which again is 5 pixels wide and in Bump style 11 06 29 11 06 29 11 06 29 11 06 29 11 06 29 11 06 Internal editing takes place as with the other complex con trols just double click on the area of the trend to be able to edit ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 706 Chapter 10 Tutorial In this case too it will be possible to choose from the left hand list the buttons and fields to be displayed on the Trend simply by clicking on them if the button chosen has already been inserted it will be removed For example we insert the Zoom and GoTo buttons that allow us to select the position of the graph For each of the buttons inserted we can edit their respective graphic properties trying always to maintain a homogeneous style within the project 0 11 18 22 11 18 22 11 18 22 11 18 22 11 18 22 11 18 24 Editing the Trend chart We can now go on to edit the basic element of the trend view er
278. e 49 Properties of ESACNTRL Touch area Properties ControlLeft Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the area has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 626 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 49 Properties of ESACNTRL Touch area Properties ControlTop Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object that is the rectangle containing the bar has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Typ RW Control Defines the width of the currently Width drawn area Control Defines the height of the currently Height drawn area Methods of ESACNTRL Touch area Table 50 Methods of ESACNTRL Touch area Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer Table 51 Properties of ESACNTRL Slide potentiometer Properties ControlLeft ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the button has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Chapter9 627 Scripts Table 51 Prop
279. e Border which can be Solid or Broken The val BorderStyle ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 425 Properties Editor Table 57 Properties of a Trend Graph XY Properties Description Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Indicates the way the Trend display is UpdateMode updated automatically with a change of value or on command Indicates the refresh period of the RefreshTime ee trend expressed in milliseconds HorScaleVisible Indicates whether there needs to be a horizontal scale Indicates the way the scale should be displayed The Date alone the Time alone both or tenths of seconds can be represented HorScaleMode Active if the type of scale envisages HorScaleDateFormat the Date and permits its format to be specified Active if the type of scale envisages HorScaleTimeFormat the Time and permits its format to be specified HorScaleLabelFont Indicates the Font for the label texts of the horizontal scale Indicates the color for the label texts of the horizontal scale these can b
280. e Completed appears Backup amp Restore O Backup Restore Hard Disk24123 EBK E RunTime Project T History alarms recipes trends variables Restore Completed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 546 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Click OK to go back to Control Panel where the project just loaded can be launched by clicking on Start ESA Application Downloader Configuration E ContfalPanel It s possible to execute backup restore operations on both HMI and PCs Such function is in Main Menu Strumenti gt Utilita downloa der gt Backup Restore Tools Options ud Sqaod Utilities b on Translations gt AJGA J al wa bs iB i Tags gt Recipes gt Alarms gt Dictionary gt Backup Restore Backup Restore YToactw Backup Restore YTood with Modem Bootloader for IT and XT Bootloader for YTxxxV in DIRECT mode Bootloader for YTH in ASSISTED mode 4 ETH1 ETH2 gt rs USB1 USBZ b By clicking on Transferring files Backup source project the following image will appears ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 547 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Perel family tt re QO vr In the next window you can select the family of the panels IT PC or VT Wizard O fackup O Gackue Panal Format only cina Type M Project D husene O Recipes O Legs N
281. e Edit menu Kol Path Menu Description of function Modify gt Annul Annuls the previous operation ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 18 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Table 2 Functions of the Edit menu ete Path Menu Description of function Modify gt Repeat Repeats the following operation Edit gt Cut Cuts the object selected Edit gt Copy Copies the object selected Edit gt Paste Pastes the obj ect that has been cut or copied Edit gt Cancel Deletes the object selected Script Menu Find Go to line Comment Uncomment Indent Cutdent Table 3 Script menu functions ete Path Menu Description of function ae Script gt Find Finds a specific string in the script l HF ot Script gt Go to line Directs to a specific page in the script iio C Script gt Comment Allows to insert a comment in the script Script gt Increase Increases the re entry of the re entry text in the script Script gt Reduce Reduces the re entry of the text re entry in the script RI Script gt Eliminates a comment from the Uncomment script ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 19 Layout of menus Fields menu Co Go A Select Move editing area Connect Move port Create Create Table 4 Functions of the Fields menu Icon Path Menu Description of function Fields gt Select Selects the object clicked on after pressing Fields gt Move
282. e can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Allows you to specify the vertical cen tering of the text within the Label The TextVAlign value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible It is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable for changes in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock not TextMaxLen Determines the maximum value in re lation to the length of the text string TextMultiLine Determines whether the Label text can start a new line Determines whether the translation of TextTranslateDisable the Label text must be disabled Determines whether automatically to distribute the text uniformly within the TextAutoAdjust Label this causes a resizing of the La bel in relation to the text contained in Runtime Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement iene aoa a Tag to the Direct move ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 319 Properties Editor Table 22 Properties of the Label Properties Description Complex label A Complex label can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Complex label This icon or Menu option is active only if it is within a
283. e identifying number ID of a trend GetTrendlid whose name is known provided as input parameter for the method Used to enable or disable Trendid the trend in practice Long operates on attribute Enabled Enabled Requires as Boolean input parameter the trend to edit and the value to be attributed 1 enabled 0 disabled The object The object ESAPAGEMGR offers functions and methods for the ESAPAGEMGR global management of pages within the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax similar to ESAHMI ESAPAGEMGR ShowNextPage Properties of the object ESAPAGEMGR accessible from the SCrip Table 14 Properties of the object ESAPAGEMGR accessible from the script MELO PEES S Resch htc N A Leuren adea ne eny code e the identity code of the integ RW Language current language in use ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 SAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Chapter9 581 Scripts Table 15 ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method ShowNext Page ShowPage ByName ShowPage ByNumber Show Previous Page ShowHelp Page ClosePopUp PageBy Name ClosePopUp PageBy Number Description Shows the next page following order of page ID number Shows the page identifying it by the input parameter needs a string containing the name of the page to be passed Shows the page identifying it by the input parameter needs an
284. e in a single field the Index Variable determines the choice of Tag the value of which is displayed by the Indexed Variable A Attention the Tags must all be of the same type while the Index Tag must be the Integer type Below is an example illustrating this ESA FlunTines Sinulation INDEX TAG Index_A a Semulstion is stopped The above image shows the Run time of a simple project where we have created 7 Uinteger Tags called al a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 and a7 to which we assigned values 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 and 70 we then created an Index tag an Uin teger tag called Index_A the values of which can be betwe en 0 and 6 in this example there are 7 tags assigned the values 0 6 By attributing value 0 or 3 to the Index tag ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 156 Chapter 5 Project Explorer the Indexed tag displays the value of Tag al in this case 0 and a4 30 respectively INDEX TAG m a3 Index_A 0 a4 INDEXED TAG o o ja ESA RunTime Sinwalation Togi Sidi Hri Projet Tage mnla poet rag Para 1 sa wee a io Booo me Ede vaka warchint moet une al Sandin i shopped Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Editor Events in Extended mode You can associate each Variable with an event function or script by clicking the Browse button on the right OnIniti
285. e keys and by selecting the various present check boxes e From what row of the list the variables import should be started e Select the individual variables to be imported e Select all variables to be imported by clicking the Se lect all key e Uncheck all variables to be imported by clicking the Un check all key e Overwrite the already present variables inside the project or not e After how many errors the variables import is stopped After having made the selection the following screen is obtai ned by clicking on the Import key Tags Import Choose the tags to import Starting importing from row Scheduler_Ste INTERNAL Scheduler_Stc INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL Tag_INT INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL HolidayGroup_ INTERNAL Scheduler_Ste INTERNAL Scheduler_Stc INTERNAL SYS_AlarmNo SYSTEM mvm sirim som meee O O O O O O O O O Select all Deselect All O Stop importing if encounter sere msm srin som 37 SYS_AlarmNo J ki O Overwrite existing var errors Import Cancel If everything is done correctly there are no error reports ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 164 Chapter 5 Project Explorer PLC Format Tags Import Excel format PLC Format After clicking Next and selecting the file to be imported the following screen is obtained Tags Import DB 101 StorePrintData Tot DBW Word DB 101 StorePrin
286. e of the label should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking BoreerBung If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method RGB RW Defines the color of the internal area of the label currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 603 Scripts Table 31 Properties of ESACNTRL Label Properties Description TextValue Defines the value of the text currently written on the label Can be varied by providing a new string and the on screen update happens after the Draw method has been invoked Defines the color of the text RGB RW currently being written on the label Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value TextColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the text of the Int RW label should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking TextBlink If a different value from the pr
287. e of the track values has been 5 divided Used only if the attribute TraclINumRanges specifies a sufficient number of intervals Defines the color of the sample readings and the track lines in relation to the intervals they TracKCOLOrI belong to This is the standard color used for the track icons and the labels on the vertical scale Defines the color of the sample readings and the track lines TTACKCOIONE relating to the interval of track number 2 Defines the color of the sample readings and the track lines TTICKC OJOS relating to the interval of track number 3 Defines the color of the sample readings and the track lines TTACK OIORF relating to the interval of track number 4 Defines the color of the sample readings and the track lines MACKE OTOTS relating to the interval of track number 5 Defines the color of the sample readings and the track lines TrACKCOTOTG relating to the interval of track number 6 TrackValue Specifies the exact coordinate of Long RW Low the bottom margin of the table ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 637 Scripts Table 55 Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Properties TrackMax Samples TrackNum Samples Description The maximum number of tracks that can be inserted in a table buffer This is a read only value Indicates the number of samples currently in the table buffer This is a read only value Methods of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Table
288. e of their work session Using POLYMATH the programmer can proceed to establish access policies for particular features e g access to buttons pages recipe management etc thereby stopping operators without the proper credentials from accessing or editing data in an improper manner Each operator when using the panel must be recognised by the system by entering an identifying name and a password for the appropriate level of access logon operation It is envisaged that only one operator can be logged on and use the panel at any given moment each operator can logout at any time Up to ten access levels can be defined and the lowest level typically level 1 is the one with the highest degree of operational freedom Each user who has not gone through the login procedure will be treated by the system as a level 10 user the lowest degree of freedom and can access only the features available to that level To run an operation of a level 213 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 214 Chapter 5 Project Explorer lower than ten you will be asked to login again using a special Popup page predefined by the system Use POLYMATH to define the initial users levels that is the levels of those present at the start up of the project You can also add or edit users directly in runtime To do this you can introduce into their pages a predefined check called User List see chap 6 User List Table page 436 For security reasons each
289. e operation and the value with which to execute the OR The result of the operation will substi tute the original value of the variable This executes a logical XOR operation on the binary representation of the values must specify the variable on which to perform the operation and the value with which to execute the XOR The result of the operation will substi tute the original value of the variable ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 756 Appendix B Predefined functions Functions relating to pipelines Table 8 Functions relating to pipelines Function Description Starts the pipeline defined according to the settings set out in the editor in POLYMATH the name of the Pipeline to be started must be specified StartPipeline Stops the pipeline defined from work ing in POLYMATH the name of the Pipeline to be stopped must be speci fied StopPipeline When this function is invoked the writ ing of a pipeline defined independently WritePipeline of its settings the writing occurs even if the pipeline has been stopped takes place Functions relating to timers Table 9 Functions relating to timers Function Description Starts the count of the selected Tim i ers need to specify the name of the PPAT nines timer to which the command refers see chap 5 Timers page 274 Starts the count of the selected Tim StobTimer ers need to specify the name of the p timer to which the command refers see
290. e path ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 274 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Audio File Look in 2 My Recent Documents Desktop My Documents My Computer My Network 2 Desktop my Documents Y My Computer 12 232 Documents and Settings gt hedit Project 310 slave Project selection Project selection310 PY Alarm mp3 GCE File name Alarm mp3 Files of type mp3 mp3 The Include as a resource inside project check box is also present by enabling it the file just loaded inside the project will be available In the Listen Stop section it is possible to listen on PC the selected Audio File Timers Timers are tools put at the operator s disposal for programming the execution of certain activities in line with temporal variables calculated directly by the terminal After double clicking on the Timer icon in Explore Project ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 275 Project Explorer Project Explorer 00 aooga Progetto IT110T_Pro SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 P Fal Progetto C4 HWConfiguration IT110T_Pro SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Ca SwConfiguration P Tags amp Languages and fonts Pages PopUp pages DB Frames FN Alarms Recipe types g Users and Passwords S Data archive Scripts 3 Global script Lists E ry Images a a Advanced ty Pipelines a Reports H Remote notification aS SystemKeyboa
291. e se lected using the RGB code or color pal ette HorScaleLabelColor Indicates the frequency with which the HorScaleLabelSkip horizontal scale labels should be in serted VerScaleVisible Indicates whether there should be a vertical scale VerScaleVisible Number of digits to show on the verti Number cal scale VerScaleLabel Number of decimal digits to show on Decimal the vertical scale ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 426 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 57 Properties of a Trend Graph XY Properties Description Indicates how the scroll movement of ScrollType the table should operate may be con tinuous half screen or full screen Length of time periods expressed in thousandths of a second If the value TimeSpan 10000 is entered for example at any point the trend table will display the values gathered in 10 seconds GridHorVisible Indicates whether there should be a horizontal grid GridHorDivision Indicates the number of horizontal di Number visions in the grid Indicates the number of horizontal GridHorMinDivision subdivisions in the grid that is the Number number of horizontal lines between any two divisions Indicates the style of the divisions of GridHorDivisionStyle the horizontal grid may be Solid or Broken line Indicates the style of the subdivisions of the horizontal grid may be Solid or Broken line GridHorMinDivision Style Indicates the color of the divisions of GridHorDivi
292. e settings required to send the Notifiche Remote Remote Notifica tions via E mails Email Sender s name Email s subject SMTP server Port 80 SMTP username SMTP password SMS From the SMS mask it is possible to determine the settings required to send the Notifiche Remote Remote Notifica tions via SMS service ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 248 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Sender s name SMS gateway Port 80 SMS gateway username SMS gateway password Type of SMS HTTP Y User tag user Password tag password Gateway URL extension User Id Identifier tag Destination tag Message tag Unicode tag O Replace Message tag Space Replacement Proxy From the Proxy mask it is possible to determine the settings required to send the Notifiche Remote Remote Notifica tions via Proxy service Notification Users From Explore Project double clicking Notification Users the user list is accessed Clicking Add an unlimited number of different users can be added The name e mail address needed to notify the message and the language can be specified for each user These parameters can be edited modifying the corresponding fields ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 249 Project Explorer Notification Groups All users previously created can be put into one or more groups From Explore Project double clicking NotificationGroups the group li
293. e the acquisition of samples HorizontalCursorPosition represents the time of the ac quisition of the sample when it identifies at least one Sample on the graph Pen Selected field indicating that the Pen is currently selected 411 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 412 Chapter 6 Properties Editor As already described in this chapter another customized label can be added to the complex field see chap 6 Complex la bel page 319 or a dynamic field showing the value of the Trend on the pen see chap 6 Trend Pen page 319 TrendViewer Comment Editing CI Override default grid size Width 10 Height 10 The General mask can be used to insert a name and an iden tifying comment for the TrendView being edited In addition you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of the page see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field Properties of a Trend Graph Table 55 Properties of a Trend Graph Properties Description Identifying name of the Trend Graph Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manua
294. e the selected folder in the structure Procedure for updating operator terminal Final Report Single terminal VT130W Communication port COM1 Baud rate 9600 Activities selected Download Firmware and project File path C Documents and Settings mlanza Desktop 12 ESA4 Elettronica Batch Executor 21 03 2011 1208 Backup_22032011_0908 bin Output folder C Documents and Settings mlanza Desktop ES4 Elettronica Batch Executor 22 03 2011 0321 Save Procedure Finish Cancel Pressing the End key will copy the necessary files to Download the project At this point open the folder where the procedure has been saved or more precisely open the path ESA Elettronica Ba tch Executor xx xx 2011 0859 BatchExecutor bat ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 J 7 Layout of menus Clicking twice on the BatchExecutor bat command will open a Dos window follow the instructions on video the previously saved file will be transferred at the end of the se quence e C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe Please connect the PC COM to MSP port of the terminal operator for PC COM pin use CUCOM11162 cable for PC COM 25pin use CUCOM25F9M adapter CUCOM111 62 cable ECHO is off Go to TRANS PAGE and then select panel port If the panel offers a choice between Modem and PC press on the lable PC ou are now in transfer page ECHO is off ENTER to continue ESC to abort the model of the operator panel any key
295. e with Scripts Table 6 ESARECIPETYP methods accessible with Scripts Method Description GetFirst Returns the name of the RecibeTvpe first recipe type in ama yp ascending order of the IDs set using POLYMATH Returns the name of the recipe type after the one just displayed in GetNextt ascending order of the IDs RecipeType set using POLYMATH Name Requires the method GetFirstRecipeTypeName to have been called at least once The object This object offers functions relating to the management of the ESARECIPEARC filing of recipes in the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC Recipel mport filename xml ESARECI PEARC methods accessible with Scripts Table 7 ESARECIPEARC methods accessible with Scripts Method GetFirst RecipeName ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Structur Name Str Returns the name of the first recipe in the terminal belonging to the type specified Needs as an input parameter the type of recipe whose list is to be examined in chronological order of the insertion of the recipes Chapter9 569 Scripts Table 7 ESARECIPEARC methods accessible with Scripts GetNext RecipeName Delete Recipe RecipeExists Description Returns the name of the next recipe in the terminal belonging to the type specified Needs as an input parameter the type of recipe whose list is to be
296. eOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement oes a Tag to the Direct move ste rone Fina ornoa FinalY Vertical co ordinate Dynamic Text Events Table 27 Dynamic Text Events Event Description OnAbortI nput aes when data input operation is 351 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 352 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 27 Dynamic Text Events Event Description Activated when data input using the Onsegminput keyboard starts OnValueChanae Activated when the value of the Field is j changed using the keyboard ASCII Field An ASCII field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon Ela or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value Fields gt ASCII field After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Field ASCII fields tell the operator the updated value of a particular String variable These fields can also be edited thereby be coming value changing fields The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to an ASCII Field In POLYMATH the value of an ASCII field is represented by a series of dollar symbols that can be substituted by the effective value in Runtime SPPEPES SSH Note An alternative method of creating an ASCII Field is to drag a string variable fro
297. ead zone if the value of the variable is rising ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 151 Project Explorer the event is activated the moment the variable rises above the reference value Let us consider the example in which we put a reference value of 30 without a dead zone In this case if the threshold is defined as a minimum threshold the events will be activated as soon as the value arrives at the value 30 when the value IS rising and as soon as it goes below when the value is falling If the threshold is defined as a maximum threshold the events will be activated as soon as the value exceeds the value 30 when the value is rising and as soon as it returns to a value equal to or less than 30 when falling If we add to our example a dead zone equal to 10 of the reference value 10 of 30 3 the behaviour will be if the threshold is defined as a minimum threshold the events will be activated as soon as the value arrives at the value 30 when the value is rising and as soon as it goes below the value 33 when the value is falling If the threshold is defined as a maximum threshold the events will be activated as soon as the value exceeds the value 30 when the value is rising and as soon as it returns to a value equal to or less than 27 when falling Ll Enabled Value 4 Desdhard 5 Win V a The second type of threshold the Deviation threshold there are two types of this thre
298. eader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Slide Selector pP Note It is advisable to use the SlideSelector rather than a Potenti ometer if the number of choices that can be executed by the opera tor is restricted giving a limited range of options Properties of the SlideSelector Table 43 Properties of the SlideSelector Properties Description mame Sty te arc Semen be unique among the graphic elements wan mnane Determines the color of the Potentiom eter which can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Potentiometer has a background area or should be AreaVisibility transparent a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be man aged with thresholds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 389 Properties Editor Table 43 Properties of the SlideSelector Properties Description Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as Signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determine
299. ean variable dynamic in Runt ime or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock Bee Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement a a Tag to the Direct move sts Movenenintenals ee ornoa FinalY Vertical co ordinate Polygon A Polygon can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Polygon After clicking on the icon click on the page at the points that you want the vertices of the Polygon to appear in POLYMATH will show the preview of the Polygon as soon as the mouse is moved Every click made will produce a new vertex The introduction of the Polygon is confirmed by just double clicking it thereby ending its edit Once a Polygon has been introduced its structure that Is its vertices can be edited after selecting the Polygon and then moving one of its vertices the lines sides adjacent to this vertex are automatically removed by POLYMATH Using this function an irregular Polygon can be created that is one having angles and sides with dimensions chosen at will Regular polygons can also be introduced using the appropriate POLYMATH tool see chap 6 Regular polygon page 315 To define the characteristics of the Polygon they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section
300. eating the list is the usual one double click in Project Ex 671 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 672 Chapter 10 Tutorial plorer on the option ImageList click on Add and then in Project Explorer click twice on the list to be able to edit Identification Name ImageList Comment In the edit mask we leave the name of the list as per default ImageList and click on Add to introduce images to the list NumericLimits F In the Images column of the table we select the image to be introduced from the pull down menu choosing it from those included in the project We add both the images related to the languages ita and eng The procedure for creating text lists is exactly the same as for image lists after creating one with the default name of Tex tList the following situation obtains Identification Name TextList Comment Il livello dei pezzi basso Il livello dei pezzi medio Il livello dei pezzi alto Il livello dei pezzi altissimo We now add 4 texts relating to the value of a variable for ex ample we insert the following strings The level of pieces is low The level of pieces is normal The level of pieces is high and The level of pieces is very high Each string inserted needs a translation in all the languages of the project thus in our case we have to provide a translation in English To insert the
301. eceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the font to use for writing RW the text Can be edited by FontFace inserting the string relating to the Name name of the Font one of those included in the project The change will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines the size of the label text RW Can be changed by attributing the FontSize required value The change will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 604 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 31 Properties of ESACNTRL Label Properties Description Defines whether the label text is shown in Italics 1 or in Roman 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the label text is shown in Bold 1 or in Roman 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked FontBold Defines whether the label text is shown underlined 1 or normal Font 0 If modified using a Script Underline the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the label text is shown barred 1 or normal 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked FontStrike Out Methods of ESACNTRL Label Table 32
302. ect option we get into the following window from which it s possible to edit the following properties A Falih Ton hRet bens Poin RCE SAA Taxt propera Bahaviour Aor Ti Pi L it EEL Ven Appe ranis FontField Seem Tahal Tahoe p Gres color pressed Ga H Area color released ampe nso Area visibility E Border blink Quen 3 Border color presand Border color released U Border wisibility el Border size E Boarder style Splid x Button J0 E ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 284 Chapter 6 Properties Editor By clicking on the Text Property option we can get into the following window from which it s possible to edit the following properties Cit TouchGutton ee ea Le Text Blink Ho Birk Text Color Text H Align Gh dle Tast Y Align DER By clicking on the Behaviour option we can get into the fol lowing window from which it s possible to edit the following properties al operties PHEA Listof Texts Label Image Eyer Behaviour Citable T m bode Password level 10 Tab index 0 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 285 Properties Editor By clicking on the option Text List we can get into the fol lowing window from which it s possible to edit the following properties Edit Touchiuttorn List of Texts Text list value 6 Text list Pyne By clicking on the Label option we can ge
303. ect ed Table 9 Events assignable to Timers Event Description Activated when the Timer is suspended OnSuspend by means of a stop command OnTimerFired Activated following the completion of the Timer count OnTimerStart Activated when the Timer count is started OnTimerStop Activated following a stop command to the Timer Events related to Trend Buffers Table 10 Events assignable to Trend buffers Event Description OnBufferClear Activated when the buffer has been emptied Activated following the admission of a OnBufferFull new sample if after the reading the buffer becomes full OnBufferOverflow Activated when the buffer is full anda new sample has arrived A new sample has been admitted Not OnSample generated for the trend buffers as signed to a tag array Activated following the admission of a new sample and the filling of the buffer has reached the warning level see chap 5 Buffer page 222 OnWarningLevel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Managing a page Chapter6 295 Properties Editor Scheduler Events Events regarding Schedulers can be edited by Events Editor EXTENDED mode or by the Events option in the DOUBLE CLICK mode see chap 5 Events page 156 Table 11 Scheduler Events Description Activated by Start Tag assigned va lue present in the Properties sub mask see chap 5 Properties page 200 Activated by End Tag assigned value pre
304. ection gate on the Service page configuration download page of the terminal See hardware manual Video terminal Txxx Downloader Configuration Perform the project Download on the IT terminal When a project is compiled it can be transferred on to the terminal by means of the Download function to start transfer click on the icon d of the instruments bar or on the main menu File gt Download If there are compiled files for the current project version edited POLYMATH will display a window relating to the configuration of the hardware connection machine terminal If however no files are compiled with respect the project POLYMATH will ask the programmer to perform compilation In the window relating to download it is possible to select the terminal to send the project files and the relative parameters to the type of connection to use types foreseen for the IT terminal are e Standard Serial e Ethernet TCP IP e Local e USB e http The USB connection is carried out by connecting using a suitable cable the gates of the machine with POLYMATH installed and those of the terminal see chap 5 Communication ports page 128 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 512 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime If an Ethernet TCP IP connection is chosen specify the parameters in order to carry out the connection as IP address and communication gate that must be configured before
305. ed Compile project it compiles the project By selecting the second option Download files from the panel the following window will appear ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Wizard Chapter8 535 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Download files from panel File name Source directory Destination directory Edit destination directory In the window above there are the following buttons Add file s gt Run the procedure again for new files to add Remove file s gt Remove files and folders in the panel It is useful to get part of the memory free Modify the destination folder gt just change the path of the files File selection Panel files Network G4 Hard Disk H Documents and Settings Hy bin pages help H ESA img G Reports E Documents Client log Filename f V4IRegSvrCE exe V4IUtility dll netIS4PI dll V4IRCSApi dll MSSOAPR dIl MSSOAP1 dll WISC10 dll V4IZLib dll V4IESAaudio dll 4IScripting dll V4IDataServer dll V4IDevMgrExternal dll V4IDevMarInternal dll V4IDataLogManager d V4IDataLogObserver dll V41Pipelines dll V4IExch4reas dll Date time 02 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 02 05 2011 02 05 2011 02 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 11 05 2011 a4 ncs oni4 gt A v
306. ed and for ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 687 Tutorial the background color and the frame of the pop up we select green soe ox a a PopUp_page Page 0000 v Top 180 Left 500 Width 250 Height 200 PageBorder3DEffect Flat PageBorderColor Ez PageBorderEnabled v I PageBColor 0 128 0 PageBorderSize al PageBorderStyle Solid i Our pop up is now ready to accept objects placed in it As al ready mentioned we will start by inserting a label by clicking on A in the toolbar and drawing its outline inside the pop up Using the Properties Editor we now assign the multilanguage text of the label Are you sure you want to quit and Con firm exit from project the font 30 yellow and a color for the background and border of the label both blue as well as the border dimension of 5 pixels and the Bump 3D effect Now the label looks like this ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 688 Chapter 10 Tutorial Mouse pointer 665 600 a Label Label 0000 AreaColor AreaVisibility v Border3D Bump BorderBlink No Blink BorderColor JJ 0 128 255 BorderVisibility v BorderSize 5 FontField SystemTahoma Text re you sure you want to quit The only things missing now are the buttons confirming or canceling the Quit command We create these as set out in de tail for the las
307. ed to the Enter key e All keys The Beep will be associated to all keys e None The Beep will not be associated to any keys ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 252 Chapter5 Project Explorer StandardBlack_ _10_Horizontal Only Enter E StandardBlack_7_10_Vertical only Enter 7 Only Enter All Keys None he o O Add X Delete At this point the system keyboards are available to be used in the project to do this it will be necessary to associate them to an editable field for example a number field manr Edit SunvericAiel d nihicsion n ae wana Num ndi ld Carmine O beck Lata Decimal digis Digis a Keyboard id i l PR iE AscaLow Aeprecentation Decimal mith sig E Asemlawlirrat scalp Tag ed e Tags l E At cal plant w Dabi Tiri E Extendedtow_WVer E Prbend ep var E WurnericLirnit ea ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Keyboards Chapter5 253 Project Explorer To see the result of what was described so far let s click on the Execute project key from the main icon bar ESAPOLYMATH Project Gosaue The Run Time Simulator will appear from which by moving the mouse on the field to edit we will be able to change the value by entering data using the keyboard that will appear mule Keyboards can be customized to enter data having the desired form colour and content so that they can be used for projects in any
308. eference variable whose value is checked Using the appropriate keys Tagld you can create a new variable or edit ing an existing one Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock n t Determines the authorization level re quired to edit the potentiometer value PasswordLevel see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only StartAngle Determines the Knob starting position given as an angle ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 ScaleColorRanges Chapter6 395 Properties Editor Table 45 Properties of the Knob Potentiometer Properties Description SweepAnale Determines the angle in degrees of pone the aperture of the Knob Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using the cursor keys within a page It also controls the or Tabi ndex der in which data is introduced in sev eral fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Determines the color relating to the ScaleValueColor scale of values This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette Determines whether the scale of val ScaleEnab
309. efined function QuitRunt ime To be able to edit the pop up created in the previous section we scroll the Project Explorer list and find it under the option Pop up pages AY Languages and fonts Fages g Popup pages Le Popup page Frames FN Alarms Before beginning to edit the graphics of the pop up we access its general settings present in the General mask The only change to be made in this mask is to disable the option Show the title bar thus there will be no blue bar over the pop up in runtime The other options will be left unchanged If we return to the Fields mask we will find a preview of what the pop up will look like E E H ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 686 Chapter 10 Tutorial Mouse Unlike Frames Pop ups can be freely moved around the screen as well as resized To move a pop up Select it by click ing on in the toolbar and drag it to the required area In our example we will move the pop up to the bottom right hand corner of the page as shown below To make the editing of the graphics easier we enlarge the Brine preview by clicking on the zoom icons A io or in the toolbar We are now ready to edit the graphics of the pop up Repeat ing the procedure employed in the previous section for the button we open the Properties Editor and change some of the options there We enable the outline of the pop up and set a size of 5 pixels for the 3D effect we select Recess
310. eight Defines the height of the object pint fR 606 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 33 Properties of ESACNTRL Image field Properties Description Defines whether the border of the rectangle of the field should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking Border sunk If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the field being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for AreaColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Methods of ESACNTRL I mage field Table 34 Methods of ESACNTRL Image field Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Returns the original value of the horizontal dimension of the image currently displayed within the symbol field ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 607 Scripts Table 34 Methods of ESACNTRL Image field Description Returns the original value of the vertical dimension of GetVertDI m the image currently displayed within the symbol field Properties of ESACNTRL Numerical field Table 35 Properties of ESA
311. elected options in the table otherwise the colours are those in the Fields mask Alarmgroups POLYMATH offers the possibility of organizing the alarms of a given project into Alarm groups this could be useful where a considerable quantity of alarms is envisaged and the programmer wants to have at his her disposal a cataloguing tool for example to speed up the acquisition of many a alarms at the same time Using this mask new groups can be created by clicking on Add or existing ones deleted by clicking on Delete in addition for each group a comment with a purely identificatory purpose for the programmer can be introduced that will be visible only within POLYMATH Usersignals Signals wied te mige the operator Enable a signal and move A to the desired positon bi Reed Alarms hel Meseage hel Diagrecstic Alarm hel Denner Burner tptieags bd Enable Buzzer Hinireur priority thet wil trigger the buzzer AlarmPriority Error a Use this mask to set the alarm signals that appear to the operator The types of alarm messages displayed are e Raised alarms e Simple messages e Diagnostic alarms ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 191 Project Explorer e Banners Once the type of alarm message has been selected by clicking on the appropriate box it is displayed in the preview page in the right hand section of the mask After clicking on the element introduced it can be moved to t
312. elector Properties Description Identifying name of the Selector Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH man nanes pem emanes ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 397 Properties Editor Table 47 Properties of the Knob Selector Properties Description Determines the color of the Selector which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines whether the Selector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border Border3D which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking porcerpunr or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the color of the Border us BorderColor ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able Determines whether the Border of the Selector should be present or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border f which must be a number to which a BorderSize i l l whole variable can be assigned if so desired Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val Bo
313. ellent quality e Good quality e Normal e String compression e High compression Note The images with png extension can be 24 or 32 bit if the image will be imported in 32 bit the transparency characteristics will also be maintained while in case of 24 bit the eventual tran sparency of the image will be lost Operations performable on an image When you are inside Image mask of an image POLYMATH activates a series of icons for graphic purposes that are applicable to the image in question These features are accessible via the toolbar or the image submenu of the main menu To edit it is possible to use the image editor of the window Below we set out a list of POLYMATH utilities related to images e Load image reached via icon Ry or main menu Image gt Load image Allows a new image present in your PC to be loaded you can introduce images in the more common formats e Modify can be reached via the icon or by main menu Image gt Modify Allows the image to be modified 235 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 236 Chapter5 Project Explorer ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Restore image reached via icon or main menu I mage gt Restore image Undoes all changes made to the base image Colour reached via icon isl or main menu Image gt Colour Allows the type of image colour to be selected from the following 3 types namely Automatic Grey tones or Black and white Increase contrast
314. em The first screen allows selection by clicking on the correspon ding Unused tags to be removed Note All variables are selected by default Pressing the Remove will remove unused Tags Wizard Removing unused tags E ak DB_11 DB_NO DB_11 DBB_NO DB_11 EN_R DB_11 ERROR DB_11 LADDR DB_11 LEN DB_11 NDR DB_11 R DB_11 SFCERR DB_11 STATUS HolidayGroup_1_ Month HolidayGroup_1_Year Scheduler_Start_1 Scheduler_Stop_1 SYS_AlarmNotAck Select all Deselect all At the end click on OK ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 ESAPOLYMATH i 16 unused tags have been removed Chapter3 49 Layout of menus Cross reference The Cross reference option allows searching for unused components within all projects from the following window it IS possible to select search criteria Cross reference Search for Free Search Find Replace Page Elements Tags of the project O Scripts Functions of the Project The search criteria are the following e Free search e Find Replace e Page Elements e Project Tags with Check enabled by default e Project Scripts Functions Free search Within Free search it is possible to carry out a search by fiel ds by editing the Name Mask and inserting for example the letter F In the initial page it is also possible to decide if the search is to be completed for the entire project or
315. em Properties of the PC under the option Name of Computer or it must be requested from the network administrator The code c indicates the drive on which the Shared folder can be found A typical example of this function is when exporting recipes alarms or trend buffers directly to a PC so that they can be dealt with more easily To do this just carry out the export by indicating the path NOMEPC c Shared_Polymath file xml ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 528 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime in the Scripts or when configuring the function predefined in POLYMATH Exporting files to various supports After configuring the panel for Ethernet access or for sharing folders this connection can be used for exporting data from POLYMATH projects And therefore it is possible to use the function for exporting and importing recipes alarms or trend buffers to various devices For example to export data to a physical support other than the main disk like a mass storage card or USB key just specify the name of the file including the complete path e g Hard Disk2 fileexportato xml in the destination file path Online tools The function Online tools allows several operations between PC and HMI For example it s possible to up download files between the 2 devices The function Online tools is placed in the Main Menu by cli cking on Tools gt Utility downloader gt Online Tools Tools 2
316. en moment it is possible to add change or cancel elements and connections which are part of project s Hard ware configuration all you need to do is double click on the option Hardware Configuration in the Explore project win dow see chap 5 Project Explorer page 121 the Hardware Configuration window will now appear Grid g CODESYS gy MOTION CONTROL gy MOTOR DRIVE fg OTHERS fg PLC oe Aee H AEG MODICON H ALLEN BRADLEY BECKHOFF H BERTHEL gy CROUZET fg DELTA EATON MOELLER gy GE FANUC lg HITACHI fg KERNEL Sistemi fg KUHNKE Hg MITSUBISHI gy MODBUS Fa wW RTU Master fast peripherals gt l RTU Master slow peripherals z IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH RTU Master fast pe allel U Tad In the left part of the windown all the project hardware ele ments are present while the right part lists all the possible de vices which may be used with the terminal chosen previously Terminal or device addition There are different options to add new devices to the project e Right click the mouse inside the white page then choose Add New Item zoom In zoom uk Add Mew Object e Click on the A key present in the tools bar e Select Fields gt Create from the main menu ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 98 Chapter 4 Managing the project ee 5P1 SP2 ETH A dialogue window will open from where it is possible to select ESA device
317. ents associated to start and end ties type StartEnd v Start Tag StartEnd a Z End Tag Scheduler_Stop w Tp By default the scheduler has two Tags associated to it ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 262 Chapter5 Project Explorer e Start Tag e End Tag It is possible to change Tags adding new ones that have to be of the same type Internal and value Unsigned Long of the default ones Properties Task type StartEnd v Start Tag Tag be Scheduler_Start End Tag Scheduler_Sto TAE ee ee ee Holiday Policy None Clicking on the Modify key will edit parameters of the just created Tag Unsigned Integer Long Unsigned Long Real Initialization Double The Holiday sub mask allows regulating the just created scheduler based on a time period Holiday in which the user needs to change the activity functions set on scheduler for example if user is away for the whole month of August it is possible to appropriately set Holiday option to disable schedu ler for the necessary time period On the Regulate sub mask it is possible to choose among the following options ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 263 Project Explorer e None e Do not perform during Holiday e Separate Scheduling Choosing the None option set by default the scheduler is repeated every day without interruptions L Holiday
318. eout ines tile chard before Tx Retry Uisa tet Probie limig b mig THEE 500 4000 Idle chars before TH DEC 0 100 Retry time sec DES 1 60 ETH Thee p st id ig giniecte SPE The parm it net conmected In this window it is possible to configure the communication method between the panel and the device the parameters can be configured in function of the connected panel and device The bottom of the window shows the range allowed by the protocol for each value inserted MSP ASP SP1 SP2 Protocol timeout msec Idle chars before TH Retry tire 286 The first four parameters are always available in the configuration whilst the others vary according to the protocol used on the gate CAN Bawdrate Boot wp bie ming Sync time msec Cris mice ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 129 Project Explorer DP Ares Length ward ja Timeout LI ser Lod Terminal address erly for terminals wo ETH1 ETH2 Caeway address COM 0 For this communication gate no parameters are foreseen because it can be set via Script Main window General Communication ports f My Boot configuration Exchange areas Components Editing page default grid size Width 10 SS Height 10 aom Options O Show focus O Show mouse cursor V Use SIP keyboards O Beep on key press M Hide Taskbar W Show confirmation messages Mv Use default dialogs size Dialogs size Persistent Data
319. er property For PasswordChar example if you attribute the cha racter to the Password Character property a line of asterisks will appear when inserting the data e g 12345 Tabi ndex Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement cea aaa a Tag to the Direct move ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 356 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 28 Properties of the ASCII Field Properties Description ASCII Field events Table 29 ASCII Field events Events Properties OnAborti nput Activated when data input operation is ended Activated when data input using the AREE keyboard starts OnValueChanae Activated when the value of the Field is A changed using the keyboard Symbol Field A Symbol field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value fields gt Symbol field After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Field The Symbol field serves to indicate to the operator a given im age according to the value of a related variable depending on the value of the variable an image contained in a list of imag es is displayed see chap 5 Image list page 232 For ex ample the image of a led that may be ON or OFF can be shown according to the Boolean variable The reader
320. er clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the button A bistable button is useful when you need to change and memorize the value of a variable by pressing it Unlike a monostable button the bistable button must have two values of a variable assigned to it one for the ON state and one for the OFF state and pressing it changes the value variable 403 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 404 Chapter 6 Properties Editor The library supplied with POLYMATH contains a set of buttons ready for use within the project see chap 7 POLYMATH Li braries page 479 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a bistable button and how to edit it Properties of a Bistable button Table 51 Properties of a Bistable button Properties Description Identifying name of the Bistable but ton Must be unique among the graphic elements wan Wt aivesion pem Het venion Determines the color of the area of the Button in OFF state which can be se lected using the RGB code or color pal ette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds OffStateAreaColor Determines whether the Button has a background or should be transparent OffStateAreaVisibility when it is OFF a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be managed wi
321. er of printable rows in the page This property is neagcneue updated whenever the value of the property FontSize changes Defines the number of columns Int that can be printed in the page Page This property is updated Columns whenever the value of the property FontSize changes ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 641 Scripts ESAPRN methods accessible with Scripts Table 58 ESAPRN methods accessible with Scripts Method Description Starts the print procedure DialogBox and leaves the panel Bool waiting for other print inputs This function needs as an input parameter a value indicating whether the print setup window should be shown If the value True is passed the Options window is shown as soon as this instruction is executed If the value False is passed the print command is sent to the last printer used in the current session or to the default printer if no printing has been performed in the current session The actual printing starts when the method PRNEnd is invoked The method returns 1 if the user has clicked on Ok or if simply it has been decided not to show the DialogBox O if the user has cancelled the operation or there is a negative integer indicating an error code It is important to deal with cases in which a value other than 1 is returned so that no further print operations are run Concludes the print setup phase and sends the data to the printer Interrupts a
322. eral is used to set identifying properties of the Header Footer page The name is a unique attribute within the project that is other different Headers Footers with the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH At the bottom of the mask you can define your preferences regarding editing the Headers Footers You can also specify a ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 246 Chapter 5 Project Explorer unit of measurement as a reference options are centimetres pixel inches or millimetres and the height and breadth values of the part of the page occupied and the depth value of the grid for the edging phase Points relating to print formats XML and Hardcopy When the Print function is called using a predefined command or a Script you can decide to print the Report onto paper or onto file or both In the case of printing onto file the Report specified by POLYMATH is saved onto a physical support of the panel in XML format so as to be able to be displayed on a browser and be in any case kept in a reconstructable digital format For more information on how to carry out this operation the reader is advised to read the chapters illustrating this function see Functions relating to printing page 757 and see chap 9 ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts page 581 Hardcopy printout is an alternative mode for printing the Reports created in POLYMATH With this you can
323. erface it offers a wide functionality range in step with the new requirements on the HMI market The architecture of Polymath is extremely flexible as it allows to program all operator panels in the ESA range as well as de velop supervision solutions for small and medium plants In this way the user can pass easily from an application develo ped on HMI platform to one developed on PC platform and vice versa The concept behind Polymath is to be the switching point be tween the customer and the terminal in fact it is the tool that allows the user to transfer his or her own ideas onto the panel creating projects at different levels of development It is a uni versal software that is it can be used to program the behav ior of ESA Windows CE terminals independent of their particular features and technical characteristics The work performed by Polymath produces a compiled project containing all the operative details of the package created Once the project has been compiled without errors it can be uploaded and installed on the panel which is now ready to use Polymath guides the user at every step of the develop ment of the project from its creation to editing from compi lation to its passage to the terminal Thanks to a very high number of communication protocols Supported with Polymath there are no longer limits to connec tivity both in industrial environments and towards the world of PCs All of the most important commun
324. erties The characteristics of the Rectangle must be set in the Prop erties Editor as indicated in the following section Properties of the Rectangle Table 15 Properties of the Rectangle Properties Description Identifying name of the Rectangle Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 301 Properties Editor Table 15 Properties of the Rectangle Properties Description Determines the color of the Area that can be selected using the RGB code or AreaColor color palettes The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Rectangle Should have a background or if it must AreaVisibility be transparent a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border which can be selected using the RGB BorderColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variab
325. erties of ESACNTRL Slide potentiometer Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the potentiometer has currently been ControlTop drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Width Control Defines the height of the object Height Defines whether the object should Bool be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the border of the rectangle containing the potentiometer currently being redrawn Can be changed by B rdercol i attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the border of the rectangle containing the potentiometer should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking BorderBlink 2 Rapid blinking If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 628 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 51 Properties of ESACNTRL Slide potentiometer Properties Description Defines the color of the internal a
326. ervals in the graphics between hour and half hour e Default value indicates the desired temperature val ue that can be activated by pressing the Default key in the Chronothermostat The system exits the Auto matic mode and passes to Manual mode with the De fault value Script The Scripts that can be activated in this page allow to define the behaviour of the Chronothermostat in the Riscaldamen to Heating or Cooling modes or both Tag script is a service variable that memorises the activation State 1 or not 0 of the Script itself The Type of Chronothermostat indicates which mode to make active in the system e Heating only the system questions the values set and changes the values of the Hot tag e Cooling only the system questions the values set and changes the values of the Tag freddo Cold tag e Riscaldamento e Raffreddamento Heating and Cool ing the system questions the values set and changes the values of the Tag caldo Hot tag or Tag freddo Cold tag according to the system active The passage of activation from one system to another is activated by the Estate Summer or Inverno Winter control present in the Chronothermostat The Tag di commutazione Switch over tag indicates the active state 1 or off state 0 of the Riscaldamento e Raf freddamento Heating and Cooling system Differently the Tag caldo Hot tag and Tag Freddo Cold tag
327. es 731 Example creation of panel s network ccccccccccceesseeeeeeeeees 731 Download the network project ccccccccssssessseeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeees 734 Appendix A System Variables ccccssssssscsccccccssssssssssccssooees 737 Appendix B Predefined functions ssscscccccssssssssssssscccssoees 745 Appendix Status AGC sisapsscscsvcscsscortsedsssessigucenpantiasevesstdessesacaiees 761 VE SUAS Ab Ca eraa cra sussinanaateensei mani iceest eeeaim aie 761 Key bOard Slats Aredia 763 Status area of recipes new style non compatible mode 763 Status area of recipes old style compatible mode 764 Appendix D Command area ccccccccsssssssssscccccccccccssssssssccosses 765 Command area for New Style non compatible recipes 771 Command area for Old style compatible recipes 06 771 Appendix E VTxxxW Panels Managemen cssssseeeeees 773 SOLO RA ROR CMO nts jtn E lesa inode E iene ee Appendix F Update Operating System ssssssssssssseeeees 777 ESAPOLY MATH User manual rev 2 2 ESAPOLY MATH User manual rev 2 2 L What is Polymath What does Polymath do Which POLYMATH version Chapter 1 Introduction Introduction Polymath is the programming software of ESA elettronica de veloped in NET technology with latest generation features Equipped with a modern and complete int
328. es are divided by Manufacturer s Once the selection has been made click on Avanti Next to continue I ixi Device Choose the device to use fi MOTION CONTROL fi MOTOR DRIVE fi OTHERS mm PLC fi 28B fi SEG MODICON fi ALLEN BRADLEY fy BECKHOFF fi BERTHEL fm CROUZET fy DELTA fy EATON MOELLER fi GE FANUC fi HITACHI fi KERNEL Sistemi fi KUHNKE fi MITSUBISHI fi MODBUS E 1 FF acs E E m EL E ernet J2 M CS1 C31 CP1 series A H series HOST LINK fm PANASONIC i SAIA fm SCHNEIDER TELEMECANIQUE x E Finish Cancel i pow P Note the categories proposed in the window differ according to the type of panel previously selected N E Note When a user chooses a device that allows the variables import from database to owner the mask described below will appear and it will be possible to decide whether to import the variables at this stage of the project or to postpone the operation Import tags The device 57 300 400 supports importing from DB Do You want to import tags now O Don t ask again ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Changing elements within a project Chapter4 97 Managing the project All the data required for the project has now been inserted POLYMATH will configure the hardware for the project You will then be able to edit the project accordingly At any giv
329. es of TrendXY can be set on the General mask The ID of TrendXY is an identification number of the data structure inside of the project it is a whole number greater than zero The Name and ID of a TrendXY are alone attributes inside of the project Distinct TrendXY s having the same name or ID number cannot exist ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 227 Project Explorer The comment is a Unicode string visible only inside of POLY MATH Buffer Data acquisition Source X sample TagX_Trendxy v FP Source Y sample TagY_Trendxy v Strobe type On Command v The data acquisition will be performed using a script a function or an exchange area Management Size samples 100 Warning level 75 ne to file J The file will be saved in the FLASH of the terminal If the logs are too frequent the FLASH could be damaged M Enabled at start up Export file Customize file The functional features of the TrendXY and the relative me mory buffer are indicated on this mask First of all as can be seen two distinct tag sources must be indicated and not only one as in Trend since the second variable was the time which will be the object of TrendxXyY monitoring As in the Trend function a value sampling mode must be in dicated The available sampling types and their properties are identical to those on Table 4 and in the successive descrip
330. esides these there are the Zoom options which allow you to edit the dimensions of the display of the objects Show memory displays the Tags occupied in the device memory Eliminating a VT or device To eliminate a VT or a device from the Hardware Configuration window just click on and then on the element to be elimi nated To eliminate it once the object has been selected press the Canc key of the keyboard or alternatively click with the right hand key of the mouse on the element then using the drop down menu that appears click on Cancel Eliminating a connection To eliminate a connection from the Hardware Configuration window just click on and then on the connection line to be eliminated To eliminate it once the connection has been selected press the Canc key of the keyboard or alternatively click with the right hand key of the mouse on the element then using the drop down menu that appears click on Can cel When the application is launched or in the course of the work on POLYMATH you can proceed to work on a project previously saved onto Hard Disk or onto a removable support There are three options for opening a new file click on File gt Open from the main menu click on f l to go to the Home Page of the program Then click on Open existing project 103 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 104 Chapter 4 Managing the project Saving a project Network project
331. ete code of our Script Example 6 Creates printout of list of recipes What follows is an example illustrating the use of the print functions Supposing we want a paper printout of the list of recipes present in the memory of the terminal The logic behind searching for recipes is similar to that used in the previous example Let us first of all initialize the print session using the Start method by providing parameter 1 the Print options window is Shown in runtime before the print session starts To abort the print operation the user can click on the X of the window This control is carried out with an If that checks and where appropriate stops the running of all the other code rows if ESAHMI ESAPRN Start 1 1 Then Now we create a page heading of a title and two blank rows to separate the title from the contents To leave blank rows we ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 650 Chapter 9 Scripts use the method WriteLN passing an empty string Before writing the title we set the font at a higher value which we then reduce to a smaller font for the rest of the page ESAHMI ESAPRN FontSize 16 ESAHMI ESAPRN WriteLN Recipe Lists in the VT ESAHMI ESAPRN WriteLN ESAHMI ESAPRN WriteLN ESAHMI ESAPRN FontSize 12 At this point we instance the read cycle of the recipes saved in the VT using the methods GetFirstRecipeName and GetNextRecipeName Within the cycle we use the method PrintLN to have the name of
332. ev 2 2 366 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 33 DateTime field events Event Description OnValueChanae Activated when the value of the field is 3 changed using the keyboard Bar Field A Bar field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon Pa or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value Fields gt Bar field After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Field The Bar field serves to give a graphic indication of the value of a variable within a Scroll bar guided by a scale of values If the field is editable the operator can change the value simply by moving the pointer onto desired the Scale value The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Bar field Properties of the Bar field Table 34 Properties of Bar field Properties Description Identifying name of the Bar field Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate Determines the color of the Bar field which that can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 367 Properties Editor Table 34 Properties of Bar field Properties
333. evice window E M E 08 TrojechyTS Face Tage Memory Address Ey Project TETT unah A HwConfiguratian Memory Address Urubelway TEM07 S7 47 5 Prarrmum af ane Retresh group Refresh Group i E T SW Configuration Glass 0 as last s possible a 7 Tags Pl Update Device enabled Class 0 5 S00 msec e lass S 5 sec F Hums pett gO Update slwape even when a bag an t Class 10 10 sec Fi Int_var O rad only Fi Real_War Fi STR V r Data Area 7 Tag_internal Word al g 373_CurrentLanguagelo ly eS g oro _Dsteandtime Li Signed Areay_var_2 g aor VARA F aro VARA Languages and fants iiss ed Languages Era Ay Forts For the other variables we will leave the refresh group as pre defined Class 0 as fast as possible Summary of variables and memory area f TS95CE am SS S5WwConfiguration ay Num pezzi a Int_var g Real_Var E STR_Nar i Tag_Internal a SYS_CurrentLanguageID 3 S_DateandTime i 4rray_VAR_2 array_VAR_4 array_VAR_6 G A Languages and fonts We have thus defined 9 variables of different types that we can use as we wish within our project The next table offers a summary also of the use of the memory addresses as speci fied in our work up to this point Tabella 1 Organization of Memory area Address Memory name Variable ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 663 Tutorial Tabella 1 Organization of Memory area Address Memory name Variabl
334. evice addresses Compiling tags Compiling tag groups Compiling tag group 7 300 400 Progetto ITLOST SP1 SP2Z ETH1 Pages Page Z CUPDATE 571 Compiling tag group S7 300 400 Progetto ITLOST SP1 SP2 ETH1 Pages Inizio_ 1 CUPDATE 571 Compiling tag group 7 300 400 Progetto ITLOST SP1 SP2 ETH1L Pages Inizio CUPDATE 5717 Compiling tag group 57 300 4008 Progetto ITLOST SP1 SP2Z ETH1 Pages Page CUPDATE 571 Compiling tag group 7 300 400 8 Progetto ITLOST SP1 SP2 ETH1 Pages Page 1 CUPDATE 571 Compiling protocol frames Compiling pointer header of database Compiling final CRC value of text database Compiling EXT file Compiling INT file Compiling SYS file Building configuration files succeeded EPMCEV4IRTCOMPILER Pets e h c ecco Cet xml Succeeded Idx_Tags xml Idx_Tags xml Succeeded Seripting xml cs5 5 Scripting xml Succeeded Tags xml Succeeded Building Messaging xml Building Messaging xml Succeeded Building Recipients xml Building Recipients xml Succeeded Errors Viewer 8 Warnings Viewer Compiler Output ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 5O2 Chapter7 Other anchorable windows ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 503 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Compiling Downloading and Runtime The preceding sections have provided all the necessary concepts f
335. examined in chronological order of the insertion of the recipes The method GetFirstRecipeName has to have been called at least once Deletes the recipe specified by the parameters as an input parameter Requires the recipe type name the recipe name and a Boolean variable indicating whether the user must confirm the operation 1 or whether deletion is automatic 0 Returns a Boolean value indicating whether the recipe referred to exists 1 or not 0 The test is carried out on thee recipes saved Requires as an input parameter the type of recipe and the name of the recipe to be checked Structur Name Str Recipe Name Str UserFlag Bool Structur Name Str Recipe Name Str ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 570 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 7 ESARECIPEARC methods accessible with Scripts Description Exports the recipes Filename referred to in the input Str parameters Necessary Structur specifications the name of Name the destination file xml or Str csv If an empty string is RecipeList provided the name can be Str assigned in Runtime the recipe type name and the list of recipes to be inserted names separated by the TAB character on the keyboard If one of the two parameters or both is an empty string all recipes are exported without consideration to their type or name Imports the recipes Filename contained in the file xml Str or csv indicated by the
336. exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH As an alternative to the drawing of the dimensions as seen in the previous section you can also manually set the width and height of the frame You can also overwrite the default dimensions of the grid by introducing new measurements Cross references The mask relating to cross references offers the possibility of displaying the list of all the pages using the frame in question This function is very useful for cataloguing the pages that are influenced by the changes made to the frame Properties Use transparent color Background color ia 255 255 255 x Border visibility o Border size 1 Border color E PAo z Border style Border 3D Flat 7 Advanced Use background image o Background image v B ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 182 Chapter 5 Project Explorer The Properties window allows you to determine the graphi cal properties of the frames The Properties window of the Frames option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode The window is in two parts Appearance and Advanced The Appearance section allows you to edit the following op tions e Use transparent colour e Background colour e Border visibility e Border size e Border colour e Border style e 3D border The Use transparent colour and B
337. f ESACNTRL Complex Control Grid Properties Description Defines the color of the Grid ribbon Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value RibbonBack returned for example by the Color RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the text of the Grid ribbon Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value RibbonFore returned for example by the Color RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the cell row selected in the Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB SelBack Long value returned for Color example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the text of the cell row selected in the Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for SelFore l Color example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines how to create the order admissable values are 0 ascending 1 descending ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 632 Chapter 9 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL Complex Control Grid Table 54 Methods of ESACNTRL Complex Control Grid Method Description OUT IN Count Returns the number of Long Column column
338. f the Trends in editable fields Se gt Using this list you can create new Trend buffers and duplicate or delete existing ones For more information on the table and the meaning of the events that can be associated to a Trend buffer readers are advised to consult the next chapter see chap 6 The events relating to the Timers can be edited by the Events editor by keeping the reference Timer in the related list selected page 294 Once a new Trend has been created double click on it in Project Explorer to be able to edit it For this there are two pages General and Buffer as indicated in the following sections Project Explorer is used only to define the operation of each Trend Buffer while the way it is drawn is dealt with in the next chapter see chap 6 Trend View page 407 General Identification Name TrendBuffer Comment ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 222 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Using the General mask you can set the identifying properties of the Trends The ID of the Trend is an identifying number of the data structure within the project it is a whole number greater than zero The name and ID of a Trend are unique attributes within the project that is other different Trends with the same name and number cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH Buffer Data acquisition Source sample Tag_TrendTemp1 EF St
339. f the installation path has not be modified the image Is in C Program Files ESA Elettronica ESAPOLYMATH xml OSI mages IT105 TFIT NK bin Bootloader Windows CE for IT Parameters File name image to send C Program Files ESA elettronica ESAPOLYMATH 1 After selecting the source from the Boot File to transfer press the NEXT button and switch on the IT panel so that transfer can begin Bootloader Windows CE for IT mife x Send File Windows CE image transfer completed Once transfer of the file is terminated the IT panel should be left on until the initial page is displayed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Downloading the image of the Operating System for VT CE Establishing an Ethernet connection Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Bootloader Windows CE for IT oj x Wizard completed Panel is loading the new Windows CE image this action may take between 10 and 20 minutes At this point if the image is different to that already installed connect a Mause USB because the panel will lose calibration Two error Pop ups will display click ok Entering in CONTROL PANEL gt STYLUS it will be necessary to calibrate the touch screen again POLYMATH offers the possibility of transferring the entire Windows CE Operating System image to the terminal This can be done using the main menu by clicking on Tools gt Update OS Image OS in panel The type of connection ha
340. fers C Schedulers C DataLogs TrendBuffersxY C RemoteNotification C WeeklyTasks C HolidayGroups m Mle snan ann ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 42 Chapter 3 Layout of menus while the second one contains all options Document Template Creation Step 1 E Template Contents HW Configuration S F 17107 W SP1 ETH1 oe SW Configuration Tags Complete Pages ScreenShot Pages PopUpPages Images TextLists ImageLists Alarms RecipeTypes Frames Reports Pipelines Scripts GlobalScripts TrendBuffers Schedulers HolidayGroups DataLogs TrendBuffersxY RemoteNotification Tal titaalelseTaelen Cancel Pressing the next button opens a window from which it is pos sible to choose the desired page layout ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Document Template Creation Step 1 Frontispiece O Include Frontispiece main page for HTML format O Author O Company O Project Logo O Company Logo O Document Info Cancel Chapter3 43 Layout of menus By enabling the include title page check box a preview is automatically opened with all default parameters enabled Document Template Creation Step 2 a Frontispiece M Include Frontispiece main page for HTML format Content Preview J Title i Author PROJECT DOCUMENTATION W Company M Project Logo W Company Logo i Document Info Cancel Pressing
341. ffect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 344 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize BorderStyle Keyboardld Representation ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether the Border of the Numeric Field is present or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Defines the maximum number of char acters visible in the field representing the value Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Enabling this option allows you to
342. g log for the file to register the users ac tivity ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 656 Chapter 10 Tutorial Setting global keys We now Set the global keys of the application Their functions come into effect whenever the button corresponding to them IS pressed using either the physical or the virtual keyboard irrespective of the context System alarms System messages Timers Timers events EGSA In our project Fl will be assigned the function displaying the page linked Help in this way whenever the operator presses button F1 the Help relating to the page being displayed will appear Setting timers The last operation of the software configuration is setting tim er to be used to manage a trend see below Lot Tener One Shot 1 7 sac Increase We set a One shot Timer called Timer to last 1 7 seconds with an ascending direction Phase 3 Without doubt data management is the most important as Configuration pect in creating a project for the work of the terminal It is es ofvariablesand sential to have a clear idea of the structure the data needs to Memory areas respect in runtime and how the operator can access them ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 657 Tutorial With POLYMATH internal variables as well as device and sys tem variables can be managed see chap 5 RefreshGroups page 138 It is also possible to manage memory areas dedi cated for example
343. g the RGB code or the color pal ette ScaleValueColor Indicates where the scale of values Should be positioned in relation to the Bar If the Bar is vertical the scale can be positioned to the left or the right if it is horizontal the scale can be above or below ScalePosition Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement iene aa a Tag to the Direct move ste rone Fina ornoa FinalY Vertical co ordinate Slide Selector events Table 44 Slide Selector events Event Description Activated when the value of the Selec OnValueChange tor is changed using the touch screen ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 392 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Knob Potentiometer A Knob Potentiometer can be introduced into a page by click ing on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple controls gt KnobPotentiometer After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the potentiometer Knob potentiometers are useful for introducing a direct control on a variable A continuous representation of the value of the reference variable is given and the operator can attribute any value simply by clicking on the knob indicator The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to
344. g to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the border of the rectangle containing the indicator currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for pOreerColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the border of the rectangle containing the indicator Should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking BoreerBung If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the bar currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the value the indicator refers to Editing this property Value provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 623 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL Indicator Table 46 Methods of ESACNTRL Indicator Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field
345. gap 3 non valid value the cursor is hidden Returns the time Long Time Str GetCursor coordinates of the cursor Position functions only if the cursor is active Saecursor Changes cursor time Long Time Str He coordinates functions only Position l i if the cursor is active Moves display of the table Long Step up Long MoveDown Moves display of the table Long Step down Long MoveLeft Moves display of the table Long Step leftwards Long Moves display of the table Long Step Moyemgng rightwards Ga Long Moves the coordinates of Long Time Str the table to the position indicated by the input parameter Redraws the table Long completely GetCursor TrackValue ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 object ESAPRN Chapter 9 Scripts Table 56 Methods of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Method Description OUT IN Chart Aligns the contents of the Long Alignment table to the right Changes the display times Long RelTime RelativeTo from Relative to Absolute Str Absolute Needs as an input AbsTime Time parameter the times at Str which to run the display Changes the display times Long RelTime AbsoluteTo from Absolute to Relative Str Relative Needs as an input AbsTime Time parameter the times at Str which to run the display ESAPRN puts at the user s disposal simple functions for printing strings on printers connected to the panel A print session can be managed by inserting
346. ge we can begin to insert our check window to insert a recipe editor we click on and draw the outline of the check window on the page POLYMATH will draw the recipe editor viewer with a standard layout By selecting it we open the Properties Editor and set certain general graphic attributes for example we select a color blue for the area and border the width of the latter be ing set at 5 and the type as Bump ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 701 Tutorial Top 17 Left 155 width GET Height aH l AreaVizibility i border Gump Rordier Blok Ho Blink Bankerfalar uy 9 128 255 Bordervisibdkey Bordersine 5 Internal editing of complex controls After introducing the recipe editor and defining its general graphic properties we can start editing the internal compo nents of the check window To perform this operation we just double click on the check window that has just been added to the page The work area will show the Fields mask that is used to change the buttons and the fields and their characteristics see below As we Can see the elements making up this control area are touch buttons labels indicating the recipe type and a grid in which the instances of recipes are inserted in runtime In the left section of the mask there is a list of buttons and labels that can be inserted into the viewer all those already present are default elements so no change is made By selecti
347. ge will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the percentage infill of the object currently being redrawn The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Defines the infill color of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for ECOLO example by the RGB function e g FillColor RGB 24 255 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Defines infill direction of the object currently being redrawn the values may be as follows 0 From bottom to top 1 From top to bottom 2 From left to right 3 From right to left If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 600 Chapter 9 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL Polygon Table 28 Methods of ESACNTRL Polygon Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Irregular line Table 29 Properties of ESACNTRL Irregular line
348. ge will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines infill direction of the object currently being redrawn the values may be as follows 0 From bottom to top 1 From top to bottom 2 From left to right 3 From right to left If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Defines the percentage infill of the object currently being redrawn The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Defines the infill color of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Chapter9 59 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL Ellipse Table 20 Methods of ESACNTRL Ellipse Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Arc Table 21 Properties of ESACNTRL Arc Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn ControlLeft If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels RW counting from the top where the ControlTo objec
349. ged by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the area of RGB RW the internal table Can be changed by attributing an RGB ChartArea Long value returned for Color example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the border of RGB RW the internal table Can be changed by attributing an RGB ChartBord er Long value returned for Color example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Str RW Specifies the exact position of the left margin of the table that is the start time of the table BorderColor ChartTime Left displayed in the format DD MM YYYY HH MM SS mmm ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 634 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 55 Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Properties GridHorLine Color GridHorMin LineColor GridVertLine Color GridVertMin LineColor ScaleHor LabelColor CursorFlag ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Defines the color of the horizontal Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will a
350. ged with thresholds Determines the style of the Border It can be Solid or Dashed The value can be associated to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the Border colour by me ans of the RGB code or the colour pa lette The value can be associated toa whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Viewer border is present or not A Boolean variable can be associated to this value BorderBlink ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Determines the dimension of the Bor der It must be a number to which a whole variable can be associated op tionally or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border It can be No Flash Slow Flash or Fast Flash The value can be associated to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 61 Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Properties Description Determines whether the object is visi ble initially It can also be associated to a Boolean variable for Runtime modi fications or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object can Lock move or not Edit the Chronothermostat After having inserted a Chronothermostat on a page dou ble click it to start its editing A graphic will be present by default which upon the programmer s choice can be accom panied by a range of control buttons to view the Chronother mos
351. ged with thresholds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 454 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 63 Scheduler View Properties Properties Description Determines whether there will be a Border to the Rectangle or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value BorderVisibility Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable could be assigned if de sired or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds BorderStyle Determines whether the object is ini tially visible It is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable for changes in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock not Allows associating and modifying a new Scheduler to Scheduler View Editing Scheduler View After having inserted a Scheduler View on a page double click it to start its editing A graphic will be present by default which upon the user s choice can be accompanied by a range of control buttons to view the Scheduler View The editing is organised on two masks Fields and General Fields AALA General gsar Hato Execute stor Acor user button ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 455 Properties Edit
352. gh a questo punto l utente non potr pi in teragire in nessun modo con il pannello Cor E Remote Display Control for Windows ESA Passthrough Eth T R SP1 T R User has to click on the Stop key to interrupt the Passthrou gh mode Serial port COMMS ee Panel IT105S SP1 ETH1 Address 192 168 100 1 4096 Fort el Device FF Seres FF Sigma Start Passthrough Passthrough Accepted VSP open Passthrough operating PASSTHAROUGH STARTED ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 730 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC After pressing the Stop key user interrupts the Passthrou gh mode and the window can be closed ESA PassThrough Re cil ene FB Liptioy Serial port COM Panel IT1055 5P1 ETH1 Address 192 168 100 1 4096 Fort SP1 Device FF Seres FP Sigma Stop Fassthrough PASSTHROUGH STOPPED ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 12 Example creation of panel s network Chapter 12 731 Panels network Panels network In order to create a panel network first create a number n of single products corresponding to the panels to be connected between them Remember to make available the variables on the network then create a network project that incorporates each single project Download must be carried out only from the network project until the projects are linked between them If n
353. ghts Pipes and Valves Tanks The Library comprises the following categories of objects e Buttons e Swicthes e Lights e Pipes and Valves e Tanks e Motors e Machinery e Images List e Images e Flags and Icons e Various e Keyboards e User Objects e Temporary Objects ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 482 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows Library Explorer q Buttons Switches Lights Pipes and Yalves Tanks Motors Machinery Image lists Images Flags and Icons various Keyboards User objects Temporary objects The library allows you to use objects immediately by dragging them with the mouse onto the page Pantatone mouse 000 1 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 483 Other anchorable windows This window appears after you have dragged an object onto the page You can now edit the various properties of the object as you like Valore 1 Visibilita Background 255 255 255 Sempre Background 1 255 255 255 Sempre Fan 0 255 255 255 Visibile Fan 45 255 255 255 Non visibile Fan 135 255 255 255 Non visibile Fan 225 255 255 255 Non visibile Fan 315 255 255 255 Non visibile Grid 255 255 255 Sempre Sfondo Trasparente al DOUBLE CLICK mode Double click an ob
354. gle of the field currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long BorderColor value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the border of the rectangle of the field should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 5 2 Rapid blinking pore uns If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 617 Scripts Table 40 Properties of ESACNTRL Symbol field Properties Description Defines the color of the internal area of the field currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the field is enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the user can edit it Disable Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the value the symbol field refers to Can be varied by Value providing a new string and the on screen update happens after the Draw method or Refresh Control is invoked Methods of ESACNTRL Symbol f
355. gns the selected element to grid the grid Displays hides the cells to b selected by the Grill on the Touch screen Layout gt Show Hide Touch Grid Layout gt Show Displays hides the pixels of Hide touch the Area on the Touch screen sensitive areas Layout gt Enlarge Enlarges the page display Layout gt Reduce Reduces the page display Makes it possible to indicate the Layout gt Zoom display percentage for the page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 26 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Table 9 Functions of the menu Layout ete a Path Menu Description of function Group two or more elements in Layout gt Group the current selection see chap 6 Grouping of two or more graphic elements page 465 ED sevens gt Separates the elements of a eer group T Layout gt Block Blocks the Blocks the objects pages Blocks the objects pages pages E E Layout gt Un block Un blocks the objects pages Layout gt Re Re dimensions the elements dimension with the collected maintaining the as control pect Using the Layout menu you can also access all the functions for aligning and positioning the elements within the pages This is done using the submenus Align Arrange and Level that are illustrated below Submenu Align Top Bottom Middle Left Center Right DEDEGE Table 10 Functions of the submenu Layout gt Align Icon Path Menu Description of fun
356. h the format HHmmss0O0O Sets date specified in pa rameters parameters con tain date in BCD with the format DDMMYYYY Reads sample block of trend buffer specified by the parameter Clears empties alarm his tory Recipe synchronization syncro_cmd is bit struc tured bit 15 confirms transfer from VT to PLC bit 14 confirms end of transfer from VT to PLC bit 13 transfer time out elapsed Recipe transfer request from VT to PLC The first two parameters contain the name of the recipe 4 alpha numeric ASCII characters parameter 3 is the identifier of the type of recipe The command can only be used for compatible recipes see chap 5 Modes of compati bility a pag 209 Parameters PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER _ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 char PARAMETER_ 2 char PARAMETER_ 3 trend ID syncro_cmd name 2 name 2 type_id 767 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 768 Appendix D Command area ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Tabella 2 Command codes and parameters Description Recipe sent from PLC to VT without overwriting The first two parameters contain the name of the recipe 4 al phan
357. h the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH If the recipe being edited is not defined in a compatible mode you can use the bottom of the mask to choose whether to enable the dedicated exchange areas for the recipe in question If this option is activated it will also be necessary to indicate the command and status areas linked to the recipe see chap 5 Exchange areas page 132 If on the other hand the recipe has been defined in a compatible mode it will be possible to define the status area used see chap 5 Exchange areas page 132 Recipe type fields LC Name None Nome Ricetta Id None Id Ricetta E Comment None Commento 211 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 212 Chapter5 Project Explorer The real structure of the Recipe type must be indicated in the Fields mask Each recipe in the terminal must have the fields Name ID and Comment while other fields can be introduced by the programmer It is precisely the fields introduced by the operator that are the distinctive elements of each Recipe type By clicking on the Add key it is possible to introduce a new field to the Recipe type After having clicked on the key variables already present in the project or new variables can be assigned to the new field using the column relating to the variable by clicking on the field introduced It is also possible to access the editor of the variable sele
358. hap 6 Managing a page page 295 General Fields AAA Help page F Keys Identification Name Start Comment Page number Description 4 Runtime parameters J Jump automatically at the next input field Editing O Override default grid size Width Li Height 10 Using this mask you can introduce the identifying attributes of the Page like Name Comment Number and Description The Name the Number and the Description of the page are unique properties within the project that is there cannot be other different pages that have one of these attributes in common For this reason whenever a page is pasted in or duplicated POLYMATH sees to it that these properties are edited so that they satisfy the requirement of uniqueness The page number can be a whole number greater than O its maximum value depending on the capacity of the terminal s memory the Comment is a Unicode string and it is visible only within POLYMATH A Warning when entering the Description string be very careful not to introduce control or punctuation characters Control characters are those between 0x0000 and Ox001F inclusive that can be introduced using a keyboard by pressing the sequences ALT 000 up to ALT 031 This rule applies in general for all the objects containing the property Description This mask can also be used to furnish operational settings for the page you can decide have the cursor jump automatically t
359. hapter6 441 Properties Editor Properties of the RecipeGrid Table 60 Properties of the Recipe Grid Properties Description wists Denson oFte wath Heit Denson ote remit This field allows the operator to deter mine which columns to put in the table and define their respective properties To edit the columns click on the icon Columns w In the window which appears enter the details relating to their width to the font and to the dimension and for mat of the titles of each column in the table RowHeight Determines height in pixels of each row hock Determines whether the object can Lock move or not Determines the index that the object Tabli ndex l will occupy in the table order Indicates whether the horizontal scroll bar should be present in Runtime when the dimensions of the instances allow for it LetterHeadVisiblity te eal the tables should Indicates the way the instances should be ordered within the table the order HScroliBarVisible OrderMode can be alphabetical chronological or der of editing and Recipe ID order Indicates whether the vertical scroll VScrollBarVisible bar should be present in Runtime when the number of instances allow for it Recipe Editing Table The Recipe Editing table is a predefined element in POLY MATH one that can be inserted into the project pages It al ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 442 Chapter 6 Properties Editor lows the o
360. hat the terminal ae must execute while the second Word indicates the ID of the reci recipe that has to be transferred The meanings of the commands of Word 0 are listed in the ta ble below Tabella 4 Meanings of Word 0 bits of the Command area for non compatible recipes Description If the bit is high 1 it indicates confirmation for transfer from panel to device If the bit is high 1 it indicates confirmation for transfer from device to panel If the bit is high 1 indicates request for non synchronized transfer from panel to device If the bit is high 1 indicates request for syn chronized transfer from panel to device Command area In the case of recipes configured as compatible with the old for Old style style it is not necessary to define a dedicated Command area compatible rather the Command area defined for the project will be used rECIpesS with particular reference to commands 20 21 22 and 23 al ready described in the first part of this chapter ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 772 Appendix D Command area ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix E VTxxxW Panels Ma 773 nagement Appendix E VIxxxW Panels Management In this manual reference has been made to programming the terminals of the VTxxxCE range and the IT range POLYMATH however offers the possibility also to create and manage projects relative to the products in the VTxxxW range It is possible to create new projects
361. he 241 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 242 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Report pages You can define the left right top and bottom page margins You can also define default values for the editing grid of all the pages belonging to the Report then if required the grid can be edited for each individual page in the related General table Report page list Caiit First page of the Raport The Report pages mask displays the list of the pages belonging to the Report Use this list to add new types by clicking on the Add key or duplicate use the Duplicate key or delete by using the Delete key the existent ones In addition existing ones can be edited by clicking on Edit For each type of Report the summary of its characteristics is Shown in editable fields Name and Comment This mask is useful for gaining a complete view of all the Report pages Headers and Footers page Frami DefauhF eote Gefoulttteader Defiutf artar Defauliisadar This Headers and Footers mask allows you to associate a Header or a Footer page or both to each Report page Just assign a Header Footer object to the Report page ID and specify whether this is to be placed in the upper part Headers or the lower part Footer In the following sections we will illustrate how personalized Headers and Footers can be defined Definition of a Report page There are two ways of creating a Repo
362. he Esplora Progetto Project Explore contains all of the da ta relative to the project being edited Its functioning has already been specified in the relative section of this manual see chapter on page In general the editing windows of each element of the Esplo ra Progetto Project Explore will have the same options con tained in the VTWIN application windows Project Explorer 3088 Project v Tuk HW Configuration z C VTS9OSW CAN SW Configuration Pz Tags g Tag Memory areas amp Languages and fonts 5 Pages E start Alarms A Info messages Recipe structure ig Users and Passwords S Data archive Gl Simple commands Touch buttons Q Direct commands ri Advanced commands Equations i Automatic operations Macros ii Lists B Text H Image FN Images G ih Advanced ty Pipelines deh Reports Field keyboards i E Project 775 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 776 Appendix E VTxxxW Panels Ma nagement ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix F Update Operating 777 System Appendix F Update Operating System In this chapter is reported operations sequence to follow with Polymath to update the Operating System Before start the procedure be sure the terminal is turned off and connect with ethernet cable to the PC Be sure subnet mask configurated on PC as follow 255 255 255 0 and IP address is within 192 168 100 2 and 192
363. he File gt Download on the main menu The network panel panels window will display towards which download will be carried out At the end of compilation POLYMATH will display the window relative to the hardware configuration of the machine terminal connection select therefore the type of connection between Ethernet TCP IP or USB Ethernet TCP IP connection In the field device address and Gate insert the IP address and the panel gate whose name is indicated in the box above Insert the password if it has been configured see chap capitolo 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 Click on forward and if the parameters have been configured correctly a download window will be displayed Proceed as for a single project see chap capitolo 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 When the first download is terminated POLYMATH will return to the connection choice conditions if in the project choice window there are two or more selected projects Insert the IP panel address whose name is indicated in the box above and download Repeat operation until the last project USB connection If a USB connection is selected connect the USB gate of the PC to that of the panel whose name is indicated in the box above Insert the password if it has been configured see chap capitolo 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 Click on forward and if the parameters and the connections have bee
364. he PC Communication ports Main window Boot configuration Exchange areas Components Identification Name IT11L0T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Comment Model IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Creation Date 15 06 2010 8 48 43 Modify Date 02 09 2010 10 47 16 Compiling Date 15 06 2010 10 08 11 IT Remote access O Activate IT Remote Access Username Enable Passthrough O spi O sp2 Note When user chooses item SP 1 only the SP1 port is enabled for Passthrough when user chooses item SP2 only the SP2 port is ena bled for Passthrough The SP2 field is editable only when panel has two serial ports In order to be used the Passthrough function requires a sof tware that ESA makes available to users in the Polymath setup DVD see chap 2 Installing POLYMATH page 9 in the Poly math Suite menu under the Install ESA Passthrough item the software Is installed in the same directory as Polymath af ter itis installed the software allows establishing a connection between the PLC development tool and the PLC connected to the IT panel To be able to do this virtual serial ports must be created The ESA Passthrough software allows the user to choose whi ch port to use in order to communicate and to download or upload the PLC program Note It is possible to use Passthrough only with OMRON and PA NASONIC devices ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 726 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connect
365. he area equivalent of 4 ele ments Address Yo MW 7 We now use the Device mask to set as starting memory ad dress word 7 namely the first to remain free as a result words 8 9 and 10 will also be occupied and enable the con tinuous update option as illustrated below Update Device enabled l Update always even when a tag isn t used by any field O Read only In conclusion we use the same procedure to define another two memory areas calling them array_var_6 and array_var_2 respectively and defining their dimensions as equal to 6 and 2 We give the variable array _var_6 the ad dresses from word 11 to 16 inclusive and give the variable array_var_2 the addresses word 17 and 18 Setting refresh times Now that we have defined the list of variables we can go on to attribute particular refresh policies to some of them by ac cessing the list of variables double clicking on Variables in Project Explorer and opening the Refresh Groups mask Refresh Groups Class_0 as fast as possible Class_0_5 500 msec Class_5 5 sec Class_10 10 sec NewRefresh We add a customized group to the list of groups by clicking on Add We will call the new type NewRefresh and set the up date time as 2 seconds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 662 Chapter 10 Tutorial Finally we attribute the group we have just defined to the vari able int_var by acting on the tag D
366. he con tent of the TaskSettimanali WeeklyTasks is displayed the functioning of which was described in the last previous para graph see chapter 7 TaskSettimanali on page Consult the next sub paragraphs to know the details of the properties that can be associated to a Chronothermostat and its editing modes Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Table 61 Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Properties Description Identification name of the Chronother mostat View It must be unique among the graphic elements Comment Identification comment inside of POLY MATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 446 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 61 Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Properties Description AreaColor AreaVisibility Border3D BorderStyle BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Chronother mostat has the background area or if it must be transparent A Boolean varia ble can be associated to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the 3D effect of the Bor der It can be Flat Relief Rec essed Bump or Etched The value can be as sociated to a whole variable or it can be mana
367. he position you want the message to appear in For the first three types of messages the following must be defined for the appropriate icon to be displayed a minimum level of priority a destination page when the icon itself is pressed and the image to be presented on screen which can be selected from among those in the project If on the other hand the type of message is Banner a background and text colour need to be defined as well as a rotation time expressed in seconds in case there should be more than one alarm message The reproduction of a warning sound Enable buzzer audio can be enabled at the back of the mask Configurazione cicalino audia M Abilita cicalino audio Priorit minima che avvia il cicalino audio AlarmPriority Error iGO Tipo di buzzer audio Buzzer z FileAudio Nessuno 7 When this function is enabled it is also necessary to Indicate a minimum priority alarm level so as to cause the sound re production see chap 5 Priorities page 189 AlarmPriority Error AlarcmPriarity Fatal Error iAlarmPriarity Error AlarmPriority Warning It is also possible to assign the alarm to the buzzer or to an audio file See chap 5 Audio Files page 270 AlarmPriority Error a P AudioFile Buzzer ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 192 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Note Audio files can only be reproduced on the IT110Txxxx IT112Txxxx IT 15Txxxx ter
368. her the border of the button should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking serosa If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the button currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 625 Scripts Table 47 Properties of ESACNTRL Touch button Properties Disable Description Typ RW e Defines whether the button is Bool RW enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the pressing it has an effect or not for example the function is executed or the Script corresponding to it Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method TextLabel Provides the text of the label Provides the colour of the label Strin RW TextColor displayed g Methods of ESACNTRL Touch button Table 48 Methods of ESACNTRL Touch button Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Touch Area Tabl
369. hods of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer page 628 Properties and Methods of ESACNTRL Knob Potentiometer The properties and methods of the Knob Potentiometer that can be accessed using Scripts coincide with those of the Slide Potentiometer already described see chap 9 Properties of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer page 626 e see chap 9 Methods of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer page 628 Properties and Methods of ESACNTRL Knob selector The properties and methods of the Knob Selector that can be accessed using Scripts coincide with those of the Slide Potentiometer already described see chap 9 Properties of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer page 626 e see chap 9 Methods of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer page 628 Properties of ESACNTRL Complex Control Grid Table 53 Properties of ESACNTRL Complex Control Grid Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the left where the Grid has currently been drawn If Sones this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the top where the ControlTop Grid has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Int Width Control Defines the height of the object Int Height ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev
370. ia a script setting the attribute OffScan at True see chap 5 Device page 142 Activated when the variable goes On i Line that is when it becomes avail OnOnLine l able again after a break in communica tion Activated when the update of the vari able field is enabled this happens via a script setting the attribute OffScan at False see chap 5 Device page 142 Activated when the peripheral device assigns a new rough value to the vari able therefore also at the startup of OnRawValueChange the project and when the connection with the device is re established The event is always generated before the value itself is transferred OnValSent Activated when the rough value has been correctly sent to the field device ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 291 Properties Editor Table 2 Events assignable to variables Description Activated when a new value is as signed to the variable thus also at the startup of the project and when the connection with the device is re estab lished The event is always generated before the value itself is transferred OnValueChange Events related to alarms Table 3 Events associated with the Alarms Log Event Description OnHistoryFull Activated when the alarm log is full Activated when the alarm log memory reaches the set value by default the OnHistoryWarning warning is issued after 75 records out of the 512 that can be stored on the memor
371. ic calculated by Runtime based on the va lues contained in the Buffer but the limits can also be inserted e By the tag limits the Buffer must refer to a limited va riable see chap 5 Limiti page 145 e Client the Max and Min values must be indicated From a graphical point of view the aspect of the Pen can be established It can be Signal only have an Analogue dash continuous with oblique connections between the values or Digital scaled with digital steps Even the dimensions of the line the colour and the style Solid Dash Dot Dash Dot Dash Dot Dot can be edited at will The pen marker can assume different geometrical shapes Pixel Cross Plus Cross and plus and circle and one can choose to not show the icon relative to the pen Every variation will update the preview at the back of the mask ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 429 Properties Editor Intervals Properties ELLES Color range From this mask insert the values relative to the intervals to which different representation colours can be attributed The interval scale must present values in increasing order Interval Colours Color range Bo 255 0 Bao Boo In this mask a colour can be associated to each of the value intervals described in the Interval mask The colour is applied when the value read by Buffer is contained in the relative in terval Active Alarm Vie
372. ication buses in the in dustrial world are also available Profibus DeviceNet Can and Profinet In Polymath the user may also use tools to import and export recipes alarms translations and variables in standard Excel format other than a dictionary for automatic term translation POLYMATH HMI POLYMATH HMI is the configuration software studied especial ly for the development of applications for ESA terminals in the IT SC and VT range ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 2 Chapter 1 Introduction POLYMATH Advanced Polymath Advanced offers a system of integrated program ming that allows development of applications for the entire range of ESA products from the VT textual terminals on to the high performance products of the IT family to the advan ced supervision projects on PC POLYMATH Premium Polymath Premium is the Polymath license which allows Poly math HMI license holders to switch to the Advanced version The installation of the POLYMATH Premium package allows for use of all the functions offered by the POLYMATH Advanced platform Note For a better knowledge of the functions offered by a particular product please consult the product s technical characteristics on www esahmi com En Main The main Polymath functions include POLYMATH functions e Data and Trend storage Polymath allows to monitor the value in time of any variable through the Data Log ging function allowing to view on screen
373. ice the Varia String Tag ReadElement Single element value of the t name tag s array Integer In dex a Writes from the device the String tag single element value of the Name WriteElement tag s array Integer In dex Variant Va lue Reads from the device the ReadBit single bit value from an array or the numerical Long Inde variable x Writes on the device the String Tag single bit value from an name array or the numerical Long Inde variable x Boolean V alue GetThreshold Gets the code type of the Integ String Type configured threshold e GetThreshold Gets the current state of Integ String State the tag s threshold e Gets the current specific Integ String Tag GetThreshold level state of the threshold er name LevelState Integer Le vel String Tag name Variant Va n Bool String Tag e name Description OUT l n 5 j ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 The object ESAUSERMGR The object ESAALARMMGR Chapter9 563 Scripts This object offers functions relating to the user currently logged onto the terminal The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESAUSERMGR GetCurrentUser ESAUSERMGR methods accessible with Scripts Table 3 ESAUSERMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method Description OUT IN GetCurrentU Returns the name of the Str serName user currently logged in GetCurrentU Returns the level of the Int serLeve
374. ices see chap 6 Operations for transferring Recipes page 443 Recipe list After double clicking on the Recipe element of Project Explorer you access the list of types of recipes present in the project scambio ar 1 Use this list to add new types by clicking on the Add key duplicate with the Duplicate key or delete with Delete existing ones For each recipe type the summary of the related characteristics is shown in editable fields This mask is useful for gaining a complete view of all the recipes present in the project By pressing Tools a sub menu will open with the following functions i Import Export Recipes editor Customize Log File Configuration columns e Import e Export ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 205 Project Explorer e Recipe editor e Customize Log File e Column configuration Recipes Import Export It is possible to export or import a series of Recipes previously created by clicking on Tools then on Recipes from the main menu 710 Gl pow et Utilities Translations Export Import Downloader Utilities Recipes editor Dictionary RECL T Invalid Invalid D REC2 2 Invalid Invalid i E gt Import Options Export Recipes editor Customize Log File Recipe type o Configuration columns O Use compatibility mode for the following recipe type M Expor
375. ide control The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Potentiometer 383 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 384 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties of the SlidePotentiometer Table 41 Properties of the Slide Potentiometer Properties Description Identifying name of the Potentiometer Must be unique among the graphic el ements man Wt avesion peme Heh venion Determines the color of the Potentiom eter selectable using the RGB code or AreaColor color palette The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Potentiometer has a background area or should be AreaVisibility transparent a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be man aged with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No Blinking Slow blink BorderBlink ing or Rapid blinking The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 385 Properties Editor Table 41 Properties of the Slide Potentiometer Properties Description Determines the color of the Border us
376. ield Table 41 Methods of ESACNTRL Symbol field Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Control ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 618 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 41 Methods of ESACNTRL Symbol field Method Description Returns the original value of the horizontal dimension of the image currently displayed inside the Symbol field Returns the original value of the vertical dimension of GetVertDI m the image currently displayed inside the Symbol field Properties of ESACNTRL DateTime field The properties of the DateTime field accessible using Scripts coincide with those of the Numerical field see chap 9 Properties of ESACNTRL Numerical field page 607 Methods of ESACNTRL DateTime field Table 42 Methods of ESACNTRL DateTime Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Co
377. ies using the Proper ties Editor ES 4reaColor 255 255 255 4reaVisibility v Border3D None Flat BorderBlink No Blink BorderColor moe BorderVisibility v BorderSize 1 BorderStyle Solid FontField SystemTahoma KeyboardId None TagId SYS_DateAndTime v Textl Tags v SYS_DateAndTime v Text First of all we change the height of the field setting it at 25 pixels and assign the system variable SYS_DateAndTime set 683 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 684 Chapter 10 Tutorial in phase 3 to the attribute ID Variable by selecting it from the pull down menu We can now edit the graphic aspect of the field like text color we select Yellow and attribute to the font a size of 15 pixels in Bold with the same procedure that we saw for the touch but tons Tagld S7S_DatedndTime TextBlink No Blink TextColor o 255 255 0 TextHAlign Middle Textv Align Middle Finally we choose the color blue for the AreaColor and for the BorderColor for the border we choose as a width dimension 3 pixels and as a style 3D bump AreaVisibility v Border3D None Flat BorderBlink No Blink BorderColor J 0 128 255 BorderVisibility v BorderSize 1 BorderStyle Solid FontField SystemTahoma KeyboardId None TagId SYS_DateAndTime The complete frame will look like this Fields General Cross reference The advantages that derive from using frames are numerous in particular this portion
378. iltro di ricerca il medesimo dell opzione Nome dell elemento inizia con Cross reference M Search By Name M Search By Type Save filtering conditions Search from c O Element s name begin with Mask M System M Internal v Recipe Type MW Indexed i Device All Devices Only in Load filtering conditions Cancel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 56 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained Cross reference lements List NumericField_1 NumericField_1 Element type NumericField Project ITLO7W SP1 ETH1 Pa NumericField Project IT107W SP1 ETH1 Pac Export all Export selected ea Find element From the previously described mask using the appropriate keys it is possible to complete the following operations e Export all Export all objects in the list to an Excel or CSV file e Export selected Export selected objects in the list to an Excel or CSV file e Modify After selecting an element from the list it al lows modifying it within the project e Tree view Allows modifying how elements are viewed from table to tree type e Find element Allows a more detailed search among ele ments that have already been searched e New search Allows carrying out a new search from the beginning pP Note The Project Tags option exclusively searche
379. image page 233 The alarm states to which an image should be attributed are Active Recognised Returned Simple and Diagnostic Priorities The Priorities mask gives you the possibility of managing the set of properties that can be assigned to an alarm As default POLYMATH offers three priority levels to each of which there IS a corresponding value Advice 200 Error 100 and Fatal Error 0 The Add and Delete keys respectively allow you to add priority levels to and remove them from the list the three initial levels predefined by POLYMATH cannot be removed When a new priority is added it has to be assigned a priority value that permits it to be classified relative to the other already existing levels For example if you wish to introduce a priority of a level lower than the three predefined ones we will need to assign a value of 201 or above if you wish to introduce a high priority give a value between 1 and 99 the predefined Fatal Error level is always the one with the highest priority You can distinguish the priority of the alarms in runtime by assigning them different colours in the Table of active alarms or in the history see chap 6 Active Alarm View page 429 and see chap 6 Alarm History View page 434 Use this 189 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 190 Chapter 5 Project Explorer mask to indicate the background colour with the RGB code or a palette and text of the non s
380. in engineering units Using this mask you can determine the type of conversion to be adopted for the variable the conversions that can be selected are none linear quadratic or defined by the user 147 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 148 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Conversion Type of conversion spe z Insert a value in one of the box below the other will be calculated automatically x ae a ok ot se ok Linear conversion implies the definition of two pairs of values each formed of the value of the variable and the corresponding rough value P1 x1 y1 P2 x2 y2 where xn are rough values and yn the corresponding engineering The rough value x and the corresponding value y of the variable in the conversion are related by the following equation Type SquareRoot S x1 ial x2 2 Insert a value in one of the box below the other will be calculated automatically x 59 VF 0 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer The quadratic conversion needs the same values with the exception of Y1 in the quadratic transformation the equation that connects the rough value x and the y value of the variable is as follows In both cases the window situated in the left part of the mask furnishes a graphic representation of how the conversion of the values will take place In addition
381. in the corresponding field Once a participation has been registered and selected using the KJ and f icons it can be transferred to a lower or higher ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 218 Chapter5 Project Explorer level as required If however Delete is pressed the selected participation is cancelled Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode It is possible to associate events functions or scripts to the actions executed by each use for instance log in by clicking the Browse button on the right The event is activated in the various conditions listed in the table Password Events see chap 6 Events related to Pipe lines page 292 User log Export Polymath 2 0 now also allows you to export with a new prede fined function the CSV user log Previous versions of the Polymath used Script The User Log Export function controls access to password protected objects The new Export User Log function can be associated by the Events Functions Editor The event is activated in the various conditions listed in the table Password Events see chap 6 Events related to Pipe lines page 292 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Events Functions Editor Chapter5 219 Project Explorer leg Functions Scripts associated to this event ff ExportUserLog Export ctiveAlarms PasswordAndUse
382. indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Poly gon A Label is a text field may be multilanguage into which you can introduce text strings that will not change in Runtime To define the characteristics of the Label they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section Properties of the Label Table 22 Properties of the Label Properties Description tome signee dames unique among the graphic elements wi Widens Determines the color of the Label which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 317 Properties Editor Table 22 Properties of the Label Properties Border3D BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderStyle TextBlink Description Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as Signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the c
383. indow is presented automatically ETE Tale Espa ol English Deutsch eles MX Select your language of choice This window appears offering several options Polymath Suite Install Polymath version 2 0 BETA Install Downloader version 2 2 Install Remote Access version 1 04 E Documentation 3 Utility Install Software Manual Install Acrobat Reader Install IT Hardware Manual Install OS Images HMI Install VT Hardware Manual Install Startup HMI Software Read Software Manual Install USB Serial Adapter Read IT Hardware Manual Driver Read VT Hardware Manual IT programming cable driver instructions for Win 7 Vista F ESA worldwide subsidiaries a Polimat ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 10 Chapter 2 Installation Select Install Polymath This window appears Select your language of choice and click Next ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard Cinese semplificato Francese standard Select Next ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for ESAPOLYMATH 2 0 thse InstallShield Wizard will install ESAPOLYMATH 2 0 on your computer To continue click ext ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter2 11 Installation Read and accept the license terms and select Next ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard POLYMATH SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT IMPORTANT THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU AND ESA ELETTRONICA SPA BEFORE CONTINUING WI
384. ined the name of the ShowPageName page to be shown needs to be specified in POLYMATH Displays page defined the number of ShowPageNumber the page to be shown needs to be specified in POLYMATH Shows the previously viewed page it ShowPreviousOpened goes back to the previously opened pa Page ge based on opening order and not number Closes only the current pop up page CloseCurrentPopup with the command must be as Page Signed to an element or event of a pop up page Closes the pop up page defined the name of the page to be closed must be defined ClosePopupPage Name Closes the pop up page defined the number of the page to be closed must be defined Closes all the pop up pages currently CloseAllPopupPage open in RUNTIME Shows POLYMATH defined Help relat ing to the page full or pop up cur rently being displayed see chap 5 Help pages page 173 and see chap 5 Help pages page 173 ClosePopupPage Number ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 750 Appendix B Predefined functions Table 4 Functions relating to pages Function Description Shows the focus of the application this function makes it possible to change the general settings relating to the focus in RUNTIME see chap 5 Main window page 129 Hides the focus of the application this function makes it possible to change the general settings relating to the fo cus in RUNTIME see chap 5 Main window
385. ines if the object can move or Lock not StartAngle Determines the Arc starting position given as an angle Determines the angle in degrees o SWeepAngie the opening of the Arc Sector A Sector can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Sector and drawing its dimensions directly in the page To define the characteristics of the Sector they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section rA ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 307 Properties Editor Properties of the Sector Table 18 Properties of the Sector Properties Description tome Sing he arc Sees be unique among the graphic elements wan wistvgimenson Heime hh dmenson Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Sector out line which can be selected using the LineColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible it is also possible to as sign a Boolean varia
386. ing on Add then on the drop menu to choose the type of panel to add 4 Create New Project i lel o x Multi panels project List of panels Add all the panels that you want to use into the project Qotation Quantity Building Ba Industrial IT figy T104 fy T105 fi IT105K B T107 M IT107T COMO SP2 ETH1 IT107T SP1 CAN ETH1 IT107T SP1 DP ETH1 IT107T SP1 PN ETH1 IT107T SP1 SP2 ETH1 IT107W SP1 CAN ETH1 F IT107W SP1 DP ETH1 M IT107W SP1 ETH1 Finish Cancel Una volta scelto il tipo di pannello modificando i campi Rota zione e Quantit sar possibile stabilire il numero di pan nelli da inserire e la rotazione 0 90 di ognuno di questi Create New Project Multi panels project List of panels dd all the panels that you want to use into the project Rotation Quantity IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH1 Add Delete Finish ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 119 Managing the project At the end of the selections by pressing End in the creation Wizard the user will access the HW Configuration page in POLYMATH directly Once inside the HW Configuration the user will have the list of available devices on the right and with a simple Drag and Drop they will be connected to the chosen panels like we have seen prev
387. ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Potentiometer or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Indicates the size of the character of the values written above the numerical division lines Indicates the color of the precision in dicator of the Potentiometer this is se lected using the RGB code or the color palette Indicates the number of subdivision marks appearing between two numer ical divisions These are shorter divi ScaleNotches sion lines than the numerical ones giving greater precision to the repre sentation Indicates the color ranges to be as Signed to given value intervals within the scale By clicking on v you enter an editing window in which the value intervals and their respective colors can be defined the window also allows you only to specify the limits in relation to the scale to be displayed Indicates the number of divisions on the scale of values The number relat ScaleSectors ing to the value above the division is also displayed calculated according to the number of divisions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 BorderVisibility I ndicatorColor ScaleColorRanges
388. ing to transfer it into the terminal The fun ctionality of ON LINE Simulator also allows to test the developed project by connecting the devices to test di rectly to one s own PC such as for example PLC thus allowing to verify perfect operation of the application without the need to have a panel available see chap 8 Project simulation page 505 Indirect addressing The indirect addressing function allows to greatly reduce a project s development times especially if there is need to manage complex projects in which however many pages appear similar to each other Thanks to this function the variables value is de termined in a dynamic way at runtime allowing to de ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 4 Chapter 1 Introduction Sign certain pages just once see chap 5 Indirect Addresses page 154 Project back up and restoring Polymath allows to cre ate a single compressed file containing all the informa tion for transferring or updating a project developed for IT terminals or of a SCADA PC application The file cre ated can be sent for example by E mail to the final user who will then be able to copy it on the device through a simple guided procedure see chap 8 Backup Restore page 536 Passthrough Polymath allows to check thanks to PAS STHROUGH mode a third party PLC such as Omron Host link C 1 CP1 and CS1 and Panasonic FP Series and FP Sigma and to carry out any operation allowe
389. int SYS_ReportName Name of last current report SYS_ ReportPath Directory of report destination Name of the Device Manager to String See Mame which the TAGs are connected a SYS_DM_Active True if DM is active SYS DM Error Last error verified by the Device as Manager Name of the DM configuration file String SYS DM_DBName DEF EXT n SYS_DM_ Groups Number of groups determined in Long Num the project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix A System Variables 74 Table 1 Meaning of System Variables VELEL Description Type SYS DM_Items Number of items determined inthe Long Num project SYS RCS DB Name of the configuration system s String Name configuration file SYS RCS Status Operating status of the first Int 7 communication card SYS_RCS_FW Name of the first card s firmware String Name file SYS_RCS_FW Version FW of the first String Version communication card SYS_RCS_Hw Version HW of the first String Version communication card SYS_RCS_BT Version BT of the first String Version communication card SYS RCS2 Status Operating status of the second Int z communication card SYS_RCS2_Fw Name of the second card s String Name firmware file SYS_RCS2_FW Version FW of the second String Version communication card SYS RCS2 HW Version HW of the second String Version communication card SYS RCS2 BT Version BT of the second String Version communication card SYS NATE_ Operating status of the native In
390. integer containing the page ID to be passed Shows the preceding page following order of page ID number Makes it possible to show the Help defined in POLYMATH relating to the page full or popup currently being displayed see chap 5 Help pages page 173 Closes the popup page indicated in the input parameter needs the passage of a string relating to the name of the popup page Closes the popup page indicated in the input parameter needs the passage of an integer relating to the identifying number of the popup page PageName Str PageName Str ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 582 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 15 ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Description Closes the currently active popup page the one in CloseActive focus does not work if no PopUp popup is in focus at the moment the method is invoked Returns the number counter of the currently open popup pages GetNum PopupOpen Returns the identifying number of the popup page corresponding to the index number provided as an input parameter The index number provided as an input parameter marks the order of the opening of the pages for example if GetPopup 2 pages are opened index Open O identifies the first page opened while index 1 identifies the second page opened It is advisable to use this command when in the programming phase the number of popup opened at the moment the method is invoked can be
391. ion from the PC After the ESA Passthrough software is installed a configura tion window opens below by clicking on the new icon ESA Passthrough which is on the PC Desktop ESA PassThrough DER File Options 7 Source Type SRE PAddess oo o Port 4096 Devices SS Passthrough COM Port COM Panel Port SPI r Inside the File menu the following options are available e Open With the Open item user can load a previou Sly saved configuration file e Save With the Save item user can save configura tion of the selected device on grid Address and Port e Save as saves configuration as a pht file format and customised path ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC e Close With the Close key user exits application if configuration has not been saved the user will be asked if he wants to Save it ESA PassThrough Sieg Options 7 Load Source 5 J Pades oo Port 4098 H Save as Devices SS Passthrough COM Port COM Panel Port SPI Inside the Option menu user can choose between the avai lable languages ESA PassThrough Re Options Italian eames English CO Type ETH UDP a 192 168 100 1 Port 06 H Devices SS ST Passthrough COM Port COM x Panel Port SPI Inside the menu user can see the software versi
392. ional pages thus readers are advised to consult the paragraph dealing with these see chap 5 Help pages page 173 for details of the properties F keys The F keys mask for the Popup pages Is identical to that relating to the traditional pages thus readers are advised to consult the paragraph dealing with these see chap 5 F keys Local page 174 for details of the properties Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode The Events window on popup pages is the same as the one for traditional pages so refer to the same section see chap 5 Events page 174 Popup Page Properties The Popup Page Properties option is visible in DOUBLE CLI CK mode and comes under Properties Editor in Extended mode The Popup Page Properties window is the same as the one for traditional pages so refer to the same section see chap 5 Page Properties page 175 Frames The purpose of the Frames is to edit synoptic diagrams parts to be used in more than one page For example if the project IS Supposed to contain twenty pages and ten of these have the Same group of element e g two numeric fields with a button then simply define this portion once inside a frame and fetch it onto each page Once a frame has been defined it can be introduced into a page simply by dragging it there from Project Explorer to the page in the work area
393. ions Tags d Recipes Sah Downloader Utilities Dictionary By clicking on the Import submenu we will obtain the fol lowing window ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 198 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Select a file 2 x Cereain IT110 Of fe Documenti recenti Desktop 2 Documenti _ Fr Risorse del computer K o ARL IECA Nome file JAlarms xls Tipo file Excel File Annulla After having selected the file to import and clicking on Forward we will obtain the following screenshot Alarms Import 5 xj Import Information Starting importing from row 11 2 Name Activation Typ Activation Vali Tag Priority Alarmo Bit 0 Tag_Allarmi AlarmPriority Alarmi Bit 1 Tag_ llarmi AlarmPriority O Create using a new name From the previous screenshot by selecting the various check boxes it will be possible to choose among the following op tions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 199 Project Explorer e From which row of the list to begin alarm import e Create using a new name After having chosen press on the Import key the alarms will be imported Creating and changing an alarm Once the general characteristics of the alarms have been defined within the project you can begin to define the way the individual alarms should work An alarm can be created directly from the alarm list See chap 5 List page 183 o
394. ions navigation functions and display and edit data func tions The icons relating to these objects can be found in the toolbar and the Main menu using Fields gt Create All the graphic elements have been grouped depending on their function in four groups e Simple Figures e Value Fields e Simple Controls e Complex Controls The next paragraphs contain a list of all the graphic elements predefined by POLYMATH which can be introduced into a page For each property we shall indicate in a schematic way the re lated editable properties and the events that can be assigned to them ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 300 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Warning When planning your project you need to bear in mind that when two buttons on the Touch Screen panel are pressed at the same time this is interpreted as having pressed halfway between these but tons So you are advised to avoid settings that involve this situation Simple Figures The first group of graphic elements to be considered is that of the Simple Figures these can be useful for creating more or less complex drawings or for assigning special effects to the pages Rectangle A rectangle can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple fig ures gt Rectangle and drawing its dimensions directly in the page This procedure enables you also to introduce rectangles with rounded outlines see TypeOfBox prop
395. iously ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 120 Chapter 4 Managing the project ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 121 Project Explorer 5 Project Explorer The principal anchorable window in POLYMATH is the Project Explorer window from which the structure and operations of the project can be controlled In this chapter we describe in detail all the characteristics that can be configured using Project Explorer Project Explorer eaa00aea Progetto vj Tal Progetto 5 HWConfiguration S IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 SW Configuration fg Tags GH a Languages and fonts B Pages T PopUp pages DB Frames Alarms Recipe types g Users and passwords z Data archive Scripts 3 Global script al Lists FN Images a Advanced ty Pipelines is Reports l BZ Remote notification Keyboards f gt weekly tasks t tl H H Progetto The Project Explorer window contains all the editable objects arranged as a tree diagram in which the parent element is always the project to which the Hardware configuration is anchored the ESA terminals with their attributable properties and the connected devices with their related settings Note A single click on an element in the tree selected it while a double click allows you to edit ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 122 Chapter 5 Project Explorer If Project Explorer should fail to appear on the screen becau
396. ipeType variable1 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 ESARECI PEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Chapter 9 Scripts Table 5 ESARECIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method GetTAG Buffer ClearTAG Buffer Description Returns the name of the tag buffer related to a field of the recipe needs as input parameters the name of the type of recipe and the field buffer Clears the buffer of all recipe variables including ID name and comment the numerical variables are set at 0 the strings at it needs as an input parameter the type of recipe Returns a Boolean value indicating whether the two recipes indicated are the similar 1 or different 0 the test is carried out on the versions that have been saved Requires as an input parameter the name of the recipe type and of two recipes to compare Indicates if it is in course and therefore a transfer is active Structure Name Str FieldName Str Structure Name Str Structure Name Str Recipe Namel Str Recipe Name2 Str Structure Name Str 567 The object ESARECI PETYP This object offers functions relating to the management of the recipe types in the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESARECI PETYP GetFirstRecipeTypeName ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 568 Chapter 9 Scripts ESARECIPETYP methods accessibl
397. ipt or at least before using the properties To exemplify this we will analyze the following code lines ESAHMI ESATRENDMGR Trendld 5 a ESAHMI ESATRENDMGR Name ESAHMI ESATRENDMGR Trendld 1 b ESAHMI ESATRENDMGR Name After performing the 4 instructions listed above variable a will contain the name of the Trend buffer with D 5 while variable b will contain the name of the Trend buffer with ID 1 POLYMATH assigns the IDs during the editing of the Trend buffer Table 12 ESATRENDMGER properties accessible with Scripts Properties Description Typ RW e This is a unique code identifying Long drenete the trend selected m tr This is the name of the Trend S buffer selected It is unique in that two Trend buffers with the same name cannot exist Defines the type of variable Long assigned to the Trend buffer Type selected The possible values of this property are 0 Single value 1 Array This is the name of the variable Str SourceTag assigned to the Trend buffer selected This is a code identifying the Long event to start the acquisition of new sample readings for the Buffer selected Possible codes are StrobeType 0 ONTI MER 1 ONSTROBERISE 2 ONSTROBEFALL 3 ONCOMMAND 4 ONTAG ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 577 Scripts Table 12 ESATRENDMGER properties accessible with Scripts Properties Description Used only if StrobeType has a StrobeTag value of 1 or 2 Indicates the name of the v
398. iption Determines the color of the Area that can be selected using the RGB code or AreaColor color palette The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Ellipse out line that can be selected using the RGB LineColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible it is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable dynamic in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or not Determines the 3D effect of the Ellipse which can be Flat Bump or Etched The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether to make a partial Partial Fill color infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the color of the Ellipse infill which can be selected using the RGB FillColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the direction of the Ellipse infill The infill can happen From Low to High From High to Low From Right to Left or From Left to Right The value can be assigned to a whole variable Indicates the percentage of the infill The va
399. ipts 3 Global script E Lists my Images a Advanced ty Pipelines H m Reports 2 Remote notification SS Keyboards W Bk_Ascii_Low_4_5_7_10 Efek Numeric 4 5 7 10 W Bk_Ext_Low_7_10_Hor W Bk_Ext_Up_7_10_Hor f weekly tasks ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor The following image will appear Click on the icon or the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple controls gt Touch Keyboard Button The Touch Keyboard Button allows to insert a touch key for the creation and configuration of a new keyboard After having clicked the icon indicate the area in which POLY MATH must designate the button using the mouse inside of a key The main property of the Touch Keyboard Button consists in the possibility of associating the ASCII code of the symbol to which the button is placed during the creation of the key board Slide potentiometer A Slide Potentiometer can be introduced into a page by click Ing on the icon a or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple controls gt SlidePotentiometer After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Potentiometer A Slide Potentiometer is useful for introducing a direct check on a variable There is a continuous representation of the val ue of the reference variable and the operator can attribute any value by just clicking on the indicator sl
400. is a standard programming language which allows to create own routines Thanks also to Polymath s Intellisense function the user can access a library of specific and powerful functions developed by ESA for its own operator terminals see chap 9 Scrip ts page 553 Project data importing exporting Polymath makes practical utilities available for importing and exporting all data that is used to create a project such as for example recipes see chap 5 Recipe list page 204 alarms see chap 5 Alarms Import Export page 193 lists of variables and text see chap 5 Va riables Export I mport page 157 Polymath also allows to import the variables directly from the PLC database as is the case for Siemens Allen Bradley Omron and Codesys see chap 4 Creating a project in Wizard mo de page 93 Transfer of archived data Thanks to Polymath you ll have the possibility to export any kind of archived data on the panel alarms recipes trend history variable values etc directly on extractable USB drives or on boards such as Secure Digital MMC and Compact Flash using the CSV format It is also possible to use func tions able to transfer also automatically the archived data directly in a remote PC folder through a LAN or FTP connection see chap 11 FTP Server page 721 OFF LINE and ON LINE simulator It is possible to si mulate a Polymath project OFF LINE directly on the PC without need
401. is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Symbol field In POLYMATH the Symbol field value is represented by the first image in the image list will be replaced by the correct image in Runtime ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 357 Properties Editor Properties of the Symbol Field Table 30 Properties of the Symbol Field Properties Description Identifying name of the Symbol field Must be unique among the graphic el ements man Wt avesion peme Hehtvenion Determines the color of the Symbol Field which can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 358 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 30 Properties of the Symbol Field Properties BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize BorderStyle Tagld ControlType ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Determines
402. is composed of Word style whose bits take on the following meanings compatible mode Recipe status word values Tabella 5 Meaning of recipe status word values s Bit Description a3 high bit 1 if there is an error in the transfer aa high bit 1 if the transfer is underway high bit 1 if there has been a transfer re quest ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix D Command area Appendix D Command area It is often necessary for the VTs in a plant to interact not only with the operators by means of the appropriate peripheral devices like touch screens and keyboards but also with field devices so that commands can be received and status infor mation transmitted This information exchange is carried out using special memory areas in the devices called Exchange ar eas These Exchange areas are therefore structures containing various types of information whose meaning and format is set by the VT which are regularly exchanged with the device An exchange area Is a tag area see chap 5 Value a pag 140 of one or more words residing in a field device Command response areas variables can also be used by the VT to respond to a command sent by the device using the Command area To help set command areas POLYMATH has a dedicated sec tion that can be reached using Project Explorer see chap 5 Exchange areas a pag 132 In this appendix we list the Command Areas that can be used by the
403. is necessary to set on the PC a local network with the IT panel setting as IP address 192 168 100 2 and as Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General You can get IP settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address IP address 192 168 100 2 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway C Obtain DNS server address automatically f Use the following DNS server addresses Preferred DNS server i Alternate DNS server Advanced Cancel From the Main Menu click on Instruments gt Utility downloader gt Update Boot Windows CE for IT to start the procedure and follow the instructions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 522 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime POLYMATH will ask for the previously explained IP address to be set and to select the file source from which the program will read the Boot to be transferred During the installation of POLYMATH a file is created on the PC where the images for the operating systems of various ESA panel models are copied ready to be downloaded on to the terminal generally the image files are found in the main directory of the POLYMATH in the path xml OSI mages IT1xx for example for a IT105T i
404. is option is applicable to one and only one Recipe type By compatibility we mean a use of the exchange areas identical to the Mode of functioning of VTWIN programmable ESA terminals A compatible structure uses the command area of the project see chap 5 Exchange areas page 132 and accepts commands from the PLC only with a Recipe name not over 4 characters On the other hand a non compatible structure uses dedicated exchange areas in this case the recipe can have a longer name ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 210 Chapter5 Project Explorer Fields Rows Font SystemTahoma Tahoma o Selected cell Text Color fs EA e Background Color 190 M Column headers Text Color E i00 Background Color Bi I Te M nA SysternTahoma Tahoma o a Name Nome Tipo Type Id Id Tipo Recipe Name Nome Ricetta i Id Id Ricetta Last Change Time Data Ultima Modifica H Comment Commento The Fields mask is used to define the character and colours of the Recipe display tables see chap 6 Recipe List Table page 439 and see chap 6 Recipe Editing Table page 441 Here you can specify the character of the rows the colours of the selected cells the characters and the colours of the column headings The way the editing fields relating to the font and the colours is identical to what has already been indicated for the User table see chap 5 Fields grid page 220 It is up to the programmer to
405. isena e a 83 ANCHOLADIC WInNdOW Sesinin a E T 84 Managing TNE project sassisicossessorececoso tosken e e aaa a eiaa 89 Chocce OL merie noraen ea a a a 89 Double Chek Tater la ee senenn E 90 Extended Tmerri icsi seria te sieberiana Mesias sabonde 91 Changing the type of interface ssseeeessesssssoerresssssssserrrsssssssees 92 Creating a project in Wizard mode noosesssssoerrssssssssserresssssssee 93 Changing elements within a project ssssseseeeesssssssseeeerrsssssssee 97 CPST VOI CC esie nan EE 103 Savne LDOCE aker bier weve ete ceve aeeeasaniews 104 NetWork PRO CCE en ve chiak dtmcstw a sntaadeacaesee nl eaten dee sedeteas 104 Creation of a network project sacedisiweiecinatiiiuniewaMadislodn 104 Server L107 Project wrncostietscatesccten luca a a 107 e Gal Gs ita ah es 0 CE rassar aa oncere inna stern mmr Wenere 108 INGEWOCK Projeccions E teecideaiwecsex 108 ESAPOLY MATH User manual rev 2 2 Compilation of the network project essessssseeessssssssseerrsssssssee 109 Download the network project ccccccccssssssseeeeeeeceesaeeeeeseeeees 111 Mult devic osani a O 112 M h Pane lS acenos a a a tana 117 Project Explorer swecessciceesdedsieusdstealedeserstietsdesesedeusteusdstestesdeeseisessesees 121 Operating on elements within the Project Explorer window 123 SCRUM CNS ANC 2s sisateescceicad a aauennnceesneaane 127 Software Configuration soreta e N 133 V atiaDleS siraan a a E E E E
406. isplay light one discrete step Set the display light to a specific level Read a single samples set Clear the specified datalog buffer content Start the automatic acquisi tion of a datalog buffer Stop the automatic acquisi tion of a datalog buffer Parameters PARAMETER_1 PARAMETER_2 PARAMETER_3 PARAMETER_1 percenta ge of maximum light 0 100 PARAMETER 2 PARAMETER _ 3 PARAMETER_1 buffer id PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_3 PARAMETER_1 buffer id PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_3 PARAMETER_1 buffer id PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_3 PARAMETER_1 buffer id PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_3 Note Commands number 54 55 and 56 are used only for terminals with backlight LED Commands number 14 and 15 require data being written onto the response tag as indicated in the next table ID ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Tabella 3 Response Tag codes and parameters Description Current time the parame ters contain time in BCD with the format HHmmss0OO Current date the parame ters contain date in BCD with the format DDMMYYYY Parameters PARAMETER_1 HHmm PARAMETER_ 2 ssOO PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_1 DDMM PARAMETER_2 YYYY PARAMETER_ 3 Appendix D Command area 771 Command area In the case of non compatible recipes see chap 5 Modes of for New Style compatibility a pag 209 a 2 Word command area is used in non which the first Word indicates the command t
407. ist can be configured using together the Fields mask and Password el ement see chap 5 Fields grid page 220 E Note After inserting a new user in Runtime you will have to change his her password by selecting the corresponding row in the table and then by clicking on Change Password Just insert the new password in the ensuing mask leaving blank the field relating to the old password since the new user does not possess any assigned password Properties of the Password Grid Table 59 Properties of the Password Grid Properties Description wan Dinesonoftiewith pem omenon This field allows the operator to edit the appearance of the table To edit the columns click on the icon In Columns the window which appears enter the details relating to their width to the font and to the dimension and format of the titles of each column in the table RowHeight Determines height in pixels of each row Determines whether the object can Lock move or not Determines the index that the object Tabi ndex will occupy in the table order Indicates whether the horizontal scroll HScrolBarvisible bar should be visible in Runtime E Indicates whether the vertical scroll V S CTOMBATNISIDIE bar should be visible in Runtime ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 439 Properties Editor Recipe List Table The Recipe List table is a predefined element in POLYMATH one that can be inserted into the project pages It
408. istory table see chap 6 Alarm History View page 434 Exports all alarms in the history to a file The name of the destination file and its format XML or CSV need to be specified Exports all active alarms in RUNTIME to a file The name of the destination file and its format XML or CSV need to be specified ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 746 Appendix B Predefined functions Functions relating to users and password Table 2 Functions relating to users and password Function Description Makes it possible to invoke the user log in operation see chap 5 Pass UserLogin word configuration page 213 Makes the window for inserting the user name and password appear in RUNTIME Makes it possible to invoke the log out operation Makes a message of confir mation appear in RUNTIME If con firmed this operation takes the UserLogout session user to default status can also be sent to a certain page each time the log out operation is executed see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 Changes the password of the user cur ChangeUserPassword rently logged in has no effect if no us er is logged on when pressed Allows controlling Password protected ExportUserLog objects accesses see chap 5 User log Export page 218 Functions relating to recipes To have an overview of the way the operations performed by the following functions work the reader is advised to consult the se
409. it the Background colour e Change the rotation default 0 e Change the Mirror In the released page it is possible to change both the featu res of the released button e Area Colour e Area Visibility Library Rotation Kaie a0 Chao Oar 7 Flip O Horizantal C Vertical Layer Background Always Byinual 255 255 255 Always ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 487 Other anchorable windows The following window will appear where it s possible to confi gure all the Pressed button parameters Edit PushButton FAE Ge haviour Event 4rea color Area Visibility The following window will appear where it s possible to confi gure all the General button parameters Edit PushButton eA Behavioui Identification Name PushButton Comment O Override default grid size Width Height ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 488 Chapter7 Other anchorable windows The following window will appear where it s possible to confi gure all the functioning button parameters Edit PushButton x sehaviour Disable Hide Password level Tab index The following window will appear where it s possible to confi gure all the Events button parameters Edit PushButton OnPressed OnReleased OnPressed EXTENDED mode Select the object with a single click of the mouse The P
410. itor and while keeping the button selected assign a function to the event OnReleased by clicking on Events Editor TouchButton OnPressed OnReleased This opens the list of predefined functions see Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 from which we select the function Show previous page after clicking on Add Function as shown below Events Functions Editor Functions Scripts associated to this event tO ShowPreviousPage StopallRecipeT ransters Page ShowNextPage ShowPreviousPage ShowPageN ame x ShowPageNumber CloseCurrentPopupPagel ClosePopupPageN amel ClosePopupPageNumber Close llPopupPagel Once we have clicked on Close in the window for assigning functions we have finished editing the button Following the same procedure explained in this example we can edit all the buttons in our pages We shall now see how to create other buttons using the work just done ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 681 Tutorial Duplicating buttons So far we have only inserted one button into our frame one with the function of invoking the previous page the order fol lowed is that of the IDs set for the pages Now we can create a similar button but one with the opposite function that is Show the next page We need just duplicate the button already created to avoid edit again from square one to do this we se lect the button with the right hand key
411. ivisionNumber GridVerMinDivisionStyle GridVerVisible 255 2599 299 5 Solid 255 255 255 0 Solid 4 255259 299 3 Solid 259 259299 0 Solid v aa 707 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 708 Chapter 10 Tutorial The final option requires great care In the Pens field we click on the button and a new configuration window appears This new window contains the operating methods of the Trend pens that is the different ways the graphs and trend buffers can be drawn The left hand section of the mask is used to de fine any number of pens in our project we shall edit simply the one created by default We can freely modify some of these properties as type of scale we assign the limits of the variable already defined in Phase 3 for the variable of the buffer num_ pezzi We also set the line style as dash dot the marker as a little circle and its color to be dark blue At the bottom of the page we see an example of a preview of how the graph will appear Finally we click on Close to con firm our changes and thereby conclude the editing of the trend viewer ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 709 Tutorial Phase 16 We have now finished editing a simple project that uses all the Compilation basic functions offered by POLYMATH At the end of this tuto and Download rial the reader will be able to be more familiar with the appli cation and re
412. ject Rotazione 9 Oan O1is0 270 Riflesso O Orizzontale O verticale AN F rn A i Pantatore mearen lg 277 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 484 Chapter7 Other anchorable windows This window appears You can define all the parameters of the variables associated with the object Edit Dynamiclmage eA User interface Identification Name DynamicImage Comment Control type First bit Last bit Disable 5 Hide N 7 ImageKeep spectRatio Selecting User Interface and then clicking Edit Edit Dynamiclmage General MARAM ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 485 Other anchorable windows Takes you back to the previous page where you can edit the properties of the object In the same way it s possible to import a button on the page choosing among the several ones available in the library edi ting its properties from the popup windows after double cli cking on the object For example let s import the button Access 2 After double clicking on it the following window appears al lowing to configure all the parameters of the Released but ton Edit PushButton m Eal i zasna ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 486 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows By twice clicking on the Preview key it is possible to e Change the Background colour e Change the Symbol internal colour e Ed
413. ject Ex plorer or list by double clicking on it in the tree chart it can be edited in the work area The properties and events that can be associated to the WeeklyTask object will be treated in the next chapter It is therefore recommended to consult the relative section for the list and meaning see chap 6 Chronothermostat page 445 Generall The General mask shows the data relative to the Chrono thermostat settings It is possible to introduce the identifica tion attributes of the page such as Name Comment and id The different editing fields listed below can be found in the Activation section e State tag it can be associated to a Boolean variable that indicates the switch on state 1 or switch off state 0 of the Chronothermostat scheduling e Tag task indicates the current temperature value e Manual tag is the variable that memorises the tem perature value that can be set in Manual mode e Tag OFF it can be associated to a Boolean variable that indicates the switch on state 1 or switch off state 0 of the Chronothermostat e Start time indicates the minimum value relative to the time scale in the Chronothermostat graphics 257 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 258 Chapter5 Project Explorer e End time indicates the maximum value relative to the time scale in the Chronothermostat graphics e Intervals allows to set the time int
414. ject is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es to a Determines if the object can move or Lock Defines the values to be inserted into the scale By clicking on v you enter an editing window in which the value NumValues intervals and their respective colors can be defined the window also allows you only to specify the limits in relation to the scale to be displayed Determines the authorization level re quired to edit the potentiometer value PasswordLevel see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using cursor keys within a page It also controls the or Tabi ndex der in which data is introduced in sev eral fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Defines the type of display setting for ValueType the scale the display of values can be maintained or a text list can be used corresponding to the values ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 391 Properties Editor Table 43 Properties of the SlideSelector Properties Description Active if the value type is Text List Al lows you to choose the text list associ ated with the values in question see chap 5 Text list page 230 TextListid Determines the color Color relating to the scale of values This can be select ed usin
415. jects is independent and fixed In runtime printing can be launched by pressing buttons to which predefined functions are associated or via User Script see Functions relating to printing page 757 and see chap 9 ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts page 581 Naturally a compatible printer needs to be connected to the panel Using the Report element of Project Explorer you can define any number of Report types Headers and Footers Different pages even ones belonging to the same Report can have Different and customized Headers and Footers Report List Double clicking the Report element of Project Explorer accesses the List of Reports in the project Using this list you can introduce Report Types by clicking on Add duplicate existing ones by clicking on Duplicate or delete them by clicking on Delete In addition existing ones can be edited by clicking on Edit For each type of Report the summary of its characteristics is Shown in editable fields Name ID and Comment This mask is useful for gaining a complete view of all the recipes present in the project Definition of a Print Report There are two ways of creating a Print Report e click on Add in the Report list e click on Add or Add and change on the menu appearing after clicking with the right key of the Reports element in the Project Editor ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Pr
416. k BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased oo On the first click access the immediate colour selection ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 328 Chapter 6 Properties Editor E 4ppearance Name TouchButton Comment Empty value E Position Top 10 Left 10 Width 7d Height 7O 4reaColorPressed 4reaColorReleased 164 175 193 Sreavisibility TRUE BorderBlink No Blink BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased oo With the second click access the direct assignment to Tag B Appearance Name TouchButton Comment Empty value E Position Top 10 Left 10 width 7O Height 70 4reaColorPressed SreaColorReleased 164 175 193 Sreavisibility TRUE BorderBlink Mo Blink BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased oo With the third click access the new Soglie Thresholds item ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 329 Properties Editor E Design Name TouchButton Comment Empty value E Position Top 10 Left 10 width ra Height 70 B 4ppearance 4reaColorPressed 4reaColorReleased 164 175 193 Sreavisibility TRUE BorderBlink No Blink BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased oo The following editing mask will appear by clicking on the icon Sollee 0 x Tipo valore x Tag Io 5091s valori O DEE Wi 0 0 0 1 255 255 255 S Aggiungi x sii i From the previo
417. k AoE Determines the authorization level re quired to access the button utilities see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using the cursor keys within a page It also controls the or Tabi ndex der in which data is introduced in sev eral fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement cn as a Tag to the Direct move ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 PasswordLevel 406 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 51 Properties of a Bistable button Properties Description Bistable button events Table 52 Bistable button events Event Properties OnSwitchButtonOff Activated when the Button is pressed in position OFF OnSwitchButtonOn Activated when the Button is pressed in position ON Editing the Bistable button Once a Bistable button has been added to a page its form can be edited both for the ON state and the OFF state To edit the button just double click on it within the page editing a Bistable button comprises three windows OFF ON and Gen eral The OFF and ON masks can be used to define the graphic ap pearance of the button in its two states Editing these windows works like normal editing for project pages see chap 6 Man
418. l rev 2 2 660 Chapter 10 Tutorial SYS_CurrentLanguagelD and one indicating the date and time of the panel SYS_DateAndTime Defining internal variables We will now also use an internal variable that does not relate to the device in any way It is a variable that works on the ter minal irrespective of the status of the PLC This type of vari able is defined differently from a device variable in that it is not possible to define memory conversion and threshold val ues We use the General mask to specify the name like internal_ var and of course we set the type of address as Internal In addition we enable the option allowing the vari able to be made retentive that is to maintain its value even after the terminal has been switched off In the Value mask we set the type of variable as Integer Defining memory areas Besides individual variables with POLYMATH it is possible to define consecutive memory areas value arrays or indexed variables that can be used for example to define Exchange Areas see chap 5 Exchange areas page 132 To insert these memory areas in a project use the same pro cedure as for normal variables Length 4 Initialization ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 661 Tutorial After assigning a name to the variable array_var_4 we use the Value mask to specify the type like ArrayOfUnsignedI nte ger and the dimensions of t
419. l rev 2 2 Chapter6 413 Properties Editor Table 55 Properties of a Trend Graph Properties Description Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as Signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a BorderVisibility Border to the Table or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val BorderStyle l ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock not Indicates the pens to use in represent ing the trend By clicking on the w key you can edit the types of pen as shown in the next subsection RefreshTime Indicates the refresh period of the trend expressed in milliseconds Indicates how the scroll movement of ScrollType the tab
420. l one ESAPOLYMATH Options i i 101 x Language Shared path E My dictionary Skin Miscellaneous Source 16 05 2012 17 06 55 is equal to the Local 16 05 2012 17 06 55 version Import 16 05 2012 17 06 55 Update Source Update Local X By clicking on the Local Update key the dictionary used in the project will be updated with the one in the network ESAPOLYMATH Options i iol xi Language Shared path E My dictionary Skin Miscellaneous Source 16 05 2012 17 06 55 is equal to the Local 16 05 2012 17 06 55 version Import 16 05 2012 17 06 55 Update Source Update Local X ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 38 Chapter 3 Layout of menus By clicking on Control POLYMATH will verify eventual diffe rences between source dictionary and local dictionary ESAPOLYMATH Options q iol xj Language Shared path E My dictionary Skin Miscellaneous Source 23 05 2012 12 04 42 is equal to the Local 23 05 2012 12 04 42 version Import 23 05 2012 12 04 42 Update Source Update Local Utility Sub menu Check updates Project Documentation Convert panel Convert device Remove unused bags Cross reference Shared tags Show Memory Update operator terminal Edit Find Replace scripts Table 17 Utility functions menu Icon Menu path Function description Allows to check the presence of new software issues of th
421. l And Vertical TagDirectMovement os a Tag to the Direct move Sts Movements re Rona ewaaate ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 463 Properties Editor Once an object has been selected by clicking the FJ button the movement associated to it can be displayed gfaphically Shift the object to the desired position Direct Movement The image shifts to the pre established point Horizontal Movement The image follows the established horizontal movement Tag X ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 464 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Vertical Movement The image follows the established vertical movement Tag Y Horizontal and Vertical Movement a The image follows the established horizontal and vertical mo vements X and Y Tags Operations on For all the graphic elements described in this chapter it is pos graphic sible to perform a series of useful operations aimed at further elements improving the graphic presentation of the project In this section we will give a complete description of practical examples relating to standard operations like grouping align ment and distribution ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Grouping of two or more graphic elements The grouping function is useful whenever you want to deal with a group of graphic elements as a single block so as to be able to perform cumulative operations
422. l user currently logged in The ExportUserLog fun Str ction is used to control ac cess to Password protected objects With this function it is possible to export the user log in CSV format with a new script By opening file xxxxx cSv with excel registrations will be shown of the users which have carried out password pro tected accesses ExportUser Log ExportUserLog script example ESAHMI ESAUSERMGR ExportUserLog xxxxxx csv 2 This object offers functions relating to the management of the alarms in the project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESAALARMMGR ClearAlarm Alarm_ 1 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 564 Chapter 9 Scripts ESAALARMMGR methods accessible with Scripts Table 4 ESAALARMMGER methods accessible with Scripts Method Description Raises named alarm with lag set using POLYMATH Needs as an input parameter the name of the alarm to be acquired Bear in mind that you cannot activate in Runtime the event ON for an alarm whose status is already ON the status must first be changed to OFF Raises named alarm without lag set using POLYMATH Needs as an input parameter the name of the alarm to be acquired Bear in mind that you cannot activate in Runtime the event ON for an alarm whose status is already ON the status must first be changed to OFF RaiseAlarm Forces the named alarm setting its sta
423. larmTime mode the duration is the current time of day expressed a number of seconds past midnight Chapter9 575 Scripts Table 10 ESATIMER properties accessible with Scripts Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the Timer mode possible Long values of this property are 1 Once onlt 2 Normal 3 Single alarm 4 AlarmTime Defines the current state of the Long Timer possible values of this property are 0 Not Active 1 Counting 2 Terminated 3 Suspended Indicates the current position of Long Count the counter ESATI MER methods accessible with Scripts Table 11 ESATIMER methods accessible with Scripts Method Description Sets the duration value to Duration SetTimer correspond with the input value Returns duration set for timer Starts the timer returns the value of the start timer activity Stops the timer returns the value of the stop timer activity Suspends the timer returns the value of the suspend timer activity The object ESATRENDMGR gives access to certain properties and ESATRENDMGR methods that are useful for managing Trend Buffers ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 576 Chapter 9 Scripts ESATRENDMGR properties accessible with Scripts It is important to emphasize that the properties offered by ESATRENDMGR are only available as Read only and the Trend buffer ID that the following code lines refer to must be defined at the beginning of the Scr
424. ld After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the Field The purpose of the Numerical Field is to show the operator the updated value of a particular variable These fields can be also be edited to become Edit value fields The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Numerical Field In POLYMATH the value of the Numerical Field is represented by a series of hash charac ters which in Runtime are substituted by the effective value ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Po a Chapter6 343 Properties Editor Note an alternative method of creating a Numerical Field is to drag a numerical variable from the Project Explorer directly onto the destination page in the work area Properties of the Numerical Field Properties Description Identifying name of the Numerical field Must be unique among the graphic elements wan Wt aivesion pem Hehtvenion Determines the color of the Numeric Field which can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the numerical field must have the background area AreaVisibility or if it must be transparent A Boolean variable can be associated to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D e
425. ld editing double click it on the page After having selected the TrendXY Graphic click on the icon w In the Pens voice in the relative Editor Properties uw a oF a a a x p t E s e gilail B 2 m i p i ji tied E a 2 G aj amp m 4 a a te a ofa The displayed pens editing window is made up of three sec tions On the left there is a list of pens created by the user from which to create and eliminate elements At the bottom ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 428 Chapter 6 Properties Editor there is a preview of the pen currently being edited At the centre of the window there is the actual editing area for the selected pen This window is divided in Properties Inter vals and Interval Colours masks They will be described in the following sub paragraphs Properties Name Italian Italy TrendPenxy Trend buffer XY Trendpufferxy g Scale type X Preset o Min X 0 Max X aa Scale type Y Prest ti itsi s sS Min Y Max Y Pen style Line Analoge S n Line style Solid x Size 1 Marker koes Default color E 0 0 M M Show pen icon First of all a Name and a Trend bufferXY for which the Pen must be used can be associated to the Trend Pen Indicate a value Scale type that can be e Programmed the Max and Min values that can also be associated to variables must be indicated e Automat
426. ld page follow a function of Change page If you choose to assign a predefined function to an event the lower part of the window can be used to enter its parameters e g file name name of objects etc If you choose to assign a script to an event you can choose to save the value returned by that script if the script is set to return a value in a variable For further details relating to the assignable functions and the scripts the reader is advised to consult the appropriate chap ters of this manual see chap Appendix B Predefined func tions page 745 e see chap 9 Scripts page 553 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 290 Chapter 6 Properties Editor pP Note If you wish to assign more than one function to a key it is bet ter to use a user script containing those functions We set out below a description of the events that can be as signed to some of the elements already seen in Project Explor er The list of events in the case of graphic elements will by contrast be dealt with case by case Events related to variables Table 2 Events assignable to variables Description Activated immediately after initializa Onl nizialization tion of the variable that is at the star tup of Runtime Activated when the variable goes Off OnOffLine Line that IS when it becomes unavail able following a break in communica tion Activated when the update of the vari able field is disabled this happens v
427. lds Chapter6 363 Properties Editor Table 32 Properties of the DateTime field Properties Description Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Enabling this option allows you to se Reference variable for the data value to be displayed The variable selected Tagi d can be Long or Unsigned Long Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an existing one Determines the flashing of the text the possibilities are No Blinking Slow TextBlink blinking or Rapid Blinking The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Text field which can be selected using the RGB TextColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the type of horizontal alignment of the text this can be Cen TextHAlign ter Left or Right The value can be as sociated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the type of horizontal alignment of the text this can be Cen TextVAlign ter Top or Bottom The value can be associated with Tag or it can be man aged with thresholds Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for
428. le 1 in the configuration mask otherwise it is possible to look for the executa ble file exe of the application to be launched using Windows explorer 2 Note The ShutDown function which may only be used with PC and XS allows to turn off the PC XS directly from Runtime without accessing Windows the function therefore stops Runtime and then turns off the PC XS The ShutDown function may be used for the following operative systems Windows 2000 Windows Xp Win dows 7 32 bit Windows 7 64 bit The function is also available in side Script commands Graphic examples of what was previously described 1 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix B Predefined functions 753 Events Functions Editor Functions Sangis afeaciated to hig evan WE Run pplicationi Cecnmandling Windows eotepadiere So bemp yan apphcaber hesk EA Mode Sized x li fi g W E a H 400 2 Events F unctions Editor Punchone Sones afeeciated to this avert WE Run ppicationi Maximized a Efe 3081 Functions relating to trends Table 6 Functions relating to Trends Function Description Performs a trend sample reading the trend buffer the command works on must be given as an input parameter see chap 5 In runtime the system Supplies the support for the acquisition and accumulation of numerical values and for their graphic presentation in m n the form of a trend curve
429. le or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Rectangle or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable could be assigned if de sired or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val BorderStyle ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 BorderVisibility 302 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 15 Properties of the Rectangle Properties Description Tyecorsox is beet or naa S TypeOfBox must be normal or rounded Editable if the Rectangle is rounded corresponds to the horizontal distance between the position of the corner and the point at which the curve joins the horizontal side of the Rectangle Editable if the Rectangle is rounded corresponds to the vertical distance Roundy between the position of the corner and the point at which the curve joins the vertical side of the Rectangle Determines whether the object is ini tially visible It is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable for changes in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock iot Determines whether to make a partial Partial Fill color infill The value can be assigned to a whole variable Determines the
430. le should operate may be con tinuous half screen or full screen Determines the index that the object Tabli ndex will occupy in the table order ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 414 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 55 Properties of a Trend Graph Properties Description Length of time periods expressed in thousandths of a second If the value TimeSpan 10000 is entered for example at any point the trend table will display the values gathered in 10 seconds Indicates the way the Trend display is UpdateMode updated automatically with a change of value or on command Indicates the color of the chart area ChartAreaColor which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette ChartAreaTop Vertical coordinate position of the chart ChartAreaLeft gla coordinate position of the ChartAreaWidth Size of the width of the chart ChartAreaHeight Height dimension of the chart Determines the border color of the ChartBorderColor chart which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette ChartBorderSize Determines the border size of the chart Indicates the color of the divisions of GridHorDivisionColor the horizontal grid can be done using the RGB code or the color palette GridHorDivision Indicates the number of horizontal di Number visions in the grid Indicates the style of the divisions of GridHorDivisionStyle the horizontal grid may be Solid or Broken line Determines the color of the horizontal g
431. led ues is to be present or not Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement cara a Tag to the Direct move se Movenerinevas Fina Rovira eaaate Knob Potentiometer events Table 46 Knob Potentiometer events Event Description Activated when the Potentiometer val OnValueChange ue is changed using the touch screen ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 396 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Knob Selector A Knob Selector can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple controls gt KnobSelector After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the selector Knob selectors are useful for introducing a direct control ona given variable A discrete representation of the value of the reference variable is given and the operator can attribute one of the values present simply by clicking on the knob The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Slide selector Note It is advisable to use the Knob selector rather than a potenti ometer if the number of choices the operator can make is to be re stricted giving a limited range of options Properties of the Knob Selector Table 47 Properties of the Knob S
432. lly the user can assign a different colour to every Bit for example when the second Bit is at 1 the object will be yel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 332 Chapter 6 Properties Editor low When the third Bit is at 1 the object will be blue when the fourth Bit is at 1 the object will be red and so on If there are more Bits at 1 the lowest one will be considered S sotie i0 xi Default Hoo i 1 E 255 255 128 2 By 0 0 255 Bl 3 J 255 0 0 amp Aggiungi X Cancella The Bits that the user addresses may not be adjoining The most insignificant Bit must be Bit 1 while the most si gnificant Bit will depend on the length of the type of Tag as sociated e g if the Tag is at 16 Bit the user can insert the Bits from 1 to 16 Objects to The new Thresholds Management functionality is supported by which the the following objects with properties described below Thresholds functionality Rectangle can be applied Area Colour Area Visibility 3D Border Border Flashing Border Colour Border Thickness Border Style Hidden Ellipse Area Colour Area Visibility Line Colour Hidden ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 333 Properties Editor 3D Ellipse Arc Line Colour Hidden Circular Sector Area Colour Area Visibility Line Colour Hidden Line 3D effect Line Colour Line Size Hidden Polygon Area Colour Area Visibility Line Colour Line Size Hid
433. ls of the meaning of the properties that can be assigned to a Monostable Button and how to edit them Note No variable has to be assigned to a monostable button When you want the pressing of the monostable button to have an effect on a variable just assign the appropriate functions to the button s events ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 401 Properties Editor Properties of the Monostable button Table 49 Properties of the Monostable button Properties Description Identifying name of the Monostable button Must be unique among the graphic elements man Wt avesion pem Het cvenion Determines the color of the area of the button when pressed selectable us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds AreaColorPressed Determines whether the Button has a background or if it must be transparent PressedAreaVisibility when pressed a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the area of the button when released which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned toa whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds AreaColorReleased Determines whether the button has a background or if it must be transparent when released a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds
434. lue can be assigned to a whole variable ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 305 Properties Editor Table 16 Properties of the Ellipse Properties Description Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement a Tag to the Direct move Sts Moveneninevas Finan Rona eaaate Arc An Arc can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures gt Arc and drawing its dimensions directly in the page To define the characteristics of the Arc they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section Properties of the Arc Table 17 Properties of the Arc Properties Description Identifying name of the Arc Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 306 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 17 Properties of the Arc Properties Description wan With aneson pem Het nenon Determines the color of the Arc outline which can be selected using the RGB LineColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tial visible it is also possible to assign a Boolean variable dynamic in Runt ime or it can be managed with thresh olds Determ
435. lues Double 4 9406564584124E 324 to 1 7976931348623E308 for positive values ASCII string ASCII String maximum length Ox7FFF characters Array of Whole value string 1 to 1024 Unsigned without sign Integer WORD Array of Whole value string with 1 to 1024 Integer sign WORD Array of Floating point 32 bit va 1 to 1024 Real lue string For each variable you can introduce an initialization value that is assumed at the start of the project In the case of a String type of data its maximum length can also be indicated Type Array of Unsigned Integer WORD x Length 2 If the variable is a device variable Array type data will also be present this in substance is a data area whose dimensions can be set by POLYMATH as indicated in the figure a table ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 142 Chapter 5 Project Explorer will also appear which enables you to introduce the Initialization values of each portion of the area Device General Value Limits Conversion Thresholds Indirect Address Events Memory Address Memory Address RTU Master fast peripherals x Refresh group Class_0_5 500 msec ICG i Update Device enabled O Update always even when a tag isn t used by any field O Read only Data 4rea Fc 03 16 read write registers Type word 7 O Signed O Bco Address Address 0 valid range Address HEX O FFFF B In the case of device varia
436. lues of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking TextBlink If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the font to use for writing the text Can be edited by FontFace inserting the string relating to the Name name of the Font one of those included in the project The change will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines the size of the field text Can be changed by attributing the required value The change will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field text is shown in Italics 1 or in Roman 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field text is shown in Bold 1 or in Roman FontBold 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field text is shown underlined 1 orin normal Font 0 If modified using a Script Underline the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 614 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 37 Properties of ESACNTRL Dynamic text Properties Description Defines whether the field text is shown barred 1 or in normal FontStrike 0 If modified using a Script
437. lution e Click Connect The image displayed on the terminal will appear on the PC Bi Remote Display Control for Windows Oj x File zoom Tools Help Mowe Right Pause Off Every operation carried out on the terminal is displayed on the PC and vice versa FTP Server Another important function that ESA puts at the user s dispo sal starting with the POLYMATH 1 60 version is the FTP Server The FTP acronym means Files Transfer Protocol It gives the user the possibility to enable and disable the FTP Server service of the panel from any other device PC XS IT con nected to the network This function is very useful when it is necessary to write can cel or modify data on the terminal easily from a remote ac cess The remote access disks are the following e My Device Hard Disk FTP default folder e My Device Hard Disk2 if a USB pen is used as well e My Device Storage Card if a Secure Digital is used as well ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 722 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC FTP Server features From the ESA terminal click on Control panel M Start ESA Application 0 Downloader Configuration E Control Panel The following image will appear B amp Stylus Date Time Owner Network a T Uf A ARS i Lamp Saver Backup Password FTP Reset Information Click on the FTP icon The following image will a
438. ly gon and a Sector First of all we enable the icon relating to alignment by clicking on the icon i then we draw in the page a Selection area big enough to contain the outlines of both objects See figure Once the mouse key is released the objects become selected and the alignment icons become clickable ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 470 Chapter 6 Properties Editor There are six icons in the Alignment Menu each of which be haves differently as shown below By clicking on Layout gt Align gt Top the top edges of all the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level of the top edge of the highest positioned object in our exam ple the button See figure By clicking on Layout gt Align gt Bottom the lowest edges of all the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level of the bottom edge of the lowest positioned object in our example the button See figure ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 471 Properties Editor By clicking on Layout gt Align gt Mid point the vertical mid points of all the figures selected are aligned with one an other at the level of the vertical mid point of the lowest po sitioned object in our example the button See figure By clicking on Layout gt Align gt Left the left edges all the figures selected are aligned with one another at the level of the left edge of the leftmost object in our exampl
439. m the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the field currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the font to use for writing the text Can be edited by FontFace inserting the string relating to the Na nre name of the Font one of those included in the project The change will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines the size of the field text Can be changed by attributing the required value The change will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 609 Scripts Table 35 Properties of ESACNTRL Numerical field Properties Description Defines whether the field text is Shown in Italics 1 or in Roman 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field text is shown in Bold 1 or in Roman FontBold 0 If modified using a Script the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field text is Shown underlined 1 or in normal Font 0 If modified using a Script Underline the variation
440. m the Project Explorer directly onto the destina tion page in the work area Properties of the ASCII Field Table 28 Properties of the ASCII Field Properties Description Identifying name of the ASCII field Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 353 Properties Editor Table 28 Properties of the ASCII Field Properties Description man With aivesion peme Hehtcivenion Determines the color of the ASCII field which can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Bo
441. m the options on a drop down menu the characteristics of each variable appear in the lower part of the mask and are also illustrated in the related appendix of this manual see Appendix A System Variables page 737 Indexed tags allow you to view the data of each variable in a single field the Index Variable determines the choice of Tag the value of which is displayed by the Indexed Variable see Indirect Addresses page 154 The network tags are variables that can be used by all the terminals that make up the network in the case of a panel network project Value Type Integer The mask relating to value can be used to configure the type of data that the variable is supposed to contain The types of data possible are those represented in the following table Tabella 1 Types of variable Type Description Range Boolean True 1 or False 0 Unsigned 16 bit unsigned integer O to OXFFFF Integer on 32 bit signed integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 Unsigned 32 bit unsigned integer O to OXFFFFFFFF Long ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 141 Project Explorer Tabella 1 Types of variable Type Description Floating point IEEE 32 3 402823E38 to bit single precision 1 401298E 45 for negative values 1 401298E 45 to 3 402823E38 for positive values Floating point IEEE 64 1 7976931348623E308 bit double precision to 4 9406564584124E 324 for negative va
442. managed with thresh olds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 369 Properties Editor Table 34 Properties of Bar field Properties Description Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the field see PasswordLevel chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of Tabi ndex the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 ee Indicates from which value the Bar val BarOrigin ue count should start Color of the values figures related to the numerical subdivisions of the scale This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette ScaleValueColor Indicates where the scale of values Should be positioned in relation to the Bar If the Bar is vertical the scale can be positioned to the left or the right if it is horizontal the scale can be above or below ScalePosition Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement ean a Tag to the Direct move sts Movenerinevas Finan Rona eaaate FinalY Vertical co ordinate ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 370 Chapter 6 P
443. ment in the context of POLYMATH Once a Group Field is created it is possible to edit the position of the objects within it or delete and add objects after double clicking on the group itself In this way you ac cess the Group editor in which it is also possible to set the Group s general properties and dimensions This operation can of course be performed on all the types of graphic element described in this chapter Moreover the ele ments of a group can be disaggregated later by clicking on the key Layout gt Separate active only when a group of ob jects is selected After their division the elements return to be ing separately editable ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 467 Properties Editor Depth order of objects When there is an overlapping of more than one object in a page the operator can establish display priority policy for the overlapping objects By selecting one of the objects it is pos sible to determine at what depth level to position it by press ing one of the four keys also to be found in the Main menu Layout gt Level Bring to Front Send to back To understand the way the four options work let us take the example given in the previous section but adding to the poly gon and the touch button a third element a Sector We will apply the Level commands to the touch button then select it click on ad and then on the button Now by clicking on Layout gt Level g
444. ments use the same Draw method for redrawing the element in question The correct syntax to access the properties of the object ESACNTRL is ESAHMI ESAPAGE PageName ESACNTRL ObjectName BorderColor RGB 32 255 0 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 586 Chapter 9 Scripts Aw Warning When a Script modifies the graphic properties of an object these are displayed only when the object is redrawn using the appropriate Draw method This method redraws the object simultaneously applying all the changes made to the attributes up to the moment the display is invoked Dynamic fields that show a value also have the RefreshControl method capable of updating only the value of the field while ignoring the graphic properties that have been changed Properties of ESACNTRL Rectangle Table 17 Properties of ESACNTRL Rectangle Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn ControlLeft If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the top where the object has currently been drawn ControlTop If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Int Width Control Defines the height of the object Int Height Defines whether the object
445. mer Project 2005 Customer Project 2006 Customer Project 2007 Customer Project 2008 Customer Project 2009 lt My Computer B osram Demo PRI x Customer Demo Fiera DESTOP REMOTO DriverInfo ESA DESA elettronica ESAPOLYMATH Gets Ye Favorites Forme personalizzate O Gavazzi hedit HMI D1 6 sp1 HMI D1 6 sp2 Hmidesigner_V17_SP1 gt File name TEST ls Microsoft Excel xls My Network Save as type ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 160 Chapter 5 Project Explorer amp Note The file to be exported can be saved with extension xls or mn 39 CSV By clicking on the Separate addresses check box the varia bles list is shown in the table created in separate fields Tags Export E x Choose the filename and extension to export tags File Name M Separate addresses Export Cancel By clicking on the Export key the following screen is obtai ned Tags Export File Export Start export 03 03 2011 9 35 00 Exporting Tags in file pp xls Scheduler_Start Scheduler_Stop HolidayGroup_Month HolidayGroup_Year Tag_INT HolidayGroup_1_Month HolidayGroup_1_Year Scheduler_Start_1 Scheduler_Stop_1 SYS_AlarmNotAck SYS_AUD_MSG_LINEOUT Tag exported Tag_PLC Finish export 03 03 2011 9 35 00 Open Export Folder ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 161 Project Explorer Import Tags
446. meters Time must be expressed as DD MM YYYY hh mm ss mmm Removes all samples from the specified trend and triggers the event OnBufferClear Acquires a new sample for the trend indicated by the input parameter This method functions independently of the type of trend acquisition and of the value of its attribute Enabled Exports part of the buffer of the trend indicated by the input parameter Requires in addition the passage of the destination file name the type of file 1 xml 2 csv and the times of the first and last Samples to be exported Exports all the samples in the buffer of the trend indicated by the input parameter Requires in addition the passage of the destination file name the type of file 1 xml 2 csv Trendld Long Value Var Quality Bool Trendld Long Value Var Time Str Quality Bool Trendid Long Trendid Long Trendid Long FileName Str Type Int TimeStart Str TimeEnd Str Trendid Long FileName Str Type Int ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 580 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 13 ESATRENDMGR methods accessible with Scripts Description Changes the limits of the Trendid vertical scale assigned to Long the penline All tracks of MinLimit Change the trend specified are Dbl ScaleLimit updated In addition needs MaxLimit as input parameter the Dbl new upper and lower coordinates of the track scale Returns th
447. minals Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Events Editor in Extended mode It is possible to associate an event Script to each alarm you have created The event is activated in the two different conditions of the Alarm e OnHistoryFull Ithe event is activated when the alarm log memory reaches 100 capacity memory full e OnHistoryWarning the event is activated when the alarm log memory reaches the set value by default the warning is issued after 75 records out of the 512 that can be stored on the memory List Memory resources Behavior Fields Priorities Alarms groups User Signals List OnHistoryFull OnHistory Warning OnHistoryFull To attribute an event to the alarm simply select a condition by clicking the browse button and in the window that appe ars using the necessary buttons to associate a script to the alarm ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 193 Project Explorer Parameters af the seleebed funcion vert O Stare the return walaa ints Alarms Import Export It is possible to export or import a series of alarms previously created by clicking on Tools then on Alarms from the main menu Options Utilities Translations Tags Recipes Downloader Utilities Dictionary Alarms Export Options Utilities Translations Tags Recipes A LAr ms Downloader Utilities Dictiona
448. mode see chap 5 Modes of compatibility page 209 then at the request for a transfer of data the de vices will behave as follows e the VT will send the data transfer request to the PLC WORDO BIT1 of the Status Area e the PLC responds enabling the transfer using bit 4 of WORDO of the Command Area e At this point the data transfer will begin WORDO BITO of the Status Area e At the end of the transfer the VT will signal to the PLC WORDO BIT3 of the Status Area that the download has terminated e the PLC will respond confirming the reception WORDO BITO of the Command Area If during the data transfer the handshake times are not re spected the VT puts at 1 in the Status Area the Error In Trans ferring bit bit 14 download bit 15 upload ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 445 Properties Editor Chronothermostat A Chronothermostat can be inserted inside of the page by clicking on the icon or from the Main Menu Fields gt Cre ate gt Complex Controls gt Chronothermostat After having clicked the icon indicate the area in which POLYMATH must designate the Chronothermostat using the mouse inside of the page A Chronothermostat represents a Polymath object that al lows to detect a temperature and edit the behaviour of the sy stem in Manual or Automatic mode at will Scheduling allows to program the temperature trend weekly The Chronothermostat is the field inside of which t
449. mon doubt Indicates particularly important points to be read with care to avoid falling in to difficult situations Indicates that there is a guide dedicat ed to explaining in detail how a partic ular operation should be carried out Indicates that within the description there are key ideas ideal for rapid consultation of the guide in that they accompany the essential notions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 6 Chapter 1 Introduction ESA Elettronica s Customer Care service ah In the event of any doubts about the use of POLYMATH or oth er ESA products contact ESA Elettronica s Customer Care ser vice open Monday to Friday from 8 30 to 12 30 and 14 00 to 18 00 Customer Care telephone number 0039 031 757400 Fax 0039 031 751777 E mail customer care esahmi com Important it is always a good idea to annotate the currently in stalled version of POLYMATH and keep it to hand every time you contact ESA s Customer Care service The version of the software is shown in the main menu by clicking on Help gt Information ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter2 7 Installation 2 Installation This chapter supplies information needed to be able to under take the first steps towards using POLYMATH installation We set out the requirements a machine must have for the ap plication to function correctly as well as the crucial steps that make up the installation phase amp Note POLY
450. monitored can be determined Link Type node NetworkTag 7 Node 1T107T SP1 SP2 ETH1 Tag name Server_Tag gt The tag must have the following features It must be the Network type The node must be indicated The node is the point whe re the tag is shared in our example the shared tag Is in the 1T107T terminal The name of the tag to be monitored must be determi ned in our example the name of the tag to be monito red is Server_Tag Compilation of The compilation and the download of the projects that make the network up the network project must be carried out inside of the project network project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 110 Chapter 4 Managing the project Click on the icon to fill out the project O08 868008005 sanodan a BOSE SeroesesaeHOOO esecebaleoussgulae Bagga Jag a 8s 0o gda ia ITIOFTISPLSPEJETHI Ta MiirkTagi Torpi amp C TTHOeR SPL SPS 0TH ia i MateorkTage Fy Th utter ETA Corgan Vergini The following mask will appear from which one can choose to fill out all the projects that make up the network or if only one project has been varied to fill out only the modified one Wizard download network project New Wizard Page x Choose network panel to download compile PC_Client IT107T SP1 SP2 ETH1 Click forward At the end of the compilation the following mask will appear Wizard download network project New Wizard
451. mote access Activate IT Remote Access Username USERI The first time the project is transferred with the Remote De sktop function enabled the user will be requested to re start the terminal x 7 J Reqgrstry conhiqurabon s changed Pitast reboot panei e Connect a standard Ethernet cable or the ESA CVNET11002 cable between the terminal and the PC e Launch the ESA REMOTE exe application The fol lowing image will appear ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 716 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC ESA Elettronica Remot ua Eg File Options IP Address PC IP Address Panel User Name Refresh time CONNECT e Clicking on the Options key the language with which the Remote Desktop software mask is displayed En glish Italian can be chosen ESA Elettronica Remot f Language 2 Lp a English IP Address Panel ee T j Paszivord Refresh time 0 5 se gt CONNECT e Carry out the registration on line if not already carried out choosing the Registration option from the me nu e Set the PC IP address clicking on the Detect IP key ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 11 717 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC POLYMATH 2 0 has a new Remote Desktop containing a new function for storing up to 5 different IP addresses for the PC Panel and User Name so you do not need to insert all the da
452. move the cursor to the left When it reaches the left edge the graphic scrolls from the right e to the left of a unit specified by the greater horizontal division of the grid e Move to the Right the button has two functions de pending on whether or not the cursor is viewed if the e cursor is invisible the key pressure scrolls the graphic from left to right If the cursor is e visible move the cursor to the left When it reaches the right edge the graphic scrolls from the left e tothe right of a unit specified by the greater horizontal division of the grid e Move up the button scrolls the graphic from the bottom to the top of a unit specified by the e greater vertical division of the grid e Move down the button scrolls the graphic from the top to the bottom of a unit specified by the e greater vertical division of the grid e Initial page the button scrolls the graphic from right to left until the oldest samples are positioned e on the left of the graphic e End the button scrolls the graphic from left to right until the newest samples are positioned e onthe right of the graphic e Go to the button displays a dialogue box to ask the user which time and date must be e placed at the right of the graphic e Vertical Size Increase increases the vertical scale factor e Vertical Size Decrease decreases the vertical scale factor e Horizontal Size Increase increases the horizontal sca le factor
453. move the se lected entry up after going to the desired option e Down The Down key allows the user to move the selected entry down after going to the desired option e Preview With the Preview key the user will view a graphic preview of the chosen customization e OK By pressing OK the user confirms the created settings The following is an example of a preview by only using the value checkmark set by default ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 A File Type Station Mame Project Id Fy Version Creation Date Creation Time Trend Name Trend ID 4 Export Key 10 License Code OO m 0 Oo d Sm 12 value l Chapter5 225 Project Explorer B C TREND EXPORT M1107 ProfSP1 SP2 ETH ETH Progetto 1 00 21 03 2012 15 30 08 BufferTempi 1 i TORRE A The following is an example of how the exportation file is com posed after customization by the user with all 4 options ena bled A B C Li E FileType TREND EXPORT Station Name IT110T ProfSP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Project Id FY Wersion Creation Time Progetto 1 00 230201 12 02 55 Trend Name BufferTempi a al 4 5 Creation Date G i E Trend ID S Export key DTVO 1 10 License Code aAA 12 Date Time qa 2303 2012 14 2303 2012 15 25 03 2012 16 2303 2012 17 23032012 Value Cluality 12 02 55 12 02 55 12 02 55 12 02 55 12 02 55 l l
454. mware and project has been saved in C Documents and Settings mlanza Desktop Prog2 ESA Elettronica Batch Executor 2 63 2611 6216 Backup_21632611_1713 jobs donet CloseCommunication and end process Press any key to continue ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 73B Layout of menus O amp Note The panel needs to be set on the transfer page Open an exi sting procedure TO Open an existing procedure select the corresponding op tion then click Browse Procedure for updating operator terminal Z Initial choice Open an existing procedure l Create new procedure Cancel Select the previously saved procedure then click Open _ Procedure for updating operator terminal Initial choice Open an existing procedure Select a procedure file Look in B New Folder DESA Elettronica My Recent Documents File name 111 xml _Spen ps Files of type Select Procedure file xml ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 74 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Subsequently it is possible to choose the terminal type the default option is the one previously saved Procedure for updating operator terminal VT50 Rev 2 VT60 CAN VT60 Rev 1 VT60 Rev 2 VTissw VTLSSW Portrait VTissw CAN VTLSSW CAN Portrait VTiSssw ETHERNET VT1iSSW ETHERNET Portrait VT1iSSW PROFIBUS VT1SSW PROFIBUS ee v Cancel From the following
455. n The buttons that can be inserted are different and each has a pre defined non editable function assigned to it e Delete deletes the Recipe selected e Export exports the Recipe selected into a csv file e Export all Recipes exports all the Recipes in the table into a csv or xml file e Transfer download downloads the Recipe selected onto a device e Import Recipes imports the Recipes from a csv file In addition a Dynamic field can be inserted which contains the Recipe type list in a pull down menu which allows the op erator to filter the display for a specific type of Recipe The properties relating to position and dimension can be inserted into the Properties Editor of this field and it is also possible to indicate which type of Recipe to display as default when the page opens Fields Pem Identification Mame RecipeDirectory Comment Editing OI Override default grid size Width 10 Height 10 The General mask can be used to insert a name and an iden tifying comment for the Recipe table being edited In addition you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of the page see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field The graphic properties fonts and colors of the Recipe list can be configured using the Fields mask of the Recipes element see chap 5 Fields page 171 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 C
456. n be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or not Indicates whether the image should I mageAutoSize automatically sized to fit the dimen sions of the Field Indicates the type of horizontal align I mageHAlign ment of the image within the Field which can be Central Leftward or Rightward Indicates whether the image should maintain the proportions of the source image BorderVisibility I mageKeepAspect Ratio ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Value fields Invert Function Option Chapter6 325 Properties Editor Table 24 Properties of the Image Field Properties Description Indicates the color selectable using the RGB code or the color palette for which the transparency filter should be applied manetransoarenk Indicates whether a transparency filter g P Should be applied to the image Indicates the type of vertical alignment ImageVAlign of the image within the Field which can be Central Top or Bottom I mageTransColor Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement See ae a Tag to the Direct move sts Moveneninevas Finan Rona eacate Value fields are objects graphic that can be inserted into a page in order to show the operator the value of an item of data variable or a representation of it Some of these fields can also have their value edited by the operat
457. n configured correctly a download window will be displayed Proceed as for a single project see chap capitolo 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 When the first download is terminated POLYMATH will return to the connection choice conditions if in the project choice window there are two or more selected projects Disconnect the panel where download has been completed and connect the second panel whose name is indicated in the box above Switch off and on again the panel so that POLYMATH recognises the second panel and download Repeat operation until the last project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 736 Chapter 12 Panels network ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix A System Variables 737 Appendix A System Variables In this section we analyse the meaning of one particular type of variable the system variable inside the terminal which in RUNTIME is a read only variable In general these represent the operating status of the terminal and the project currently being executed System variables can be created in the project the same way as other variables and be managed and used in the same way see chap 5 General pag 139 The name of the default system variables begins with the prefix SYS_ followed by a string identifying its function To represent the system variables in the project POLYMATH makes a system library available containing predefined pages for displaying this type
458. n enur na n Euret 521 Downloading the image of the Operating System for VT CE 523 Establishing an Ethernet connection cccccceecceeecceeeseeeeeeeeees 523 OMMIMe HO ONS eie eraaete ot aee E RS 528 Back p RESTON srera wlenactenn bac ieetaho Gan iecaton asa 536 Restore Remote panel update scnass ssssdaicetentonercedaaciaardeseeevedaidees 539 Panel IR OSC os actin crest A A E 549 ESAPOLY MATH User manual rev 2 2 Scripts 553 The object ESAUSERMOR sj saticestocmsaceGaunenaatieaaves slsiuksondeetasertusons 563 The object ESAALARMMGER cccssssseseseseeeeeeeeesseeseeeeeeees 563 The object ESARECIPE MGR siius ctcntectearaesuaaieleacieei eee i ia 566 The object ESARECIPETY P sx scsctxssasie caxvndadesaeiateatucnaeaslansadccaiasic 567 Ehe opject ESARECIPEAREC nennir an E 568 The object ESARECIPE PRP corrain aE 570 Lhe object ESAPIPEMOR sickest ieee coda naa rendered duis 572 The object ESA TIMBER creceu 574 The object ESA TRENDMGR sisectasesesaicsdadecstesasdestdaieeadergacniaies 575 Theobject ESAPAGEMGR senenin aan 580 Theo ESAPAGOGE cerun a 584 The Object ESACNTER D gropan E sed 585 Theo ect ESAPRN serra NAA OSAA 639 Examples OF SCAPTUS auias T tuad 642 Tutorial 651 Phase The Project and Hardware Configuration 651 Phase 2 Software configuration eeessssssssoeresssssssssseeersssss 653 Phase 3 Configuration of variables and Memory areas 656 Phase 4 Gener
459. n establish how the operator is to be ad vised of the alarm being set off we have chosen message hat is a little icon will appear on the screen irrespective of the page the project is in when the alarm is raised By clicking on this alarm icon in runtime the operator is taken to the page identified in the second field of this mask Furthermore we will leave the default image as the image associated with the alarm icon and at the bottom we will keep the enablement for the warning noise We will now insert the definition of a type of recipe in our project in POLYMATH we define only the structure of the rec ipe the instances themselves of recipes must be defined and appropriately saved or exported to a file in runtime by the op erator ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 Tutorial Idenbheathan Marte Races Type Timiani Thil reaps gihbani denne of the bag alara in he bebara Prapeet T Exchange areas O Enshi anch Agt Anas We use the General mask to set only the name RecipeType and a short comment leaving the default ID set by POLY MATH Recipe Name Recipe Id Careen RecipeFiald itr war RecipeField_1 array v r ctr VAr VSS Current arguing ar Era DaeAndTime Now we use the Fields mask to insert the variables that really make up the recipe In our example we click on Add and add two fields as shown above We introduce two fields containing the variables int
460. n the HMI 529 Transfer it allows to transfer a project previously open Panel Explorer it allows to view the files and the folders ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 530 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Online tools Panel explorer hy Filename Sire oy Netwerk V4 lRegSwrOL exe Likb Co Hard Cask Wel Tobey dll S8Kb 4 O Denman and beninge net Sar d WEG Dube ree iaai Ob EQ EOLL T2 EQ EOLL T2 E Log Config Reports Ly Temi L Feapet G Gliant Ei Tm E Fort Dey raed Lj Paget i Im E Help VAIRCS Agel HESeAP RL dll AES PL al WIS Lidil WHE Saudis dll Wa 1S oriphry ll Wl uaa Darna ll Wa sew gel sternal all Vel ews grbriternaldll Vel ete LegManageridll Vd Data Lopobserver sl Ve Pipelines d Ved Esooh Areas ll VolPoseManager dll VelheopeMeaeger dll Ve alan Manager ll Wal Slanmobaereer dll 46kb kb 281kKb skh Sanh takih Lhdkh hekh 4akKb GJkb JIEb 51Eb 6akb i7Kb 197Kb 144Kb TOK PAEVSOLL Oe ee SAFO SOLL oe SACS SOLL oe sateen Geo sateen GSi tatart O08 fate e011 O08 diain Gos iiiad Ob05 iiai 805 TO ZOLL 05 ZOOL 05 PAV SOLL 505 PAGS 2OLL S05 PACS 2OLL e605 sateen 8 05 fate en11 0805 Wal Libert aver ll adib Wd Repecicerver dll lkb vaj ieTag dll ash Wa TTirmeer oc 4ikb Ve TrenMonagerdil LdzkKb Vd TremaOtsarvercll ATED ZUTA Z0LL 08 05 AIIM dE aTkKb EMOEOLL 08 05 335K b ZATA 06 05 am TA te SO11 G08 abari 6 08 didaill
461. n the Table of active alarms or in the history see chap 6 Active Alarm View page 429 and see chap 6 Alarm History View page 434 Use this mask to indicate the background colour with the RGB code or a palette and text of the non selected options in the table otherwise the colours are those in the Fields mask page 190 and a description representing the actual text that the operator will read on the panel when the alarm is triggered The description is a multilingual Unicode string see chap 5 Languages page 166 that cannot contain punctuation or control characters da Alt 000 a Alt 031 and which cannot exceed 255 characters in length The attributes Datiuser 1 and Datiuser 2 are optional attributes indicating identifying multilingual strings of the alarm The user can choose whether to employ them for personal purposes or to leave them unused When they are used they appear in runtime within the alarm views if the appropriate column is present in the attribute Columns see chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 and see chap 6 Properties of the Alarm History Grid page 436 Note For the current value of a variable for example one assigned to an alarm to appear in the Description Datiuserl or Datiuser2 strings just put into the string the name of the variable in a sequence having the form f lt name of the TAG gt lt format gt the format follows ANSI C specifications For exampl
462. n the left mouse key is released the port will remain in the new position unless it is again moved ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 101 Managing the project IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH SP2 d4 ETH1 SP1 RTU Master fast pe Lada a 4 com If ports that are references to existing connections are moved POLYMATH will automatically update the position and the con nections showing in the window without altering their nature Connecting two elements If the page contains at least one ESA panel and one device you will be able to specify the mode of the connection between them If you want to add a connection you have first to click on and then go on to click inside a free port one that Is not already a reference to another connection When the pointer nears an available port a small rectangle will appear next to the pointer containing a connection thread as shown in the figure IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH SP2 gt 4 ETH1I SPi R IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH1 Master fast pe HT hakaata a 4 com Without releasing the left mouse key you can proceed to specify the connection path a horizontal line appears ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 102 Chapter 4 Managing the project IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH RTU Master fast pe SP2 gt 4 ETH1 SPRI gt To establish the second terminal of the connection release the mouse as soon as the black line reaches the port you wish to
463. n the left sides of consecutive objects is al ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 475 Properties Editor ways equal to the distance between the left sides of the first two objects reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from the left If the reference distance is less than zero POLYMATH takes it automatically to 0 thereby aligning to the right In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure Vertical arrangement Using our example let us add three different colored buttons to the page as indicated in the next figure After drawing the three buttons let us click on icon k of the toolbar and draw a Selection area that includes all the objects This activates the arrangement options of the toolbar or Main menu Layout gt Arrange In the examples in this subsection our starting point to illus trate how the arrangement operation works will always be this same initial situation For vertical arrangements POLYMATH takes as its reference the distance between buttons 1 and 2 being the first two from the top ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 476 Chapter 6 Properties Editor To operate a simple vertical arrangement just click on the Icon of the toolbar or Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Ver tically POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the top side of one object and the bottom
464. n the preceding subsection To start the transfer just click on the h icon of the toolbar or use main menu File gt Download If there are files compiled for the version of the project currently being edited POLYMATH will show the window relating to the hardware configuration of the PC terminal connection If on the other hand no files have been compiled for the project yet POLYMATH will ask the programmer whether it should start compiling The download window allows the operator first to select the terminal to which the project file is sent and the parameters for the type of connection to be used The types of connection catered for are e Standard serial e Ethernet TCP IP e Local e USB e http The serial connection is the most common type and it is achieved by connecting the ports of the PC on which POLYMATH has been installed and those of the terminal with the appropriate cable see chap 5 Communication ports ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 510 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 128 The type of port to be used for the PC terminal connection must be specified In the EsaPolymath 2 1 version a second Download protocol was added called UDP User Data Protocol ESAPOLYMATH Downloader Parametri comunicazione Tipo connessione Ethernet TCP IP Indirizzo dispositivo 192 168 100 1 Porta 4096 Protocollo TCP UDP
465. n the project while by clicking on Add a new language can be introduced In our case Italian is introduced as a second default language we can always change the project languages by selecting them from the pull down menu Startup Language Italian Italy fe aaa Te aan Using the same page we Set Italian as the display language at the opening the project in runtime In any case the oper ator can change the current display language by using the commands that give us access to it Inserting a new font Now let us add two more fonts to display the project texts with SystemTahoma Tahoma 0 System Font v SystemCourier Courier New 0 System Font SystemSymbol Symbol 0 System Font SystemTimesNewRoman Times New Roman 0 System Font SystemWingdings Wingdings 0 System Font B Ka Font Trebuchet MS v 320 E v Font_1 Univers 45 Light Univers 47 CondensedLight Univers 55 For example we select the fonts Trebuchet MS and Verdana from the list containing the fonts in the PC where POLYMATH has been installed v SystemTahoma Tahoma 0 System Font E v SystemCourier Courier New 0 System Font i v SystemSymbol Symbol 0 System Font SystemTimesNewRoman Times New Roman 0 System Font SystemWingdings Wingdings 0 System Font Font_Trebuchet Trebuchet MS 320 i 7 Fon verdane Nara A lt iii gt Add Duplicate ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 655 Tutorial We must also as
466. nation panel Convert to IT110T SP1 PN ETH1 ETH2 ape SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 IT110T Pro SP1 CAN ETH1 ETH2 IT110T Pro SP1 DP ETH1 ETH2 IT110T Pro SP1 PN ETH1 ETH2 IT110T Pro SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 fig 17112 fig 17115 Rotation Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 45 Layout of menus The following image summarising the operation to be carried out will appear Panel conversion wizard Conversion Convert from IT1O7W SP1 ETH1 Convert to IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 M Adjust fields dimensions M Adjust background image Cancel At this point click on Next and wait for the end of the con version Panel conversion wizard The panel has been successfully converted ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 46 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Convert device The Convert device option allows converting a Device into a second during this conversion only variables with the same structure are maintained The first screen allows choosing the Device group Device conversion wizard Destination device fy CANOPEN fm CODESYS fy MOTION CONTROL fi MOTOR DRIVE fy OTHERS mm PLC fi PROFIBUS fi PROFINET fy THERMOREGULATOR fim WEB SERVER Convert to H Ge Ee Be a Ge Ee Cancel Open the folders to choose the Device type Once the Device type is chosen click Next Device conversion wizard Destina
467. nclude the Alarm Grid table whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsec tions see chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 Using this mask you can proceed to indicate which buttons should be present with the table and position them within the area To insert or remove a button just click on the list of buttons to the left of the table if an object is already present in the page it will appear highlighted within the list and will be visible in the Table Edit Area To move an ele ment button or table just drag it to the desired position The buttons that can be inserted are different and each has a pre defined non editable function assigned to it e Add User allows the operator to add a new user e Delete User allows the operator to remove the user se lected e Change Password allows the operator to change the password relating to the user selected Identification Name UserDirectory Comment diting O Override default grid size Width 10 Height 10 The General mask can be used to insert a name and an iden tifying comment for the User table being edited In addition you can overwrite the default dimensions of the editing grid of ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 438 Chapter 6 Properties Editor the page see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new measures in pixels valid only for editing the current field The graphic properties fonts and colors of the User L
468. nd aborts the print procedure being run ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 642 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 58 ESAPRN methods accessible with Scripts Method Description With this a new print page can be created After this New Page function has been invoked the next texts are printed on a new page Writes the text contained Text Str in the input string in a WriteLN single row going to the next line when the row has been printed Writes the text contained PosX Int in the input string into the PosyY Int WritexY position indicated in Text Str pixels by the two parameters PosX and PosY Writes the text contained Row I nt in the input string into the Col I nt WriteRC position indicated interms Text Str of row and column positions by the two parameters Col and Row Examples of This paragraph deals practically with writing the scripting Script use code We offer examples relating the use of all the accessible objects described so far Example 1 Analysis of variables and launching events In this example we will Suppose we have a project in which we configure a page a variable an alarm and the controls assigned to the page Using POLYMATH we set the objects we need while running the Script We set a variable calling it Tag the names of the objects assigned using POLYMATH are important as this is the key to accessing them using Scripts of the Integer type assigning an initial value of 0 In addition
469. nd choosing an item of the list e g Previous Page the SW will search all Previous Page Internal Commands in the project Chapter3 61 Layout of menus Cross reference Filters Search By Name Search from Element s name begin with Mask Search By Type Function Script Function Internal Command PROJECT Previous page Macro Save filtering conditions Load filtering conditions Cancel Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained Cross reference lements List Element type Project VTSOSH Pages Start Loc Export selected Find element a Cancel By selecting the Macro option and choosing an item of the list e g High level the SW will search all the High level macro used in the project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 62 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Cross reference Filters Search By Name Search By Type Save filtering conditions Search from Element s name begin with Mask Function Script Function Internal Command Macro w ETEN be Load filtering conditions Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained Cross reference lements List Searched element Element name Element type Project TSOSH Pages Start Loc Export all Export selected Find element Shared Tags
470. nd the device values for this variable Let us suppose that this is always a value between 0 and 1000 then if you try to go out side these limits in runtime the value will automatically be put at the nearest limit to the value requested Our example will not use conversions and thresholds we leave the possibility of assigning these in the way described in the related part of this manual see chap 5 Conversion page 147 and see chap 5 Thresholds page 149 to the user Thus we have finished configuring the first variable num_ pezzi the other 3 variables are configured in exactly the same way and thus we can edit them to give an integer variable called int_ var with an address of word 1 a real variable called real_ var with an address of word 2 a string variable called str_var with an address starting at word 3 and having a length of 8 characters so it also occupies word 4 5 and 6 as shown in the figure below f Fal character Right li F Hears mh the char map of the device Defining system variables We will now define a further two project variables indicating the current status of the process in runtime the variables that allow us to do this are system variables see Appendix A System Variables page 737 For example we will define one variable indicating the ID num ber of the language currently in use in the project 659 ESAPOLYMATH User Manua
471. ng e Attribute a name and insert any comments on the key board e Define the size of the keyboard e Edit the default size of the grid 255 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 256 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Properties Width 240 Height 220 Appearance O O00 Background image BkMumericfoas710 aga Foreground image Bk_NumericBg_4_5 710 Aag advanced o S Show display T Show in foreground mode T The Properties option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Properties Editor in Extended mode The Properties window allows you to do the following Assign a position in the page to the keyboard Define the appearance of the keyboard by selecting a background and foreground picture Choose whether to show or hide the content in the key board display Choose whether to show the keyboard in foreground mode Weekly Tasks The Weekly Tasks allow to set all functions that are necessary to create and edit a Chronothermostat After double clicking on the TaskSettimanali Weekly Tasks in the Project Explorer a list of WeeklyTasks inserted within the project will appear in the work area AA ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer From this list it is possible to insert new duplicate or eliminate existing The Tools key allows to modify the structure of the columns at will Once a WeeklyTask has been created from the Pro
472. ng between Database Area Types used to display Memory Sta tus After selecting the desired field e g Dbw press Next Device tag occupation Choose the Device and Data4rea Device S7 300 400 Industrial Ethernet Datarea ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 66 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Setting a value of 10 in the DB field a screen opens in the page showing DBW 10 Memory occupation state Device tag occupation Free Used space DB Valid range DEC 1 65535 Finish It is also possible to view the BIT memory occupation by selecting InputBit in the Data Area item Device tag occupation Choose the Device and Data4rea S7 300 400 Industrial Ethernet Device DataArea Input Bit Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 67 Layout of menus Clicking Next the following screen appears Device tag occupation Free Used space E Valid range DEC 0 16383 Finish Operator terminal update The Operator terminal update option can be used only with the VT family terminals regarding the IT family terminals see chap 8 Backup Restore page 556 and allows creating a backup file containing the entire project and the VT termi nal firmware From the Tools menu select the Operator terminal update Sub menu Options lt check updates Translations Project Documentation Tags Convert panel
473. ng each internal object button or label in the Prop erties Editor we can change their respective properties such as graphic attributes or access procedures For example we ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 702 Chapter 10 Tutorial could enable the download button only for level 5 users or those with a lower level higher priority osition Appearance 4reaColorPressed 155 159 164 SreaColorReleased J 0 128 255 AreaVisibility v BorderBlink No Blink BorderColorPressed 255 255 255 BorderColorReleased moo Borderisibility v BorderSize 3 Button3D v Bitmap None Caption Label Text Load FontField SystemTahoma TextColor 255 255 0 TextHAlign Middle TextVAlign Middle While the check buttons are being edited the only difference from standard buttons is that the events cannot be changed With POLYMATH each already has assigned to it a predefined function The next section will describe how to edit the basic checking element the table grid Editing the grid Remaining in the edit mask contained within the control area select the grid and open the Properties Editor lors JE sapt Grdkeape 0000 ka Recipe Type Top 154 Left i width ims Haight Fa bes bnoeerence columns BewHeight 18 Shonkecpetyee RecipaType HScrolliarvisble OrderMode Alphabete Inernasing Vlorolierliadhle We can now change properties like the height of the columns we will se
474. ng is also the way an object moves from the library to a project just take an element from the Library Explorer to the Project Explorer so that it is included in the project Warning When inserting an element from the Library to the Project pay special attention to the nomenclature of the objects When the object inserted has the same name as an element already present in the project POLYMATH will replace the element with the one present in the library Error Viewer is an anchorable window see Le Finestre an corabili Anchorable Windows on page 4 7 chapter that sup plies information regarding the errors present in the project erare Vios p PN Errors Viewer 3 I The value of the address is incorrect The value must be included between the min and the max values The tag used doesn t exist The number of the page is incorrect The same number is used in another Page The number of the page must be unique Errors Viewer 3 A Warnings Viewer 1 Compiler Output The Error Viewer window lists in real time any errors asso ciated with the project you are editing and validating errors are highlighted in red Double clicking the description of a problem focuses the application on the source of the error opening a window Properties Editor window in the work area etc where you can make the necessary corrections Er rors disappear as soon as they are corrected in the associated area ESAPOLY MATH User
475. ng the simulator all the values of the variables the watch list and the simulations are lost To save them for further use use the file menu to export Watch lists Tag values and Simulations Downloading a Preparing Windows CE panels for the first download project To ensure that projects created with POLYMATH are correctly run on Windows CE panels 2 files to be found on the installation CD need to be copied onto the memory Hard Disk of the panel e Esa cfg this file is different for every model of panel in that it contains hardware information and goes under the root directory Hard Disk e Startup esa this file must be copied into the directory Hard Disk Esa Startup It allows the ESA Downloader application to start and therefore enables communication to take place in the project download phase In addition the addition of this file leads to the project being started automatically when the panel is Switched on ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 509 Compiling Downloading and Runtime After copying these two files the terminal s operating system Starts after successive start ups the ESA Downloader application will start automatically without any additional operation being necessary Downloading a project When a project is compiled it is ready to be transferred to the terminal by invoking the Download function if Esa Downloader has been properly configured in accordance with the indications i
476. nitial page We will leave the general settings in the lower part unchanged but activate the log onto file option identifying the file LogTrend xml as the export file In addition we disable the automatic start up of the Trend at the beginning of the runt ime it must be enabled when necessary using a function or Script We have now defined the buffer of the trend we shall now in sert into a page by introducing a display field referring to this buffer ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Phase 11 Graphic setting drawing a Frame Chapter 10 675 Tutorial At this point of the work the functional structure of the project has been almost completely set We now need only define the graphic presentation of the project in runtime POLYMATH puts at our disposal essentially three presentation elements classic full screen pages pop up pages pages that open on request overlapping full screen pages and frames portions of a page common to a group of pages The interrelated use of these three elements allows complex and flexible configurations to be used that can meet every op erational requirement Defining a frame In our tutorial example we start with the definition of a frame that we then introduce into all the pages of our project Basi cally this frame will contain the buttons for navigating be tween the pages a Quit project button and information regarding the current time Fa Tutorial 4 HWConfigurati
477. nt vertically when redrawing using the Draw method This value if read with a Script assumes a value of Y1 Top values set with POLYMATH Similarly the point is drawn on the pixel with the value Y1 Top Script values ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 25 Properties of ESACNTRL Line Properties ControlHide LineBlink Description Typ RW e Vertical coordinate of the arrival point Changing this value means moving the arrival point vertically when redrawing using the Draw method This value if read with a Script assumes a value of Y2 Top values set with POLYMATH Similarly the point is drawn on the pixel with the value Y2 Top Script values Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the line currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the line should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing
478. ntering data and whether to hide the applications bar whether the confirmation message is to be shown whether to show the confirmation message whether to use the default size of the dialogues The last three options allow the user to set the time out in the edit phase the font for the Help pages and the password level for accessing the system pages see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 Dialog Box Boot configuration Exchange areas Components Editing page default grid size General Communication ports GEMM heh Width 10 Height 10 Options O Show focus O Show mouse cursor V Use SIP keyboards O Beep on key press M Hide Taskbar V Show confirmation messages M Use default dialogs size Dialogs size Persistent Data Flush Interval min 3 v Edit mode idle timeout sec 10 Help pages font SystermTahoma Tahoma v From the main window previous image it is possible to change the Dialog Boxes size disabling the check box Use default dia logs size ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 131 Project Explorer Once disabling such option the user will be able to configure the new sizes Main window Editing page default grid size Width 10 Height 10 5 O Show focus O Show mouse cursor M Use SIP keyboards O Beep on key press M Hide Taskbar W Show confirmation messages O Use default dialogs size Dialogs size Persistent Data Flush Interval min 3 y Edit
479. ntrol Returns the length of the GetTextLen string currently written into the field ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 619 Scripts Properties of ESACNTRL Bar Table 43 Properties of ESACNTRL Bar Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the rectangle containing the bar has currently been drawn If this Properties Description value is changed the object is moved horizontally when ControlLeft redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle containing the bar has currently ControiTop been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the rectangle Width containing the object Control Defines the height of the Height rectangle containing the object Defines whether the object should Bool RW be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method RGB RW Defines the color of the border of the rectangle containing the bar currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for BorderColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 620 Chapte
480. o ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 360 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 30 Properties of the Symbol Field Properties Description Indicates the list of images from which a Runtime selection of the image to be displayed is made Using the appropri ate keys a new list can be created or an existing one edited see chap 5 Im age list page 232 ImageListi d Indicates the color selectable using the RGB code or the color palette for which the transparency filter should be applied hwaeeTeaneoarent Indicates whether a transparency filter g P should be applied to the image I mageTransColor Indicates the type of vertical alignment ImageVAlign of the image within the Field which can be Center Top or Bottom Identifies the movement associated to the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement ee a Tag to the Direct move ste Moveretitenas Finan ornoa FinalY Vertical co ordinate TypeOfMovement Symbol Field events Table 31 Symbol Field events Event Description OnAbortI nput Activated when data input operation is ended Activated when data input using the cabegininpue keyboard starts Activated when the value of the field is Onvamecnange changed using the keyboard ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 361 Properties Editor DateTime field A DateTime field can be introduced into a page by clicking
481. o PARAMETER_ 1 It frees however the command tag by putting O into the COMMAND ID A command response tag should be assigned to each device equipped with a command area The VT polls the command tags residing in the different devic es but always runs one command at atime interrupting the polling while the command itself is run The table below shows the codes relating to the various com mands that can be used COMMAND_ID and the respective parameters required for the execution Tabella 2 Command codes and parameters Description Parameters Forces sequence non POP PARAMETER_1 sequence ID UP if page ID is O it starts PARAMETER_2 page ID from the first page Not on PARAMETER_ 3 Touch Screen panels Forces page non POP UP PARAMETER_ 1 if a Sequence is active it is PARAMETER_ 2 disabled PARAMETER_ 3 Forces the cursor onto the PARAMETER_ 1 index tab current non POP UP page PARAMETER 2 in the field whose index tab PARAMETER_3 is specified Sets the language indicated PARAMETER_ 1 language ID in PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER 2 PARAMETER_ 3 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix D Command area Tabella 2 Command codes and parameters Description Asks for the current time writes parameters onto the response tag see next ta ble Asks for the current date writes parameters onto the response tag see next ta ble Sets time specified in pa rameters parameters con tain time in BCD wit
482. o a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 458 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 64 Holiday Groups View Properties Properties Description Determines whether the object is ini tially visible It is also possible to as sign a Boolean variable for changes in Runtime or it can be managed with thresholds Determines if the object can move or Lock Het Properties of the Holiday Groups Viewer grid Table 65 Properties of the Holiday Groups Viewer Grid Properties Description man nane pem Heh venion Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the 3D effect of the Bor der It can be Flat Relief Rec essed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as sociated to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border It can be No Flash Slow Flash or Fast BorderBlink Flash The value can be associated to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the Border colour by me ans of the RGB code or the colour pa BorderColor lette The value can be associated toa whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 459 Properties Editor Table 65 Properties of the Holiday Groups Viewe
483. o be more precise for displaying the previous page To introduce a touch button we click on 9 in the applications bar and draw the outline inside the frame General Cross reference Properties Selection After selecting the new button we go to Properties Editor and change certain graphic attributes relating to the button first we set the size the width at 50 pixels the height at 25 hor izontal position at 5 and vertical at 3 Now we add the text to be seen on the button ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 678 Chapter 10 Tutorial oe TouchBburton TouchButton 00t Hanne TouchBaution Comment Empty value E Peart Top i Lait 13 width 110 Height 35 ZAR Areatoloreressed 00 0 AreacolorReleased 4 175 193 Areavisibilty x Borderfilink No Blink BordercolorFressed 285 255 255 Bordercolerteleased i 0 0 0 Bardervisibility a Bardersize 5 Button 3 Bitmap Hona Caplan Label Text al sa Text contained in the object CO FET We choose label mode and click on to edit the translations of the text for English we insert Back for Italian Indietro Once the texts have been defined we edit their size and color Continuing to work in Properties Editor we set as text color Yellow and click on wo in the Font option to edit the character size ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 679 Tutorial E ToudhButton Touch Button 0000
484. o left until the most recent sample readings are positioned on the right side of the graph GoTo the button makes a dialog window appear to ask the user at what date and time the right side of the graph should be put IncreaseVerticalEnlargement increases the vertical scale factor ReduceVerticalEnlargement decreases the vertical scale factor IncreaseHorizontalEnlargement increases the horizon tal scale factor ReduceHorizontalEnlargement decreases the horizon tal scale factor Zoom Increases the total graphic display Reduction Decreases the total graphic display Reset Enlargement restores the original scale factors no zoom User Button Button to which the user can assign a function script HorizontalCursorPosition it represents the sample ac quisition time when it identifies at least one sample on the graphics Selected Pendrive Value field that indicates the pen drive currently selected ShowScalePen Determines the scale pen to be shown via a pull down menu There are also two bistable buttons a Date Time Field and a Numerical Field that can be edited as already described in this chapter see chap 6 Bistable button page 403 see chap 6 DateTime field page 361 and see chap 6 Numerical Field page 342 each having its own function CursorEnabled allows the graphic cursor to be dis played or not Pause shows whether or not the update of the graph is enabled does not disabl
485. o the next input field in runtime If this option is activated each time the operator enters a value into a numeric field and ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 173 Project Explorer presses the Enter key the focus of the application that is the selection moves to the next field the order of the selection passage between fields is defined by the Tabl ndex attribute to be assigned to the page objects see chap 6 Properties of the Numerical Field page 343 for example It is also possible to overwrite the default grid dimensions for the current page by specifying the desired dimensions This option is useful when a different degree of precision is required during the editing phase of the page When low values are entered the grid becomes denser and there is greater freedom in positioning objects within the page by entering a high value the grid becomes less dense and the freedom in positioning objects in the page becomes more limited Hel ages A each project page can have a Help page assigned to it giving information relating to the working of the mother page The Help page is essentially a window into which a text to guide the operator can be introduced Apart from the text displayed other properties like the position and the dimensions of the page can be defined At the bottom of the mask you are offered a preview of how and where the Help page will appear in runtime It is also possible to define
486. o user logged on SYS_Font Name of font face_name usedas String system font SYS_ Language Number of languages configured Num With X being a value between 1 and SYS_LanguageX 8 inclusive name of the Xth language configured SYS_CurrentPage Name of current non pop up page SYS_Page Name of focus page including String popup TRUE if focus display is enabled Boolea PSL ences otherwise FALSE SYS Script Name of Script currently being String executed empty if none ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix A System Variables 739 Table 1 Meaning of System Variables VELEI Description Date and time of system format t_time Windows VT settings using SYS_DateAnd POLYMATH also make it possible to Time define the refresh frequency for this variable see chap 5 Configuring the Boot pag 131 SYS AlarmNotOff Number of active alarms not Int terminated in the system SYS AlarmNot Number of active alarms not Int Ack acquired in the system SYS Histor TRUE if alarm history has reached Boolea Warnin y the limit set in POLYMATH see n g chap 5 Behaviour pag 187 TRUE if alarm history has reached Boolea the maximum limit set in n SYS MStOryRUN POLYMATH see chap 5 Memory resources pag 186 TRUE if active alarm buffer has Boolea reached the maximum limit set in n BUMETEUN POLYMATH see chap 5 Memory resources pag 186 SYS AlarmNum Total number of non acknowledged active
487. o which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val BorderStyle ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Establishes the Font size for represent ing the text of the scale Indicates the color of the precision in dicator of the Potentiometer This is selected using the RGB code or the col or palette BorderVisibility I ndicatorColor Determines the color of the Potentiom KnobColor eter knob selectable using the RGB code or color palette ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 394 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 45 Properties of the Knob Potentiometer Properties Description Indicates the number of subdivision marks appearing between two numer ical divisions These are shorter divi ScaleNotches sion lines than the numerical ones giving greater precision to the repre sentation Indicates the color ranges to be as Signed to given value intervals within the scale By clicking on wi you enter an editing window in which the value intervals and their respective colors can be defined the window also allows you simply to specify the limits in rela tion to the scale to be displayed Indicates the number of divisions on the scale of values The number relat ScaleSectors ing to the value above the division is also displayed calculated according to the number of divisions R
488. object can move or Lock nae Edit the TrendXY After having inserted a TrendXY on a page double click it to Start its editing A TrendXY Graphic will be present by de fault which upon the programmer s choice can be accompa nied by a range of control buttons to view the TrendXY The editing is organised on two masks Fields and General F ort a l f T O E e opm ierp pm y igri a a a g g B ar a a a Hie From the Fields mask the buttons which should be present together with the table can be indicated and positioned inside of the area Each button has its relative properties which can be edited in Editor Properties as for normal touch buttons see chapter 6 To insert or remove a button click the list of buttons at the left of the table If an object is already present on the page it will be highlighted inside of the list and it will be visible inside of the drawing area To move an element button or table drag it to the desired position There are se veral buttons that can be inserted and each one has a pre de termined function associated to it unchangeable e Move to the Left the button has two functions de pending on whether or not the cursor is viewed if the e cursor is invisible the key pressure scrolls the graphic from right to left If the cursor is 421 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 422 Chapter 6 Properties Editor e visible
489. of num_ pezzi reaches the exact value specified in this window Tl bvello dei pezzi basso tl kvollo Sei perzi medio Il bvelio dei pezzi ako JI Evolio dti potzi akissimno ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Phase 14 Using complex controls Chapter 10 Tutorial We also have to specify the graphic properties of the label re lating to the dynamic text using the same methods as already seen for all the other objects we have added up to now using the Properties Editor POLYMATH allows you to insert complex controls for managing elements like alarms recipes users and trends All these elements are edited in the same way thus in this il lustrative project we shall insert only one complex control a recipe editor First of all we create a new page click with right key on Pag es in Project Explorer then on Add and drag the frame cre ated in Phase 11 into it rn Tutorial Dh HwConfiguration Gf TS95CE in SW Configuration Gh fy Tags H g Languages and fonts r E ea M Pop n Add Mew and Edit H m Frar H FN Alar SS Rec ig Lise E Dat Create Folder Ge Scri wi T Ctrl c E m Lists apy H Faste Ctrl E rs Ima H Faste as Child a Ady Configuration columns In this way all the tools defined in the frame are again made available to us in this page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 7OO Chapter 10 Tutorial Starting from this empty pa
490. of horizontal alignment of the text this can be Cen ter Left or Right The value can be as sociated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the type of horizontal alignment of the text this can be Cen ter Top or Bottom The value can be associated with Tag or it can be man aged with thresholds Indicates whether the field should be disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Chapter6 355 Properties Editor Table 28 Properties of the ASCII Field Properties Description Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock at Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the field see PasswordLevel chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 AsciiLen Determines the maximum length of the string represented in the Field Allows you to use a general numerical field and view during insertion of its data the character attributed to the Password Charact
491. of the page only needs to be edited once rather than having to re edit every time its elements are to be present in a new page editing one frame you can make changes to all the pages containing that frame for example if later you want to insert a new button in the frame this will be present in all the pages containing the frame with just one operation ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Phase 12 Creating pop up pages Chapter 10 Tutorial Pop up pages are pages overlapping with already opened not yet closed full screen pages They are generally smaller than the complete page and are invoked by particular events Scripts pressing buttons events assigned to variables etc It is a good idea for the pop up page to include the function relating to its closure to avoid leaving Pop ups open that might create confusion inside the project In our example we have created a Pop up page PopUpPage in the foregoing section we associated its appearance with pressing the Quit button the one identified by the color or ange Let us suppose that when this key is pressed a mask for confirming the Quit operation appears that is a Pop up In effect two items will appear a label asking in the two lan guages of the project whether you wish to quit or not as well as two buttons one for negating associated with the function of closing the current pop up and one for confirming the Quit operation associated with the pred
492. of the relative tags This function is useful when different degrees of mutability are envisioned for field tags It is possible to introduce eliminate and duplicate update classes An identification name and a refresh value indicated in seconds can be inserted for each of these The Tools key allows to modify the structure of the columns at will Tags in the groups Memory amp ddress Address Group RTU Master fast per Address 0 Clars 05 S00 msec ET Hantar iit per Aiddrarr Clas _O 8 S00 mbe BTU Master fact par dddressmt Class_0_5 S00 msec ETL Marter fact per Addreccetl Clave 08 S00 mbet This window shows the list of project tags and it is possible to modify the relative class associated It is possible to filter the display of the elements limiting it just to the tags of the class selected The distinctive features are supplied for every tag in the list Under Tags in the tree chart find the tags just created Double click on these to enter the editing window of the individual tag ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer General Value Device Limits Conversion Thresholds Indirect Address Identification Name Tag Events Comment Address Type Device gt Tag sharing O Allow the tag s value to be shared through the intranet internet Name Comment Network identifier The editable elements in the General mask are the identifying
493. of variable see chap 7 POLYMATH Libraries pag 479 Table 1 Meaning of System Variables VELGI Description Type Name of terminal for TCP IP String SYS_ Machine network terminals this always Name coincides with the network name of the terminal e g TermCE SYS_IPAddress IP address of terminal SYS_OSName Operating system e g CE4 2 SYS_Screen_Hor_ Horizontal dimension of screen Int Dim pixels SYS_Screen_Vert Vertical dimension of screen Int _Dim pixels Version of project the string String never an empty string has the SYS_ Project following structure Vvv rr dd Version mm yyyy where vv version from O1 rr release from 00 dd mm yyyy release date SYS_ Author Name of project author SYS Author Org Name of organization to which the String project author belongs ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 738 Appendix A System Variables Table 1 Meaning of System Variables Earle Description Type SYS_ Project_ Name of the project String Name SYS_ AlarmPath File path for alarm history SYS_ RecipePath File path for the recipes SYS_TrendPath File path for trends SYS_UsrLog Log file path and name for user access SYS PageNum Number of non POP UP project pages SYS _ UserNum Number of users configured _ SYS TimerNun Number of timers La SYS_ Pipelines Number of pipelines in project Num SYS_PWDDefault Default protection level that is with n
494. oject New Wizard Page x Status al Binary compiler pages page Inizio alarm signal AlarmSignal alarm signal AlarmSignal 1 alarm signal AlarmSignal_ 2 alarm signal AlarmSigqnal 3 frames frame signal AlarmSiqnal frame signal AlarmSiqnal_1 frame signal AlarmSignal 2 frame signal AlarmSiqnal 3 Multi devices With the function Multi devices POLYMATH allows the user to quickly create a project with more devices by using the quick entering method Drag and Drop After having opened the Wizard mode see chap 4 Using the Wizard page 93 to create a new project select the Multi devices option then click on Forward Create New Project Choose the type of project that you want to create Te E oo W be Simple Project Network of devices Network of panels Multi devices Multi panels Choose a name and optionally a description for the project Name Project Description Cancel After having chosen the type of ESA terminal enter the desi red devices with the Drag and Drop mode ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 113 Managing the project Create Hew Project Parel Choose the product b gt use 3 Me Products pa Building z W Industrial H IT i ey Tid i my trios 2 Bg Lhe gi ITio7 ITIOFT COMM SP2 ETAL I ITO T SP1 CAN ETI ITLO7T SP1 GP ETH ITIO7T SPL PN ETHE IT207T SPL SP2 CETHI IT107W SP1 CAN ETHI ITIO7 W SPL Or
495. oject Explorer In both cases the Report is edited by means of three tabs General Pages and Headers Footers page General The upper part of the General mask can be used to introduce the general properties of the Report The Report ID is an identifying number of the Report within the project it is a whole number greater than zero The name and ID are unique attributes within the project that is other different Reports with the same name or the same ID number cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH Paga Previa are Layout Porra z Caefaull back gromi colar S55 365 365 Margins and grid Uts Left J Right Top Bnei eed width 1 Gred hargil 1 The lower part of the General mask can be used to define the common layout of each page belonging to the Report currently being edited All the pages belonging to the same Report thus have the same layout Using the left side of the mask you can define the page settings while the right side shows you an updated preview of how the printed page will look You can define a format for the page options are A4 A3 B5 Legal or Letter an orientation Portrait or Landscape and a default Colour for the pages belonging to the Report Finally after specifying a unit of measurement as a reference options are centimetres pixel inches or millimetres you can proceed to define the margins between which to print t
496. oject Explorer key allows modifying the columns structure at will while the Modify key allows entering the General property editing mask General General Identification Name Scheduler Comment Task type istatend ee Start Tag Scheduler_Start v End Tag Scheduler_ste s s ss OH Policy None x Weekly type bays OO O The General mask consists of the following sub masks e Identification e Properties e Holiday e Fields I dentification Identification Name Scheduler Comment ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 261 Project Explorer This sub mask makes it possible to assign a name and a com ment to the scheduler Properties Properties Task type StartEnd v Start Tag Scheduler_Start v End Tag Scheduler_Stop v The Properties sub mask shows data relating to the Sche duler settings It is possible to insert page identification at tributes e Task Type e Start Tag e End Tag The Task Type section makes it possible to choose among the following options e Single only the beginning time is shown that is only a start event will be associated it will not have any event or end time Task type Single w start Tag scheduler_Start Ww ae Scheduler_Stop e StartEnd both start time and end time are shown that is there will be two ev
497. olds if these have already been assigned ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 559 Scripts Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from crip Table 2 Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from Script Method Description OUT IN Returns the IC variable Long String code inserted under string form Gets the code type of the Integ String GetDataType value corresponding tothe er type of tag Gets the code type of the Integ String GetRaw DataT rough value value inside er ype the device from the variable Checks if the tag value is Bool String not valid ean Checks if the tag is Bool String correctly Off Line ena Checks if the tag is Bool String correctly Off Scan ean Checks if the tag value had Bool String been forced whilst in Off ean Scan Checks if the threshold of Bool String the tag is forbidden ean Set the tag to the Off Scan status String tag name Boolean O ffscan Set the threshold of the String Tag tag to the forbidden status name Boolean nhibit GetStringLen Gets the enoth configured Long String of the tag s string re Gets the filling assigned to Integ String Scthming type the code of the tag s string er ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 560 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 2 Methods of the ESATAG objects accessible from Script iStock card ay EBsscribtion GetFillingChar Gets nears the filingacnaracter fillings character integ eae
498. olor of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Label or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Text shown in the Label by clicking on you can edit multilanguage texts and their related Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Determines the flashing of the text the possibilities are No Blinking Slow blinking or Rapid Blinking The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 318 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 22 Properties of the Label Properties Description Determines the color of the Label text which can be selected using the RGB TextColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Allows you to specify the horizontal centering of the text within the Label TextHAlign The valu
499. on VTS9SCE aan gt A SS SWConfiguration Pz Tags H Languages and fonts 5 Pages a PopUp pages Wee Edit Recipe add New hen Edit g Users S Data ar Scripts 3 Global 7 E Lists Create Folder FN Images a Advanc Copy Ctrl c Paste Ctri Paste as Child We will create our frame using Project Explorer as indicated in the above figure By double clicking on the frame created the gridded editing page will open in which we can place the ob jects we want ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 676 Chapter 10 Tutorial First we reduce our frame so that it becomes a horizontal bar This we do by clicking on fa in the toolbar to select the frame and then by going to the red points and dragging the frame as Shown below This way the frame assumes the size indicated We can now define a background color by opening the Properties Editor Within the Background option we select the color blue while leaving all the other options unchanged ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 677 Tutorial Properties Editor rt FrameBColor FrameBColorTransp PageBorderEnabled Advanced BackgrImageEnabled L EER EEE EERE EEE EERE E oe a E e Sa e a DIDI AIA Our frame will thus appear as in the figure below and will be ready to accept objects placed within it Mouse poil We shall begin by introducing a button for navigating between pages t
500. on instal led on PC ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 728 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC 21x File Options Source Type ETH UDP PAddess 2 Port 4096 Connect ESA PassThrough 1 00 cF ok ESA Elettronica 5 p 4 Passthrough COM Port COME Panel Port SPI Sa After having Connected the ETH cable and having inserted the correct parameters application is connected to the IT panel by using the Connect key During Connection a dialog box window with relative data connection address IP errors opens using the Discon nect key the connection can also be interrupted ESA PassThrough Re File Options 7 Source Type ETH UDP IP ddress 192 168 1700 1 Fort 4056 n Devices IT1055 5P1LETH1 Pot Device Node SPI FP Series FP Sigma Passthrough SPO COM Port COMS Panel Port SPI START In the ESA Passthrough window it is also possible to modify the COM virtual port and the SP1 or SP2 Panel port ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 11 729 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC Dopo aver configurato tutti i parametri premendo il tasto Av vio si aprir una dialog box contemporaneamente sul pan nello verr disattivata la modalit Runtime ed apparir una finestra a pieno schermo contenente tutti i dati della connes sione Passthrou
501. on the individual objects contained in a page The correct syntax for using the object ESAPAGE is as follows ESAHMI ESAPAGE NamePage AreaColor RGB 23 24 23 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 The object ESACNTRL A Chapter 9 Scripts Warning The methods and Properties of ESAPAGE and thus of its children s objects are only applicable to the currently open page If a Script tries to edit elements in a page not currently open in runtime an error signal will appear ESAPAGE properties accessible with Scripts Table 16 ESAPAGE properties accessible with Scripts Properties Description The name attributed to the page by POLYMATH in the project editing phase The number attributed to the page by POLYMATH in the project editing phase Width The value of the width of the page CELE CCE value of the height of the page The background color of the page This can also be changed by inserting in the input phase an ArCACOLOR RGB value Long returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 ESACNTRL contained within ESAPAGE puts at the operator s disposal a series of methods and properties relating to the individual objects present in a page The following sections will analyze the properties and methods accessible using Scripts in relation to each graphic object that can be added to a page maintaining the order followed in the chapter on the Properties Editor All the graphic ele
502. ons he Options of POLYMATH Tools gt Utility Accesses POLYMATH utilities NA Tools gt Manages the Translation of the Translations project NA Tools gt Tags Manages the Tags Variables of Variables the project NA Tools gt Recipes Manages the project recipes NA Tools gt Alarms Manages the project alarms NA Tools gt Accesses the Downloader func Downloader Utility tions NA Tools gt To access the Dictionary func Dictionary tions 1 Icon Not Available ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 33 Layout of menus Click on the option Tools gt Options to access the mask for configuring the Options of POLYMATH PEI Select the language to use for the ESAPOLYMATH IDE Language Skin English 7 Miscellaneous Paths Shared dictionary Use the Language menu to choose the language of the POLYMATH application Once the language has been selected the application will need to be restarted to apply the changes ESAPOLYMATH Options ioj xj Select the skin to use for the ESAPOLYMATH IDE Blue 7 Miscellaneous Paths Shared dictionary ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 34 Chapter 3 Layout of menus From the Skin menu it is possible to select the skin to use with the POLYMATH interface ESAPOLYMATH Options g Draw only field s border while moving Fi Copy amp Paste using a new name C Use manual validation of project s
503. ons in both the project s languages After clicking on OK our Help page is complete and with that our page pop up too At this point in the project the only thing left to do is define the number of pages and the way data can be accessed from them In our example we first define the default page created in POLYMATH that we defined as the Start page of the project ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 690 Chapter 10 Tutorial see chap 10 Configuring the Boot page 665 and then we go on to create pages that use complex controls Editing the Start page When a new project is created POLYMATH defines a default page in it This is initially empty but can naturally be edited by the programmer who can also add an unlimited number of pages to the project The ways of navigating within these pag es are defined by the programmer using the many made avail able by the application buttons with predefined functions Scripts user checks etc To edit the default page we double click on it in the Project Explorer Siw Configuration E 5 Tags G Languages and fonts is S Pages E E G Poplip pages el Frames FN Alarms F At this point the editing masks for the page appear in the work area We move to the Fields mask that shows a preview of how the page will appear in runtime Now just drag the object into the page required the positions can be modified with greater precision by operating the Pr
504. onts Pages PopUp pages Frames Alarms Recipe types Users and Passwo Data archive Trend Trend xY Data log Scripts Global script Lists Text Image Images Advanced Is lt lt s s s sx I lt x lt x LU AS Si s a IS lt lt k k KIK aS Is SRIK RIR IRIKI RIR Cut to eliminate the element selected and copy it into the clipboard Copy to copy the element selected into the clipboard Paste to paste in the element contained in the clipboard Paste as Child to paste in the element contained in the clipboard as Child of the element selected Import to import variables recipes alarms etc insi de the project Export exports project elements variables recipes alarms etc on Hard Disk specific network path or USB storage device amp Note For the functions Alarms Recipes Users amp Password it is also possible to customize the Log files Elements of Project Explorer The tree type structure of Project Explorer allows the user to access the configurator of all the components of a POLYMATH project with the exception of the graphic elements that are configured by the Editor property the Project see chap 4 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Setting the panel Chapter5 127 Project Explorer Creating a project in Wizard mode page 93 and Hardwa
505. operties Editor for each individual object Naturally the first time the page preview is accessed it will appear completely empty E ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 691 Tutorial You can now decide whether to display or remove the grid in side the page by clicking on the icon in the toolbar Introducing a frame We begin editing the page by introducing the frame we creat ed in Phase 11 we select the frame using Project Explorer and drag it into the page as indicated in the figure below Tal Tutorial C4 HwConfiguration C VTS95CE SW Configuration Pz Tags E A Languages and fonts 5 Pages E PopUp pages SB Frames DB Frame E Alarms We now position the frame in the lower part of the page As we can see all the buttons and graphic properties specified in the edit phase of the frame have been imported Introducing an image Now we can introduce a second element into of our first page we apply one of the images inserted in Phase 7 that is the image saved in the project as logo We can do this in the ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 692 Chapter 10 Tutorial Same way that we inserted the frame in other words by drag ging the quickest method or we can use another procedure as set out below In the toolbar we click on the image icon and trace the outline of the area that will take our image on the page We have now defined where the image is
506. operties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Control Returns the length of the GetTextLen string currently written into the field Properties of ESACNTRL Symbol field Table 40 Properties of ESACNTRL Symbol field Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the rectangle of the field has currently ControlLeft been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 616 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 40 Properties of ESACNTRL Symbol field Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle of the ControlTop field has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the rectangle Width containing the object Control Defines the height of the Height rectangle containing the object Defines whether the object should Bool be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the border of the rectan
507. or From the Fields mask the buttons which should be present together with the table can be indicated and positioned inside of the area Each button has its relative properties which can be edited in Editor Properties as for normal touch buttons see chap 6 Touch Button page 373 To insert or remove a button click the list of buttons at the left of the table If an object is already present on the page it will be highlighted in side of the list and it will be visible inside of the drawing area TO move an element button or table drag it to the de sired position There are several buttons that can be inserted and each one has a pre determined function associated to it unchangeable e Save the button saves and stores the changes made e Automatic allows scheduling to start The system rea ds previously set values and behaves based on them By pressing once the Automatic button the system switches to Manual and Scheduler is disabled e Run activates set function in events e Stop stops Scheduler execution e Copy the button copies Scheduler daily trend to then overwrite it into a different day at will It is useful when the same daily scheduling is needed on different days It functions by pressing the button and subsequently selecting days the change is to be applied to finish by selecting the Copy key again e User Button identifies a new button that can freely be customised by
508. or In this section we will analyze each Value field indicating its functional charac teristics its particular properties that can be configured by the Properties Editor and its Events Events Editor A general property of all graphic objects buttons value fields numerical fields etc that can be inserted in a project page is called the Invert Function option The Invert Function option can be associated to variables that have a Boolean behaviour true false and can be used only if activated as shown hereafter Select the Tools menu and then the Options sub menu ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 326 Chapter 6 Properties Editor 000G age k Utilities gt Gaeecc0dQae Z Z Translations gt oaa OOD E J erres Project Explorer Recipes Alarms Downloader Utilities ESAPI Langas akn T FMATH Opli Dl rss cnily field s border mhilis mairg fl Copy bPaste using a ner HTE D Ure manusi walidwtan of project s components O Hiri pateeceds adaig C Shor page s heldi bocttig fd Ure the panels picture ints the pape editor fd Shoe the ineeet hunchon Mas epen chalga 10 Selecting the Show the invert function box the option will be activated Invert Function option operation Select the Invert option in Editor Properties using it as an example with a numerical field associated to a Tag Properties Editor NumericField NumericField 0003
509. or as indicated in the follow ing section Properties of the Trend Pen Table 23 Properties of the Trend Pen Properties Description Identifying name of the Trend Pen Must be unique among the graphic el ements wath With neson Determines the color of the Trend Pen which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable AreaColor Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value AreaVisibility ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 321 Properties Editor Table 23 Properties of the Trend Pen Properties Border3D BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize BorderStyle TextBlink TextColor TextHAlign Description Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able Determines whether there will be a Border to the Field or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if
510. or creating and editing a project by describing all the utilities offered by POLYMATH Once the editing phase is over the work done needs to be downloaded onto the ESA panel First of all it is necessary to check that there are no problems in the project that might prevent it behaving properly in runtime To detect any errors there needs to be a validation operation which analyzes all the objects created and checks that the properties are complete and coherent without however creating any transfer files Transfer files are created though when compiling which therefore is the more complex operation Once the compiled files have been created they can be downloaded onto the panel using the appropriate POLYMATH function This chapter will supply the details of the operations of validation compilation and download illustrating at the end another very useful function of POLYMATH the download of the image of the operating system onto a Windows CE terminal Validation Validation is the operation that checks the coherence of the objects added to the project Any errors or warnings are Shown in the Errors Viewer window see chap 7 Errors Viewer page 499 POLYMATH offers wither a global validation of the project or the validation of only the object currently being edited a project can be globally validated by clicking on the icon of the Toolbar or main menu using File gt Validates Project while partial validation requires a
511. orced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the percentage infill of the object currently being redrawn The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Defines infill direction of the object currently being redrawn the values may be as follows 0 From bottom to top 1 From top to bottom 2 From left to right 3 From right to left If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 595 Scripts Table 23 Properties of ESACNTRL Circular sector Properties Description Defines the infill color of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g FillColor RGB 24 255 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked FillColor Methods of ESACNTRL Circular sector Table 24 Methods of ESACNTRL Circular sector Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning upd
512. order3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 26 Properties of the Dynamic Text Properties BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderStyle Tagld TextBlink TextColor TextHAlign Description Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Dynamic text or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 Reference variable for the value to be displayed This is a numerical variable Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an exist ing one Indica
513. orts csv files of following elements e Watch list list of variables selected by check mark e Tag values value of variables Simulations type of simulation associated with single variables File gt Import Exports csv files of following elements e Watch list list of variables selected by check File gt Export mark e Tag values value of variables Simulations type of simulation associated with single ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 506 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Tags Menu path Function description Tags gt Edit value Edits the value of the selected variable Tags gt Reset all Resets the values of all values variables Tags gt Add to Adds the selected variable to watch list the Watch List Tags gt Remove Removes the selected variable from watch list from the Watch List Tags gt Reset Removes all variables from the watch list Watch List Tags gt Show Shows list of variables included watch list in the Watch list Tags gt Show Shows list of all variables complete list included in the project Simulation Simulation gt Play Carries out all simulations Simulation gt Pauses the simulations Pause Simulation gt Stop Stops the simulations Simulation gt Add Adds a new simulation new simulation Simulation gt Edit Edits the selected simulation simulation Simulation gt Removes the selected Remove simulation simulation
514. ot they will remain single and independent A detailed description of the procedure in order to create a panel s network follows Example of network layout between 2 server panels those that make the variables available to various clients of the network and 2 client panels Ethernet Create a new project for the first server panel connecting the desired device and develop it as per a normal project taking care to check the box allow the tag value to be visible on the network ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 732 Chapter 12 Panels network fect Explor a TOC Exerer a a d o da Progetto TOS Ti SPL SPA OTM Tage a TL Propet Fe Configuranon Hunn Tag I cial arin sath gilli Comment Te SWConigurabon Idernthicaton 7y Tags Ta amp Languaped amd honis 3 E Pages m address E Inizio Ih ie i7 Foplip pages pea Device E BB Frames P alarms gt Recipe tres Og Users and passwords i E Cate archive a Scripts u Global script 7 ust i images ih advanced i Tag sharing GA Allow the tag s value te be shared through the itranetinternet Narr Tag ori rik Network edenther Tag Progette iT lost SEL SP 2 ETHLA Tags Tag Name name of the variable visible on the network Comment a text can be inserted that comments the variable Network identifier non changeable progressive number that identifies the variable When it has been created save the p
515. ou can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Determines the flashing of the text the possibilities are No Blinking Slow TextBlink blinking or Rapid Blinking The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the text of the button which can be selected using TextColor the RGB code or color palette The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Allows you to specify the horizontal centering of the text within the Label TextHAlign The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Allows you to specify the vertical cen tering of the text within the Label The TextVAlign value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Lock ns ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 377 Properties Editor Table 37 Properties of the Touch button Properties Description Determines the authorization level re quired to access the button functions see chap 5 Password configuration page 213 PasswordLevel Makes
516. ou to select which project to start up You can also check a box for starting up the project in automatic mode ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 514 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime ESA Elettronica Start Up Active Project Project Automatic Start Activate Cancel Active Project Project01 Automatic Start Cancel OK e Press OK to confirm ESA Elettronica Start Up Ed Active Project Project Automatic Start Activate Cancel X e Info displays the version of the DataModel supported by the current Runtime e Connection Setting allows you to configure the connection parameters by selecting between the serial or Ethernet port port 4096 If the serial transfer is ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 5 5 Compiling Downloading and Runtime chosen a CVCOM41102 cable must be used If the direct ETHERNET transfer is chosen a CVNET11002 cable crossed type must be used If passing through a HUB or a SWITCH a standard network cable must be used Connection Settings Seral Connection 0 Serial Ok Part number Cancel Baud rate C Eth TCP Ethernet connection T Eth UDOP Fort number 4096 f Http e Start ESA system start runtime the project starts after it has been transferred onto XS PC e Stop ESA system stop runtime e Exit Downloader close downloader e About shows information of the downloader versions
517. ow the user can choose either to download the files onto the panel or viceversa in our sample we download files PC gt HMI if a project is open the following window will appear ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 548 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Wizard IT Beckup Opborns oline Panal Stre File Marie Giytomp Test tip In the second part of the window you can choose where to store the project through the button Browse Now click Next Wizard Communication parameters Canned guth bee In the first submask the option Connection Type allows to select the kind of communication serial COMPORT ethernet USB ecc ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Panel Reset Chapter8 549 Compiling Downloading and Runtime OTe SVSM59 ITA Tan Tagram r TEXT_001 7RH TrandPen tmp TrondPonMarkar rde Limp Tr ndPanMerkanrorers bmp r Trond ona kar rg and lid np Sart Runtime Onlet Beckup of flos oprieenil By clicking End you end the procedure Panel Reset is an application of the terminal control panel which allows to cancel all that has been transferred onto the Hard Disk From the initial page of the terminal click on Control Panel M Start ESA Application Downloader Configuration E Control Panel From the Control Panel click on the Reset icon ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 550 Chapter 8
518. owing It is certainly possible to customise Scheduler View using the days of the week or the Week and Week end keys see chap 5 Fields page 171 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 453 Properties Editor Scheduler View Properties Table 63 Scheduler View Properties Properties Description Identifying name of the Scheduler View Must be unique among the graphic elements Comment Identification comment inside of POLY MATH man Wt avesion pem Het avenson Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Scheduler View should have a background or if it AreaVisibility must be transparent a Boolean vari able can be assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Border3D Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking BorderBlink or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border which can be selected using the RGB BorderColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be mana
519. ows transferring a Panasonic PicProgram project to PLC using the terminal RunApplication ChangeModbusSlave Used to change the address of a SLA Address VE Modbus Used to launch the Excel applica tion The document to be opened can be indicated with the application name and pathway Used to launch the Internet Explorer Runi nternetExplorer application Used to launch the Media Player application The document to be opened can be indicated with the appli cation name and pathway RunMediaPlayer Used to launch the Acrobat Reader application The document to be opened can be indicated with the appli cation name and pathway Used to launch the Word applica tion The document to be opened can be indicated with the application name and pathway ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 752 Appendix B Predefined functions Note The Run functions allow to launch applications such as Ex cel Internet Explorer Media Player Acrobat Reader and Word These functions are only available on ESA termi nals with Windows CE Professional Plus license for example in code IT110T1112 the Professional Plus license can be identified by I in position 7 of the code Note The Run Application function that can be used only with PC and XS allows launching an external application it is possible to directly insert path to be executed in order to open a fi
520. page 129 Functions relating to the project Table 5 Functions relating to the project Function ChangeNextLanguage ChangeLanguage LightUp LightDown LightSet ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Changes the project language current ly being used to the next one in the list defined in POLYMATH see chap 5 Languages page 166 all the ele ments subject to translation are dis played in the new language Changes the project language current ly being used to the defined one all the elements subject to translation are displayed in the new language In RUNTIME this function exits from the project completely returning the operator to the environment of the panel s operating system Reduces the project to an icon the corresponding icon can be found in the applications bar It increases brightness of led display terminals 1T104 IT1LO5T 1T107W It decreases brightness of led display terminals 1T104 IT1O5T 1T107W It sets brightness of led display termi nals I1T104 IT105T IT107W Appendix B Predefined functions 751 Table 5 Functions relating to the project Function Description It launches an application that has be en installed on the device PC XS Flush Persistent Data Used to force the writing of the actual persistent type internal Tag values ShowCalculator It shows calculator Allows to turn off PC directly from Run time DownloadPanasonic All
521. parameters device IP address and CPU expansion Slot number ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH1 Parameter Device IP address 0 0 0 0 Expansion slot 2 Device IP address IPADDRESS 0 0 0 0 255 255 255 255 Expansion slot DEC 0 255 Chapter4 117 Managing the project Panel From the previous screenshot by clicking on the ESA panel name one will enter the main edit window of the same see chap 5 Setting the panel page 127 Identification Name IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH1 Comment Model IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH1 Creation Date 09 05 2012 8 30 43 Modify Date 09 05 2012 8 30 43 Compiling Date 09 05 2012 8 30 43 IT Remote access O activate IT Remote Access Username Multi Panels By using the entry Multi Panels the user will be able to sim ply create a project made up of more panels After opening the Wizard mode to create a new project select the Multi Panel option then click on Forward Create New Project Project Type Choose the type of project that you want to create O E oo oP be Simple Project Network of devices Network of panels Multi devices Multi panels Choose a name and optionally a description for the project Name Project Description aris C k a el ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 118 Chapter 4 Managing the project A window will appear from which it will be possible first by cli ck
522. peline to be provided Start PipelineBy Name ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 573 Scripts Table 9 ESAPIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Start PipelineBy Number StopPipeline ByName StopPipeline ByNumber Write PipelineBy Name Write PipelineBy Number GetPipeline StatusBy Name Description Starts the Pipeline indicated by the input parameter needs the number relating to the Pipeline ID Stops the Pipeline indicated by the input parameter needs the string containing the name of the Pipeline to be provided Stops the Pipeline indicated by the input parameter needs the number relating to the Pipeline ID Forces the writing of the Pipeline indicated by the input parameter also if the Pipeline has been stopped the string containing the name of the Pipeline must be provided Forces the writing of the Pipeline indicated by the input parameter also if the Pipeline has been stopped needs the number relating to the Pipeline ID to be provided Returns an indication of the status of the pipeline referred to in the input parameter the string containing the name of the Pipeline must be provided The complete returned data will have one of the following values and meaningss 1 Inactive Pipeline 2 Active Pipeline 3 Disconnected Pipeline no communication Pipelinel D I nt PipelineNa me Str Pipelinel D I nt Pipeline Name Str
523. pend the event is activated when the timer is temporarily suspended e OnTimerFired the event is activated when the timer na turally stops counting e OnTimerStart the event is activated when the timer starts counting e OnTimerStop the event is activated when the timer is stopped Timers MUnArE AANe GnTimerFired OnTimerStart OnTimerStap OnSuspend ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 278 Chapter5 Project Explorer Configuringthe It is possible to define a set of properties and working cha device racteristics for each device in the project Double click HW Configuration in Explore Project to open the editing page IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 E 4 ETHI SP1 gt 4 SP2 ATU Mader fast pe Sl _ RTU Master IRTU Master Fast peripherals peripherals 4 com o o o Select the device you wish to edit Double click it to edit its settings in the General and Communication Ports win dows General General Identification Name RTU Master fast peripherals Comment DEVICE Model RTU Master fast Panpark DEVICE Creation Date 14 05 2010 18 20 3 Modify Date 15 07 2010 15 07 35 Compiling Date 15 07 2010 11 43 08 O Use swap into protocol Type of addressing Default x This window allows you to insert the identification attributes of the devices such as the Name and Comment Each na me in the project must be different no two devices should have
524. perator to access the Recipe editor in the terminal see chap 5 Recipes Types page 203 To insert a Recipe Editing table into a page click on the icon or alternatively use the main menu Fields gt Create gt Complex Controls gt RecipeEditing After clicking draw just the outline of the table in the page and it will appear automatically Clear Butter Dornad Buffer Upload Buffer Once the table has been inserted into the page and been se lected a series of properties contained in the Properties Editor can be attributed to it the meanings of these properties are identical to those of TrendView see chap 6 Properties of a TrendView page 408 By double clicking on the table you access its editing page which comprises two masks Fields and General GGGGG80G686 PeeeErEEE Cuna ng Bou Bi d baat Bire Fiar Buplend bute Wiar buton The default contents of the Fields mask include the Alarm Grid table whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsec tions see chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 Using this mask you can proceed to indicate which buttons should be present with the table and position them within the area To insert or remove a button just click on the list of buttons to the left of the table if an object is already present in the page it will appear highlighted within the list and will be visible in the Table Edit Area To move
525. plicate by clicking on Duplicate or delete ones already present by clicking on Delete ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 245 Project Explorer Fields Using this mask you can edit the way the Header Footer will actually appear in the pages into which it is called it is edited just like in the case of normal pages with various objects being introduced and properties being set see chap 6 Managing a page page 295 The properties of the Header Footer are the same as for Frames see chap 6 Properties of Frames page 298 To introduce an object simply click on the respective icon and immediately after draw where in the page you wish the outline of the area to contain it to be placed The next chapter describes all the procedures for introducing the graphic objects together with their related meanings and tools Using this mask you can however set the dimensions of the Frame Click on the icon to select it and then move the cursor to one of the red corners by dragging it in line with the desired dimensions this operation can also be performed by the General mask as set out in the next section You cannot use this mask to move the object in that its position could be at the top of the page if used as a Header or at the bottom if used as a Footer General Fiel General Identification Name Header Comment Pixels Height Grid width Grid height The Gen
526. ployed in introducing the recipe editor we can introduce other complex controls in new pages or even more than one in the same page For example in our project we create a new page in which we insert an active alarms display table Applying the same procedures as in the previous subsections we obtain the following result 703 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 704 Chapter 10 Tutorial This we obtained by inserting the complex control resizing it and eliminating certain default buttons Furthermore we have configured the control graphically so as to have a uniform set ting within the project as a whole The user can now practice inserting also instances of other complex controls recipe list alarm buffer and user table all of which are edited in exactly the same way as we have just seen Phase 15 After inserting the complex controls we need into our project Defining the we can add a page containing a trend a chart displaying the Trend graph behavior of a variable Suppose that in our project we want to constantly monitor the situation of the variable num_ pezzi graphically In Phase 10 we defined a Trend buffer for acquir ing and memorizing value samples acquired by the variable First of all we create a new page as in the previous phases and drag the navigation frame inside it Now we can really start inserting the graph in the toolbar we click on and draw the space where our trend should appear in the pag
527. ply a name or a different path The network project makes it possible for several terminals to communicate share and manage data simultaneously One s own project is present on each terminal where Tags are Shared and can be monitored by all of the network partici pants The sequence of operations to be carried out to create a Network Project will be shown in the following images ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 4 Managing the project To create a new project having opened the Wizard mode select the option Panel network and then press Forward Create New Project Project Type Choose the type of project that you want to create Te E da W be Simple Project Network of devices Network of panels of Network of panels Multi devices Multi panels Choose a name and optionally a description for the project Name Project Description Click Add to download the projects that make up the network one at a time Create New Project Network Project List of project Select ESAPOLYMATH projects to include in network project 105 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 106 Chapter 4 Managing the project Once the projects have been downloaded click Forward in this example we will put two projects on the network Server_IT107 vtprj and PC Client vtprj then click End Create New Project Network Project List of project Select ES4POLYMATH projects to include
528. porting Tags see chap 5 Variables Export Import page 157 One alternative method of creating a variable is to click Add in the menu arising from right clicking on Tags in Project Explorer or clicking on in all those properties to which a variable can be associated Once a variable is created it with its valid name assigned by POLYMATH will appear under the Tags option of the tree form diagram to enter edit mode for this just double click on it If you wish to get to know the list and the meaning of the events that can be associated to a variable you are advised to consult the next chapter see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 Note By dragging a variable from Project Explorer onto a page in the work area POLYMATH automatically creates a data field numerical or ASCII associated to the variable within that page Note The duplication of a variable provokes the creation of a new variable with anew Memory Address with the same value address as the Memory Address of the original variable 137 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 138 Chapter 5 Project Explorer RefreshGroups Class_0 as fast as possible 0 sec Class_0_5 500 msec 0 5 sec Class_5 5 sec 5 sec H Class_10 10 sec 10 sec The second window in the Tags menu allows to specify the Gruppi di Rinfresco Refresh Groups present in the project These classes allow to distinguish the updating frequency of the values
529. ppear Enable Upload Directory Hard Disk FTP Selecting the Enable option the FTP folder sharing service in the Hard Disk directory is enabled ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 11 723 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC FTP Configuration OK Directory Hard Disk ETP Selecting the Upload option the writing modify mode of the shared folders is enabled FTP Configuration OK Directory ihard DiskiFTR The 3 folders that can be used simultaneously are shown in the following image ojx FTP Configuration Enable Upload Directory Hard Disk FTPY Hard Disk FTP Hard Disk2 Storage Card In this way besides the folder reserved by default My Devi ce Hard Disk FTP a further memory space than can be used remotely can also be accessed At the end of the configurations just described click OK to make them effective ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 724 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC Passthrough Another important function that ESA puts at the user s dispo sal starting with the POLYMATH 2 10 version is the Pas sthrough Passthrough refers to the possibility of downloading or uploa ding the program of a PLC connected to one of our operator panel serial ports in the IT range This function can be obtai ned by having the user s PC staying directl
530. ppear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the minimum horizontal Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the vertical Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the minimum vertical Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the horizontal scale label Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the cursor is visible 1 in the table or not 0 Chapter9 635 Scripts Table 55 Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the color of the cursor RGB RW Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for CursorColor example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines
531. print the entire content of the page displayed by the panel at the moment of the print command adapting it to sheet format There are two types of Hardcopy printout e Hardcopy page print the current page excluding any popup e Fullscreen hardcopy print exactly what appears on the screen oh gt Note There is also the possibility of managing the text print and values on rows in runtime exploiting the Scripting functions contained POLYMATH Readers are advised to consult the section in this manual dealing with the Scripts to discover the potential of these functions see chap 9 object ESAPRN page 639 Remote The Remote Notifications function allows to send notification Notifications messages by e mail to a previously created user list Associating the notification message to a given alarm present in the project a message can be sent to one or more users for example The message can be associated to one or more than one of the three alarm states Raised Acknowledged Acquired From Explore Project double clicking Remote Notifica tions the editing area is accessed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 247 Project Explorer General The text which will make up the message in the desired lan guage can be typed on the General mask Alorm messages Alarm ON message ON Alarm ACK message ACK Alarm OFF message OFF Email From the Email mask it is possible to determine th
532. project option In the second part of the screen click on the Browse key to choose where the project copy is to be saved then click on Next Wizard TT Geckup Options fd Compile Project cove De Terme os ebk The following image will appear click on Next to save ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 542 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Default paths A ute defauk path Pages Ls Hap At the end click on End Wizard Backup Rettore gt Ee_fenmers_Limuts_Fg_4_6_ _i0 geg gt Dk Aumens Limits _ bg 4 5 7 _10 Pg gt Bb _Dar_Tima_fo jpa gt Bb _Dar_Tima_ g jpa gt Ds _Aumerm _fo_d_ gt _7_10 jp9 gt Bk Humer Da A_i 7 ijen gt k_Ascii_Up_Fo_4_5_7_10_G8 jp gt De_Agci_Up_0g_4_5_7_t0_01 jp9 eek k Ascii Low Fg a _5_7_10_ l jpg eee k Ascii Low Ago d 5 7_18 ijpg eek STMG ITA TEK eek S17 SMSG_EMG 0h oom Heteork Tags im er Propectaml ook TEZT_OOL TRN coir Page hameger bin wee ESAPRIASC Mine Backup of files enreeieneed At this point the file is ready to be sent to the remote client after receiving it they must copy it on a USB drive and insert it in the USB drive present on the IT file From the initial page of the terminal click on Control Panel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 543 Compiling Downloading and Runtime o Downloader Configuration E ContralPanel From the Con
533. properties of the variable like name and comment the name of a variable must be unique that is other variables cannot exist bearing the same name again the maximum number of chars you can give to the tag s name is 60 The comment is a string that is displayed only within POLYMATH and it identifies the variable It is necessary to specify the type of variable you are editing the variables are divided into device internal system indexed and networks variables The device variables are shared with the connected equipment and constitute the two way data exchange medium the internal variables by contrast are used as a deposit for local data or results of operations or Scripts and their value is not read by the device in this case it is possible to specify whether the value should be retentive by activating the option appearing in the page when the variable is internal Save the value in a persistent memory Tags are retentive If the variable is retentive the value is conserved when the terminal is switched off The system variables whose names begin obligatorily with the prefix SYS_ are variables predefined by POLYMATH that contain special information relating to the working of the project and of the system They are not editable by the 139 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 140 Chapter 5 Project Explorer operator but can be displayed and used by the panel The type of system variable can be selected fro
534. ption User Data 1 User Data 2 Alarm Type M History M Delay M Global Ack M ack all instances M External Ack External Ack Tag M External Ack Bit Mallow Page M Page Support remote notification Notification group Automatic bit reset Cancel By clicking on Forward the following page will open from which the user will be able to choose clicking on the Select button where to save the file to export ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 196 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Alarms Export j 0j x Choose the filename and extension to export alarms File Name Salva in mno o em i Documenti recenti Desktop i Documenti r BL Risorse del computer E lt USETIGCE Nome file Salva come Microsoft Excel xls 7 Annulla ZA Alarms Export loj x Choose the filename and extension to export alarms C Programmi ES4 amp elettronica ESAPOLYMATH 2 10 Samples IT110 Alarms xls File Name Export Cancel Click on the Export key to obtain the following window ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 197 Project Explorer Alarms Export File Export Start export 12 04 2012 14 38 34 Exporting Alarms in file Alarms xls Alarm exported Alarmd Alarm exported Alarmi Finish export 12 04 2012 14 38 34 Open Export Folder Alarms Import Options Utilities tE Translat
535. r 1 fam bea E A gy a EvA Camcor Camcor Camcor Climate Climat Climat Climat im l i Curtain Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Aae Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Fan Fan 1 HE a e mE uA Fan 2 Fan 3 Fan 4 Fan5 Garden Garden Kitchen POD i g Kitche Kitche Kitche Light Lighti Light2 Light3 anon 48 64 gt Fi ea Switches Lights Pipes and Valves Tanks Motors ears Hit TT Tah anii Machinery Image lists Images Flags and Icons Various Keyboards User objects Temporary objects Project Explorer 00a Progetto HW Configuration Tal Progetto 1 b HWConfiguration 17110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 SW Configuration Pz Tags amp Languages and fonts Pages H PopUp pages H DB Frames PN Alarms Recipe types g Users and passwords 5 Data archive Scripts 3 Global script E Lists 4 Images ie Advanced Project ExplorerA Libra lorer rojet Bpiors K brame Chapter7 481 Other anchorable windows Image of the Explore Libraries in Extended mode Library Explorer 88600 Access Access Access Access Bathro T2E Bathro Camcor Camcor Camcor Camcor 6D Climate Climat Climat Climat Curtain ea Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai Curtai i Curtai ORAA G Switches Li
536. r hand using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned toa whole variable TipColor Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement a Tag to the Direct move Sts Movenerinevas Fina Poona ewaaate Simple Controls are objects that can be inserted into a page to show the operator the value of an item of data variable and or edit it In this section we will analyze each Simple Con trol identifying their functional characteristics their proper ties configurable using the Properties Editor and their associated events Events Editor Touch Button A Touch Button can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple controls gt TouchButton After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the button Touch Buttons are useful as they allow the operator to assign a given function or script user with a single click For further details regarding scripts and predefined functions the reader is advised to consult the relevant section of this manual see chap Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a button 373
537. r UserLogin UserLogout ChangeUserPassword Recipe LoadRecipe DownloadRecipeBuffer DownloadRecipe SaveRecipeBuffer ClearRecipeBuffer DeleteRecipe UploadBufferRecipe ExportRecipe ImportRecipes ExportRecipeType ExportRecipedllTypes StopRecipeTransfer StopAllRecipeTransfers Page ShowNextPage ShowPreviousPage uPanehlarne The FileName field in the window below allows you to select the directory and the name of the file in which to save the Log Events Functions Editor mx Functions Scripts associated to this event 0N ExportUserLog Add Function F Add Script Parameters of the selected function script O Store the return value into AEEA Hard Disk test csy Opening the xxxxx csv file with Excel displays the following records and allows you to check who has accessed password protected objects ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 220 Chapter 5 Project Explorer A 16 07 2010 08 44 09 P4 login 16 07 2010 08 45 11 P4 logout 16 07 2010 09 16 07 P8 login 16 07 2010 09 19 33 P8 logout 16 07 2010 10 08 03 P8 login 16 07 2010 10 16 14 P8 logout Fields grid General Users Users events Rows Font SystemTahoma Tahoma wv Selected cell Text Color jess 255 255 Background color 0 0 0 The Fields grid window is used to set the graphic properties of the cells of the user list table See
538. r using Project Explorer click with the right hand key on Alarms and then on Add In the editing phase two masks General and Property that we Shall go on to describe in detail below are presented for each alarm in the project General The General mask can be used to set the identifying properties of the alarm like Name and Comment The name is a unique attribute within any given project that is other different alarms with the same name cannot exist The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH A variable must be assigned on which the checks relating to the alarm will be carried out depending on the type of variable see chap 5 Value page 140 there will be different modes of checking which may be orientated to the bit or value of the variable The text box asks you to enter the reference value which when reached will generate the alarm absolute value or bit number ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 200 Chapter5 Project Explorer Properties General Properties Events Information Priority AlarmPriority Error 7 Description Alarm Description we User Data 1 w User Data 2 w UES Alarm ISA The specific characteristics of the individual alarm are defined in the Property mask First of all the programmer is asked to enter a membership group for the alarm see chap 5 You can distinguish the priority of the alarms in runtime by assigning them different colours i
539. r 9 Scripts Table 43 Properties of ESACNTRL Bar Properties Description Defines whether the border of the rectangle containing the bar Should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking i 2 Rapid blinking BorderBlnk If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the internal area of the bar currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value AreaColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the color of the indicator used in the bar currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g AreaColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the value the bar refers to Editing this property provokes Value immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines whether the field is enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the user can edit it Disable Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 I ndicator Color Chapter9 621 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL
540. r Grid Properties Description Determines whether the Viewer border is present or not A Boolean variable can be associated to this value BorderVisibility Determines the dimension of the Bor der It must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be associated op tionally or it can be managed with thresholds FontGridCell Determines the font used to display text in grid cell FontHeaders Determines the font used to display text grid headers Determines the RGB color used for the TextColorDisableCell text in disable cell Determines the RGB color used for the TextColorEnableCell text in enable cell Determines the RGB color used for the TextColorSelectedCell text in selected cell Determines the RGB color used for the TextcolorWweek text in week headers Determines the RGB color used for the TextColorWeekend text in weekend headers Determina se l oggetto inizialmente visibile anche possibile associare una variabile di tipo Boolean per mo difiche a Runtime oppure pu essere gestito a soglie Lock n se l oggetto si pu spostare Permette di controllare il movimento del focus quando si utilizzano i tasti di movimento del cursore all interno di una pagina inoltre controlla l ordine di Tabi ndex inserimento dati su pi campi quando la Impostazione automatica del campo successivo della pagina abilitato see chap 5 Generale page 17
541. r example in our project we set the color blue for the border and the internal area 5 for the border size with 3D Etched as the style The last step is to edit the indicator so that it will be displayed in yellow The preview of how the potentiometer will appear is as below Setting a dynamic text Suppose we want to relate a text to the value of the variable monitored by the potentiometer To help us do this POLY MATH allows us to insert dynamic texts in the project pages the text displayed is chosen from a text list in runtime and it depends on the current value of reference variable To add a dynamic text to the page we click on the icon in the toolbar and draw the outline of the field in the page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 698 Chapter 10 Tutorial General Help page Keys Events Page Properties Mouse Sih cy Selecting the field just created we move to the Properties Ed itor and specify the check variable num_ pezzi the same one that the potentiometer is monitoring and the appropriate text list TextList Behavior Value 0 250 500 750 ControlType Value Disable L Hide L_ Lock PasswordLevel 10 TabIndex 0 TextList TextList TextMaxLen We now move to the Value option and click on to start ed iting the values we must specify a reference value for each option in the text list The corresponding string will be dis played whenever the value
542. rch By Name Search from Element s name begin with Mask Search By Type Function ExitRuntime Script Function Internal Command Macro Save filtering conditions Load filtering conditions ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 58 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained Cross reference lements List Searched element Element name Element type Progetto IT112TPro SP1 CA4N ET Find element Cancel By selecting the Script option and choosing an item from the list e g ESAStartup the SW will search all ESAStartup Script in the project Cross reference Filters Search By Name Search from Element s name begin with Mask Search By Type Function Script ESAStartup Function Internal Command Macro Save filtering conditions Load filtering conditions Cancel Once the filters for carrying out the search are selected the following mask is obtained ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Cross reference lements List Searched element Element name Element type Script Progetto IT112TPro SP1 C4N ET Export all Export selected Find element From the previously described mask using the appropriate keys it is possible to complete the following operations e Export all Export all objects in the list to
543. rder to the ASCII field or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds BorderVisibility ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 354 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 28 Properties of the ASCII Field Properties BorderStyle Keyboardld Tagld TextBlink TextColor TextHAlign TextVAlign ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Enabling this option allows you to se lect the keyboard to use for editing Reference variable for the value to be displayed This is anumerical variable Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an exist ing one Determines the flashing of the text the possibilities are No Blinking Slow blinking or Rapid Blinking The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Field text which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the type
544. rderStyle i ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Active if the value is a Text List value Font for the text shown in the field by clicking on wW you can edit multilan guage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Establishes the Font size BorderVisibility ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 398 Chapter6 Properties Editor Table 47 Properties of the Knob Selector Properties Description Defines the color of the indicator hand I ndicatorColor This is selected using the RGB code or the color palette Determines the color of the Selector KnobColor knob which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette Reference variable whose value is checked Using the appropriate keys Tagld you can create a new variable or edit an existing one Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds le if the E nee can move or Lock aes the values to insert into the scale By clicking on v you enter an editing window in which the value in NumValues tervals and their respective colors can be defined the window also allows you only to specify the limits in relation to the scale to be displayed Determines the authorization level re quired
545. rds nn Keyboards f gt Weekly tasks Hwg Schedulers m Holiday Groups fev A4udioFiles BM vers BBB 2 8 pii aE he List window will appear containing a list of Timers en tered in the project Timers Name Mode Duration Direction Bers One Shot 5 sec Increase eae Normal 5 sec Decrease Single Alarm 01 01 1970 0 00 10 MA PS a E EE NA ET ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 276 Chapter5 Project Explorer The Timers can be used in accordance with the needs of the project simply by entrusting functions or Scripts to their Start suspend or end count events see chap 6 Events related to Timers page 294 Using the general table relating to the Timers you can introduce delete and duplicate Timers In relation to each element you can specify the operational mode the duration and the direction of the count There are different modes of operation e One run the timer starts allows a certain period of time to elapse then goes off and stops one run e Normal the timer works periodically that is when it goes off it resets itself and then another cycle starts indefinitely continuous run e Single alarm the timer goes off at the date and time specified and then stops e Alarm time the timer goes off at the specified time then resets and another cycle starts continuous run A Warning Irrespective of the type of Timer used it is always necessary for the Timer to be activate
546. re configuration editor see chap 4 Managing the project page 89 have already been described in the previous chapter while the other objects will be described in this chapter To access the editor of an element just double click on it in Project Explorer the corresponding editing window will appear in the work area We will start by describing the elements that can be associated with ESA terminals and then we will illustrate the settings of devices connected to these terminals When the Project Explorer icon corresponding to the panel added to the project is double clicked the user is able to edit its characteristics Editing the panel is organized via 6 work windows General Communication ports Main window Configuration Boot Exchange areas and Components The user can move from one window to another at any time without losing any of the changes made General Harte TLIO SF 1 SPs ETAL tabon Data 15706 7010 5 45 sdy Dabe 0209 2000 10 47 16 sdl 7 ETH ad d 1 i ampiling Gabe 15 04 2010 10 08 11 The work window General is used to change the name of the panel in question and add comments within it to make it distinguishable in the programming phase with POLYMATH The bottom of the window shows information on the date of creation editing and compilation of the project ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 128 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Communication ports Protecsl iir
547. rea of the potentiometer currently being drawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for peacore example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines the value represented by the potentiometer Can be varied Value by providing a new string and the on screen update happens after the Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field is enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the user can edit its Disable value Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Methods of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer Table 52 Methods of ESACNTRL Slide potentiometer Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Redraws only the part of the field relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Control ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 629 Scripts Properties and Methods of ESACNTRL Slide Selector The properties and methods of the Slide Selector that can be accessed using Scripts coincide with those of the Slide Potentiometer already described see chap 9 Properties of ESACNTRL Slide Potentiometer page 626 and see chap 9 Met
548. reached via icon or main menu I mage gt Increase contrast Increases the contrast of the image being edited Decrease contrast reached via icon or main menu Image gt Decrease contrast Reduces the contrast of the image being edited Increase brightness reached via icon or main menu Image gt Increase brightness Increases the brightness of the image being edited Decrease brightness reached via icon bea or main menu Image gt Decrease brightness Reduces the brightness of the image being edited Cut Area reached via icon or main menu Image gt Cut Area If this icon is pressed it will be possible to cut and make visible a portion of the imported image Rotate reached via icon or main menu Image gt Rotate This function makes it possible to rotate the image anticlockwise with each rotation POLYMATH automatically updates the Height and Width dimensions inverting them Adapt to screen reached via icon A or main menu Image gt Adapt to screen If this icon is pressed the image is adapted so that it occupies the work screen completely in practice its dimensions coincide with the maximum screen dimensions of the VT Maintain proportions reached via icon A or main menu Image gt Maintain proportions If this icon is pressed the proportions of the original image are maintained that is to change the Height of the image POLYMATH updates the Width and vice versa Chapter5 237 Project Explorer General
549. red page will show seven keys for weekly programming along with the two hour and minute fields ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 265 Project Explorer Fields Weekly type By choosing the Week option the configured page will show two keys for choosing between week day programming or week end only along with the two hour and minute fields ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 266 Chapter5 Project Explorer By double clicking on Scheduler View in both cases the page opens configuration menu for editing all present objects see chap 6 Editing Scheduler View page 454 Events The Events option is only present on DOUBLE CLICK Mode while it is present in Events Editor on the Extended mode It is possible to match an event function or script to each previously created Scheduler The event is activated on the two different Page conditions e OnStart The event is activated by the start tag assi gned value present in the properties sub mask see chap 5 Properties page 261 e OnStop The event is activated by the end tag assi gned value present in the properties sub mask see chap 5 Properties page 261 List eStart neo To assign an event to the page click on the selected condition and on the browse key the following screen is displayed which allows user to match a function or a Script to the page by using the appropriate keys ESAPOLY
550. relating to the value shown leaving out the graphic aspects of the field This function is preferable to Draw when all that is needed is a refresh of the value it is quicker Refresh Control Properties of ESACNTRL Touch button Table 47 Properties of ESACNTRL Touch button Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the button has currently been drawn ControlLeft If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the button Width Control Defines the height of the button Height Defines the position in pixels Int RW counting from the left where the ControlTop button has currently been drawn If this value is changed the ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 624 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 47 Properties of ESACNTRL Touch button Properties Description Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the border of the button currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value BorderColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whet
551. rev 2 2 86 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Project Explorer egaegag POLYMATH is organized into four virtual areas inside of which a window can be anchored These virtual areas are situated respectively to the left to the right below and above the Work area To select which of the four areas to move the window to use the mouse to place the grab see picture on one of the four arrows of the directional pointer see picture in the middle of the screen When the mouse key is released the window assumes its new position immediately keeping it until the next operation Each time the mouse reaches an area of the directional pointer the corresponding destination area is highlighted If the window is dragged within another Anchorable window a new directional pointer containing a fifth central button appears When the grab is dragged onto one of the arrows of the directional pointer and the mouse key is released the window is simply set next to the existing one in the appropriate direction While if it is dragged onto the fifth button of the pointer the window is incorporated as a clickable folder as indicated in the figure below ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 87 Layout of menus The windows that are in the form of a clickable folder can be moved by merely dragging the folder to a new position The changes made to the program layout are saved for all future use of the software ESAPOLYMATH
552. rface page 89 281 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 282 Chapter 6 Properties Editor P Note As of DOUBLE CLICK all the objects properties are visi ble and editable in the popup window which appears after double click over any object Following is an example using in the project a Touch Button By using the DOUBLE CLICK interface see chap 4 Double Click Interface page 90 let s insert a touch button in a page of the project see chap 6 Touch Button page 373 and let s double click over it to edit its properties by using the EXTENDED interface such properties of the object are placed in a table see chap 6 Properties of the Touch button page 374 will appear the following image Edit TouchButton m xi General Identification Name TouchButton Comment O Lock bata Bitmap Nons Image X F2 Image list id A 7 Image Tag id Tas R sitstartstor O Caption none Text Text jw Text list id B Text Tag id Tas F eitstartstor G ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 283 Properties Editor Clicking on Position we will obtain the following screenshot from which it will be possible to edit the object position High Left and its dimensions Height Width Cdit Toanchibutton Top 65 Left ur Width 143 Height 137 eS From the previous window by clicking on the Asp
553. rid subdivisions which can be select ed using the RGB code or color palette GridHorMinDivision Color Indicates the number of horizontal GridHorMinDivision subdivisions in the grid that is the Number number of horizontal lines between any two divisions ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 415 Properties Editor Table 55 Properties of a Trend Graph Properties Description Indicates the style of the subdivisions of the horizontal grid may be Solid or Broken line GridHorVisible Indicates whether there should be a horizontal grid Determines the color of the vertical GridVerDivisionColor grid divisions which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette GridVerDivision Indicates the number of vertical divi Number sions in the grid Indicates the style of the divisions in GridVerDivisionStyle the vertical grid may be Solid or Bro ken line GridHorMinDivision Style Determines the color of the vertical GridVerMinDivision subdivisions of the grid which can be Color selected using the RGB code or color palette Indicates the number of vertical subdi GridVerMinDivision visions in the grid that is the number Number of horizontal lines between any two di visions Indicates the style of the subdivisions in the vertical grid may be Solid or Broken line GridVerVisible Indicates whether there needs to be a vertical grid Indicates the color for the label texts of the horizontal scale
554. ro perties Editor window appears to the right of the POLYMATH ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 489 Other anchorable windows where you can define all the parameters of the variables as sociated with the object Pros ae Eor cade thes Edig Oynamicinage Dynamicimage 0000 Ehsable Hida Leck Imagekeepigpeceans Y TypetfMovement Properties Editer Events Editor a Double clicking the object opens the window below where you can edit the properties of the object Valore p ene Rotazione 9 Ooan O1is0 270 r Visibilit Riflesso Orizzontale O verticale Background 255 255 255 Sempre Background 1 255 255 255 Sempre Fan 0 255 255 255 Visibile Fan 45 255 255 255 Non visibile Fan 135 255 255 255 Non visibile Fan 225 255 255 255 Non visibile Fan 315 255 255 255 Non visibile Grid 255 255 255 Sempre Sfondo Trasparente ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 490 Chapter 7 Other anchorable windows Libraries management To manage libraries click on the appropriate Libraries man agement icon in Libraries explorer Library Explorer a Gi Switches EE Lights Pipes and Valves Tanks Motors Machinery Image lists Immagini i Flags and Icons Various keyboards Ukente Folder My Library TEMP This screen opens Libraries management iol
555. robe type On Command i The data acquisition will be performed using a script a function or an exchange area Management Size samples 100 Warning level 75 O Log to file M Enabled at start up Export file In this mask enter the operating characteristics of the Trend and of the related memory buffer First of all a Source variable to the object of the monitoring of the Trend must be specified You also need to indicate a sampling mode for the values The types of sampling available are summed up in the following table Tabella 3 Types of Trend sampling Sampling mode Description the sampling is done at regular intervals ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 223 Project Explorer Tabella 3 Types of Trend sampling Sampling mode Description the sampling is done when the reference On Strobe Raise variable changes the value from FALSE to TRUE the sampling is done when the reference On Strobe Fall variable changes the value from TRUE to FALSE the sampling is done on receipt of a command On Command from a Script function or command area If the type of sampling is Time based it will be necessary to enter a reference to a Timer specially configured so as to acquire sampling of the TrendBuffer see chap 5 RefreshGroups page 138 while if the type of sampling is On Strobe Raise or On Strobe Fall it will be necessary to specify a Boolean variable see chap
556. roject and using the Same method create the one for the second server Now create the client project connecting the Tcp IP http device that is found in the device list below Others Esa Electronic and develop it as anormal project In the definition of the variables below Address Type select the Network Type Network Device Internal System Indexed Network When creation is terminated save the project and create in the same way the one for the second client ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 12 733 Panels network Create now a new project Select as project type Panels network Create New Project Project Type Chaser the type of project thak you want to create ae WwW Sere Fad Havik of Haei ol deres mrri Click on the three points at the end of the white box to add by means of the normal window of Windows the first project Following click on Add and insert the other three projects developed previously Create New Project Network Project List of project Select ESAPOLYMATH projects to include in network project Complete the guided procedure as a normal project Double click on the name of the first panel in this case Client105 and by means of the section Network configure the network parameters The network parameters configured In this section will over write those already configured in the panel Therefore they will be those to be used on the
557. rom the following screen choose the operation to be perfor med either carrying out backup of firmware the project or recipes present on the terminal or downloading the firmware the project and one of the previously saved recipes present on ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 70 Chapter 3 Layout of menus the PC hard disk or on an external support USB pen drive to the terminal Procedure for updating operator terminal Select an activity Backup O Firmware and project O Recipes Download O Firmware and project O Recipes For example choose to back up the firmware and the project present on the terminal select the corresponding check bo xes then click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal Select an activity Backup M Firmware and project O Recipes Download O Firmware and project Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 71 Layout of menus From the obtained screen it is possible to select an existing folder or to manually insert the path after the folder is cho sen click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal Choose output folder Folder Name C Documents and Settings mlanza C Cancel A report of the situation of the previous wizards is viewed on the next page by pressing Save Procedure it is possible to save the selected folder in the structure Procedure for updating operator terminal Final Report Single
558. roperties Editor Bar field events Table 35 Bar field events Event Description Activated when the value of the Field is OnValueChange changed using the touch screen Indicator An Indicator can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Value fields gt Pointer After clicking on the icon use the mouse to define the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Indicator The Indicator gives a graphic representation of the value of a variable within a given scale of values Unlike the Bar the In dicator cannot be edited and has a different graphic form The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to an Indicator Properties of the I ndicator Table 36 Properties of the Indicator Properties Description Identifying name of the Indicator Must be unique among the graphic elements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 371 Properties Editor Table 36 Properties of the Indicator Properties Description AreaColor AreaVisibility Border3D BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderStyle Determines the color of the Indicator area which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari
559. roup initial refer ence if the control relates to a group Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Active if the type of control is single bit LastBit orientated Indicates the last bit of the group to apply the control to Determines if the object can move or Lock 6k Determines the authorization level re quired to be able to edit the field see PasswordLevel chap 5 Password configuration page 213 This property is ignored if the field is Read Only ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 26 Properties of the Dynamic Text Properties Description Makes it possible to control the focus movement when using movement keys of the cursor within a page It also con trols the order in which data is intro duced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Tabi ndex Defines the text list from which the string to be displayed will be selected TextListid in Runtime Using the appropriate keys you can create a new list or edit an ex isting one see chap 5 Text list page 230 TextMaxLen Indicates the maximum length of the text F Determines whether the translation of TextTranslateDisable the Label text must be disabled Identifies the movement associated to Typ
560. rride default grid size width 10 Height 10 An identification name and comment for the Trend that is being edited can be inserted on the General mask The page editing grid default dimensions can be overwritten as well see chap 5 Main window page 129 introducing new mea surements in pixel valid only for the current field editing ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 424 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties of a Trend Graph XY Table 57 Properties of a Trend Graph XY Properties Description wists Diversion oPte wath Heit Denson ote newt Determines the color of the Area which can be selected using the RGB AreaColor code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Graph has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether there will be a BorderVisibility Border to the Table or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if so desired or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines the style of th
561. rt page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 243 Project Explorer e click on Add in the Report list of pages related to reports e click on Add or Add and change on the menu appearing after clicking with the right key of the Reports element in the Project Editor In both cases the Report pages are edited by means of two tabs Fields and General Fields Using this mask you can define the way a Report page in question will actually appear it is edited just like that for normal pages with various objects being introduced and properties being set see chap 6 Managing a page page 295 The properties of the Report pages are the same as those of the Project pages see chap 6 Page properties page 297 To introduce an object simply click on the respective icon and immediately after draw the outline of the area to contain it wherever you wish in the page The next chapter describes all the procedures for introducing the graphic objects together with their related meanings and tools General The General mask can be used to set the identifying properties of the Report page The name Is a unique attribute within the project that is other different Report pages with the same name cannot exist ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 244 Chapter 5 Project Explorer The Comment is a Unicode string and is visible only within POLYMATH In the Parameters sub mask it is possible
562. rtchas orien Sem x Imegas System Seem Lijit Tyma Speen ca Granit shoes Sateen Seem a Filed polygons Tysen orem System kepboards Sytem Sytem ux Salva in B IT107_T w gt QO 2 e am Documenti recenti Desktop o Documenti Sr a Risorse del computer S asec Nome file User Salva come Library Annulla Z The utility of the operation described above is to be able to use the group of objects belonging to a certain library also from another PC where POLYMATH is installed thus allowing access to the same library file for different users also it is possible to maintain the library ies continuously updated by clicking on Update Source ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter7 493 Other anchorable windows LE nid Librarcad ai ier Local Local Buttons Sy sheen Syfem x Setrhes Systecn ptem EE Tribin Frim m Lights Tyber Errem w pmig object Systecn Sprem ai Filed podygane Syitesn Sten m Tyska bepboards Eyib Sytem Mr brary Local Local Pp Library il Tinpan fer CS Programm ESA gauren AOR 2012 18 2689 H egual ba the Loca DRO 2012 18 28 83 warin imparts E Mp Lbeary_1 Local Local Y MT Lirary_i Local LacH The same utility is also found in case the library saved in the network therefore accessible by other users is different from the one in the processing phase project therefore by clicking on the Local Update key the project library will be upda
563. rties of ESACNTRL Circular sector Properties ControlLeft ControlTop Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Chapter9 593 Scripts Control Defines the width of the object Width Control Defines the height of the object Height ControlHide Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the arc of the circular section currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 5K94 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 23 Properties of ESACNTRL Circular sector Properties Description Defines whether the arc of the circular section should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is f
564. ry ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 194 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Click on the Export submenu to obtain the following window Hix Choose the alarms to export Filter fall Alarms Alarms that will be exported Alarm Alarm Cancel Clicking on the drop menu the filter options which may be selected by the user will be shown let s choose for example the option All the Alarms Alarms Export l 5 x Choose the alarms to export Filter M All Alarms All Alarms of a Device All Alarms with name starting with All alarms of folder s Alarms that will be exported 4larmo Alarm Cancel by clicking on Forward we will obtain the following window from which the user will be able to choose the languages to export ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 195 Project Explorer Alarms Export loj xi Language selection Md Languages M Italiano Italia M Inglese Stati Uniti M Tedesco Germania M Spagnolo Spagna Francese Francia Portoghese Portogallo M Cinese semplificato M Russo Russia by clicking on Forward we will obtain the following window from which the user will be able to choose the fields to export in the Excel table Alarms Export IOl x Choose the elements to export Project elements M Activation Type M Activation Value M Tag M Priority M Group M Descri
565. s s s Ts Up using Up the user will be able to move the selected layer up after going to the Id column Down using Down the user will be able to move the se lected layer down after going to the Id column ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 186 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Preview with the Preview key the user will view a graphic preview of the chosen customization OK by pressing OK the user confirms the created settings The following is an example of how CSV exportation of the alarm history occurs A B C D z F G H l 1 File Type HISTORY_ALARMS_EXPORT 2 Station Name 3 Project Id 4 FW Version 3 00 5 Creation Date 26 03 2012 6 Creation Time 1 22 55 Export Key NCDTEPQO 8 License Code 1M1SINCBJTSQXG1Q g 10 Name Description Date Time EventType Priority Quality Operator 11 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 02 30 1 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 12 Allarme_1 Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 02 41 3 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 13 Allarme_2 Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 02 46 2 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 14 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 10 26 1 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 15 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 10 37 3 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 16 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 10 44 2 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 17 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 10 48 1 100 0 DEFAULTUSER 18 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 10 51 3 6100 0 DEFAULTUSER 19 Allarme Descrizione All 26 03 2012 1 11 00 2 100 0 DEFAULTUSER Memor
566. s Tags used in the project If a Tag is present within the Project Explorer but it is not associated with any project element it will NOT be included in the search ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 57 Layout of menus Project Scripts Functions In the Projects Scripts Functions option it is possible to com plete a search for elements within the project with two diffe rent criteria that can only be used individually e Search by Name allows carrying out an alphabetic se arch among elements the Search by Name option is divided into three subgroups 1 Search from to The filter is set by the user who can de fine a search field starting form one letter and finishing with another one 2 Element name begins with The filter is set by the user who defines a search field by selecting the letter at the begin ning of the name for the element to be searched 3 Mask The search filter is the same one of the option Element name begins with e Search by Type allows searching within each indivi dual category of the Function or Script present in the panel project It is possible to choose between IT and VT based on the panel type used in the project IT By selecting the Function option and choosing an item from the list e g Exit Runtime the SW will search all Exit Runti me functions in the project Cross reference Filters Sea
567. s a polygon to the page Polygon Simple figures gt Adds a broken line to the page Broken line Simple figures gt Adds a regular polygon to the Regular polygon page Simple figures gt Adds a circular sector to the Circular sector page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 21 Layout of menus Table 5 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Simple figures ete Path Menu Description of function Simple figures gt Adds a label to the page Label Simple figures gt Adds a complex label to the Complex label page Adds a trend pen to the page indicating the current value of the buffer Simple figures gt Adds an image to the page image Submenu Value fields Simple figures gt Trend pen Numeric Dynamic ASCII Symbolic Date time Bar Indicator A A GE JT T Table 6 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Value fields Kol Path Menu Description of function Adds a numerical field to the page see chap 6 Value fields page 325 Value fields gt Numerical Value fields gt Adds a dynamic text to the page Dynamic Value fields gt Adds an ASCII field to the page ASCII Value fields gt Adds a symbolic field to the Symbolic page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 22 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Table 6 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Value fields Icon Path Menu Description of function Value fields g
568. s and panels Add New Object Category panels anels X Now the introduction procedure of the object selected results identical to that described previously in the Wizard e Itis possible to enter a device also simply by selecting it from the list in the right part of the window and drag ging it inside the left part of the window itself ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter4 99 Managing the project Devices EJ E CODESYS E MOTION CONTROL MH MOTOR DRIVE Mm OTHERS E PLC mm 458 E AEG MODICON E ALLEN BRADLEY E BECKHOFF Mm BERTHEL Mm CROUZET Mm DELTA Mm EATON MOELLER E GE FANUC IT107W SP1 SP2 ETH AA SP2 gt 4 ETHI SPi gt H H H H H A A w RTU Master fast peripherals wW RTU Master slow peripherals I RTU Slave w Tcp IP Modbus Master i Tcp IP Modbus Slave EE OMRON EE PANASONIC E caa m SCHNEIDER TELEMECANIQUE SIEMENS WIGAR zl P E ee ft Automatically a window will open from which it will be possi ble to set device connection parameters RTU Master fast peripherals General Identification Name RTU Master fast peripherals Comment DEVICE Model RTU Master fast peripherals DEVICE Creation Date 04 05 2012 15 53 00 Modify Date 04 05 2012 15 53 00 Compiling Date 04 05 2012 15 53 00 Parameters O Use swap into protocol Type of addressing Def
569. s in the Grid CountRow Returns the number of Long rows in the Grid Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Table 55 Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Properties Description Typ RW e Defines the position in pixels Long RW counting from the left where the Grid has currently been drawn If Controrkent this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method Defines the position in pixels Long RW counting from the top where the ControlTop Grid has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method Control Defines the width of the object Long Width Control Defines the height of the object Long Height Defines whether the object should Bool RW be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 633 Scripts Table 55 Properties of ESACNTRL Trend Graph Defines the color of the border of the rectangle containing the Grid Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB Properties Description Typ RW e 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking RGB RW the Draw method Defines the color of the internal RGB RW area of the rectangle containing the Grid Can be chan
570. s laal La 7 W oB o c soeo E E The following page will open where by using the present keys it will be possible to change the layers add new ones delete as needed change the order of the existing ones Layers ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 170 Chapter 5 Project Explorer e Add by using the Add key the user will be able to add new layers max 13 edit the name and determine whether or not to make the selected layers visible e Delete using the Delete key the user will be able to delete the selected layer e Up using Up the user will be able to move the se lected layer up after going to the Id column e Down using Down the user will be able to move the selected layer down after going to the Id column Project preview All interno di Polymath presente una funzionalit che per mette di ottenere una preview della pagina attualmente visua lizzata questa preview permette all utente di visualizzare gli stati degli oggetti senza dover passare dal Simulatore La funzionalit che accessibile dal menu a tendina presente nella Toolbar permette all utente di visualizzare alternativa mente lo stato Off e lo stato On dei controlli contenuti nella pagina ON ESAPOLYMATH Progettetapile 25 MT 112 5amplelT112 vtprj OOBGese0e0 eceeuugac 2 16 canonada BRSSEU eC ess se OOe steele seceesse alll qaa Doa BOG 0 8S 0O odgo S600 a8 ProgekoSapmleITLi2TSPi
571. s notice able to the programmer If the Properties Editor does not appear on the screen because it has already been closed it can be recalled to the screen by clicking on the icon in the toolbar or using the Main menu by clicking on Display gt Show gt Properties Editor Like all an chorable windows the Properties Editor too can be moved re duced to an icon or closed see chap 3 Moving Anchorable windows page 85 Over the next paragraphs we will show the editable properties of each object and the meanings of these properties Dynamic assigning of values to the properties Some properties can have a variable assigned to them rather than having a constant value The value of the properties can change in Runtime in line with the changes of the variables as Signed to them To pass from the assigning a constant mode to assigning a variable mode just click on the icon present on the left of the editable field If in assigning a constant mode the icon will be and pressing on it will take you to assigning a variable mode If in assigning a variable mode the icon will be gt and pressing on it will take you to assigning a constant mode The type of variable assigned must naturally be compatible with the values requested by the properties for example e forthe properties True False the variable must assume Boolean values e for the properties DateAndTime the variable must as sume Long values e for properties defining colors
572. s of the machine with POLYMATH installed and those of the terminal PC see chap 5 Communication ports page 128 If an Ethernet TCP IP connection is chosen specify the parameters in order to carry out the connection as IP address and communication gate that must be configured before the PC see chap 8 Preparation of the PCs or PC terminals based on the first download page 512 Once the connection has been selected click on Connect to Start the connection whilst clicking on Cancel cancels the operation Transferring data After setting all the connection variables and activated the connection POLYMATH checks the status of the terminal In particular there is a check of the space available in the terminal s memory relative to the needs of the current project and status of the project s components ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 5 7 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Panel Connection Type Ethernet TCP IP 192 168 100 1 4096 Selected panel IT_TFT Model YT4T SP1 ETH1 Model panel connected YT4T The upper part of the download mask is used to indicate whether the project being sent is consistent with the type of terminal being used to receive the transfer If it is not the mask shows an error message Awalleoe o ovine 123kb Hamor aeedabilibe CK the eomesnents can be downloaded Following this the details regarding the memory require
573. s set out in the paragraphs that follow File menu Cle Che Shatter Colettafa FS rt D Cirit Table 1 Functions in the File menu Kol Path Menu Description of function Creates a new Wizard project File gt New see chap 4 Managing the project page 89 File gt Open Opens an existing project File gt Close Closes the CT Files Save asa Saves a project with a different name path T File gt Print Prints Prints the project 0 Prints the project 0 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 17 Layout of menus Table 1 Functions in the File menu Path Menu Description of function J File gt Validate Validates all the project see project chap 8 Validation page 503 File gt Validate Validates the element currently current selected Compiles the project see chap File gt Compile 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 Opens the project simulator see chap 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 File gt Run project Open the project online simula File gt Perform tor see chap 8 Compiling online simulator Downloading and Runtime page 503 Downloads the project onto the panel see chap 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 NA File gt Exit Exits from POLYMATH 1 Icon Not Available File gt Download Edit menu Cr Ctrl p Ctrl ctrl E Ctrl Delete Table 2 Functions of th
574. s the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The BorderColor value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Selector or not a Bool ean variable can be assigned to this value BorderVisibility Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a BorderSize whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Active if the value type is Text List Font related to the text shown in the field by clicking on you can edit multilanguage Fonts see chap 5 Languages page 166 Establishes the Font size Indicates the color of the precision In dicator of the Potentiometer This can be selected using the RGB code or the color palette I ndicatorColor Reference variable whose value is checked Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an existing one ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 390 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 43 Properties of the SlideSelector Properties Description Indicates the color of the entire cursor CursorCol r of the Potentiometer This can be se lected using the RGB code or the color palette Indicates the direction of the scale whether vertical or horizontal Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the ob
575. s the name of the page i Sequencel Sequence sequence d Int Name Get Gets the name of the page Sequence Sequence sequence Name Str Page Varies the light on the LigntUp display by increasing it ee ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 584 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 15 ESAPAGEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method Description OUT IN n Varies the light on the LigntDown display by decreasing it Varies the light on the LightLevel LightSet display by setting the specific value CloseAllPop Closes all open PopUp pa ges Current Returns a numeric value Language based on the set language Creates a file containing a Export file v cloned list of user accesses Str Mode og I nt Flush Saves persistent data in Integer Persistent panel memory Data Carries out a copy of the PrintDia viewed page log bool Hardcopy Orienta tion int Mode int Quit Only for PC XS exits Run Application time and turns off PC XS Prints and or saves a ReportMo project report in PDF for de int mat PrintDia log bool ReportNa me string OutputNa me string The object The object ESAPAGE allows some properties of an individual ESAPAGE page to be managed as set out in the following table The String relating to the name of the references pages must be passed to it This object does not have usable methods but in the following section we will analyze the object ESACNTRL child of the object ESAPAGE which enables the user to act
576. s to be defined as in the case of the project download see chap 8 Transferring data page 516 The image loaded onto the panel overwrites the existing one which should be backed up before running this operation While installing POLYMATH the images of the operating systems for the various models of ESA panels are copied onto the PC ready to be downloaded onto the terminal Generally the image files are in the main directory of POLYMATH in the path xml OSI mages VTxxx For example if the installation path has not been changed the image for VT595 will be in C Program Files ESA Elettronica ESAPOLYMATH xml OSI mages VT595 NK800 bin ESA panels with Windows CE operating system allow a connection to be made to an Ethernet network by means of just a few simple steps After connecting the terminal to the network using the appropriate network cable just define the connection as set out below 523 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 524 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime e From the initial page of the terminal click on Control Panel MP Start ESA Application o Downloader Configuration E Control Panel e From the Control Panel click on the Network icon amp _ Stylus Date Time Owner Network eo fh Nay OW AG S i Lamp Saver Backup Password FTP X Reset Information e Use the next window to insert the details by which the panel is to be recognised within the network
577. s will now show the new image Image by clicking twice on this we can edit it ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Phase 8 Defining text and image lists Chapter 10 Tutorial Us Look in E Haye O t ca ile Now just click on the empty area in the work area to browse the contents of the Hard Disk and choose the file to insert You are now directed to the editing mask of the images where you can set dimensions and compression characteristics Col or variants of the image can also be defined at this point see chap 5 Operations performable on an image page 235 For our images we will leave all these properties unchanged We use the same procedure to introduce the images of the flag denoting the English language and the logo to use in our project The image objects of POLYMATH take the name of the source file but can still be edited we have introduced 3 images with the names ita eng and logo When defining a project it may be useful to display images or dynamic texts to the operator in relation to the value of a vari able For this reason POLYMATH allows you to define object lists that can then be invoked in the project in association with a variable depending on the value of the variable assigned one or another item in the list will be shown Let us now create a simple list of images using the two images of the flags introduced in the previous section The procedure for cr
578. sal by the programming language VBScript time Now date Date day addzero Day date month addzero Month date year Year dat hour addzero Hour time minute addzero Minute time second addzero Second time dest Hard Disk2 ric_ amp day amp amp month amp amp year amp h amp hour amp amp minute amp amp second amp xml As we can see the variables day month hour minute and second are passed to the addzero function defined by us in which the zeroes for one digit values are added The final instruction leads to constructing the string dest indicating the path and name of the file to which the recipes are exported In our case we will save onto the support called Hard Disk2 which for example could be a USB key with a name of the type ric_O2 12 2005 h12 13 08 xml In this way we will be certain to have a series of distinct exportations in a file with unique names in terms of the support What follows is an overall view of the Script that has just been configured 647 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 648 Chapter 9 Scripts 1 S ES AMM ESATAG Contrallo CEt KAVVA l 2 I 1 Then Upload and Save the Recipe ESAIN ESARECIPETEE RecipebutterUpliad Dosaggi o 5 ESAIMI ESARECIPETEE Sav recip Dosaggi Saddlivatea 0 Velu s of the date and time HoOsAd Ferd Day d at S Saddrerd Month data annoe Year dataj 12
579. same network after having first carried out the configuration indicated in the preceding section In this section we shall give an example of how to access a PC folder with Windows XP using a POLYMATH project e First of all create a new folder on your PC s hard disk e g C we will rename this folder Shared_Polymath and then select it by clicking with the right hand mouse key as indicated below ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 526 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Shared_Polymathy Explore Search Sharing and Security OH Send To uk Copy Create Shortcut Delete Rename Properties e Now select the option Sharing and Protection from the resulting menu This takes you to the window for the Sharing settings e Now move to the Sharing tab as shown in the figure below Shared_Polymath Properties General Sharing Security Customize fou can share this folder with other users on your network To enable sharing for this folder click Share this folder C Do not share this folder Share this folder Share name Shared_Polymath Comment User limit Maximum allowed Allow this number of users To set permissions for users who access this Permissions folder over the network click Permissions To configure settings for offline access click Caching Caching Windows Firewall is configured to allow this folder to be sh
580. screen choose the COM port to be used set communication speed then click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal Select communication parameters Communication port Baudrate com 115200 Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 75 Layout of menus For example choose to Download the firmware and the project previously saved with the back up select the corre sponding check boxes then click Browse Procedure for updating operator terminal Select an activity Backup O Firmware and project O Recipes Download MW Firmware and project a Browse O Recipes Cancel Pressing Browse will open a window where Backup files are associated in the folder s Select Firmware and project file B 12 OBESA Elettronica 4 library My Recent F WBackup_22032011_0908 bin Documents Backup_22032011_0908 bin File name Fw and Project file bin 3 My Network Files of type MW Firmware and project C Documents and Settings m O Recipes ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 76 Chapter 3 Layout of menus From the obtained screen click Next Procedure for updating operator terminal Choose output folder Folder Name C Documents and Settings mlanza C Cancel A report of the situation of the previous wizards is viewed on the next page by pressing Save Procedure it is possible to sav
581. se it has previously been closed it can be brought back to the screen by clicking on the icon Mad of the toolbar or using the main menu by clicking on Display gt Show gt Project Explorer Like all anchorable windows Project Explorer too can be moved reduced to an icon or closed see chap 3 Moving Anchorable windows page 85 There are six buttons present in the upper part of the window e The button is used to add one element to the category selected in the tree chart If the entire project is selected this key can be used to insert new VTs or devices e The button is used to enter editing mode for the element selected in the tree chart e The button is used to shift an element upwards e The button is used to shift an element downwards e The button is used to put the objects in order The M button is used to put the page numbers in order Project HwW Configuration Project IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Project IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH23 3 Con Project IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Tags Project IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Pages Project IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH23 PopUpr Project IT110T SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Images Y There is also a drop down menu from which any of the categories making up the menu can be selected HW Configuration _FrojectH w Configuration Project Explorer Library Explorer ji Information relating to the element selected is displayed in the lo
582. sent in the Properties sub mask see chap 5 Properties page 200 To set graphic and visual characteristics of a project special attention must be paid its the base element the Page Each graphic element navigation or function button command and Data viewing editing field must be positioned in a Page for it to be visible to the operator in Runtime To create and manage the pages in a project the reader is ad vised to consult the preceding chapter see chap 5 Pages page 168 When you enter a page s Fields mask the work area will show a preview of how the page will be displayed on the VT During the editing of a page a series of programming com mands are made available Use buttons el and of the toolbar accessible also via Layout menu gt Zoom to change the display dimensions of a page defining these with the Zoom the same operation can be performed by clicking ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 296 Chapter 6 Properties Editor the right hand mouse key when the pointer is on the page and choosing the required function from the menu that appears By clicking on the x icon of the toolbar Layout gt Show Grid you can decide whether to show or hide the editing grid in the page preview The grid is very useful for bringing ob jects in alignment very quickly when they are being arranged on the page The grid dimensions can also be edited using Project Explorer in the VT options see chap 5
583. shold and these can be enabled Separately e DLO lower deviation e DHI higher deviation Deviation thresholds are relative to a reference value and indicate how much can be deviated from this value For each of the above mentioned thresholds the developer wants to enable he she must specify the deviation value expressed as a percentage of the reference value independently of which event is generated thus if both ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 152 Chapter 5 Project Explorer possible events are enabled two thresholds different from one another must be defined The values can be fixed or can refer to other tags There must be a dead zone value for each threshold expressed as a percentage value of the level referred to the attributes dead zone and value can be associated to another tag Let us now seek to clarify how deviation thresholds work by using an example To make it easier to understand we will avoid using the dead zone the concept of which has already been expressed in the course of the explanation of the Level threshold concept Let us set 30 as a reference value We shall activate by clicking on the appropriate box the low Level threshold assigning 10 as the value This means that the event onThdDevLo see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 is launched each time there is a breach whether rising or falling of the value given by e reference value low threshold value In our case 30
584. sidered as Signed for relative values or BCD Note Binary coded decimal BCD is a commonly used format for representing the decimal digits in binary code In this format each digit of a number is represented by a 4 bit binary code whose value is between 0 0000 and 9 1001 For example the number 127 is represented in BCD as 0001 0010 0111 If the type of area is String you can define the length the type and the gap characters The types of gap characters available are left right or none Itis also possible to define the gap character by entering the appropriate ASCII code or choosing an option from the drop down menu In both cases the right hand side of the mask will display a preview of the gaps You can use the lower part of the mask to introduce the destination memory addresses the values entered must be coherent with the range displayed at the foot of the mask Limits Validity ranges can be defined for the tag just created if this restriction has sense in relation to the type of data It is possible to assign these limits to the values of the tag and or to the device If limits are assigned to the Tag i e on the tags of the terminal the limit will have effect in the editing phase if for example a maximum limit is at 100 and the operator inserts a higher value in an editing field the field will automatically be taken to 100 maximum limit However this limit does not prevent a greater value being written in th
585. sign IDs to the fonts we have just added so that they can easily be identified when we want to use them in the project Font_ Trebuchet and Font_ Verdana Settings identifying users The next step is to define the users of our project It is neces sary to know from the outset who will be interfacing with our project and what their respective rights will be In our project we will stipulate 2 users one at level 1 maxi mum access rights and one at level 5 lower credentials As for user names and passwords we will call them userl and user5 respectively Same value for user name and password in general it is advisable to insert different strings General parameters i Logout automenceally when panel is iJe idle pmeow sec bd After a user s logout show aleays particular page Page to show rages Page a O togn using password caly Log users activity O Enable loggers of users logn Acgout Log to file The fle well be sewed in We FLASH of the terminal If the logs are too frequent the FLASH could be damaged Tenestacre format Gd Erase bogs after Le Oasys The same window now allows us to access the General mask to set general values relating to managing users in runtime For example we set the automatic logout after a period of in activity at 5 minutes 300 seconds and force the view of the first page Page when the logout is executed In conclusion we set a name e
586. sionColor the horizontal grid can be done using the RGB code or the color palette Determines the color of the horizontal grid subdivisions which can be select ed using the RGB code or color palette GridVerVisible Indicates whether there needs to be a vertical grid GridVerDivision Indicates the number of vertical divi Number sions in the grid Indicates the number of vertical subdi GridVerMinDivision visions in the grid that is the number Number of horizontal lines between any two di visions GridHorMinDivision Color ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 427 Properties Editor Table 57 Properties of a Trend Graph XY Properties Description Indicates the style of the divisions in GridVerDivisionStyle the vertical grid may be Solid or Bro ken line Indicates the style of the subdivisions in the vertical grid may be Solid or Broken line GridVerMinDivision Style Determines the color of the vertical GridVerDivisionColor grid divisions which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette Determines the color of the vertical GridVerMinDivision Subdivisions of the grid which can be Color selected using the RGB code or color palette Indicates the pens to use in represent ing the trend By clicking on the w key you can edit the types of pen as shown in the next subsection Editing of the Trend Pens To access the TrendXY writing pens editing enter the Tren dXY complex fie
587. ssed la ter it is also possible to only backup the project both the ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 538 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime project and recipes alarms trends variables or to backup any combination of the 3 options Run Time Project History In our example the Backup will be performed enabling all 3 options Backup amp Restore RunTime Project History alarms recipes trends variables Start Backup After having enabled the desired option boxes click on the browse key to choose where to save the Backup file in the example the folder My Documents is chosen 2J Yy Documents Name jd Type Backups ebk ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Restore Remote panel update Chapter8 539 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Press the Start Backup key to Save Backup Restore Gackup Restore Jimny Documents 123 EBK RunTine Project History alarms recipes trends variables Start Backup J Ready If everything has been completed properly the wording Backup Completed appears Backup amp Restore gackup Restore im Documents 123 EBK Esl RunTime Project History alarms recipes trends variables J Backup Completed The Restore function is very useful when needing to load a Runtime project and or application on an IT terminal without needing to use POLY
588. st is accessed Clicking Add one or more groups can be added ery PALER ge FALL Fae ET __ Eee j ke aL Ue Clicking Modify the General and User masks are acces sed General fefiiel Users Identification Name NotificationGroupl Comment Parameters O Send an email to all the users of the group O Send an SMS to all the users of the group O The notification is dispatched when the alarm is triggered O The notification is dispatched when the alarm is acknowledged O The notification is dispatched when the alarm goes off From the General mask an e mail can be sent to all the users in the group choosing from the options of the Parame ter voice The notification can be sent when the alarm Is Raised or Acknowledged or when the alarm Ends Users ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 250 Chapter 5 Project Explorer From the Users mask clicking Add the users created pre viously can be added one at a time Double clicking None the users on the list can be chosen To add other users to the same group repeat the operation clicking Add again until the desired number of users is rea ched System The system keyboards will be present by default in POLYMA Keyboards TH they differ from regular keyboards because they may not be customised also their image is not visible in Explore project and therefore may not be changed List From Explore projec
589. system During bench test phase use IP static addresses t The proxy supported by the network projects is HTTP type Note If the information is not recognised contact the system administrator ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 734 Chapter 12 Panels network Make sure that in the section share tag the check Enable Share tag device is enabled Shared tags password a password can be determined to protect the shared tags Shared tags gate the gate for the shared tags can be determined At this point double click on the first client tag and using the section link associate the client tag with that of the server Project Explorer aoda Sf Client_ITLO5T E F MetworkTags fen F NetSpeed 3 E MetRevolution S Server_IT1055 F MetworkTags Node type the type of node belonging to the server can be selected Node the server from which the tag will be chosen can be selected Tag name the tag to be associated can be selected When the above phases are terminated save and compile the project after which proceed to download Download the Start the compilation of the project by clicking on the icon network of the Tool bar or from File gt Compile on the main menu see project chap capitolo 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime page 503 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 12 735 Panels network Start transfer by clicking on the icon fida of the Tool bar or from t
590. t Filter All Tags v Tags to be exported Scheduler_Start Scheduler_Stop HolidayGroup_Month HolidayGroup_Year Tag_INT HolidayGroup_1_Month HolidayGroup_1_ Year Scheduler_Start_1 Scheduler_Stop_1 SYS_AlarmNotack SYS_AUD_MSG_LINEOUT Tag_PLC Cancel p Chapter5 159 Project Explorer by clicking on Forward we will obtain the following window from which the user will be able to choose the fields to export in the Excel table Tags Export Choose the elements to export Tag elements Memory address Data area type BCD Signed V Type Group Comment Tag sharing Name tag sharing Comment tag sharing Network identifier Read only Update disabled Always update Limit tag enabled Limit tag min Limit tag max Limit device enabled Limit device min Limit device max Value Ta Carnuaecian Cancel Note During the Export phase the folders eventually created by the user in project phase will also be exported Cliccando sul tasto Avanti si aprira la pagina successiva dalla quale l utente potr scegliere cliccando sul tasto Sfoglia dove salvare il file da esportare Choose the filename and extension to export tags File Name Save in My Documents _New_test_report 2 _TEST IMPORT My Recent OAB DeviceNet Documents Backup_Test Biticino PDF for michelino Qcamtasia Studio CAN Analizer jcc CERT Simulation 10 Customer Project 2004 Custo
591. t Adds a field relating to the date Date Time and time to the page Value fields gt Bar Adds a bar to the page Value fields gt Adds an indicator to the page I ndicator Submenu Simple Controls Touch button Touch area Touch key Continuous selector Discrete selector Continuous knob Discrete knob Table 7 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Simple Controls Icon Path Menu Description of function Adds a touch button to the page see chap 6 Simple Controls page 373 Simple Controls gt Adds a touch area to the page Touch Area Determines the keys and is used only during the configuration of the run time keyboard Simple Controls gt Touch Button Simple controls gt Touch Keyboard Button Simple Controls gt Adds a slide potentiometer Slide with no predefined values to Potentiometer the page Simple Controls gt Adds a slide selector with Slide Selector predefined values to the page Simple Controls gt Adds a knob potentiometer Potentiometer without predefined values to Knob the page ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 23 Layout of menus Table 7 Functions of the submenu Fields gt Create gt Simple Controls Icon Path Menu Description of function Simple Controls gt Adds a selector knob with Selector Knob predefined values to the page Submenu Complex controls Push button Switch button Frame Tren
592. t Status ethernet gate SYS NATE FW Name of the native ethernet gate s String Name firmware file SYS NATE FW Version FW of the native ethernet String Version gate SYS NATE_HW Version HW of the native ethernet String Version gate SYS NATE BT Version BT of the native ethernet String Version gate ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 742 Appendix A System Variables Table 1 Meaning of System Variables Earle Description Type SYS COM1_ Driver name on the first gate String DriverName SYS COM1_ Driver status on the first gate String DriverStatus SYS_COM1_ TRUE if communication with the Boolea DriverPresent field on the first gate is active na SYS COM1_ Driver version on the first gate String DriverVersion SYS COM1_ Terminal address on the first gate String DriverAddress SYS COM2_ Driver name on the second gate String DriverName SYS COM2_ Driver status on the second gate String DriverStatus SYS_COM2_ TRUE if communication with the Boolea DriverPresent field on the second gate is active na SYS COM2_ Driver version on the second gate String DriverVersion SYS COM2_ Terminal address on the second String DriverAddress gate SYS_ETH_Driver Driver name on the ethernet gate String Name gatel logicl SYS_ETH_Driver Driver status on the ethernet gate String Status gatel logicl True if communication with the Boolea field on the ethernet gate is active na gatel Logicl SYS_ETH_Driver Driver version on
593. t To Arranges the object in the g P selection to the top 5 Arranges the object in the Arrange gt Middle election to the middle Arranges the object in the Arrange gt Bottom election to the bottom Submenu Level Places the object selected into the foreground see chap 6 Depth order of objects page 467 Level gt Down the object selected by a ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 29 Layout of menus Menu mage Load Edit Reset Color Increase contrast Decrease contrast Increase brightness Decrease brightness Cub area Rotate Fit to display Keep aspect ratio BeBEGECOGEBNG amp Table 13 Functions of the menu Image ete a Path Menu Description of function Load the current image see Image gt Load chap 5 Operations performable on an image page 235 Image gt Edit Allows the image to be edited Remove the image loaded Image gt Increase Increases the contrast of the contrast image selected Image gt Decreases the contrast of the Decrease contrast image selected Image gt Increase Increases the brightness of the brightness image selected Image gt Decrease brightness oy y Makes it possible to choose the Us type of colouring between pages Colour Automatic Tones of grey White and Black Decreases the brightness of the image selected ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 30 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Table
594. t after double clicking on System keybo ards one will access the list of system keyboards in side of which there is a default keyboard egagga 1 ProjeaiTiiit Pro 801 22 eT ee Ss List S Pages a F eee Only Enter To Racipe types iy Users and Passwords F E bata archive cahpit a Global seripe ia Advanced f Pipalinas Fish Reports R Remote notification eg Er temikeybosrds 95 Keyboards m Keyboard a z Spatonmkie phones PrageckiTliot Pra RPL SP2 ET ETH ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 251 Project Explorer From the List menu it is possible to by pressing Add or Delete add or delete one or more system keyboards once the choice is made click OK i cx E System keyboards m a Ks ucstuue ax afeficiofe se Aw tee a Cyrillic E Standard Size_04_05 Size_07_10 Size_12 Size_15_17_19 Note Among the available keyboards POLYMATH makes 2 groups of keyboards available which differ by use of fonts Cyrillic and Standard also POLYMATH allows to associate the keyboard by choosing it based on the dimensions of the panel used in the project The selected keyboard will appear in the list from which it will also be possible to choose whether to associate a Beep to the keys the user may choose among 3 possibilities e Only Enter key The Beep will only be associat
595. t Move to First Level the button is brought to the top level above all the other objects When instead we click on the icon Layout gt Level gt Move to Lowest Level the button selected is taken to the bottom level that is below all the other objects See figure ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 468 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Now if we click on the icon Layout gt Level gt Up the but ton is moved one level towards the top that is it rises only above the object that was immediately above it at that mo ment in our example the polygon Naturally with each click of this icon the object selected ap pears at a different level Similarly by clicking on the icon nl Layout gt Level gt Down the button is moved down by one level that is it drops only below the object that was immediately below it at that mo ment in our example the polygon ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 469 Properties Editor Alignment of objects When there are two or more objects in a page the operator can use the tools supplied by POLYMATH to obtain their auto matic alignment these tools can be accessed directly via the Main menu Layout gt Align or via the respective icons of the toolbar as described below To describe the various behaviors of the Alignment function we will use the same example we utilized in the last subsec tion three elements in a page namely a touch button a po
596. t follow synchronization 1 or not 0 Structure Name Str Recipe Name Str UserFlag Bool Structure Name Str Recipe Name Str UserFlag Bool StructureN ame Str RecipeNa me Str SyncFlag Bool ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 572 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 8 ESARECIPETRF methods accessible with Scripts Description Downloads the video Structure buffer onto the device Name corresponding to the Str recipe specified by the SyncFlag i input parameter It is Bool Recipe area Buffer necessary to provide the Hewnload type of recipe and a Boolean variable indicating whether the download must follow synchronization 1 or not 0 Uploads the video buffer Structure from the device Name corresponding to the Str recipe indicated by the SyncFlag input parameters It is Bool necessary to provide the type of recipe and a Boolean variable indicating whether the download must follow synchronization 1 or not 0 The object This object offers functions relating to the Pipelines in the ESAPI PEMGR project The following table describes the methods that can be used with this object using a syntax of ESAHMI ESAPI PEMGR StartPipelineByNumber 2 ESAPI PEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Table 9 ESAPIPEMGR methods accessible with Scripts Method Description Starts the Pipeline Pipeline indicated by the input Name parameter needs the Str string containing the name of the Pi
597. t has currently been drawn P If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method ControlWidth Defines the width of the object ControlHeight Defines the height of the object Defines whether the object should Bool be visible 0 or invisible 1 ControlHide Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 592 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 21 Properties of ESACNTRL Arc Properties Description Defines the color of the border of the arc currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for ArcColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method Defines whether the arc should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking ArcBlink If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Methods of ESACNTRL Arc Table 22 Methods of ESACNTRL Arc method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Properties of ESACNTRL Circular sector Table 23 Prope
598. t headers O Use an expor language Export language Italian Italy z Recipe editor Allows to edit the recipes of the selected structure directly from POLYMATH ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 206 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Import Export Customize Log File A Configuration columns The user will be able to choose whether to update the previou sly exported pre existing file ioixi Recipes editor Welcome to ESAPOLYMATH recipe fields editor wizard Select editing mode Update local copy of a recipe export file Create a new recipe file Panel to use the recipe definitions from Recipe definition to use Ej Cancel or create a new one Recipe editor wizard Ol x Recipes editor Welcome to ESAPOLYMATH recipe fields editor wizard Select editing mode Update local copy of a recipe export file Create a new recipe file Panel to use the recipe definitions from I1T110T_Pro SP1 SP2 ETH1 ETH2 Recipe definition to use JRECI After clicking on Forward the following window will be shown from which it will be possible by selecting the check box to ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 207 Project Explorer change the viewing method of the columns vertical horizon tal tol Recipes editor The headers of the grid are visibled and exported only if the Export headers of RecipeTypes is checked
599. t into the following window from which it s possible to edit the following proper ties Enlil Tw hi fbul ton Text max len Text translate disable O Text mwt line E Sa ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 286 Chapter 6 Properties Editor By clicking on the Image option we can get into the fol lowing window from which it s possible to edit the following properties Edit Touchtiutton Image subnsine Image H align or Image beep aspect ratin Image transparent color o o 0 T Image transparent o Image W ahgn Ghia o Image list value 4 ue Inmage list type By clicking on the Events option we can get into the fol lowing window from which it s possible to associate an event function or script to the object see chap 6 Properties of the Touch button page 374 Edit Towclefut torn l nPressed ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 287 Properties Editor Let s go back to the explanation of Properties Editor which is composed by a list of properties and related editable values If the value fields are not editable it means that the current configuration of the element does not permit any change in its value in these cases editing the fields in question is only pos sible when the correlated attributes allow it Changes in the graphic properties of an object cause an im mediate redrawing of the object on the page which i
600. t parameter remembering to assign the close current pop up function to the Cancel key and the exit from runtime function to the Confirm key In our example we create a blue key for cancelling with a label saying Cancel and An nulla and a red one for the confirmation The resulting pop up will be as follows with the label saying OK and Confer ma Defining a Help page for the Pop up In phase 2 we configured the project to manage the global keys specifically we stipulated that when the F1 key was pressed in any context of the project the Help relating to the page being displayed at that point would be shown We will therefore define a text to be displayed when the oper ator presses F1 with the current pop up open The Help pages are edited while the page they refer to is being created just move to the Help pages mask to start editing ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Phase 13 Drawing Full Screen pages Chapter 10 689 Tutorial Help page O Enable ae ra o gt o gt Preview In this phase the dimensions and position of the Help page can be defined we shall leave the default values but change the text the operator will see We click on to start editing the text On this PopUp click on Ok to exit Runtime or to Cancel to continue running the project We insert the texts of advisory messages to be displayed in the page providing of course translati
601. t this at 25 the display of the vertical and horizon tal scroll bars we will leave both at TRUE and the columns to ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 Tutorial be displayed in the table We click on the icon and a new editing window opens Columns EJ Columns to show Selected column Recipe Field s Name Ed Recipe Field s Value Width Font size 16 O Bold O Italics O Strikeout O Underline Keyboard None Alignment Centered The left hand menu contains the list of columns to be seen in the table in runtime In the case of the recipe editor this list contains only two non removable items in general the lists for other controls can be customized Furthermore if we se lect each column in this list we can use the right hand section of the mask to edit the values of column width and font prop erties for the table headings titles In our example we set for both columns a width of 104 pixels and heading font size of 16 points Finally we click on Close to confirm the changes made Remember that the colors of the fields selected in the table in runtime can be changed in carrying out the general editing of the recipes see chap 5 Fields page 171 In conclusion using the last option in the Properties Editor ShowRecipeType we select the type of recipe the check re fers to RecipeType Introducing other complex controls Using the same procedure em
602. t up box if you wish to have the choice of interfaces when the Polymath starts up Leave the checkbox void if you prefer to set your current choi ce of interface for next time The first step using POLYMATH is to create a brand new project The user is offered two ways of creating a new project one guided the Wizard and one completely manual Opening the Wizard Wizard mode will guide you in creating your projects and in or ganizing the various hardware components There are three ways of activating the Wizard e Click on e File gt New from the main menu e Click on to enter the Home Page of the program and Click on Open Wizard to create a project to start up the guided project creation Using the Wizard To create a project in Wizard mode 5 operations need to be carried out choosing the Type of project choosing the ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 94 Chapter 4 Managing the project Panel choosing the Device Project information and Confirmation of the choices While in any given window of the Wizard it will be possible to review the preceding step sim ply by clicking on the Preceding key The first choice to make relates to the type of project to be created the options available are Simple Project Network of Devices or Network of Panels Multi devices or Multi panels For example let s select the Simple Project option once the choice has been made click
603. tData FDE DBW Byte DB 101 A4larmscCtrl ResetPl DBW Byte DB 101 AlarmsCtrl 4larmS DBW Byte DB 101 AlarmsCtrl 4larm4 DBW Byte DB 101 CommunicationCctr DBW Byte DB 101 CommunicationCtr DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl ISOs DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl POL1 DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl POL2 DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl ISOS DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl ISOS DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl POL1 DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl POL1 DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl POL2 DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl POL2 DBW Byte DB 101 WeekEndCtrl Minui DBW Byte DB 101 0i UnitCtrl StartSte DB W Byte DB 101 0ilUnitCtrl MotorRe DBW Byte OOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOOD O amp dd CPU name as prefix O Overwrite existing var Import ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 165 Project Explorer From the previous screen it is possible to choose between the following options by acting on the keys and by selecting the various present check boxes e Select the individual variables to be imported e Select all variables to be imported by clicking the Se lect all key e Uncheck all variables to be imported by clicking the Un check all key e Add as prefix to the individual variables name the CPU name from which they were previously exported e Overwrite the already present variables inside the project or not After having made the selection the following screen is obtai ned by clicking on the Import key _ Tags Export File Export OK tag DB 101 Output
604. ta manually Click the drop down menu to select the IP address of the PC ESA Elettronica Remot E Eg File Options 7 IP Address PC Detect IF IP Address Panel User Name Refresh time Click the drop down menu to select the IP address of the Pa nel ESA Elettronica Remot O X IP Address PC IP Address Panel User Name CONNECT ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 718 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC From the IT control panel click the Network icon D 7 ue Stylus Date Time Owner Network s a A A FTP Lamp Saver Backup Password Fi o 2 Reset Information The following image will appear from this image you can obtain the IT IP address in our example the IP address is 192 168 100 1 IP Address 192 168 100 1 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 1192 169 100 2 Subnet Mask To establish the connection between PC and IT the IP address of the terminal must be compatible with the IP address of the PC ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 11 719 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC ESA Elettronica Remot E Fie Options 7 IP Address PC 192 168 100 2 IP Address Panel 192 168 100 1 p User Name Paszword Refresh time K ry Connected e Insert the same User Name which we assigned pre viously USER1 e Click the drop down menu to select one of
605. tat The editing is organised on two masks Campi e Generale Fields and General Fields From the Fields mask the buttons which should be present together with the table can be indicated and positioned inside of the area Each button has its relative properties which can be edited in Editor Proprieta Properties Editor as for nor mal touch sensitive buttons To insert or remove a button cli ck the list of buttons at the left of the table If an object is already present on the page it will be highlighted inside of the list and it will be visible inside of the drawing area To move an element button or table drag it to the desired position Several buttons can be inserted and each one has a pre de termined function associated to it unchangeable e Copy the button copies the daily trend of the tempe rature in order to overwrite it on another day at will This is useful when it is necessary to have the same dai 447 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 448 Chapter 6 Properties Editor ly schedule on different days Functions by pressing the button and then selecting the days where the modifica tion is to be applied To conclude re select the Copia Copy key e Change state the button allows to pass from heating mode to cooling mode and vice versa This function must be activated in the Script della WeeklyTask Script screen used It is only active if the selection of Type of Chrono
606. tatus 2 Words and the Recipes status areas are 2 Words and 1 Word respectively In POLYMATH the status areas can be defined in the course of the general configuration of the panel see chap 5 Ex change areas a pag 132 The status area relating to the panel is composed of 6 words each of which assumes a meaning in line with what is set out in the table below Tabella 1 Structure of VT status area Description VT_STATUS contains bit coded status information see chap C VT_STATUS values a pag 762 SEQUENCE _ID contains the numeric ID of the active sequence including pop ups in focus If no sequence is active the value is 0 PAGE_ID contains the numeric ID of the page including pop ups in focus can never be 0 when the Runtime is active ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 762 Appendix C Status area Tabella 1 Structure of VT status area VT STATUS values Description CONTEXT_VALUE the value depends on the page control in focus see chap C CONTEXT_VALUE values a pag 763 MAIN _SEQUENCE_ID contains the numeric ID of the active non pop up or base sequence If no sequence is active the value is 0 MAIN_PAGE_ID contains the numeric ID of the base page currently being displayed can never be 0 when the Runtime is active Tabella 2 Meaning of VT_STATUS bit values ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description WATCHDOG in the course of normal
607. ted to the present library in the network Libraries images Lights Dynacree objec Filled polygons Drem keyboards Ay Library My Library My Library Hy Library i e SR OK OS AC Up Local My Librery_t Imported from CoFrogrammiblsa Source LUS 2012 16 96 59 is equal to the Lorak UNSO 16 36 53 version Impori My Library imported from T yoo MANUALT A Source La DAOL 17 09 05 ts equal te the Lesa 1gp ioli 17 03 05 virran Importta Using Up the user will be able to move the selected field up after going to the Library Management column Down Using Down the user will be able to move the selected field down after going to the Library Management column ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 494 Chapter7 Other anchorable windows bd Tools Create library Import Refresh system libraries Check shared libraries The Tools key is made up of the following submenus e Create library e Import e Update system libraries e Check shared libraries Laer management EEE eee i l Libraries ible Mair hal ter Dits L sal Cal Duane Syitem Syre eal Switches Tyeke Gyran ina imagis System System ical Lights System System Cynamic objects System System Ea Filled polpgencs System System System keyboards System System ca Hy Library Local Local i Hy Ubrary_l Local Local w Hy bbrary_i Imeceted from Co Vrregrammils See IOS 16 0653 bs equal te the Locali LOS
608. terminal VT1sSw Communication port COM1 Baud rate 115200 Activities selected Backup Firmware and project Output folder C Documents and Settings mlanza Desktop Prog2 ESA Elettronica Batch Executor21 03 2011 0216 Finish Cancel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 72 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Pressing Save will save in xml format Saving the procedure file Save in Prog2 EjProg2 xml 4 My Recent Documents Desktop CI My Documents 3 My Computer a File name Prog2 xml ave My Network Save as type Vt update procedure file xml Pressing the End key will create a folder with the files neces sary for project Backup At this point open the folder where the procedure has been saved or more precisely open the path ESA Elettronica Ba tch Executor xx xx 2011 0859 BatchExecutor bat Clicking twice on the BatchExecutor bat command a Dos window will open follow the instructions on video the backup file will be saved at the end of the sequence C WINDOWS system32 cmd exe a fa If the panel offers a choice between Modem and PC press on the lable PC You are now in transfer page ECHO is off Press ENTER to continue ESG to abort Check the model of the oparator panel Press any key to continue CHECK whether there are backup on HD and eventually restore one of them No Restore Executed Press ENTER to Continue or ESC to EXIT BackupFwAndPro ject Fir
609. tervals with gaps of 200 per interval as in the figure below ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 696 Chapter 10 Tutorial We then move to the Colors mask and set the color green for the low level orange for the middle level and red for the high est level Finally we click on Close to confirm the changes made Beso We must now perform an important operation namely the setting of restrictions on the use of this potentiometer Still positioned in the Properties Editor we go to the Password Lev el option and enter the value 5 for the user set in Phase 2 Passwordlevel This setting means that the value can be edited by means of the potentiometer only by users who have logged in and whose user level has a value lower than or equal to 5 thus level 1 users can also edit When the project starts for ex ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 697 Tutorial ample the system gives the user level 10 until the log in has been performed This means that if a user who has not logged in or with level greater than 5 tries to access the potentiom eter that is tries to change the value of num_ pezzi the log in window will automatically be displayed to make it possible to perform the operation We need now only define the graphic details as we have just seen in the case of other objects relating to the color of the area of the border and of the indicator needle of the value Fo
610. tes the blinking mode of the text displayed can be No Blinking Slow Blinking or Rapid Blinking Determines the color of the Field text which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the type of horizontal alignment of the text this can be Cen ter Left or Right The value can be as sociated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds 349 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 350 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 26 Properties of the Dynamic Text Properties Description Determines the type of horizontal alignment of the text this can be Cen TextVAlign ter Top or Bottom The value can be associated with Tag or it can be man aged with thresholds Active if the type of control is value orientated the values on which to ap ply the list strings must be indicated Value a By clicking on you can access the mask associating values and elements of the text list Indicates the type of control to exer ControlType cise over the control variable this can be value oriented single bit orientat ed or bit group oriented Indicates whether the field should be Disable disabled The value can be associated with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Active if the type of control is single bit orientated or bit group oriented It in dicates the bit reference to apply the control to or the g
611. th thresholds Determines the color of the area of the button in ON state which can be se lected using the RGB code or color pal ette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds OnStateAreaColor Determines whether the Button has a background or should be transparent OnStateAreaVisibility when it is ON a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be managed with thresholds ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 405 Properties Editor Table 51 Properties of a Bistable button Properties Description Reference variable whose value is checked Using the appropriate keys Tagi d you can create a new variable or edit an existing one Indicates the value that the reference variable must assume for the button to ValueStateOff be OFF if the button goes to OFF by being pressed the value of the vari able is updated to that value Indicates the value that the reference variable must assume for the button to ValueStateOn be ON if the button goes to ON by be ing pressed the value of the variable is updated to that value Indicates whether the button should Disable be disabled The value can be associat ed with Tag or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the object can move or Loc
612. the font and the dimension of the text of the Help pages during the phase of defining the general properties of the panel see chap 5 Main window page 129 This page only becomes visible to the operator when it is expressly called using the ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 174 Chapter 5 Project Explorer button assigned to this function introduced into a mother page via the command area and function keys F keys Local The last mask available for editing the page is the one relating to the F keys it is possible to edit the behaviour of a particular function button within the page Unlike the global keys the functions set in this page are only effective when they are in the current page A Warning The table present in this mask already indicates the global functions see chap 5 Keyboards page 253 so as to make any overwriting evident In fact if they were assigned to the same global and local key functions only the local ones would carried out in runtime in the context of the page in question The functions or Scripts that can be associated to the local buttons are introduced in exactly the same way as already seen for the global keys thus the same procedure should be followed see chap 5 Keyboards page 253 Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Editor Events in Extended mode You can associate an event function or script to each
613. the project set up operations POLYMATH now creates all the connections we need to interact with the panel device communication ports addresses etc The project s Hardware settings can of course be changed at any time simply by clicking on Hardware Configuration in Project Explorer When configuring the Software we can define the global pref erences relating to our project In our example we customize the project by stipulating two languages three user levels a personalized font not one of the default ones and a Timer We shall however leave the options relating to the transla tions of messages and systems alarms unchanged The pro grammer can of course decide to customize every single message Setting project languages We wish to produce a multi language project in which it will be up to the end user operator to decide the language with which to interact with the panel in runtime in practice this means choosing the language in which the messages the er rors and the texts that appear in the pages will appear In our example we shall set two languages Italian and English To carry out this operation we go to the appropriate page by clicking on the Project Explorer option Languages in the VT595CE Configuration Software S y sterr bo System Language English USA Italian Syster Gn GI xs ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 654 Chapter 10 Tutorial By default POLYMATH inserts English i
614. the Field Allows you to select the type of Pen to which to assign the field Tabi ndex PenValue I mage Field An Image field can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Simple fig ures gt I mage After clicking on the icon use the mouse to in dicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the Image The area created in this way will contain one of the im ages added to the project see chap 5 Frames page 178 To define the characteristics of the Image they must be set in the Properties Editor as indicated in the following section j L Note An image can also be added to a page by simply dragging it from Project Explorer into the work area to the page position re quired With this procedure POLYMATH automatically creates an Image field relating to the dragged image ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 323 Properties Editor Properties of the I mage field Table 24 Properties of the Image Field Properties Description Identifying name of the Image field Must be unique among the graphic el ements man Wt avesion pem Heh cvenson Determines the color of the Image field which can be selected using the AreaColor RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans AreaVisibility parent
615. the button The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Chapter6 379 Properties Editor Table 37 Properties of the Touch button Properties Description Active if the ImageListType is single bit orientated or bit group oriented It I mageListFirstBit indicates the bit reference to apply the control to or the group initial refer ence if the control relates to a group Active if ImageListType is bit group I mageListLastBit oriented Indicates the last bit of the group to which the check is applied Identifies the movement associated to TypeOfMovement the object None Direct Horizontal Vertical and Horizontal And Vertical TagDirectMovement a Tag to the Direct move se Movements Finan Rona caaate Touch button events Table 38 Touch button events Event Description Activated whenever the button is OnPressed pressed Activated whenever the button is re OnReleased leased after being pressed Touch Area A touch sensitive area can be introduced into a page by click ing on the icon md or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create S gt Simple controls gt Touch area After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH Should draw the item The Touch Area is useful when you want to assign an entire screen area to a given function or user script for example a ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 380 Chapter 6
616. the button for changing languages Help page Keys Events Page Properties Mouse pointer 33 0 Si EA Aaaa ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 695 Tutorial Introducing value indicators We now give the page an object for indicating value for our variable num_ pezzi As illustrated elsewhere in this manual there is a set different objects for displaying editing values In our project we will insert a kKnob potentiometer that allows us also to set the value of the variable to suit our requirements We click on the icon relating to the knob potentiometer in the toolbar and draw the destination area in the page POLY MATH will draw the object in the page as can be seen from the following figure General Help page Keys Events Page Properties Mouse X While keeping the potentiometer selected we move to the Properties Editor and modify some attributes First of all we assign the variable num_ pezzi as reference variable the one whose value will be displayed edited then we assign the number of values to be displayed on the bar 5 and the num ber of notches to display between the values 5 ScaleNotches z SealeColorRanges 4 80 100 Scale Se qtors z In addition we define the intervals of the scale and the related values by clicking on the icon adjacent to the Color Inter vals option In the window that now appears we click on Add to add new intervals and create 6 in
617. the ethernet gate String Version gatel logicl SYS_ETH_Driver Terminal address on the ethernet String Address gate gatel logicl SYS_ETH2_Driver Driver name on the ethernet gate String Name gatel logic 2 SYS_ETH2_ Driver Driver status on the ethernet gate String Status gatel logic2 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 SYS_ETH_Driver Present Appendix A System Variables 743 Table 1 Meaning of System Variables VELEL Description Type SYS ETH2 Driver True if Communication with the Boolea 3 s field on the ethernet gate is active na Present gatel Logic2 SYS_ETH2_ Driver Driver version on the ethernet gate String Version gatel logic2 SYS_ETH2_Driver Terminal address on the ethernet String Address gate gatel logic2 SYS_ETHS3_Driver Driver name on the ethernet gate String Name gate2 logic 1 SYS_ETHS3_Driver Driver status on the ethernet gate String Status gate2 logicl SYS ETH3 Driver True if Communication with the Boolea E field on the ethernet gate is active na Present gate2 Logicl SYS_ETHS3_Driver Driver version on the ethernet gate String Version gate2 logicl SYS_ETHS3_Driver Terminal address on the ethernet String Address gate gate2 logicl SYS_ETH4_Driver Driver name on the ethernet gate String Name gate2 logic 2 SYS_ETH4_Driver Driver status on the ethernet gate String Status gate2 logic2 True if communication with the
618. the field refers to that is the one whose value will be checked and in relation to which the image to be displayed will be chosen We select the system variable relating to the ID of the current language SYS_CurrentLanguagelD defined in Phase 3 as illustrated below Passwordleyel 10 0 Empty value internal_var num _ pezzi real var str var S S_DateAndTime Tag We also assign as an image list the one created in the course of Phase 8 ImageList and attribute the values relating to the images we click on the wo key next to the Value option ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 694 Chapter 10 Tutorial Value 1j2 ControlType Value Disable In the window that opens we assign the value 1 for the image eng and 2 for the image ita The IDs of the project languag es are shown as these latter are created Phase 2 take care that they correspond when assigned to items In an image list or text list when necessary Finally we also change some graphic details like the color of the area blue and the border white 4reaColor 0 128 255 4reaVisibility v Border3D None Flat BorderBlink No Blink BorderColor 255 255 255 BorderVisibility v At the side of this symbol field we also put a button permitting us to change the display language of the project by assigning the function ChangeNextLanguage We dealt with how to edit a button in Phase 11 so now we follow the same steps to cre ate
619. the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as Signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Symbol Field or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Reference variable for the value to be displayed This is anumerical variable Using the appropriate keys you can create a new variable or edit an exist ing one Active if the type of control is value oriented it is necessary to indicate the values on which to apply the strings in the list By clicking on you access the mask for associating values with elements in the list of images Indicates the type of control to exer cise over the control variable this can be value oriented single bit orientat ed or bit group oriented Chapter6 359 Properties Editor Table 30 Properties of the Symbol Field Properties Description Indicates whether the field should be Disable
620. the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordinate Horizontal position coordinate Indicates the Frame to be contained by the Frame Field being edited Determines if the object can move or Lock Aot Makes it possible to control the focus movement using cursor keys within the page It also controls the order in Tabi ndex which data is introduced in several fields when the automatic setting of the next field of the page is enabled see chap 5 General page 139 Trend View A Trend View can be introduced into a page by clicking on the icon or using the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Complex controls gt TrendView After clicking on the icon use the mouse to indicate the area in the page where POLYMATH should draw the TrendView ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 408 Chapter 6 Properties Editor A Trend View is the field inside which you can see the contents of the Trend Buffer whose working was described in the pre ceding section see chap 5 page 220 The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a TrendView and how it is edit Properties of a TrendView Table 54 Properties of a Trend View Properties Description Identifying name of the TrendView Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH Vertical position coordin
621. the other possible User Names ESA Elettronica Remot File Options IP Address PC 192 164 100 2 p IP Address Panel 192 168 1700 1 x lt User Mame Pasziword Refresh time CONNECT A Connected e The PASSWORD field can be left empty Otherwise to attribute a password it must be assigned from the ter minal ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 720 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC 1 Click Control panel W Remote Display Control for Windows gt ioj x File Zoom Tools Help EE Start ESA Application o Downloader Configuration E Control Fanel 2 Click the Password icon B amp e Stylus Date Time Owner Network Lamp Saver Backup Password FTP o 2 Reset Information 3 Set the password for example 1234 then press OK E Remote Display Control for Windows loj x File zoom Tools Help Enter Password YOU must enter your password to change Password Settings Password er Lamp Saver ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Enable and disable FTP Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from the PC e At this point the Password field on the PC can be fil led out inserting the same one set on the terminal 1234 e Assign the Refresh Time it establishes in how much time the image that appears on the PC video will be updated Normally 0 5 sec is a good so
622. the type of value as Integer Bimar Addreee unie may T Atreery add Refregh grsup Clsrp O as fact ap fed Usedate Dewees enabled ipda ghvayd even when bag ant ured by ang held O haad only Dara Ari ward Trpe wer O fined Oiti We will leave the default settings in the Device mask memory address Memory Address and proceed to enable the option Update continually even when no tag is used by a field so that this variable can be controlled by a Script The value of the word containing the variable must also be assigned spec ifying memory addresses different for all tags so that there will not be wrong references in runtime unless there is a def inite intention for them to coincide we give the first variable the memory address 0 Note The address of the variables can be edited directly through this mask when individual variable areas being edited or alterna tively using the mask for managing addresses in the device memory In either case the changes made to a MemoryAddress will influ ence all the variables referring to it evice PRT Conversion Threshold Input limits on Tag value M Enable Min Max eo O Advice in case of wrong input Type Complete Page OK CANCEL for both limits Input limits on device value M Enable Min Max eG ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 Tutorial The next step is to set the limits on both the panel a
623. their respective function In this section we will simply explain how Anchorable windows are positioned and managed Displaying Anchorable windows When the program is started up all the Anchorable windows are displayed in the layout of the application though the software layout can be changed to suit the user Each of these windows can be closed at any moment using the Fey button and hidden using the EJ button Hidden windows remain on the sides of the screen in the form of clickable folders To make a window appear again in its fixed position click on the icon EJ Note The Hide function is recommended where the resolution of the screen is poor and space needs to be reserved for the Work area Once Anchorable windows have been closed they can be re introduced by clicking on the respective icon in the Tools menu or using the submenu Display gt Show Alternatively they can be re introduced using the menu that appears after clicking with the right hand key inside the toolbar first activate the corresponding check By clicking on the icon g Display gt Show All all the Anchorable windows are re introduced while the icon Display gt Hide all deletes them all without distinction Moving Anchorable windows Anchorable windows can be moved within the POLYMATH as the user thinks fit To move an Anchorable window select it by clicking on the title bar of the window in question See below ESAPOLYMATH User Manual
624. thermostat corresponds to Riscalda mento e Raffreddamento Heating and Cooling e Save the button memorises and saves the modifica tions made to this function e Automatic allows to start Chronothermostat sche duling The system reads the previously set cycle va lues and behaves according to the same e Manual the system leaves Automatic mode and fol lows a variable temperature value at will at any time from the panel e Default pass to a pre established temperature value Default in the design phase The Automatic function is deactivated e Perform activates Chronothermostat functioning e Off exists the Chronothermostat functioning mode e User Button identifies a new button that can be cu stomised freely by the user General dentification Chronothermviewer Comment diting O Override default grid size Width 10 jen Height 10 An identification name and comment for the Chronothermo stat that is being edited can be inserted on the General mask Moreover it is possible to overwrite the default dimen sions of the page editing grid introducing new measurements in pixel valid only for editing the current field ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Table 62 Properties of the Chronothermostat Grid Properties Description Identification name of the Chronother mostat View It must be unique among
625. ties AreaVisibility Border3D BorderBlink BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderStyle ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Determines the color of the Date Time field which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Field has a background area or should be trans parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value or it can be managed with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the Date Time field or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresho
626. time ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 553 Scripts Scripts POLYMATH allows the programmer to add to the project whole programmes or functions for managing and editing all the application s components graphic objects variables recipes etc in runtime Thanks to this users can complement the set of predefined functions supplied by POLYMATH with those they have created according to their needs User scripts can be called up in a project when a button is pressed when an event is triggered or in response to being called by other scripts Scripts can be inserted into a project using Project Explorer see chap 5 Scripts page 228 and their code can be written using simple programming scripting languages like VBScript For details concerning programming techniques variable declarations operators conditional structures and predefined functions the user is advised to consult specialist manuals relating to the language to be used In this chapter we will give information relating to the properties and methods that can be used in POLYMATH scripts with relevant examples Editing codes Serepl Sub Script 1 Dim a 2 Hour Now 5 IZ a gt 814 Jind a lt 19 Then ESAMML ESAPAGE Fage ESACHTI IZ a And acid Then ESAHMI ESAPACE Page ESACHTI 7 Tt gt 1f And aco Then BSAHMT RSAPAGE Page ESACHTRI oO Tf jar 0 And ac Then BSAHMT ESAPACE Page ESACHTRI 3 4 IZ
627. tination variable The acquisition rhythm is governed by the refresh parameters of the source variable Similar to polling only that the values acquired from the source variable are Copy by Change assigned to the destination variable only when the value of the source variable is changed The value is copied by command that is in line with the transition from FALSE to TRUE of the value of the auxiliary variable that can be entered into the next field activation must be Boolean In the boxes for choosing variables you will also find the icons for adding variables and editing them Events The Events option is visible in DOUBLE CLICK mode and comes under Editor Events in Extended mode You can associate an event function or script to each condi tion of the Pipeline by clicking the Browse button on the ri ght OnDestDown OnSourceDown OnStop OnStart The event is activated by associating it to one of the conditions listed in the table Events associated to the Pipeline see chap 6 page 292 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 240 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Reports Print reports are objects that make it possible to set out on paper information relating to the Runtime procedures In POLYMATH different types of Report can be defined each having an undefined number of pages Each Report page can in turn contain all the objects found in a Page The arrangement of these ob
628. tion Function Description Sends notification messages to a pre viously created user list via email SMS or Proxy see chap 5 Remote Notifi cations page 246 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Appendix B Predefined functions 759 Functions relating to Chronotermostat Table 13 Functions relating to Chronotermostat Function Description Enables manual mode following tag SetManual value set in weekly tag Chrono ther Temperature mostat see chap 6 Chronothermo stat page 445 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 760 Appendix B Predefined functions ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 VT Status area Appendix C Status area 761 Appendix C Status area The terminal can be set to write information regarding its sta tus and functioning onto defined memory areas This informa tion can be used by the device while it is carrying out its work Unlike in the case of command areas here the panel supplies information to the device There are four types of status infor mation that the terminal can write to these memory areas e status of VT informs the device of the display and op erating status of the terminal e status of keyboard e status of recipes new style e status of recipes old style VIWIN compatible mode The memory area reserved for the status area will depend on the type of information to be supplied by the terminal the VT status requires 6 Words the Keyboard s
629. tion the list of the reci pes of the type defined is provided and the operator can choose which recipe to download Saves the recipe buffer POLYMATH re quires the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command re fers to be specified Cancels the buffer containing the reci pes may be useful to insert a button with this function near an alarm histo ry table see chap 5 Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 Cancels one or more recipes POLY MATH requires the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and changing a Rec ipe type page 210 to which this com mand refers to be specified By pressing in runtime the key associated with this function the list of the reci pes of the type defined is provided and the operator can choose which recipe to download Allows loading recipes buffer from PLC or device to terminal 747 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 748 Appendix B Predefined functions Table 3 Functions relating to recipes Function Description Exports a recipe to a CSV or XML file on the terminal POLYMATH requires the type of recipe see chap 5 Creating and changing a Recipe type page 210 to which this command re fers to be specified By pressing in runtime the key associated with this function the list of the recipes of the type defined is provided and the oper ator can choose which recipe to export an
630. tion device Convert to fig BERTHEL fm CROUZET fi DELTA fig EATON MOELLER fi GE FANUC fig HITACHI fi KERNEL Sistemi fi KUHNKE fig MITSUBISHI fi MODBUS fi OMRON fi PANASONIC i SAlA fi SCHNEIDER TELEMECANIQUE fm SIEMENS lig Helmholz ethernet adapter for 7 300 400 A 5 90 95 100 115 up to 944 7 1200 Industrial Ethernet S 200 PPI Network 187 5Kb A S 200 PPI Network 9 6 19 2Kb 0S7 300 400 A 7 300 400 Industrial Ethernet Ge ee E H H H A a a Cancel ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 47 Layout of menus The following image summarising the operation to be carried out will appear Device conversion wizard Conversion Convert from S7 300 400 Industrial Ethernet Convert to 57 300 400 At the end of the conversion a Report is displayed listing the non converted tags and a message Is present warring the user that certain panel device connections may have been re moved next it recommends recreating new connections Device conversion wizard uS The device has been successfully converted Some device connections have been removed you need to re create them List of the Tags not converted 0 Tags Finish ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 48 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Unused Tags Removal The unused Tags Removal option allows verifying if unused variables are present in the project and to eliminate th
631. to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Trend View has a background area or should be transparent a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value or it can be man aged with thresholds Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed Bump or Etched The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the style of the Border which can be Solid or Broken The val ue can be assigned to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the color of the Border us ing the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole vari able or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines whether there will be a Border to the display or not a Boolean variable can be assigned to this value Determines the size of the Border which must be a number to which a whole variable can be assigned if wished or it can be managed with thresholds Determines the flashing of the Border which can be No blinking Slow blinking or Rapid blinking The value can be as signed to a whole variable or it can be managed with thresholds Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 56 Properties of a TrendViewX Y Properties Description Determines whether the object is ini tially visible You can also assign a Boolean variable for Runtime chang es or it can be managed with thresh olds Determines if the
632. to be placed so we can define which image to introduce While keeping the area just defined selected we move to the Properties Editor Next to the Images option there is a pull down menu containing all the images introduced into the project we choose the image logo Appearance 4reaColor 255 255 255 4reavVisibility v Border3D None Flat BorderBlink No Blink BorderColor Boo BorderVisibility v BorderSize 1 BorderStyle Solid Image IconSimpleAlarm IconDiagnosticAlarm IconSimpleAlarmTerminated ieee TrendPen els TrendPenMarkerPixel Eimas MES 5 TrendPenMarkerCross ImageAutoSize TrendPenMarkerCrossAndPlu TrendPenMarkerCircle FLAG2 5 Behavior Hide ImageKeepAspectRatio Movement TypeOfMovement We can also change other properties of the image area for example we will set the border color as white so as not to see the edges of the image and have a more pleasing effect ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 693 Tutorial Inserting a symbol field Now let us imagine we want to insert a symbol field relating to a list of images which will indicate in this page the lan guage currently selected by the operator We click on the icon in the toolbar and draw the area that will take the field Once the perimeter of the area has been defined we move to the Properties Editor in the usual way indicating first of all the variable
633. to continue whether there are backup on HD and eventually restore one of them o Restore Executed Press ENTER to Continue or ESC to EXIT Down loadFwAndPro ject jobs donet loseCommunication and end process Press any key to continue Modify Find Replace scripts This function allows to manage find modify replace the scripts present in the project On the left main window it is possible to modify the search pa ge between default Scripts and GlobalScripts set on ESAStar tup Edit Find Replace B Scripts ES545tartup Script Script_i SlobalScripts ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 78 Chapter 3 Layout of menus On the right main window there are five keys that have the following functions Find Next Replace Replace All Search All Show compiled file e Find next allows carrying out an alphabetic single se arch on the Script name e Replace allows carrying out a single replacement of a script or of part of it e Replace all allows carrying out a complete alphabe tic replacement on the name of the Script the replace ment result is indicated by inserting a next to the page name e Search all allows carrying out a complete alphabetic search the search result is indicated by inserting a next to the page name e Show the compiled file shows the compilation of all the scripts in the project in this window the compiled file is for
634. to have an automatic saving mode of the project one IS editing saving of the project is carried out automatically every 30 seconds ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 36 Chapter 3 Layout of menus Use the Directories menu to select a directory in which to sa ve the project Several folders are available by default accor ding to the type of panel used Language Open Project Documenti LMASK ESAPOLYMATH Skin Miscellaneous Save IT Projects Documenti LMASK ESAPOLYMATH IT Projects Shared dictionary Save PC Projects Documenti LMASK ESAPOLYMATH PC Projects Save RT Projects Documenti LMASK ESAPOLYMATH RT Projects Save SC Projects Documenti LMASK ESAPOLYMATH Progetti SC Save VT Projects Documenti LMASK ESAPOLYMATH W T Projects v Shared Dictionary From the Shared dictionary menu it is possible to save the dictionary for term translation by choosing a certain path this way it will be possible to access the same translation file from more PCs on which POLYMATH is installed ESAPOLYMATH Options ioj xj Language Shared path EN Skin Miscellaneous Source 16 05 2012 17 06 55 is equal to the Local 16 05 2012 17 06 55 version Import 16 05 2012 17 06 55 Paths Update Source Update Local ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 37 Layout of menus By clicking on Source Update the previously saved dictio nary will be kept in continuous updated compare to the loca
635. tor This mask lets you assign a color to each of the value intervals set out in the Interval mask A color is applied when its value read by the Buffer memory is within the corresponding inter val TrendXY A TrendXY can be inserted inside of the page clicking on the icon or from the Main Menu Fields gt Create gt Controls Complexes gt TrendXY After having clicked the icon indicate the area in which POLYMATH must designate the TrendXY using the mouse inside of the page The TrendXY is the field inside of which the content of the TrendBufferXY is displayed the functioning of which was de scribed in the previous paragraph Consult the next sub paragraphs to know the details of the properties that can be associated to a VistaTrendXY and its editing modes Properties of the TrendXY Table 56 Properties of a TrendViewXY Properties Description Identifying name of the TrendView Must be unique among the graphic el ements Identifying comment within POLYMATH man nanes pem emanes ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 420 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Table 56 Properties of a TrendViewX Y Properties AreaVisibility Border3D BorderStyle BorderColor BorderVisibility BorderSize BorderBlink ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Description Determines the color of the display which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned
636. tore mouse 800 468 The Fields mask for the Popup pages Is similar to that relating to the traditional pages see chap 5 Fields page 171 The sole difference between the two masks consists in the dimensions of the Popup page Naturally the Popup page Is meant to be smaller than a standard page it may be positioned in any part of the screen To change the dimensions of a Popup page select it after pressing the key at this point just take the cursor onto the edges of the page red outline to enlarge or reduce its dimensions TO move a Popup page select it after pressing the key then simply drag it to the position you want it to appear in runtime The next chapter illustrates all the procedures for introducing graphic objects and their related meanings and tools see chap 6 Managing a page page 295 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 178 Chapter 5 Project Explorer General The General mask for the Popup pages is identical to that relating to the traditional pages thus readers are advised to consult the paragraph dealing with these see chap 5 General page 172 for details of the properties The sole difference consists in the possibility of expressing a preference in runtime you can choose whether to display the page title bar or whether the Popup page should always appear in the foreground Help page The Help page mask for the Popup pages is identical to that relating to the tradit
637. translation we click on the icon w ad ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 10 673 Tutorial jacent to each string thereby opening the corresponding translation window he level is low Having provided the translation for all 4 strings we have fin ished editing our list and can use it for constructing our pages Phase 9 Suppose we want to link the values of two variables by defin Setting ing a mechanism whereby the value of one tag is continuously Pipelines copied onto the other In POLYMATH this can be done by de fining a Pipeline Identification Name Pipeline Comment Parameters Source Num pezzi 00 Destination Int_var v Mode Copy On Change Activation After double clicking on the Pipeline option double click in Project Explorer we click on Add to edit the pipeline creat ed We Shall leave the name Pipeline and the default ID 1 created by the application We use the lower part of the mask now to set the specific be havior of the Pipeline the source variable for the value is num_ pezzi while that value is to be copied onto internal val destination variable In the third field we select ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 674 Chapter 10 Tutorial Phase 10 Defining a Trend Buffer the copy mode CopyonChange that is the value is copied ev ery time the value of the source varia
638. tributed the property is forced to 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 588 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 17 Properties of ESACNTRL Rectangle Properties Description Defines the percentage infill of the object currently being redrawn The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Defines the infill color of the object currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for FillColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change is shown in runtime after the Draw method is invoked Methods of ESACNTRL Rectangle Table 18 Methods of ESACNTRL Rectangle Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Ellipse Table 19 Properties of ESACNTRL Ellipse Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn ControlLeft If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 589 Scripts Table 19 Properties of ESACNTRL Ellipse Properties Description Type RW Int Defines the position in pixels RW counting from the top where the object has currently been drawn ControlTop If this value is
639. trol Panel click on the Backup icon B amp Stylus Date Time CuWNer Network db OW AG P 3 Lamp Saver Backup Password FTP o Reset Information This window opens IBackup amp Restore C RunTi C Project C History Enable the Restore option and then click on the browse key to locate the file containing the project to be loaded on the panel ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 544 Chapter 8 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Backup amp Restore L RunTime L Project T History alarms recipes trends variables G Windows Choose options to be enabled Run Time Project or both ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter8 545 Compiling Downloading and Runtime Backup amp Restore O Backup iC Restore Hard Disk24123 EBK E RunTime Project T History alarms recipes trends variables Restore Completed Click on Start Restore the following image is displayed whe re the user is warned that during Restore all existing files in directories involved in the process are replaced with the new files click YES to continue Warning all the terminal directories involved in the process will be cleared and all the esisting files will be replaced by the backup Are you sure you want to proceed with the restore process If everything has been completed properly the wording Re stor
640. ts the status held released irrespective of any script or function assigned to the key and if the keyboard is disconnected the value is at 0 Status area of The status area for the recipes in non compatible mode see recipes new chap 5 Modes of compatibility a pag 209 is composed of style non 3 Words each of which having a specific meaning compatible mode e Word O0 status word containing the bits indicating the Status of the transfer e Word 1 contains the ID of the recipe to be transferred e Word 2 contains the checksum of the recipe option al used when the UseAreaChecksum flag is enabled ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 764 Appendix C Status area The meanings of the bits of Word 0 are listed in the following table Recipe status word values Tabella 4 Meaning of recipe status word values Bit Description sO high bit 1 if transfer is underway high bit 1 if transfer from panel to device has been requested high bit 1 if transfer from panel to device has been completed high bit 1 if transfer from device to panel has been requested high bit 1 if transfer from device to panel has been completed high bit 1 if there is an error in the transfer from panel to device high bit 1 if there is an error in the transfer from device to panel Status area of The status area for recipes in compatible mode see chap 5 recipes old Modes of compatibility a pag 209
641. tton just click on the list of buttons to the left of the table if an object is already present in the page it will appear highlighted within the list and will be visible in the Table Edit Area To move an ele ment button or table just drag it to the desired position The buttons that can be inserted are different and each has a pre defined non editable function assigned to it e Page Up allows the operator to go up the pages of the table e Page Down allows the operator to go down the pages of the table ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Page Left allows the operator to move left within the page Page Right allows the operator to move right within the page Line Up select the line above the current one Line Down select the line below the current one Cursor Left move the table cursor leftwards Cursor Right move the table cursor rightwards User button this button can have a user chosen func tion or a script assigned to it see chap Appendix B Predefined functions page 745 and see chap 9 Scripts page 553 Show Page displays the page assigned to the alarm see chap 5 Properties page 200 Acknowledgement acquires the selected alarm Global Acknowledgement allows the operator to per form a global cumulative acquisition of all the alarms present in the table if this option has been enabled for the alarm in question see chap 5 Properties page 200
642. tus as terminated OFF Needs as an input parameter the name of the alarm to be terminated ClearAlarm ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 565 Scripts Table 4 ESAALARMMGER methods accessible with Scripts AckGlobal Description Acknowledges all the instances of the named alarm whether of AlarmI SA or OnlyAck type that is if allowed by the settings of the alarm relating to the acknowledgement of multiple instances Needs as an input parameter the name of the alarm of the operator and of the station from which the request is made valid parameter in the case of a network Acknowledges all the instances of the alarm whether of AlarmISA or OnlyAck type of the named group that is if allowed by the settings of the alarm relating to global acknowledgement Needs as an input parameter the name of the alarm of the operator and of the station from which the request is made valid parameter in the case of a network Acknowledges all the alarms whether of AlarmI SA or OnlyAck type that is if allowed by the settings of the alarm relating to global acknowledgement Needs as an input parameter the name of the alarm of the operator and of the station from which the request is made valid parameter in the case of a network Alarm Name Str Operator Str Station Str Group Name Str Operator Str Station Str Operator Str Station Str ESAPOLYMATH
643. tus of the bit every X minutes allowing the Script to operate The Script operates the saving of the export file using a format of the type ric_DATA_ORA xml In the project we create a type of recipe called Proportions and define it as we wish this will be used in the Script 645 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 646 Chapter 9 Scripts In this example we also introduce the use of a function that checks a variable and returns a value namely the values relating to the days months hours minutes and seconds returned by the functions VBSCRIPT can be values of 1 digit So that all files saved have the same format and the same length we write a function of a few rows that adds a 0 in front of a digit if it is less than 10 Identification Name addzero Comment Return valuetype vrat Number Tag that shows the value Duplicate Using POLYMATH we create a Script in the usual way but in the general page we assign a name addzero a type of returned value Variant and an input value value numeric We have created the structure of our function now we write its code If value lt 10 Then value 0 amp value End If addzero value If the input value value is less than ten that is consists of only one digit add the string 0 to the variable and finally it returns the value of Value if the cycle is not accessed the function simply returns the value received as an inp
644. uch buttons of different dimen sions but more complex configurations are dealt with in the same way Horizontal arrangement Using our example let us add three different colored buttons to the page See below After drawing the three buttons let us click on the a icon of the toolbar and draw a selection area that includes alf the ob jects This activates the arrangement options of the toolbar or Main menu Layout gt Arrange In the examples in this subsection our starting point to illus trate how the arrangement operation works will always be this same initial situation For horizontal arrangements POLY MATH takes as its reference the distance between buttons 1 and 2 being the first two from the left To operate a simple horizontal arrangement just click on the icon of the toolbar or Main menu Layout gt Arrange gt Hor izontally POLYMATH will arrange all the objects selected such that the distance between the left side of one object and the right side of the object preceding it is always equal to the distance be tween the left side of the second object and the right side of the first object reference objects calculated according to their order when scrolling the page from the left If the reference distance is less than zero POLYMATH takes it automatically to O In our example the result obtained will be the one represent ed in the next figure 473 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 474 Chapter
645. ues of new versions it is useful specify directories diffe rent to the default ones e g ESAPOLYMATH_X XX in order to al low different versions to coexist on the same machine if this necessity should arise ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter2 13 Installation Introduce the following information regarding the user ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard x Please enter your name the name of the company for which you work and the product serial number User Name Company Name License code Note When Polymath is installed in Demo mode without license a temporary TRIAL license lasting thirty days is activated At the end of the thirty days the user is warned through a pop up window where the field for inserting the actual license appears if the user inserts the correct license it is possible to continue using Polymath otherwise the program will close and it will no longer be possible to use Polymath Select Install ESAPOLYMATH InstallShield Wizard Click Install to begin the installation If you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 14 Chapter 2 Installation Select End the POLYMATH installation procedure has ended ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 15 Layout of menus Layout of menus Before we can confidently operate the numerous feat
646. umeric ASCII charac ters parameter 3 is the identifier of the type of reci pe The command can only be used for compatible reci pes see chap 5 Modes of compatibility a pag 209 Recipe sent from PLC to VT with overwriting The first two parameters contain the name of the recipe 4 alpha numeric ASCII characters parameter 3 is the identifier of the type of recipe The command can only be used for compatible recipes see chap 5 Modes of compati bility a pag 209 Reads and writes the pipe line specified Empties the trend buffer specified Commands single sample of trend buffer specified Stops sampling trend buffer specified Starts trend buffer specified Requests printing of alarm history Parameters PARAMETER_1 char PARAMETER_ 2 char PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_1 char PARAMETER_ 2 char PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 PARAMETER_ 1 PARAMETER_ 2 PARAMETER_ 3 name 2 name 2 type_id pipeline _id trend_id trend ID trend ID trend ID ID Appendix D Command area Tabella 2 Command codes and parameters Description Requests HARDCOPY printing of the screen if text mode flag is at 1 printing will be in text mode other wise in graphic
647. ures offered by POLYMATH we need to familiarise ourselves with the work environment and its various menus The layout of the application can be divided into the following areas e main menu e toolbars e work area e aseries of anchorable windows This chapter offers guidelines for making general software settings and will pay particular attention to the main menu and the toolbar which are the basic instruments for carrying out any operations within POLYMATH We will also refer to the various anchorable windows which will be dealt with in greater detail in the course of the following chapters Working Area Higgs a ipdialce asovlgsgao EE Daiana ingoa ISFBOUO BDEBOCRNE SSRGOCRESBSAIHSH Peo ber ee 0 aga 0 0da gadaaaa e Project Errors Warnings Viewer Properties Events Editor Explorer amp Librery Explorer Compiler Output amp Task Help ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 16 Chapter 3 Layout of menus The functions offered by the toolbar can all be accessed via the main menu Main menu The main menu is the tool that permits POLYMATH s main project and settings operations to be performed ce cit Fa ee cde ean E Ye Wega TA File Edit Script Fields Layout Image View Tools 7 It is located in the top part of the program window and is a fixed element that cannot be repositioned within the framework of the page There are also various scrollable Submenus each offering different functions a
648. us mask select the type of thresholds mana gement to be performed whether with Valore Values or Bits Moreover the ColoreAreaPremuta AreaColourPres sed property of the PulsanteSfioramento Touch sensitive Button must be associated to a Tag In our example we ha ve selected the Valore type of management In this case the user can add all of the values he wants without any limits ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 330 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Thresholds ioj x Type value 7 Tag Thresholds B Default Wi 0 0 0 255 25 The first threshold is assigned with the value 10 associating it to green S soge iol x Tipo Valore 7 BB Default Wi o 0 9 M 128 255 128 A second threshold is now added by clicking on the Aggiungi Add button ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter6 331 Properties Editor ioj x Type Waes OOOO Thresholds E 0 0 0 B 128 255 0 E 255 255 255 X Delete Duplicate The second threshold is assigned with the value 20 associa ting it to blue Thresholds 5 x Type value 7 B 128 255 0 W 0 0 255 Clicking on the button to end editing If the user should select the Bits type management the sa me amount of values must be introduced as there are Bits de fined to which the desired settings are to be associated Practica
649. ut parameter The following is an example of applying this function addzero 5 is invoked by giving the value 5 and returns the value 05 Now let us analyze the code of our main Script a ESAHMI ESATAG Check GetRawValue First of all we read the raw value of the Check variable and if its value is 1 we run our operations this way we avoid executing them when the bit passes from 1 to 0 The If cycle is as follows If a 1 Then ESAHMI ESARECI PETRF RecipeBufferUpload Proportions O ESAHMI ESARECIPETRF SaveRecipe Proportions Recipe 0 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 9 Scripts End If We execute the upload of the recipe loaded onto the PLC type is Proportions in the first rows of the cycle while in the second row we Save that recipe using the name Recipe onto the terminal Now all we need is the save phase that Is run using the following instruction ESAHMI ESARECI PEARC RecipeExport dest Proportions ESAHMI ESATAG WriteValue Check 0 All the recipes are exported the third parameter is an empty string and they are saved in the file indicated in the string variable dest which we shall now go on to construct After the Save operation the check bit returns to 0 The string dest is constructed by adding the details relating to the date and time of the execution of the operation This information can be obtained using the functions put at the user s dispo
650. ut the pages created in the project Help files containing information about the help pages created in the project Images the project images are simply copied into this folder Configuration files containing information useful for running the project properly xml component files The Scripts added by the user and the password files can be found here too Recipes files rec containing information on the recipes saved in the memory of the VT Translation files containing translations of multilingual project texts and system messages Log log files used by the application this folder for example contains the log files of the login logout operations the alarm history and trend buffer logs Font files containing relative information to fonts used in the project Report files containing the relative information to the project reports Documents empty directory ready to accommodate the reports in pdf Project OPC files useful for managing the project s communications VTWinPro contains general project information xml files Font font files installed and used by the project After the file download is launched whether it is partial or total update a log window for transfer operations being performed by POLYMATH is opened ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Change Password Chapter8 519 Compiling Downloading and Runtime ESAPOLYMATH Downloader Connection Type Ethernet UDP 192 168 100 1
651. vanced section allows you to edit the following op tions e Use background image e Background image e Image Representation e Horizontal Position of Image e Vertical Position of Image Popup pages Popup pages are pages that are only displayed following the occurrence of particular situations these can be called using the command area and the button with an assigned function After double clicking the Popup pages icon in Project Explorer a list of the pages introduced into the project will appear in the work area This list can be used to add new Popup pages duplicate them or delete existing ones In addition some attributes like the Page number Description and Comment ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter5 177 Project Explorer can be edited simply by clicking inside the fields relating to the table and new texts can be introduced Once the Popup page has been created using Project Explorer or the list you can double click on it in the tree diagram to begin editing it in the work area The page editor is organized In the following sections Fields General Help page and F keys as described in the paragraphs below For information regarding the properties and events that can be assigned to the Popup pages the reader is advised to read the relevant section in the next chapter see chap 6 Properties of Popup pages page 298 and see chap 6 Events related to Popup pages page 298 Fields Punta
652. viewing only and may not be changed e Close Closes the current screen On the centre main window there are two fields the mandatory one is Find and the optional one is Replace with Find what a Replace with O Match case Wl Search hidden text O Match whole word O Search in selection J w D search up ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 79 Layout of menus e Upper case lower case by enabling the check words containing upper case or lower case characters will be searched e Whole words only by enabling the check only whole words will be searched e Use Regular Expressions or Wildcard characters Regular Expressions are syntaxes used to represent groups of strings In computing a Wildcard character or jolly or wild character is a character that doesn t represent itself inside a string but a group of other cha racters or character strings with the only exception of Special meaning characters like and e Search in the hidden text Enabled by default it se arches the commented row e Search in the selected text Searches inside a se lected text and highlights the found part e Search up allows reversing search direction In the main window at the bottom right there are two keys which allow to adjust the zoom of the compiled file If one chooses the Show the compiled file option the first part of the mask will be transformed as follows
653. w Active Alarm View is a predefined element in POLYMATH one that can be inserted into the project pages It allows the op erator to access the alarm list and perform the principal oper ations with a simple click To insert an Active Alarm table into a page click on the icon or alternatively use the main menu Fields gt Create gt Complex Controls gt ActiveAlarm View After clicking draw just its outline in the page and the table appears automatically ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 430 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Page Up Page down Page left Page right Line Up Line down Cursor left Cursor right Group Acknowledoe Once the table has been inserted into the page and been se lected a series of properties contained in the Properties Editor can be attributed to it the meanings of these properties are identical to those of TrendView properties see chap 6 Prop erties of a TrendView page 408 By double clicking on the table you access its editing page which comprises two masks Fields and General The default contents of the Fields mask include the Alarm Grid table whose properties will be dealt with in the next subsec tions See chap 6 Properties of the Active Alarm Grid page 432 Using this mask you can proceed to indicate which buttons should be present with the table and position them within the area To insert or remove a bu
654. w viewing for importing tags activating the Trial mode or not to set the maximum number of windows open at the same time in the POLYMATH Work area select be tween the ADVANCED and DOUBLE CLICK modes and de cide whether to offer this choice to the user when the POLYMATH starts up amp Note The options Manual validation and viewing only the outline while the objects are being dragged are advised for configuring particularly slow performing machines ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter3 35 Layout of menus It is also possible by enabling the corresponding check boxes to carry out the following operations e Update control e Automatic project storage Update control By enabling the Update control option it will be possible to automatically verify whether there are available POLYMATH updates in the network by default the verification is carried out automatically each week but it is possible to vary the con trol frequency by selecting the available options from the drop menu iw Check updates kl Save project automatically At the next opening of POLYMATH the verification of available updates will be automatically carried out if there are any the following image will appear Updates available i xj New updates are available for downloading do you want to view a them Automatic project storage By enabling the Automatic project storage option it will be possible
655. wer section of the window Here you will find the name the comment and the path of those objects chosen when creating the project ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Operating on elements within the Project Explorer window Chapter5 123 Project Explorer There is a series of cumulative functions applicable to all the categories or elements of the Project Explorer window irrespective of their nature These functions are contained in a menu called up by clicking with the right hand key on the object in question as illustrated in the figure Project Explorer E E aw Project ITLO7T SP1 SP2 ETH1 Tags Fal Project L HwConfiguration IT107T SP1 SP2 ETH1 SwWConfiguration IAE d Edit 4 Add New 4 Add New and Edit E 9 Le EI P J Create Folder EG E Copy CTRL C ENA paste CTRL V cy a R Paste as Child LU E o Import E o Export a s Configuration columns The functions that can be selected are Edit to enter editing mode Add new to add an element to a category Add new and Edit to add an element to a category and directly access the editing page in the Work area Rename to change the name of the object selected Duplicate to create an exact copy of the element selected the properties that must remain unique within the project e g Name Identifying Number Description are not copied but are automatically assigned a valid value Delete to delete the element selected Create folder
656. which Page to display when the alarm is raised Fields 300 i J Use the Fields mask to define the character and the colours of the display tables of the alarms see chap 6 Active Alarm View page 429 and see chap 6 Alarm History View page 434 You can specify the character of the rows the colours of the cells selected the characters and colours of the column headers The way the editing fields relating to the fonts and colours work is identical to what has already been set out for the user table see chap 5 Fields grid page 220 The programmer can also make a choice in relation to labels to be assigned to the table headings Each column can have associated to it a multilingual label to access mutilingual editing just click on the w icon adjacent to the editable text field see chap 5 Languages page 166 ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Icons that identifies an alarm Raised IcondlarmRaised IGG Acknowledged IcondlarmAcknowledged JQ Terminated IcondlarmTerminated IGG Simple IconSimpleAlarm iGO Simple Terminated IconSimpleAlarmTerminated iGO Diagnostic IconDiagnosticAlarm IGG There is also the option of selecting the images to be associated to the state of the alarm already at the project creation stage POLYMATH furnishes a set of default images that can be confirmed or substituted with an image added to the project see chap 5 Add an
657. will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field text is Shown barred 1 or in normal FontStrike 0 If modified using a Script Out the variation will appear in runtime after Draw method is invoked Defines whether the field is enabled 0 or disabled 1 that is whether the user can edit it Disable Editing this property provokes immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the color of the current text contained in the field Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value returned for ValueColor example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The change will appear in runtime after invoking the Draw method ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 610 Chapter 9 Scripts Table 35 Properties of ESACNTRL Numerical field Properties ValueBlink Description Defines whether the current field text should blink or not Possible values of this property are 0 No blinking 1 Slow blinking 2 Rapid blinking If a different value from the preceding ones is attributed the property is forced to 0 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method Defines the value of the text currently written onto the field Can be varied by providing a new string and the on screen update happens after the Draw method or Refresh Control is invoked Methods of ESACNTRL Numerical field Table
658. without needing to invoke the Draw method 597 ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 598 Chapter 9 Scripts Methods of ESACNTRL Line Table 26 Methods of ESACNTRL Line Method Description Redraws the whole object from the beginning updating all the graphic properties that were changed Properties of ESACNTRL Polygon Table 27 Properties of ESACNTRL Polygon Properties Description Defines the position in pixels counting from the left where the object has currently been drawn that is the rectangle containing it If this value is changed the object is moved horizontally when redrawn with the Draw method ControlLeft Defines the position in pixels counting from the top where the object or the rectangle containing it has currently been drawn If this value is changed the object is moved vertically when redrawn with the Draw method ControlTop Defines whether the object should be visible 0 or invisible 1 Modifying this command provokes an immediate redrawing without needing to invoke the Draw method ControlHide ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter9 599 Scripts Table 27 Properties of ESACNTRL Polygon Properties Description Defines the color of the outline of the polygon currently being redrawn Can be changed by attributing an RGB Long value LineColor returned for example by the RGB function e g BorderColor RGB 24 255 0 The chan
659. xt is to show the operator a given String as the function of the value of a variable Which string contained in a Text List is displayed depends on the value of the variable see chap 5 Text list page 230 For example the words On or Off can be shown as a function of a Bool ean variable The reader is advised to consult the following subsections to learn about the details of the properties and events that can be assigned to a Dynamic text In POLYMATH the value of a Dynamic text is represented by the first value of the text list which in Runtime is substituted by the correct value ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 348 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Properties of the Dynamic Text Table 26 Properties of the Dynamic Text Properties Description Identifying name of the Dynamic text Must be unique among the graphic el ements man Wt aiveson pem Het venion Determines the color of the Dynamic text which can be selected using the RGB code or color palette The value can be assigned to a whole variable The value can be associated with Tag AreaColor or it can be managed with thresholds Determines whether the Sector has a background area or should be trans parent a Boolean variable can be as signed to this value The value can be associated with Tag or it can be man aged with thresholds AreaVisibility Determines a 3D effect for the Border which can be Flat Relief Recessed B
660. y Table 4 Events assignable to Alarms Event Description OnAlarmAck Activated when the alarm has been ac knowledged OnAlarmOff Activated when the alarm ends Launched when the alarm enters the active stat the script or the function are run after the instance of the alarm event in the table of active alarms OnAlarmOn ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 292 Chapter 6 Properties Editor Events related to Recipes Table 5 Events assignable to Recipes Event Description OnDownload Activated when the download from the Complete VT to the device is completed OnDownioadError Activated when errors occur in the download from the VT to the device OnRecipeCreate Activated when the Recipe is created Activated when the Recipe is about to be deleted from the archive The event is generated immediately before the OnRecipeDelete effective deletion of the Recipe Activated when the recipe is about to be loaded in the archive The event is generated just before the recipe is ef fectively loaded Activated when the upload from the VT OPUpIoanCOMPIETE to the device is completed Activated when errors occur in the up OnUpicadError load from the VT to the device Script Events key OnRecipeLoad Table 6 Events that can be associated to the Scripts Evento Descrizione Activated when errors appear during OMSENPERrrOK execution of the Script Events related to Pipelines Table 7 Events assignable
661. y connected to the operator panel using the ETHERNET port in practice it is pos sible to be connected to the PLC using the same PLC program ming SW OM on a Note The Passthrough software is compatible with platforms Win dows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 A field has been inserted inside Polymath double click on Pa nel type inside Explore Project to enable this function when user is downloading the project D a aaa Pile Aa parE M n yidi Sot cornigurahen Lechange arahi Edn ardillas eres es ee ae ee ee S p ber T TSP Hy J 2 Yl POET LLG eri ere LIAL Lhe E identification ey Project b AW Configuration Name ITLLOT SP 1 SP ETAL ETH Ceria E SW Configuration F Tage amp Languages and fants H Z Pages PopUp pages Medel ITLLOT SF1 SPZ ETH1 ETHZ E Framas Creston Date ISed 64043 reas Modify Date 02 08 2000 1047 16 Alarig Compiling Gabe 19 08 2000 10 08 11 By HecipS trees iy Users aod patserards Data archive t iaia chive IT Renee aocetd Seripts fa Global geript Ll Activate IT Remote Access r mi ust Usermair w Hh iibe E 3 Advanced Enable Passthrough O i O sez Based on panel type used in project user can use the Pas sthrough function by enabling one of the connection ports available in the Enable Passthrough sub mask ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 11 Available functions for Remote connection from t
662. y resources Memory resources Number of alarms Historic 512 Active 256 Size 10240 Use the Memory resources mask to define how much memory to reserve in the terminal for the management of the alarms it is necessary to specify how many alarms can be managed by the history and how many active alarms to consider The Dimension field indicates the file dimension expressed in bytes ESAPOLY MATH User Manual rev 2 2 Chapter 5 Project Explorer Behaviour List Memory resources Fields Priorities Alarms groups User Signals Events Buffer records management Discard the oldest records when the buffer is full FIFO Ignore the new record when the buffer is full To empty the buffer use scripts The historic buffer can hold 512 alarm s records H Number of records that set the SystemTag SYS_HistoryWarning 75 4 gt File to use to store records File Name AlarmHistory Log The file will be saved in the FLASH of the terminal If the logs are too frequent the FLASH could be damaged Automatic change to page O Change page automatically when priority is greater than Min priority ca e to show in automatic 6 Use the Behaviour mask to indicate the filling and emptying policy of the buffer when it has reached its maximum value You can choose to substitute the least recent element FIFO buffer or ignore the new elements when the buffer is full The buffer can
663. you can carry out an immediate test of the conversion after entering the necessary values a value can be entered in the appropriate fields and POLYMATH displays its conversion instantly The conversion defined by the user envisages the association of a Script with the events that can be associated to the variable see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 Thresholds General Value Device Limits Conversion Indirect Address Events Thresholds Type None Inhibit Parameters The developer can enable the generation of various types of event associated to a numerical variable The events are generated when the variable assumes particular values or when there is a rapid change in the value itself called threshold values or simply thresholds The user can make use of the defined thresholds by assigning a function or a Script to the threshold events that can then be associated to a variable see chap 6 Events related to variables page 290 There are three types of thresholds level thresholds deviation thresholds and variation speed thresholds In this mask select the type of threshold required and decide whether to value activating the event should be dynamic or not Boolean The type of threshold is represented graphically to the right of the mask ESAPOLYMATH User Manual rev 2 2 150 Chapter 5 Project Explorer iret Preview Tree Level 7 Mee Vaie al

User Manual User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents